JP2023153965A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can transmit appropriate information outside the game machine.SOLUTION: In a game machine, after outputting counting information with a counting point of 1 or more from the game machine to the outside, when lending information with a lending point of 1 or more is received, information indicating an abnormality is output as a response signal to a lending notification.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 170

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of gaming medals, and multiple symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. The reels in multiple rows are rotated, and as a result of stopping the reels using the reel stopping device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined symbol appears on the active line. (for example, winning combinations such as "777"), a special gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of small winning combinations, etc. is higher than in the normal state) has a higher profit state for the player than the normal gaming state. ) is common. Here, in a reel-type gaming machine, when images, etc. for presentation to increase the interest of the game are displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display in synchronization with the rotating and stopping operations of the reels. It is designed so that when you operate the spinning drum stop device etc., you can enjoy predicting the result of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the spinning drum with the presentation images displayed on the display. There are many things.

JP2017-018215

There is a need for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine, and there has been a need to construct a control process for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. It is configured to be able to output information including payment information regarding settlement to the outside of the gaming machine, and configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to the outside of the gaming machine. When not executing the settlement process, it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is 0, and when executing the settlement process, it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is a value other than 0. , After outputting information in which the payment information related to payment is 0, if information in which the information related to lending is a value other than 0 is received, it is possible to output information including information indicating normality as response information related to lending, After outputting information in which payment information related to payment is a value other than 0, if information in which information related to lending is a value other than 0 is received, information including information indicating an abnormality can be output as response information related to lending. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to:

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine, and it is also possible to construct a control process for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of condition device number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control process on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram regarding the rotating operation of the reels in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of the push order display in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of performance-related determination processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of AT performance determination processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not to allow revival on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional special processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an advantageous BB internal process when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the performance-related determination process when the third drum is stopped on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third drum stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to the standby screen in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a side sectional view schematically showing the relative position of the reel and the hopper. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the hopper. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the arrangement of a medal auxiliary tank HS and a fullness detection electrode DE. It is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure showing the composition of a reel band. It is a figure showing the composition of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the time of stop on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start performance execution in the reel type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a status-based notification mode that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration related to payout that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 80 shows an example 1 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is a second example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is a third example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 shows an example 4 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 shows an example 1 of the operation when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 85 shows an example 2 of the operation when operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is a third example of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 shows an example 4 of the effect when operating the settlement button, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply and power-off of the gaming machine. 3 is a timing chart showing an aspect of the invention. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 3 is a table showing the relationship between power supply state and situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process in which the number of credits is added, a process in which game medals are paid out, and a process in which a game medium awarding sound is output. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including audio when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including audio when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when a push order replay game combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when a push order replay game combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of reel stop control in the AT state and changes in the display mode of the push order navigation that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first input sensor and the second input sensor, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of game progress control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals by the first input sensor and the second input sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition process, which can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. be. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by the shoot sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first input sensor, the second input sensor, and the chute sensor, which can be applied to the drum-type game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals flowing down a medal return member, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out to the medal receiving port, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the drum type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of the rotation mode of the disk from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a main control board in a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during payment processing, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 shows a main control board in a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during payment processing, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a second pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the sub-control board side. FIG. 124 shows a main control board in a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes unavailable during the wait period, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a pattern diagram which showed the audio output process by the side of a sub-control board based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during medal payout processing from the hopper, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a second pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on control commands transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 127 is a table regarding the numbers applicable to this example. FIG. 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of a main control board housed in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion included in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram of the interior of the medal selector when a game medal is inserted, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the gaming medal credit addition processing that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the gaming medal credit addition processing that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the chute main body when game medals are inserted, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter. FIG. 137 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter. FIG. 138 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the game medal payout number counting process that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. be. FIG. 141 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. It is. FIG. 142 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. It is. FIG. 143 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of a ratio calculation process in the second ROM/RAM area that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of ratio display processing in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) (variation 1) on the main control board side that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 152 shows a configuration related to stopping and automatic settlement in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram when there is a notification in the reel type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 156 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram of a medalless drum-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 158 is an example of connection cable communication contents related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is an example of a gaming machine information notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an example of a count notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is an example of a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example of a lending receipt result response command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flow related to the gaming machine information notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flow related to the lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flow related to the lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flow related to the lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flow related to the count notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is an example of gaming machine information (when HC/fraud monitoring information is set) regarding a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flow 1 related to a count notification command and a lending notification command related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flow 2 related to a count notification command and a lending notification command related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flow 3 related to a count notification command and a lending notification command related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flow related to a case where communication between a gaming machine and an SC board related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment is interrupted. FIG. 173 is a flowchart related to a case where a communication abnormality occurs during payment regarding a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a flowchart related to a case where a communication abnormality occurs during lending of a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flowchart regarding a serial number update process related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart regarding gaming machine information notification control processing related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a flowchart regarding gaming machine information notification control processing related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modification example from the thirteenth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery using an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine the content of a game in a reel-type gaming machine, and includes random numbers in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, the random numbers are hard random numbers, the built-in random numbers generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and the pseudo-random numbers are soft random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of games, specifically "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replay roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. can be mentioned. "CPU" has the same meaning as is well known in the industry, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, etc. "Power outage" refers to when the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch installed on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and it physically holds information (for example, if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1", If the device configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it will be "1" if it is charged, and "1" if it is not stored). (Note that it is generally configured such that backup power is supplied to some or all of the data held in the RAM in the event of a power outage). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which game medals are easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (so-called jackpot games, bonus games, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.). ), a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value, and a winning combination. The order in which the reels are stopped to win a prize, an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop position, an ART (assist replay time) state that is a combination of the RT state and the AT state, and the like. In addition, even in the normal game state, there are RT state, AT state, high probability normal game state, low probability normal game state, etc. (referred to as lottery state in this example), which have different lottery probabilities for transitioning to the ART state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the gaming states are combined {Furthermore, these gaming states and functions (for example, the lottery to transition to the AT state, the output of notification instructions related to the order in which the reels stop, etc.) control the progress of the game. There is no problem even if everything is mounted on the main control board. In addition, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state as "normal gaming state," but the RT state and the AT-related state are The states related to ART may be collectively referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the like. The "winning combination" is the type of conditional device (or conditional device number) that is won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game where the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won. , if the state related to AT is such that push-order navigation can be performed, the system is configured to be in a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of executable notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "Number of executable notification games" is 1 or more (this may include the game that is "0"), the push order navigation described later may be executed. In addition, the "number of playable information games" includes the difference number of game media obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number of pieces that are paid out minus the number of pieces inserted), The number of winnings of the winning position may be used. Further, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, is referred to as the "additional special state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, etc., are the specific conditions. "Type 1 special accessory" is a predetermined accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols for each specified number of winnings, or increases the probability that a conditional device for each specified number of winnings will operate. This is a bonus that can be activated when a bonus is received and can continue to operate until a result of no more than 12 games is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an RB (Regular Bonus). "Class 1 special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the 1st class special accessory continuously, and it activates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the game, and is sometimes referred to as BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning lottery, and is activated in predetermined cases to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated when the bonus is exceeded, and is sometimes referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special accessory continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. It is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Ordinary accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings for each specified number, or increase the probability that a conditional device related to winnings for each specified number will operate. This is a bonus that is activated when a combination is displayed and ends when a result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as JACIN, and the player is always in RB while the first type BB is being executed. Furthermore, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first type BB. In addition, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where retraction control that can be executed after a stop operation is not performed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation was accepted. This is the reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when performing the second type BB. The “CB transition lottery type” is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

Note that this embodiment is just an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the name of the means responsible for processing each step, etc. The present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be construed as being applied to specific things, and may be combined in any manner. For example, modifications of one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described.

(This Embodiment) Here, before explaining each component, the characteristics (outline) of the reel-type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be explained. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the structure). The reel-type gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet, a base), a reel unit installed inside the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be explained in order below.

<Front Door DU> The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the gaming state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the gaming state visible, there are a reel window D160, a number of inputs indicator light D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, a possible input lamp D300, a special gaming status display device D250, and a number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, etc. are attached. In addition, there is a medal slot D170 and a bet button D220 as a mechanism for inserting game media and inputting the number of bets (number of bets), and a settlement machine as a mechanism for making it possible to pay out the inserted game media. A button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as mechanisms for operating the reels. Note that the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes from the side. Each element will be explained in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the gaming state visible> Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be explained. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. In addition, the number of inputs indicator light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs of the same number as the number of medals currently bet (injecting the game medals necessary to start a game) are lit. It is configured like this. Specifically, the input number indicator D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps): a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and indicates that only one game medal has been bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: goes off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: goes off, and when the number of game medals bet is 2, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 goes off. : lit, 3 bet lamp D213: turned off, and if there are 3 game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: lit, 3 bet lamp D213: lit (re-game) This does not apply to the next game in which the display is stopped; details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off the light in certain cases. Further, the replay lamp D290 is constituted by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when the replay is displayed as stopped, and turned off when the next game for which the replay is displayed as stopped is completed. In addition, the insertion enable lamp D300 lights up (or may blink) when the insertion of game medals into the medal slot D170 is valid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and the insertion of game medals is activated. It is configured to turn off when the bet button D220 is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display section), which will be described later. By displaying this, the player can recognize the total number of payouts made during the special game, and the game machine can be made user-friendly. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and displays the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button A conditional device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the stopping order of D43 (this is a so-called pressing order combination (also referred to as a pressing order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is different. is generally structured so that the profit rate given to the player (number of coins paid out, subsequent RT status, etc.) can vary. It is configured to be able to notify the stop order (this notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two things: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of this display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 controls the game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display section) among the AT-related states (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games in which the player can stay in an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player and will be guaranteed if the game progresses (in this example, it may also be referred to as a push-order navigation state or an information game, and the details will be described later). It is configured like this. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a case, the number of games that can remain in the AT state can be displayed on the effect display device S40, so that the player can The game machine can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not an "advantageous section" (as for the timing of turning on and turning off the light, (described later). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, like the conventional reel-type gaming machine, game medals are easily acquired and a special gaming state (a so-called jackpot game, a bonus game BB, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.), the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than in the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state), an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stopping order and stop position of the reels for winning the winning combination, and a state in which the RT state and the AT state are different from each other. A composite ART (assisted replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "gaming states", one of the three "gaming sections": "normal section", "standby section", and "advantageous section" can be set. In this example, a "standby section" is not set, but either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "gaming sections." For example, the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an “advantageous section”. That is, when the "gaming state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "gaming section" is also the setting control of the "gaming state". Similarly, since this is done on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress situation is relatively advantageous for the player can be determined by the lighting/extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. This information can be conveyed to the players without any falsehoods or falsehoods. As will be explained later, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit for the number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" will be forcibly set. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the state during AT is cleared and initialized), changing the "gaming section" that is set will also affect the transition of the "gaming state". As a result, it is possible to automatically prevent the gambling nature from increasing significantly due to "gaming states" such as the AT state and the ART state, which have a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As mentioned above, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example is "the push that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts among the small winning combinations that make up the pushing order winning combination (the winning combination with pressing order)". Execute the order navigation once (for example, if there are 7, 3, and 1 small roles as the minor roles that make up the push order role, the push order navigation that allows you to obtain the 7 pieces with the highest number of paid out pieces) If there is a push order combination in which you can get 7 or 1 card depending on the order you press, and a push order combination in which you can get 3 cards depending on the order you press, the push order navigation that allows you to get 3 cards is referred to here. (Does not apply to the push order navigation)" or "Win any of BB, RB, MB" and "Any ending condition (not winning the 40G1 set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G The completion condition is that the condition is met (e.g., false signs) or an advantageous section of 1500G. In addition, in the case of a specification in which there is no push order Bell combination (for example, there is a push order for replay to transition to RT state, but there is no minor combination in which the number of coins paid out varies depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of ``one press order navigation that allows you to obtain the small winning combination with the largest number of paid out pieces'' is excluded. In addition, in this embodiment, since the small roles that make up the push order combination include small roles that correspond to 11-card roles and small roles that correspond to 1-card roles, "Execution of the push order navigation that allows you to get a small winning combination once" refers to notifying you of the pushing order that allows you to get 11 medals (11 winning combinations).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media> Next, main parts of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot in a state where medals can be accepted are guided into the inside of the gaming machine. Further, inside the gaming machine, there are provided sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, including an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, which are used to detect the insertion of medals into the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medals have been inserted normally, the inserted medals can be detected as betted medals. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to allow the player to bet stored medals (credit medals) by operating the bet button D220. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, it becomes possible to refund the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player. There is. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for Operating the Reel Unit> Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the operation of the reels can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU> Next, regarding the main parts of other mechanisms provided on the front door DU, the front door DU in FIG. 2 is opened to show the internal configuration of the reel-type gaming machine P. The description will be made with reference to a perspective view. On the front door DU, as a mechanism to increase the interest of the game, there is a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as preview performances and background performances, and a game effect lamp D26 (non-functional) that can be lit in various lighting modes. ), door board D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (middle decorative panel), which is a member made of synthetic resin, etc. , an upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, etc. are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that a display section that displays effects etc. can be viewed through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the reel-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have decorative lamps on the right side and the left side, respectively, with the lower panel D140 in between. A unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp units S10 are provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back side of the front door DU, and this door board D is provided with input signals such as the stop button D40, the start lever D50, and the payment button D60. It has the function of a relay board which directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M, which will be described later. In addition, corresponding to the medal slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, and is capable of detecting medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and easily detecting the medals. It has a function of conducting proper authentication, guiding proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returning improper medals to a medal receiving tray D230 described later. Furthermore, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is a portion above the operation console and below the top panel D130, and is a panel portion including the above-mentioned reel window. In addition, the sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used to perform operations on the menu screen described later and button-pressing effects on the sub-control board S side (repeatedly-pressing the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for the progress of mini-games (for example, the performance of success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. The front door DU of the reel-type gaming machine P includes a medal receiving tray D230 for receiving game medals (or sometimes simply referred to as medals) released from the ejection port D240, and a medal tray D230 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}, It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the door key is configured to be able to be released from an error state (door opening error, etc.) by inserting it into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), it is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60 is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and indicates to the player that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid by the presence or absence and/or color of the stop button lamp S60 being lit (or blinking). can be perceived. Note that since the configuration is such that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 lights up in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is disabled. , when the middle stop button D42 is enabled and the right stop button D43 is enabled, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop button D42 is turned off. The three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be lit in different ways, such as when the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit. In addition, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (it may be made different such as lighting/blinking, or may be made different such as slow blinking/high speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, the player may be configured to easily identify the stop button that should be operated at the moment. For example, if all the reels are spinning, the correct pressing order is "left → middle → right" ( If you win the push order bell that has the maximum number of coins paid out, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button will blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button will blink. When the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reels, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off, and the button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button is turned off. The stop button lamp may be configured to blink in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or base) and each device installed in the back box will be explained. A reel unit is attached to approximately the center of the back box so that a part of the reel unit is visible through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of patterns are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). Based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the reel unit is configured to be able to rotate and stop the respective reel units. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are turned on, the outer periphery of the reel The outer periphery of the reel section is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if it were illuminated by the light that has passed through it. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating drum board K, which will be described later, is stored for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53).

Further, above the reels M50, a main control board M, which will be described later and controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reels M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored therein, and which controls various effects performed using the above. The main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at an appropriate position on the main control board M (i.e., if the front door DU is not opened). (If not, it is sufficient if it is located in a location that is difficult to access manually).

Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 where the inserted game medals are collected, a medal payout device H that pays out the game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire reel type game machine P. E is stored. The game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are dispensed from the discharge port D240. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the drum-type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as the power supply unit E). Note that details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS> Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s that serves as a path for game medals inserted from the medal input port D170 near the door board D, and below the input reception sensor D10s, the game medals are transferred to a discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 and the like are provided to guide the coin. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When the player inserts game medals before operating the start lever D50 (while inserting game medals is valid), the game medals are sorted by the input acceptance sensor D10s, and only those that meet the specifications are selected. Medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not meet the specifications are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of game medals is not valid), the inserted game medal is passes through the coin shooter D90 and is returned to the discharge port D240. Furthermore, inside the input reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), there is provided a sensor related to medal input, which will be described in detail later. and a second input sensor D30s, and the signal thereof is supplied to a main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be explained in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down and turned on, allowing the game medal to pass through the passage normally. . In addition, with this configuration, if a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, one that is smaller in diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms will be pressed down. Not done. Since such medals cannot maintain an upright state, they cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down) and are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can be determined that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) if the input reception sensor D10s continues to be on for a predetermined period of time or more. .

When the game medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it passes through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s immediately after passing. These input sensors (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (arranged adjacently at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of game medals), and each sensor is turned on.・Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on/off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on/off time. It is composed of

<Medal Payout Device H> Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. 4. The medal payout device H is operated when the settlement button is operated in a state where credits (gaming medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. It will be activated when game medals are paid out due to winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release biasing means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the release port D240. The dispensing sensor (the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on/off status of each sensor (the on/off status of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the order in which the combination of off and on transitions, etc.) and the time during which the switch is on and off. More specifically, for example, when the game medals normally pass through the game medal outlet H60, the discharge biasing means H70 changes from the state where the first payout sensor H10s=off and the second payout sensor H20s=off to the state where the second payout sensor H20s=off. 1 payout sensor H10s=off・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=on→first payout The sensor state transition is sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=on→first dispensing sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=off, so if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , an example of configuring it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment. In the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specified number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the number of pieces on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is all 20 pieces. , the valid line on which winning is determined is one line: "left reel M51 upper row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 lower row." The maximum number of coins to be paid out is 11 coins, and the minimum number of coins to be paid out is 1 coin (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (draw-in priority order) is "Re-gaming role → Small role (Bell, Watermelon, etc.) → Bonus". For example, if a re-gaming role and a bonus are realized at the same time, , symbol combinations that will be replayable combinations are stopped and displayed, and bonuses cannot be won. In addition, if Bell and Watermelon are established, if you press the stop button at a position where both can be drawn (within 4 frames from the winning stop position), priority will be given to the small role with the highest number of payouts. It is configured to be retractable. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel may be changed (for example, to 21 frames) or the configuration of effective lines may be changed (for example, 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if you change the line to one line (left reel M51 lower row, middle reel M52 middle row, right reel M53 upper row). In addition, in particular, as a pull-in control when a pressing order minor winning combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the pressing order is won, a minor winning that will pay out a large number of coins if operated in a predetermined correct pressing order. (number of sheets priority control), and if the incorrect press order is different from the correct press order, it can be stopped and displayed (within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to draw in symbols that increase the probability of winning (out of a plurality of possible winning symbol combinations, the probability of winning is the highest) among the arranged symbols.

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the reel type gaming machine in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of symbols on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20 (numbers 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", " There are 10 types: "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes a winning combination that includes "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank" is replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in increasing, decreasing, or changing the types of symbols.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, any of the symbol combinations may be selected depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. The system is configured such that one symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the one line mentioned above). Furthermore, even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the active line, from the player's point of view, the configuration is such that it is easy for the same type of symbols to be aligned in a row on lines other than the active line (in the case of watermelon, it is arranged in the middle row). It is structured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reels, such as in a horizontal straight line). In addition, in this embodiment, by combining symbols that form the first type BB combination (this is an accessory continuous activation device related to the so-called first type special accessory, hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as the BB combination), "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep" which is the first type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and ends when more than 264 pieces are paid out), and type 1 BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B and payout of 132 pieces) "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven" which will end if the payout exceeds 132 pieces), and "White Seven, White Seven, It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In addition, in this embodiment, if the first type BB winning combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), during the execution of the BB, in all games during the BB, one The system is configured to refer to a lottery table and draw winning combinations (small prizes, replayed prizes) other than the prize money (a method that does not change the table to be referred to when drawing prizes during one BB run (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB winning combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to when drawing the winning combination can be changed during execution of one BB. Furthermore, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to numbers 14 to 16 that results in replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the system is configured to shift to RT0 (for details on the RT state, (described later). Note that since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state for the player than "RT1," the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes replay 05 corresponding to number 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the number 18 is When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "White Seven" can be stopped and displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, if the push order bell, which is a condition device for "Win-A1" to "Win-A6" (described later), is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous for the player, numbers 21 to 27 The symbol combinations corresponding to "Win 01" to "Win 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out. However, if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player, , symbol combinations "Win 08" to "Win 11" corresponding to numbers 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the same figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell -- Bell" corresponding to number 23 is the active line of left reel M51 and right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained no matter which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as the winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as the winning number hereinafter. In this embodiment, re-gaming combinations are provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stopping order and position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 are Accordingly, the replay combinations to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in the "condition device" item in the rightmost column, a plurality of It is configured so that various types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices that have the same winning number are grouped together, and the third column from the right is "Condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item. Specifically, for example, in "Re-gaming - A" which is the condition device corresponding to winning number 1, "Re-gaming 01'', ``Replay 02'', and ``Replay 03'', three types of condition devices are configured so that they can be stopped and displayed. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a conditional device related to replaying such as "Replay 01" may be referred to as a replaying combination, and a conditional device such as "Win 01" in which game medals are paid out upon winning may be referred to as a minor winning combination. A conditional device, such as "Type 1 BB-A", which is stopped and displayed to start a BB, is sometimes referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if winning numbers 21-23 and 25-27 are won, the BB role and the minor role will be won at the same time, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the won minor role will stop. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 at a position where they can be displayed, the symbols corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and displayed, but the symbols corresponding to the minor role will be stopped and displayed, while the symbols corresponding to the minor role will be stopped and displayed. If you operate the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be pulled in), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and display, but the symbol corresponding to the BB role is configured to stop displaying. Specifically, for example, if you win "1st type BB-B + prize-winning-C" which is the condition device of winning number 21, you will receive a cherry which is "prize 12" or "prize 13" and "1st type BB -B" and the black seven can be displayed in a stopped state. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, symbol numbers 0 to 4 are displayed in the upper row of left reel M51 (see Figure 6). If the left stop button D41 is operated at the timing when the reel (refer to the reel arrangement of ``Win 12'' is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "Win 13" will be displayed in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and "Win 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) If you operate the left stop button D41 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located in the upper row of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” will appear in the upper row of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" will stop. (3-2) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle row of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, “1” will appear in the middle row of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" stops, and then, at the third stop, operate the right stop button D43 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the bottom of the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" will stop at the bottom of the right reel M53, and the BB combination will be stopped and displayed. (3-3) If you operate the middle stop button D42 at the operation timing when symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" will appear in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the conditional devices will be stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "Role" item, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is displayed in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations that do not change to RT state are stopped and displayed, and "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to re-gaming where the re-gaming combination that does not change to RT state is stopped and displayed. This is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations whose state does not change are displayed in a stopped state. The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the middle reel M52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the left reel M51, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 stop at the operation timing when they are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "white sevens" are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and from the player's perspective, it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be lined up in the bottom row. There is. In addition, in the game where you won Replay-B and won the AT add-on lottery, you could win the AT add-on lottery by executing a direction (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "white seven" by pushing backwards. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact. "Sequential press black 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device related to replay in which replay combinations whose RT state does not change are stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. (stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" will be displayed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. are displayed in a stopped state, and from the player's perspective, it appears as if the black sevens are lined up in the lower row. In addition, in the game where you won the replay-C and won the AT additional lottery, you could win the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "black seven" in order. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1** (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be operated) This is a conditional device in which the replay combinations that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the replay combination is stopped or displayed, and if the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not change to replay 01, replay 02, or replay 03. is displayed in a stopped state, and when the first stopped reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, a re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP*1* (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-gaming combinations that are stopped and displayed can be different depending on whether the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed, and when the first stopping reel is the middle reel M52, re-gaming 03 whose RT state does not change is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP**1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel should be left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button should be pressed) This is a conditional device in which the re-game winning combinations that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on whether the re-playing combination is stopped and displayed.If the first stopping reel is the right reel M53, re-playing 01 or re-playing 03 where the RT state does not change will be stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is set to the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, re-game 04 in which the RT state can change from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination can be different depending on which of the six choices the reel stop order is made. For example, if it is "Left reel M51:1, Middle reel M52:2, Right reel M53:3" and it is "123", it will stop in the pressing order of "Left reel M51 → Middle reel M52 → Right reel M53". For example, in the case of "Winning A-1" (winning number 7), if you stop in the order of "123" = "Left → Middle → Right" (correct answer in the order of presses), the maximum number of coins earned is The symbol combination that results in "winning 01" that allows you to win 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. Note that "123" in "Press order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stop order) that can obtain the maximum number of coins for that winning number. In addition, if the reels are stopped in a push order other than the order in which the maximum number of coins can be obtained, that is, if the push order is not correct, one coin will be paid out. Then, in the AT-related state such as "AT in progress", you can navigate the push order of the replaying combinations and the push order of the bell (display the push order that gives the highest profit on the push order display device D270), and select "Normal gaming state". It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit rates for players who do not navigate the push order for AT-related states such as ``. Note that the state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 allows you to obtain the maximum number of 11 game medals even if any of winning numbers 04 to 07 stops.In other words, the maximum profit is achieved regardless of the order in which you press the button. It is a conditional device that can be obtained, and is sometimes called a bell that can be pressed in any order. In addition, "Watermelon A", which corresponds to winning number 15, is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can easily line up in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 60 in FIG. 14, three watermelons A line up in the middle of each reel. In addition, "Watermelon B", which corresponds to winning number 16, is configured so that it is easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line; for example, the winning number 66 in FIG. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the upper row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the lower row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium-weak rare small winning combination (diagonal bell alignment)", which corresponds to winning number 17, is a conditional device in which 3 bells can be aligned on the active line, and the details will be described later, but it is possible to win during the BB. This is a conditional device by which an AT additional lottery is executed. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare small win (all V-shaped bells)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a conditional device in which bells can be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the upper row of the right reel M53. Although the details will be described later, this is a conditional device in which an AT additional lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item "Bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned for each winning number. In this embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) has bonus winning information of 0, and a winning number that includes type 1 BB-A (19) that includes a bonus (BB role). 1, bonus winning information for winning numbers (20 to 23) that include type 1 BB-B, 2, bonus winning information for winning numbers (24 to 27) that include type 1 BB-C, and 3 It is said that By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB has been established or not and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Winning/re-gaming winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned for each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a replay win or a small win (winning number 0 corresponding to a loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus) are set to have winning/replay winning information as 0. , 1 to 18 winning/replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers that include replay winnings or small winnings. By storing the winning/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which replay winning combination or minor winning combination has been won. The details of winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item "Performance Group Number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the sub control board S side is configured to be able to determine the effect to be executed. Note that the details of the performance group number will be described later.

Next, in the "ball group number" field, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and uses the stored ball output group number when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery) to execute lottery processing related to AT. The program can reduce the data capacity. Incidentally, even if the condition device with the ball group number 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery will not be executed. On the other hand, if a conditional device with a payout group number other than 0 wins, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery can be executed. The details of the ball group number will be described later. Furthermore, even if a conditional device with a ball group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery may be executed. In such a case, the ball group number is 0. It is preferable to configure the system so that if the AT lottery or AT additional lottery is executed after a device with a condition of 0 is won, the lottery result is always a loss (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows the lottery probability that the winning numbers (also referred to as condition device numbers, winning roles) and bonuses (also referred to as BB, BB role) regarding the small role and replay role in this embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. This is a list showing the winning rate (also referred to as winning rate). In the figure, the winning probability of winning numbers is illustrated.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1", and "RT2" when the BB is not activated will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of winning combinations (particularly replayed combinations) can differ depending on the RT state, The occurrence rate is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "Re-gaming 04" (so-called falling re-gaming combination, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and the symbol corresponding to the re-gaming combination in the situation where it is "RT1" and the bonus has not been won) When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" from now on) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "Re-game 04" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "Re-play 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "Re-gaming 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, the falling effect which is the effect notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40 ``Unfortunate'') is executed, and when ``Re-game 04'' is stopped and displayed at ``RT0'', the falling effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, even though "Re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the falling effect is not executed, so it can be recognized that the BB has been won, which increases the interest of the game. You can increase your sexuality. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the sound effect output when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed and the replay combination other than "Replay 04" (for example, "Replay The sound effect that is output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by such a configuration, the player can recognize that "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases where there is an AT-related state in which push-order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state), and an AT-related state where push-order navigation can occur (for example, "normal gaming state", sometimes referred to as a non-AT gaming state). The player may stay in "RT1" in both the "AT in progress state" (sometimes referred to as the "AT gaming state") and the "AT playing state". At this time, when a winning number that has the possibility of transitioning (falling) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect will be played that indicates that the RT state may fall when in a non-AT gaming state. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, when in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and when the replay winning combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed) It may also be configured to notify the order navigation. This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced, being careful not to fall out of the RT state. In addition, "Re-gaming 05" which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 2 or 3 (re-gaming combination which can notify you that you have won the AT additional lottery when it is stopped and displayed in AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in this state, and almost never appears in other RT states. Incidentally, the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combinations that become the re-gaming combinations will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 are configured to execute a push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order. . Note that there is no problem in changing the lottery probability as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a portion of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which a bonus and a small win overlap.

In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the BB winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single winning number that does not overlap with the minor winning numbers) If the BB role is won (sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role will be invalidated, and only the winning of the minor role will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) the 1st type BB-A, and you win the ``1st type BB-C'' with winning number 24, , Type 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 will be invalidated. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where the winning number 0 "loses" and wins. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the small winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 and the BB winning numbers are different. In the event that a duplicate condition device is won, the new winning of the BB winning combination will be invalidated and only the winning of the minor winning combination will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) 1st type BB-A, you win ``1st type BB-B + prize-C'' with winning number 21. In this case, the first type BB-B related to the winning number 21 will be invalidated, and only the winning prize-C will be valid. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where winning number 14 "Win-C" is won. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to small winnings, and may overlap with a part of the replay winning combination. For example, some of the replay winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus winning combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay (a re-gaming role that can change the RT state), the bonus can be won even when the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay is won. Even if there is a possibility that the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, making it possible to give players expectations. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, even though the player should have transitioned to an RT state (shifted to an RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), the replay probability has not become low (he frequently wins replays), etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning a bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, during BB operation, winning number 13 "common bell", winning number 17 "BB medium-weak rare small combination (all diagonal bells)", and winning number 18 "BB medium-strong rare small combination" It is structured so that three small winning combinations can be won, ``(V-shaped bells aligned)'', and ``BB medium-weak rare small winnings (diagonal bell alignment)'' during the operation of the BB won in the ``AT state''. Or, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small win (all V-shaped bells)", an AT additional lottery is executed (details will be described later).

In addition, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the small role appearance rate when the setting value is 1, and for the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT status. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (in this example, six levels). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is 3204. is 4504, and the configuration is such that the higher the setting value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player plays a game while counting the number of times a common bell appears (number of wins), the player frequently wins the common bell, and the game machine on which the player is playing is affected. It is possible to proceed with the game while having expectations that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball payout rate. Note that the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, AT additional lottery, and high probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, will not be executed. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as the AT-related lottery).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when the push order navigation is available. In the same figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as in the "AT state", the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out based on winning minor roles, also called the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-bet bet.If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, the expected value The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as follows: "Total number of replay winning combinations (total number of winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replaying winning combinations (3) + minor winning combination (11) The sum of the numbers placed (minor role appearance rate) for the winning combination (sum of the numbers placed for winning numbers 7 to 16) x the number of payouts in the small role (11-card role) (11 pieces) / the sum of all the numbers placed (65536) )" can be calculated as follows. Further, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game can be calculated as follows: "Average number of payouts per game/Number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of gaming media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, an increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected value of medal increase/decrease per game. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account increases or decreases in medals due to bonuses. That is, if the game is played in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case of operation in an optimal operation mode or a case of operation in an advantageous operation mode), the number of medals will increase in "RT1". In addition, in "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation is not occurring, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is a value smaller than 1, and the medal will continue to decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is larger than 1 when push order navigation is available in "RT0" or "RT2", but this is not limited to this. ” or “RT2”, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game when push order navigation is available may be configured to be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes a replaying role is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3 coins) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but when calculating the expected value of medal increase/decrease in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that 3 coins will be paid out. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

In addition, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1". When is "RT2", it is 3.67137146. In addition, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1". is 1.223790487 when it is "RT2", and when the push order navigation is available, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that the numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small roles and replay roles mentioned above are just examples. (expected medal increase/decrease value) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring it like this, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and in the case of "RT2" (when BB is internally established), if the bonuses are not arranged in a game where the bonuses can be arranged. Also, the number of medals you have will gradually decrease, and if you are in a situation where push order navigation occurs and you are in "RT2" (when BB is internally established), you may intentionally play games where you can collect bonuses. By not arranging bonuses, you can prevent strategies that increase the number of medals you have. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in "RT2" to be higher than the winning probability of all the small winning combinations (Win-A1 to Winning-I) in "RT2". It is preferable to set the winning probability of the re-gaming combination so that it is designed so that the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is designed to be high. (It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much.) In addition, in this example of "RT2", the total winning probability of all small winning combinations is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is: 34251/65536 (see Figure 11), and is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning by adding up all the small winnings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number 40 for all settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number 160 for all settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is assigned a different number depending on the setting value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C are sometimes referred to as BB with no setting difference or bonus with no setting difference). The first type BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the first type BB-B is sometimes referred to as a BB with a setting difference or a bonus with a setting difference). Furthermore, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, and Type 1 BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT status (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the setting value. Note that the total appearance rate as the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting values are different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and in this way Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference.

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the reel-type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12. First, the drum-type game machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a drum board K, a power supply board E, a relay board IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. In addition, the solid line part in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line part in the figure shows the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game played in the rotary gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, and the main control chip C is connected to a CPU 100 (sometimes also referred to as CPUMC), a built-in ROMC 110, a built-in RAMC 120, etc. so that data can be exchanged with each other via a bus. It has been installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal etc. indicating that the start lever D50 etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and then sends the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotation drum board. The operations of these various boards are controlled by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S (for example, by outputting control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S is able to execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board (sometimes referred to as sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, sub-gaming section) S is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, similar to the main control board M described above. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPUSC 100, ROM, RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged. In addition, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a production display device S40, a rotation drum backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, etc. is connected. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the symbols drawn on the surfaces of the reels from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, performance display device S40, drum backlight S30, etc. is being performed. In addition, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the player can move the nine ranges of the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the drum backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. For example, the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit by lighting up the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel and turning off all other LEDs. Furthermore, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the player can inform the player that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the reel backlight S30. The device is configured to be able to perform a backlight effect (sometimes referred to as a backlight effect) as suggested by the following.

The door board D includes the aforementioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and a start button for starting the rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a settlement button D60 for dispensing stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals to end the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying game status (not shown, but as described above) The input number indicator D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the input ready lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, the advantageous section A collection of display devices such as a display YH, etc.), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, canceling an error, or changing a setting value, a game medal (or , and other foreign matter) to the discharge port D240. Further, this door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to be able to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, payment button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU is operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the input reception sensor D10s detects passage of a game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, connected to the drum board K are a drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like. The reel board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. There is. Furthermore, in the reel type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols of approximately uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is is set to 24 steps (=480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per round of the reels are changed.

The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action of releasing. The medal dispensing device H includes a first dispensing sensor H10s and a second dispensing sensor H20s that determine whether or not medals are normally dispensed and measure the number of dispensed game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by broken arrows. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied to the main control board M and the sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and the various boards (door board D, drum board K, relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, it is supplied to each control board and board.

In addition, the main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset key switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M also includes a reel control means that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53), and an "AT in progress state" which is a state related to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means that executes an AT transition lottery for transitioning to AT, and an AT additional lottery that increases the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". It has an AT add-on lottery means for executing.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). ing. In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing that is executed for the first time in the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). (Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings), etc. as function settings for the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area) (checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (in step 1006). check results) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port in step 1038. Next, in step 1040, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

If the answer is No in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Further, in the case of No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area ). Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (step 1028). 1006), it is determined whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM, and sets ( For example, it is set in a register area), and the process moves to step 1034. The range that is not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to only the storage area that stores setting values (setting value data), but also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section + The number of games (normal section), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "advantageous section", etc. are also outside the range of RAM initialization. With this configuration, it becomes possible to calculate and display the ratio of players staying in the "advantageous section" (advantageous section ratio) in the game. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (eg, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, the following is repeated at 5-second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → character ratio per 6000 games → cumulative successive character ratio → cumulative character ratio" Is displayed. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB, CB, or SB is operating". /total number of payouts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range that includes a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in a register area) and proceed to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it does not become the value at which the special game is executed. (This is to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed in the event that the process for determining whether to execute the special game is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the bytes storing information related to the random numbers are It is preferable to configure the system so that only information related to the random number is stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored). (To prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting values (setting value data) are managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to ``1'' when it becomes ``0''. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the setting value (setting value data) correction process (step 1106 and The process in step 1108) can be made unnecessary, making it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value that is most disadvantageous to the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1106, the process also moves to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is in operation (for example, "88" that lights up all segments). Then, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 to move to. Incidentally, as described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED is malfunctioning (some segments cannot be lit), incorrect information may be reported when announcing the press order. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, by having all 7 segments on the payout number display device D270 light up to "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, and to notify the player of any inconvenience. It is possible to prevent the giving of benefits, etc. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of setting values (setting value data), a RAM memory for setting value display stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the storage area for storing setting values. It may be configured to have a storage area and display the setting value by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the sub-control board S is transitioning to the setting change mode is executed.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting/reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. If Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (if the added result set value (setting value data) exceeds 5 (the setting value (setting value data) becomes 0), and the process moves to step 1116. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1112, the process moves to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the processing from step 1112 to step 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and turns on the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process moves to step 1200, a game progress control process. Although not shown, after the process of step 1120 is executed, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be terminated.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from then on, the flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU 100 of the main control board M
sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether output to each output port has been completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and The process repeats execution, and when the power supply voltage decreases, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (In other words, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). Note that if No in step 1310, the process moves to step 1306. Note that the processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is the processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information regarding the error and the game progress status at the time of the error occurrence are transmitted to the hall computer). ).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the winning line, etc.). Note that step 1203 includes data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} ("0" for clearing the RAM address). It also includes processing to set data) in RAM. Incidentally, the condition device number, performance group number, instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but may be configured to be overwritten with the selected number when the next game is executed. Next, in step 1204, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0", etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the RT state set in step 1204. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. 27. Further, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when transmitting the RT state to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1206, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22, (Set the state regarding the AT determined in steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23). Next, in step 1207, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the state regarding the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state regarding the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the AT-related status to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the AT-related status may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1208, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game section (for example, "advantageous section", etc.) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is not full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can penetrate into the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Judgment is made based on whether the current is conductive or non-conductive (if the current is conductive through the medal, it is determined that the medal is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag in step 1210 (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to "on"). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been canceled (for example, if the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting, and if the setting/ It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and The process moves to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU 100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation will be automatically executed in the next game of the replayed combination), and performs the next process (step 1220). processing). Here, in step 1218, a process of turning on the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, when a replay combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on, provided that the current number of credits (credits) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current number of stored credits (credits) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, if the re-gaming combination was not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if a re-gaming combination is established, if the stored number (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, such as "RT1" etc. When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the probability of winning a replay combination is higher than in the RT state, or when a replay combination is difficult to tell from the outside as a replay combination (a replay disguised as a small win). Even if a symbol combination (bell-bell-bell or a cherry stopped on the left reel) stops on the invalid line, the player can play the game in good rhythm (without feeling strange).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (credits do not exist). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (although not shown, it may be a payout number display device D270, a credit number display device D200, or an input number display light D210). The value is displayed (transferring to the setting confirmation mode), and the process moves to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Furthermore, when the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is performed to send a command to the sub-control board S side to indicate that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the setting change mode is started. Processing is being executed to send a command to indicate termination. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU 100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, it is not possible to input medals). It has two input sensors for detection, and when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s is off). After the sensor D30s is turned on, when the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off, it is determined that one accepted game medal has passed through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the number of credits is the maximum number (50 in this example) and the number of bets is the maximum number (3 in this example). If it is determined as Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which no medal flow path is formed). Note that if No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process moves to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payment button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and Execute the payout of one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, the CPU It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although it is not specified on the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay combination, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1234). . Specifically, whether the situation in which it is determined that no medals have been paid out continues for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal is being sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating) Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1247, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. Note that if No in step 1241 or step 1247, the process moves to step 1236.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 is valid (for example, a specified number of game medals have been inserted to start the game, etc.). ), and it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains a random number and turns off the blocker D100, and then moves to the next process (the process in step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1256. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. Note that if No in step 1251, the process moves to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is a state in which an AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to AT that can execute the AT add-on lottery are "AT in progress state", "add-on specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be greater than 0, but the AT add-on lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from daringly not aligning the BB symbol combinations in the "advantageous BB internal medium game" from becoming more advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it may be configured so that the AT add-on lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and in such a configuration, the AT add-on lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". It may be configured such that the player is not notified immediately, but is then notified that he has won the AT addition lottery at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added.

If Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1259, the process also moves to step 1400. In this process of adding up the number of games, it is possible to execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (using the same lottery table It is preferable to carry out a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes condition device number management processing, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example will be listed and explained in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. Note that the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state" and is therefore sometimes referred to as a "normal state." (2) "Normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state", the BB combination has not been won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" means when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won. Alternatively, it is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". (4) “High probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not acquired the right to move to the “AT middle state”) and has not won the bonus role. , this is a state in which it is easier to win AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the case of a new transition to the "high probability state", the configuration is such that the transition to the "low probability state" does not occur until the number of high secured obstacle games has elapsed (5) "AT in progress state" " is a state in which AT (press order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if you win the continuation lottery described later, a predetermined value will be set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" will continue (6) "Specialization precursor state". is a state in which the player has acquired the right to move to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than the "AT in progress state". (7) "Additional specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than "AT state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state where it has not won a prize. (9) "Waiting BB internal game" is a state where the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. . (10) “Advantageous BB state” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is won when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, “AT medium state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “additional specialization state”. When it is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal game", the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , when the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal game" It is a state that is executed at times. (12) "Resurrection propriety state" is a state related to the AT that changes when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the player does not win the continuous lottery to be described later. In the "resurrection possibility state", a revival lottery, which will be described later, is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not played. If you win, you will move to a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels, which will be described later, and moves to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a pull-in point creation request (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order (as appropriate depending on the stop position of the other reels) is determined. If Yes in step 1261-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point in step 1262, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process moves to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal medium game", in the game where the press order bell was won, the stop button was not stopped in the correct press order that would result in a payout of 11 coins (for example, in the case of winning - A1, Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (the reels are stopped in the wrong order), the symbol combination that will result in a payout of 11 pieces will be created by the reel stop control. It is designed to win prizes. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a check to see if the reel stop is accepted. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process moves to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, the CPU 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data in step 1268. Next, in step 1269, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed combination of symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal). ). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is made by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, and the winning combination is determined. In a game where the stop button is operated in an operation mode that allows the winning combination to win, the position of the reels that actually stopped was not normal (the winning combination determined by an internal lottery becomes possible). Even if the winning combination is not visually displayed as stopped by the player, if the reel stop control is successfully executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning combination will be displayed. The payout is configured to be executed. If YES in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a payout process for game medals based on winnings. Next, in step 1275, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a win that pays out game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example) In this case, the game medals are paid out. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). In this case, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the process in step 1276). . If YES in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays an empty medal error using the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether the setting/reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF), and steps 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s are off (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being put out has been completed). If Yes in step 1286, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1288, and proceeds to step 1290. Note that if No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process moves to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning prize (winning prize determined as Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If YES in step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. Note that if No in step 1286, the process moves to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process moves to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process moves to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes remaining game number management processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state start control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, changing the game state, etc.), and moves to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing related to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery, in which winning numbers and numbers for comparison with acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process moves to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning/replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are won at the same time, or a bonus and a replay role are won at the same time, both the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information will be calculated based on the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and is the number of consecutive winning numbers that are stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. remembered. For example, ball payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are replayable combinations in the push order, have the same number. As for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell combinations, the above numbers are the same, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay winning combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the winning combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4 to 6, which are push order replay roles, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7 to 12, which are push order bell roles, are obtained are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery was won (whether or not the obtained random number existed in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1259) without executing determination (lottery) regarding the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. If Yes in step 3618, the process moves to step 3610, and the processes from step 3610 to step 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next ball group number), moves to step 3604, and returns to step 3604. Execute the following processing. Note that specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is the winning number that can add up the number of remaining AT games in the AT state. In this example, it is determined whether the ball group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the replay-B, re-game-C, winning-D. If YES in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state related to AT is an advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game concerned is the BB medium bonus (" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add up to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process moves to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process moves to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is the "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is a specialization bonus role (in the "addition specialization state", the number of remaining AT games can be added and In the "AT state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a winning group number related to re-play - A, re-play - D1 to D3, winning - A1 to A6) (in this example, 2, 13). If YES in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. Note that if No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning and determines the number of AT additional games based on the ball group number related to the game (for example, In the lottery table shown in the drawing table, the determination is made based on which range the latched random number falls within. Note that determining the number of AT add-on games is also referred to as executing an AT add-on lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command (a command to the sub-control board S side) related to the determined number of AT additional games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games are added, and the process moves to step 1518. Note that AT-related drawings (AT drawings, AT additional drawings) can also be executed in the case of ball playing group numbers 7 to 11, which are ball group numbers related to winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) that include bonuses. .

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning. If the bonus combination is won in the AT state, specialization precursor state, specialization specialization state, or advantageous BB state), based on the ball group number related to the game, The number of AT add-on games is determined from "0" to "300" by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of AT remaining games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as not winning the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when winning the additional combination at the time of winning is as shown in the figure, and the specific calculation method is that the winning combination is Watermelon A. In this case, {Number of settings (600) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of settings (100) x Number of AT additional games (10) + Number of settings (300) x Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of settings ( 24)×Number of AT add-on games (100)}/total number of set numbers (1024)=12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, {set number (500) x number of AT add-on games (0) + set number (200) x number of AT add-on games (50) + Calculate as follows: Placement number (300) x Number of AT additional games (100) + Placement number (24) x Number of AT addition games (300)}/Total number of placements (1024) = 46.1 (games) be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3, and winning combination is A1 to A6, then
300) x Number of AT add-on games (10) + Number of set (600) x Number of AT add-on games (30) + Number of set (124) x Number of AT add-on games (50)}/Total number of set numbers (1024) = 26. 61 (game), it can be calculated as follows. In addition, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games will be added only if the state related to AT is "addition special state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare combination, {Number of settings (800) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of settings (100) x Number of AT additional games (10) + Number of settings (100) )×Number of AT additional games (30)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (100)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium strong rare combination, {Number of placements (300) x Number of AT additional games (0) + Number of placements (300) x Number of AT addition games (30) + Number of placements (400) )×Number of AT additional games (50)+Number of entries (24)×Number of AT additional games (300)}/Total number of additional entries (1024)=35.4 (games).

In addition, in this embodiment, when an AT add-on lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT add-on games is configured to vary depending on the type of winning combination, but depending on the setting value, the average value of the number of AT add-on games may be different. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when configuring to execute an AT additional lottery based on the winning number, for example, when executing the same process as an AT additional lottery with winning numbers 7 and 8, the winning number is 7. However, as in this embodiment, by configuring the AT additional lottery to be executed based on the winning number group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 can be determined. When performing the same process as an AT add-on lottery for both winning numbers 7 and 8, only by determining whether the payout group number is 2, execute the process related to the AT add-on lottery for both winning number 7 and winning number 8. will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M may make a judgment based on the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, ball group number, etc.) related to the game. ) is a winning number related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can line up in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping with a reverse push). If Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay B. In other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay B is determined. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a reverse push ("right → middle → left") to the invalid line. (to execute an effect instructing the player to line up the white sevens), and the process moves to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than a reverse push ("right → center → left") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect to prevent white sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and the process moves to step 1526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1518, the process moves to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number, etc.) related to the game is the replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a sequential push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black 7 can line up in a straight line with the invalid line by stopping with the sequential push. If Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay-C, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay-C. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a sequential push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and presses in the order ("left → middle → right") to line up the invalid line. 1400) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a sequential push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than sequential push ("left → middle → right") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect that prevents black sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and moves on to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands to prevent the sub-press. Although the control board S side is configured to be able to execute effects related to the push order navigation, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning the AT additional lottery, it is possible to display the fact that the AT additional lottery has been won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is sent to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side selects the push order navigation. It may also be configured to determine the execution timing and performance mode of the performance related to the performance. As an example, in a game in which replay B is a winning game, the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game with an additional number of AT games), and selects an effect mode that instructs a reverse push. Alternatively, in the game in which the sub-control board S side receives the command, the effect instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions (for example, a specific replay combination (e.g., replay) It may be configured to execute an effect that instructs the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible on the invalid line in a game that satisfies the condition (game-B or C) won. Or, in a game in which replay B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect that instructs the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous performances may be performed at the same time, in which case, the final game of the continuous performance) is satisfied, the AT game number additional performance (displayed on the performance display device S40) This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games increases, for example, "+30G" may be executed.In addition, in this example, the effect display device S40 also displays an increase in the number of AT remaining games. The display is configured to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In the game in which B won and the sub-control board S side received the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the performance that instructs a reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. An example of a case where an AT game number addition effect is executed in a game that is executed is when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) to encourage winning of a bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (within the bonus In this case, the winning probability of replay-B is low (including 0%), so if the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible is announced, the player will realize that the bonus has not been won). An example is when the board S side is executing a special performance.In addition, the sub control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT add-on lottery and the number of AT remaining games has been added. The information includes: (1) Information regarding the number of AT remaining games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT additional lottery.Then, on the sub-control board S side, information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is transmitted. (2) Calculate the difference between the information about the number of AT additional games and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. A command related to the number of AT add-on games received is sent to the sub-control board S side.In addition, if the AT add-on lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT add-on lottery was not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured such that when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side determines the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. In the winning game, in which the command was received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games was not increased), press the middle button (operate the middle stop button as the first stop, and press the middle stop button as the first stop). It may also be configured to select and execute a performance mode that instructs the user to press the order of avoidance. Although the AT additional lottery was executed on the main control board M side, the information on which the sub control board S side determines that there was no addition of the number of remaining AT games includes (1) information regarding the number of remaining AT games; After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasps the number of AT extra games won in the AT extra lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time from the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT additional lottery was not won), (2) Main control board A command regarding the fact that the number of AT add-on games is 0 as a result of the AT add-on lottery on the M side is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of AT state transition control processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state regarding the AT that can execute the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the only state regarding AT that can execute AT lottery is "high probability state", and by winning BB in "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game" After that, when the BB role wins, the state shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. Incidentally, even if the player wins the BB in the "low probability state", the game moves to the "normal BB internal game" and does not shift to the "AT state" thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that when a BB is won in the "normal gaming state", the AT lottery can be won using the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if you win BB in the "normal gaming state" and win the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, you will be transferred to the "advantageous BB internal game" and then win the BB. By aligning them, you will move to an "advantageous BB state". In addition, in the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal gaming state" and the BBs are not lined up, the gaming section may be set as the "advantageous section" or may be set as the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is the AT lottery winning combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB winning combination with no setting difference). Species BB-C). In addition, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference alone (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference and the same small role (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to "advantageous BB internal medium game", and proceeds to step 1410. Furthermore, if No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process moves to step 1410. Note that in this embodiment, the AT winning rate (can win or not) in the AT lottery is configured to differ when the AT-related states are different; however, when the AT-related states are the same, Even if the setting values are different, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same (if you win BB in the "high probability state", you will always win AT regardless of the setting value = then " (transfers to "AT in progress state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a state promotion win (a small number that can move from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning). It is determined whether the winning hand is a winning combination (in this example, a cherry). If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU 100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem in changing it as long as it does not differ depending on the setting value). A high probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be the "high probability state", and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "high probability state". If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the high guarantee fault counter KHc is 1 (this is the final high guarantee fault game, and it is the 10th game after entering the "high probability state"). ). If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to AT is a "high probability state", the game section is an "advantageous section", and when the game section is an "advantageous section", the pressing order The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) (i.e., Even if you win the low probability state transition lottery, if the low probability transition conditions are not met because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once, etc., the "high probability state" is configured not to end. ). In addition, if the BB role is won during the "advantageous section" and you execute BB, you can play the "advantageous section" at any timing even if you have not executed the push order navigation even once during the "advantageous section". It may be configured such that it can be terminated. If YES in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as the push order winnings (winning numbers that win different prizes depending on the order in which the reels stop and the player's profit rate differs), there are two types of winning numbers: a winning number with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a winning number with a maximum payout of 11 coins. In this case, the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for a winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 pieces has been executed once. Note that the process also moves to step 1430 in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428. In this way, in this embodiment, when a new transition is made to the "high probability state", 10 games, which are high probability probability games, are set to the high probability probability counter KHc, and the counter value is kept at 0 until the counter value becomes 0. is configured so as not to transition to a "low probability state". Note that such a lottery method is just an example; for example, the lottery for transitioning to a low-probability state is not executed for 10 games after transitioning to a "high-probability state" (staying in a "high-probability state" is guaranteed). ), it may be configured to perform a lottery to shift from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in every game after the 10 games have passed. Note that the AT lottery winnings (low-probability AT lottery winnings, high-probability AT lottery winnings) and state promotion winning combinations have the same probability of winning for all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT-related state is "AT in progress" or not. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, Watermelon B You can acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" with a probability of 1/2 of winning the "specialization precursor state", but if the AT-related state is "AT in progress" , the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if you win Watermelon B, there will be a lottery (specialized (also referred to as a state transition lottery) is not executed, and the state is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state." However, this is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, there will be a lottery where you can win Watermelon B and gain the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It is also possible to configure the system so that it is possible to execute ``additional specialization state'' by winning watermelon B in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less. If a person wins a lottery to obtain a lottery, the configuration may be such that the state can be (transferred to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the AT counter value It may be configured so that it can become (transfer to) a "precursor state of specialization" or "additional specialization state" when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), and the game that won the lottery may It may be configured such that after a predetermined number of games have been played, the game can enter (or transition to) a "precursor specialization state" or an "additional specialization state." In addition, when transitioning to the "additional specialization state", it is not necessarily necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state"; for example, the configuration is such that it is possible to directly transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state". You may. If Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small number that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to an "additional specialization state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is Watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery in which the lottery has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. Next, in step 1434, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "specialization precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final AT game) in step 1436. judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the lottery is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to step 1444-1 (defines the conditions for AT state transition. To satisfy this requirement, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "resurrection possibility state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the process moves to step 1444-1. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not considered, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the last AT game, but for example, the first AT game (the first game in which the AT state is newly entered, or after the initial value is set to the AT counter M60). The continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it has already been determined in the "AT in progress" whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue). , the performance during AT can be made different depending on whether you have won the continuous lottery or not. For example, if you have won the continuous lottery, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (playing a song, etc.) in a situation where is 1 or more (during AT execution), or to perform an effect that makes it certain that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state for displaying whether or not it is possible to recover. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a resurrection role (by winning in the “resurrection possibility state”), the CPU 100 of the main control board M It is determined whether the winning combination is a winning combination that can transition to the "AT state" (in other words, a winning combination that can bring back AT). Here, in this embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any of Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry, and a bonus role (only the BB role without setting difference, not including the BB role with setting difference). , and if the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, it is said that the person wins the resurrection lottery. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, in order to satisfy the conditions for enabling transition to the AT state, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1441-1, the process moves to step 1445. In this way, in the present embodiment, even if it is the final AT game and the player is not selected for the continuation lottery, the system transitions to the "resurrection possibility state" and is revived in the "resurrection possibility state". If the player wins the lottery, the game is configured to shift to the "AT state" from the next game. In addition, although the "Restoration possibility state" is set to "Advantageous section", AT-related lottery (AT additional lottery, continuation lottery, etc.) in "AT status" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. The manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility state".

Next, in step 1445, the CP of the main control board M
The UC 100 determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the transition conditions for the state related to AT are satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. (It is satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursory games, are played in the state). If Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onward, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If you have completed the number of portent games in the "precursor state", it will be determined as the "additional specialization state"). Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process moves to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a high guarantee fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high guarantee fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed). A command related to the remaining number of games played) is set, and the process moves to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT from the next game onward is determined to be "advantageous BB internal medium game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1450). Note that even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1450).

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "low probability state", you will win the AT transfer lottery. On the other hand, if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "high probability state", you will win the AT transition lottery (then the state will not change to the "AT state"). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as the AT lottery winning combination, and the states related to AT, which is the “advantageous section”, are “high probability state A” and “high probability state A”. If the condition device A is won in "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is selected in "high probability state B". It may be configured such that if A is won, the AT transition lottery is won at 1/2. In addition, if you win the AT transition lottery, the AT-related state will transition to the "AT preparation state" which is a preparatory state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then the predetermined termination condition (for example, "AT preparation state") will be entered. It may be configured such that when the condition (10 games have elapsed since the transition to the "AT state") is satisfied, the transition to the "AT in progress state" is completed.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". If Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU 100 of the main control board M issues a command related to winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub control board S side, for example, a winning/replay winning information related to the game). commands related to information). Next, in step 1454, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the conditional device for the game is a combination with a pressing order (a conditional device in which winning combinations differ depending on the pressing order; for example, winning-A1, etc.). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also referred to as the push order number) during the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). Note that the instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, it is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). Further, by receiving the instruction number, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Note that the instruction number is configured to be determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). In addition, when executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) exclusively for the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In addition, in this example, displaying the stopping order of the reels with the highest profit to the player on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is referred to as displaying the push order navigation, displaying the push order navigation display, etc. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is configured to be displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270. The system is configured so that "=1" is displayed both in the case of a push-order bell and in the case of a push-order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a case where the push order navigation of "Left → Middle → Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to the push order bell, and in a game related to the push order replay, " The display mode may be different depending on when the push order navigation of "Left→Middle→Right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the press order navigation displayed on the press order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning/replay winning information.

Further, if No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs mask processing on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and transfers the masked information to a predetermined address in the RAM. to be memorized. Here, if winning/re-play winning information related to the game is sent to the sub-control board S side, and if the winning/re-play winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, the high profits related to the game will be lost. This means that the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, after masking the winning/replay winning information related to the game (processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential), the sub control board S By configuring the system to send the data to the user, the system is configured so that high-profit press orders cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in this embodiment, a plurality of winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information having a similar role is preferable; for example, the RT state changes depending on the order of pressing. Multiple pieces of winning/re-play winning information in which symbol combinations that become re-gaming roles can be stopped and displayed) are set as one performance group number (for example, winning/re-play winning information 4 to 6 are set to performance group 4), and the performance is The configuration is such that the group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the winning/re-play winning information (in this example, 0 to 18) that has been provided, a new winning/re-play after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. In addition, even in such cases, multiple winning/re-play winning information such as performance group number among existing winning/re-play winning information can be treated as one winning/re-play winning information after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the system so that game winning information is provided (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is combined with the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information) which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing.・Re-play winning information), etc.). Furthermore, if it is determined that the game is a game that notifies operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of AT on the main control board M, winning/replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, In a game that does not notify operation information, the performance group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the production group number after performing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and steps 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, (set in the register area) and move on to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that this embodiment is configured to derive winning/replay winning information and bonus winning information from the winning number, but the deriving method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT status", (1) If a falling re-gaming combination is included -> Press when the falling re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed. It is structured as follows: (2) For Bell (1-card hand/11-card hand), the push order that yields the largest number of coins is the navigation, etc. As described above, in this embodiment, when the game section is an "advantageous section", the sub-control board S side displays the winning/re-play winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pressing order for the player). On the other hand, when the game section is a "normal section", the sub control board S The system is configured so that the performance group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the player. In other words, in the "advantageous section", the winning/re-playing winning information related to the game, including the winning/re-playing winning information where the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the order of presses, is directly sent to the sub-control board S. On the other hand, in game sections that are not "advantageous sections," winning/replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and winnings/replay winnings and replays where the game results and the player's profits differ depending on the order of presses are not transmitted. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side a performance group number in which information related to the push order is hidden.

In addition, in cases such as when the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is performed when transmitting winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S to determine the performance group number. Then, the production group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the performance group number refers to the winning/replay winning information, and the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play a similar role (for example, replaying roles that include falling replaying roles, push order bells, etc.) are grouped and assigned numbers. The configuration is configured such that the winning/replay winning information related to the game is subjected to mask processing {processing to make the winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential) before being transmitted to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which information related to winning/replay winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, and the pressing order (reel stop order) that results in a high profit related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be ensured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). This is a timer that measures the If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels and the request to create a draw point for the finished game. Next, in step 1560, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request during standby for the start of reel rotation for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, the processing in steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reels will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the gaming sections, and is a gaming situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". This is a game section that is easy to set. If YES in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 (which is a decrement counter and is initially set to 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section"). The counter value (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in a period that is an "advantageous section") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is the "AT in progress state". If YES in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value in step 3410. Next, in step 3412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). Note that even in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). As described above, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is decremented every game, but "advantageous BB state", " In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is configured not to be subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, if the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the transition is made from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is entered while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state" → "specialization precursor state" → "additional specialization state". Incidentally, even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". , or store "30+α" which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT add-on lottery related to the game, but when the start lever D50 is operated, it is displayed on the effect display device S40. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT additional lottery (in addition, "α" obtained from the additional AT lottery is , "α" in a specific game after the game (games that meet the predetermined conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without being notified in the game. may be notified). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the performance display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and a performance suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. The AT remaining number of games can be configured to be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, even if the player wins a bonus in a state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as in the "AT state", it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. That is, after a winning number including a bonus combination is determined, a continuous performance over a plurality of games that stimulates whether or not a bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40 or the like, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, after the bonus game ends, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", or if the result of the AT add-on lottery is won and the result of the add-on is announced, it is a value of "30" or more. can be controlled to display. In addition, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1," the bonus will be displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games will be "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance over multiple games will be performed to incite whether or not you have won the bonus, and the AT counter value will be "1". , a winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number) that allows a game to be executed and an AT additional lottery to be executed when the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1" is won and the AT additional lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing the continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the AT remaining number of games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state are satisfied in the game. Here, in this embodiment, the conditions for enabling transition to the RT state are execution of RAM clearing (RAM initialization), stop display of replay (in this example, stop display of replay 04), winning/starting of BB.・It is structured so that it can be satisfied upon completion. If YES in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and determines the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied conditions for transition to the RT state (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (see figure), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that even in the case of No in step 1702, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all the reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure, the RT state can be changed. will be transferred. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, the state shifts to "RT0". Specifically, when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, if you win "Replay D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and operate the left stop button as the first stop. , regames 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Regame-D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and you operate the middle stop button or right stop button as the first stop, replay 04 will be stopped and displayed. , the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT status is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the conditional device related to type 1 BB-A, B, and C is activated). ) and the RT state shifts to "RT2". Furthermore, if you win the BB combination in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the game shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C." Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". In addition, if the state related to AT is "low probability state" and the BB is won, and the BB ends, the RT state will shift to "RT1" which is high profit for the player, but the state related to AT Since the state is such that the push order navigation does not occur, when you win "Re-game - D1 to D3", the incorrect press order (the first stop is the left button, middle button, right button), One of the three choices is the correct pressing order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are incorrect and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the regame 04, the regame 04 is displayed as stopped, and the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" occurs. Also, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", you will win BB, and if BB ends, you will be in RT state. will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the AT-related state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game - D1 to D3" is won, the player will not be able to re-play 04. Since the button does not stop and display the correct answer in the pressing order, it is possible to maintain "RT1".

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state shift enable condition is satisfied in the game. Conditions for transitioning to AT state include, for example, (1) when BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) when winning the continuation lottery, (3) when winning the revival lottery. Satisfied if If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU 100 of the main control board M, triggered by the new transition to the "AT precursor state", determines the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, and "AT in progress"). The number of games whose subtraction is started after the transition to the "state") is set in the AT counter M60, and the process moves to step 1756. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is not a high probability state. If YES in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT of the next game is a high probability state. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high guaranteed failure games (10 in this example) in the high guaranteed failure counter, and proceeds to the next process (processing in step 3500). Transition. Note that even in the case of No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning BB in "high probability state" and moving to "advantageous BB internal medium game", B
By winning B, the player moves to the "advantageous BB state", and if the number of AT games is added in the "advantageous BB state", the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" changes to the "AT in progress state". At the time of transition, the initial value set in the AT counter will have exceeded 50. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then shifts to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, if an effect is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", at the start of the "AT state", the player is informed that the initial number of AT games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify the player, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the beginning of the "AT state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or a state where the number of AT remaining games on the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method may also be considered in which a notification effect is performed. By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to increase interest in an additional performance that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation may occur). In this example, the AT initial number of games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial number of games is not limited to that of this example. , the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the initial number of AT games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to AT becomes "AT in progress state"). (Subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in a storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT medium state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" ”, “Advantageous BB internal game”, “Advantageous BB state”, and “Resurrection possibility state”. The state will change. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win a specialization state transition lottery where you win at 1/2, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". Furthermore, if 10 games have elapsed (played) since the transition to the "specialization precursor state", the system is configured to transition to the "additional specialization state". In addition, as for the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set in the "normal section", and the "high probability state" and "AT in progress" are set in the "normal section". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "resurrection possibility state" are now "advantageous section" Set. In other words, even if the state related to the seven ATs that constitute the "advantageous section" has been transitioned, if 1,500 games have passed without setting it to the "normal section", the "advantageous section" will be forcibly ended. It is set to "normal section". In addition, if the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", However, the gaming state is maintained.

As described above, in the case of being in the "AT state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery has not been won, the state is in the "restoration possibility state". If you win the resurrection lottery in the ``resurrection availability state'', you can return to the ``AT state'' again. On the other hand, if the player does not win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", the state shifts to the "low probability state" and changes from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

When you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" ”. Also, if you win a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) in the "AT state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the " Shifts to "AT in progress state". In addition, when you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', BB with no setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends. will also transition to the "AT state" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', the BB with setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends, the BB with setting difference will stand alone. If the winning number (winning number 20) is related to the BB role of If it is a winning number that overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT state" after the BB ends (because the rare winning combination will be used as an opportunity to win the revival lottery).

Also, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the "advantageous section" and in the "high probability state", the BB with setting difference activates, and when the "advantageous BB state" ends, Transition to "high probability state".

In addition, the states related to AT that transition after the end of the "advantageous BB state" are as follows: For both BB (with BB and BB with no setting difference), the state transitions to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among the "AT state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", and during non-AT ( After the winning BB with no setting difference in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". Furthermore, after the winning BB with setting difference is completed during non-AT ("high probability state"), the state shifts to "high probability state".

Note that the state related to AT is not limited to that of this embodiment, and for example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or "high probability state", and the AT lottery is executed. It may be configured such that the player enters the "precursor state" by winning a game, and then shifts to the "AT state" after 16 to 32 games have passed, and in such a case, if the predetermined condition device is met. If you win, an AT lottery will be executed, and if you do not win the AT lottery, you will enter a "fake precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games, you will enter a "low probability state" or a "high probability state". It may be configured to do so. In addition, a "standby section" that is different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning a "cherry", the BB If "BB+Cherry" with duplicate cherries is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB+Cherry" is won is a "standby section". You can. In this way, by providing a "waiting section," there are cases where a player wins BB in the "low probability state" and does not win the AT lottery, and a case where a player wins the BB in the "low probability state" and is AT lottery. In the case of winning the AT lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combination is completed (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), so if you win the AT lottery. It is possible to incite the player as to whether or not there is a player. In addition, if a BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB As the BB that won in the "addition specialization state", execute an AT additional lottery that is different from the BB that won in the "AT state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB that won in the "AT state") It may be configured such that it is easy to play, and the number of games per AT game addition is relatively large. In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB It may be configured such that an AT additional lottery is executed in the same way as for the winning BB in the “add-on specialization state”.

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section includes a "normal section" where the profit is relatively low for the player, and a "normal section" where the profit is relatively high for the player. It has two gaming sections: an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a "normal section." If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game period for the next game and subsequent games to be the game period corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game situation, and moves to step 3528. do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game period is the "advantageous period", then in step 3514, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the advantageous period remaining games counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games staying in the "specialization precursor state" (things also become 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition for an "advantageous section" other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 becomes 0; for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0. or when push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process moves to step 3515. As described above, in this embodiment, when the "advantageous section" ends and the next game is set to the "normal section", information related to AT (the number of continuous AT games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) (information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming an "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The AT-related information cleared by the process of step 3515 (the process at the end of the advantageous section) includes the counter value of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. In addition, this information will also be cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the settings, but depending on the RAM clearing when changing the settings, "condition device related to accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and "RT status" , information related to the "number of stored coins", etc. are also cleared, but depending on the process in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT status" , information related to "number of stored coins", etc. is not cleared. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when executing the process of step 3515) are different. Note that the configuration may be such that the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or the "RT state" is maintained by clearing the RAM when changing the settings. Further, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" consecutive, clearing can be done by a simple process of specifying the first address to be cleared and the range of addresses to be cleared at the time of clearing processing. Furthermore, when the "advantageous section" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous section" has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the gaming history, such as the fact that it was in an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state". ing. However, if you clear the RAM when changing the settings, the game history on the sub-control board S side, such as the fact that it was in an "advantageous section" and information on how many games were played in the "AT state" will also be deleted.

In addition, if the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current state regarding AT is "high probability state"; (2) If the current state regarding AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the state regarding AT will be "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current AT-related state is "Advantageous BB state," the AT-related state will become "Normal BB state" in the next game. (4) Current If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "resurrection possibility state", in the next game the AT-related state will be "low probability state". state" (because information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period after the next game to the "normal period". Next, in step 3517, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the "advantageous section" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Although the configuration is such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the "advantageous section" ends and the "normal section" is set, the detailed timing of turning off the light is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal related to a game which ends the "advantageous section" and enters the "normal section" is inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 that enables the next game to be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of YES in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the game period after the next game to be an "advantageous period", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, it is decided that the CPU 100 of the main control board M will be newly set to an "advantageous section" in the next game (it has been decided to be set from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous period remaining game counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). Note that even in the case of No in step 3528, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. The timing is from the start lever operation timing in the game before the new "advantageous section" (game in the "normal section") to the timing when game medals can be inserted in the game that becomes the new "advantageous section" (new "advantageous section" game). If the game before entering the "advantageous section" was a game related to replaying, set the period as appropriate until the start lever operation becomes effective in the game that becomes the new "advantageous section". Good too.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is thereafter executed for a predetermined period of time (T in this example, for example, about 2 ms). The program is configured to be executed periodically with a period of

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, step 163
2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M acquires internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set) Determine. If YES in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing in step 1638, and moves to the next processing (the processing in step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotation drum drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. Note that in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that processes corresponding to each of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6102, the process also moves to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing when the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of reel acceleration processing starts, for example, in step 1260 of FIG. 18). It is determined whether the processing execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6108. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reels are stopped, the reels will start rotating through this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35, which will be described later). Determine whether the timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel constant speed maintenance processing, and proceeds to step 6120. It should be noted that if the result in step 6112 or step 6114 is No, the process also moves to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a constant reel speed state. If Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor is connected to the reel (corresponding to the process of this subroutine) after the reel is in a constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116). It is determined whether the index provided on the reel) is detected. Although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated once, etc. Each index is then detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotational speed of the reel has become constant, and the process moves to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotational speed is normally constant by having the reel sensor detect the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times (the configuration is such that 400 steps can be rotated by 400 interrupt processing), and when the reel rotation speed is constant, This is longer than the time it takes for the reel to make one rotation (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing interrupt processing 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes constant speed state is determined. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured so that it can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. In this way, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, , the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even in the case of No in step 6120, the process moves to step 6130. Note that the reel reacceleration processing does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration processing described above, and the reel reacceleration processing and the reel acceleration processing can be used to perform interrupt processing for each combination of excitation phases of the stepping motor and for each combination of excitation phases. The number of executions may be made different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel deceleration standby state start timing (this is the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, when the stop button is operated, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is reached). ) is reached. If YES in step 6130, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration standby state in step 6132, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts decelerating the reel (reel deceleration process) in step 6138. Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the process of step 6142. It should be noted that even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process moves to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1612). Note that even in the case of No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotating operation of the reel M50 of the reel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The reel-type game machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotational speed of the reels reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (the reels are rotated at a constant speed). When the driving state becomes a reel constant speed state, a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any stop button is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor) having four phases, Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3. Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, a column of "phase to excite" indicates which phase among Φ0 to Φ3 is to be excited (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "Reel rotation speed image" at the top of the figure, the driving states from when the stepping motor starts rotating until it stops are divided into six, and the stepping motor is controlled according to the drive pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the drive states include "reel stop state", "reel rotation start standby state", "reel acceleration state", "reel constant speed state", "reel deceleration standby state", and "reel deceleration state". In addition, in the "Reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction, and the horizontal axis is the time, and the time is illustrated so that time passes in the right direction. There is. In addition, the example shown in the same figure is an example of a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and this applies only when reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or losing synchronization. (The case where reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are activated. is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the start lever D50 being operated at timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from when the start lever D50 is operated until the stepping motor acceleration process (reel acceleration process) is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state." For example, the time from when the reel drive state became "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum playing time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed. If it is, it will be in a "wait state to start reel rotation".

Next, at timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100+60+30+15+8+4+2+1=220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the bottom left of the figure) (the reel drive state is changed to "reel constant speed"). is configured to update the status). Next, the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at timing (4) in the figure, after the reel drive state is updated from "reel rotation start standby state" to "reel acceleration state", the timer interrupt process has been executed 220 times, and the reel drive state is updated. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. The combination of excited phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to the "reel constant speed state" where interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of excited phases. (If no abnormal rotation of the reel occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image". In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower left of the figure. Note that the "phase to be excited" is a combination of phases to be excited, and the "number of times of interrupt execution" indicates the number of times that an interrupt process is executed to be excited by the combination of phases to be excited. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and (KA) interrupt process is executed 100 times at "φ0" → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times with "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times with "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times with "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" ” interrupt processing 8 times → (KF) “φ2, φ3” interrupt processing 4 times → (KG) “φ3” interrupt processing 2 times → (KH) “φ3, φ0” interrupt processing The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt processing is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it). In this way, in this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the configuration is such that the number of times the interrupt process is executed for one combination of excited phases is gradually reduced.

Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) "φ0, φ1" Interrupt processing once → (TC) Interrupt processing once on “φ1” → (TD) Interrupt processing once on “φ1, φ2” → (TE) Interrupt processing once on “φ2” → (TF) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing is performed once on "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" →..., repeating (TA) to (TG) one interrupt processing at a time. The motor is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). In this way, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for one excitation phase combination is all one time.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state changes to "reel deceleration standby state". ” will be updated. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotational speed of the reel is constant (the combination of excitation phases is switched for each interrupt processing), and the "reel deceleration standby state" ” indicates the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reels are slipping in proportion to the number of slipping frames). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and deceleration of the reel is started. When the reel drive state is updated from "reel deceleration standby state" to "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor will continue to be excited for a predetermined period of time to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform four-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined period of time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, in the reel gaming machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state changes to the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed while the reel acceleration process is being executed. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (or whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined by the process in step 6124 (when the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (determination is made after a predetermined period of time has passed since the update). If it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred, the reel acceleration process is executed again, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the system so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, even if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the , if the reel rotational failure is resolved and the reel rotational speed can reach a constant speed through the remaining reel acceleration processing until the execution of the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state changes to the reel constant speed state. If the reel sensor detects the index before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the index was updated, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and by executing the reel re-acceleration process, the player A situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) can be made less likely to occur. Further, by configuring the system so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reels. Furthermore, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs while the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is executing reel acceleration processing, the following actions will occur. becomes.

<Effect 1> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel acceleration processing ends execution → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance processing Execution -> Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel constant speed maintenance process -> Detection of reel rotation failure -> Execution of reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In addition, reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is obstructed by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), or the reel is not accelerated due to loss of synchronization, etc. This refers to the case where the process is not executed normally. In this way, by configuring the reel reacceleration process to be executed even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly played.

<Effect 2> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continued and executed → Reel acceleration End of processing → Update reel drive state to reel constant speed state → Execute reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect reel rotation failure → Execute reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. will be possible. In addition, as described above, even if a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process will continue to be executed and the same interrupt as when the rotation failure has not occurred will be issued. When the reel acceleration process has been executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process. can.

<Effect 3> The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → the power-off process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the power-off is restored → the reel acceleration process is continued. (Execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (Execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → Execute reel acceleration processing End → update reel drive state to reel constant speed state → execute reel constant speed maintenance process → detect reel rotation failure → execute reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In this way, even if the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state will be updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined period of time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index within the time limit, the game can be smoothly played. In addition, if the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will be continued after the power is restored, and the reel will be reeled within a predetermined time after the reel drive status is updated to the reel constant speed status. The reel re-acceleration process is configured not to be executed when the sensor detects the index, and this configuration prevents a situation where the player is unable to proceed with the game (inability to operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. can be made less likely to occur. Note that the power-off processing may be referred to as power-off processing.

<<Operation after operating the final stop button>> The reel-type gaming machine according to the present example is configured to operate the final reel (the reel that has rotated to the end, and the third stop button) after operating the final stop button (third stop button). When the reels (also referred to as reels) stop and the symbol combination that becomes a winning combination is stopped and displayed, the payout of game medals can be executed. You can.

<Effect 1> The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel stop operation → Operate the 1st stop button to display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel ( (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power outage occurs → Third reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Power outage is detected → Executes power outage processing → Power is restored → symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations are stopped and displayed on the reels → processing related to payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where a player wins a minor prize, such as the aforementioned common bell, which can be won regardless of the timing of the stop button operation, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Even if a power outage occurs due to a power outage at the gaming parlor immediately after the power outage occurs, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding pieces is the maximum), the relevant power outage will occur before the power outage is detected. It can be configured so that the movement (rotation) to the scheduled stop position is completed. In addition, if the symbol combinations that make up the winning combination (for example, the common bell) are stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Effect 2> The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel stop operation → Operate the 1st stop button to display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel ( (Accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the reels in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game where the winning combination of bells has been won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of bells on the reels is not stopped and displayed from the player's perspective, but when the player presses the stop button. (If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is successfully executed by the corresponding internal processing of the gaming machine) -> Execute the processing related to the payout of game medals Even if configured to work as described above good. With this configuration, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the reels as seen from the player, , when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals can be paid out, and the system is configured so that no disadvantage is likely to occur to the player. can do. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel rotation failure occurs at the second reel. This is applicable to all cases where the reel corresponding to the three stops cannot be stopped at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the effects related to reel rotation failure, as exemplified below). In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 2, the effect in a game in which a winning combination is won is exemplified. In other words, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects will occur (if other effects do not cause rotation failure or power outage, the system is configured so that the same effect will occur) good). The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop is performed as the stop operation of the first reel Operate the button → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Third stop button ) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In the judgment process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the process related to the payout of game medals is executed. Furthermore, as a winning combination in the above-mentioned or later-described operation, the symbol combination is determined to be normal at the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game. It may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that allows you to win regardless of the timing, or a winning combination that may or may not win depending on the timing of pressing the stop button in the winning game (for example, Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry) may also be used. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is In a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination does not stop displaying. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to defective reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the expected stop position due to poor reel rotation (the same applies to other actions as well). applicable).

<Effect 3> The reels start rotating as a game in which the winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel stop operation 1st stop button is operated → 1st reel is stopped display → 2nd reel is stopped and the 2nd stop button is operated → 2nd reel is shown stopped → Power is cut off and power is stably supplied to the gaming machine stops → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → detects power outage → executes power outage processing → 3 The reels cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reels is not stopped and displayed from the player's perspective, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where the Bell winning combination is won, the reels are determined to be the winning combination from the player's perspective.) Although the symbol combination corresponding to the Bell winning combination did not stop and display, the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the Bell winning combination was successfully executed by the processing within the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. )→Execute processing related to payout of game medals It may be configured to operate as described above. Furthermore, the timing at which a power outage is detected, the timing at which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage, the timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing at which the power is restored are as follows. , the timing is not limited to the above timing, but the timing of detecting a power outage during the period from when the second reel stops displaying until the processing related to payout of game medals is executed, or when a power outage occurs and the power to the gaming machine is It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply stops, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. This is applicable to all cases in which the vehicle cannot stop at the scheduled stop position (the same applies to the actions including power cut-off as exemplified below). With this configuration, a power outage occurred immediately (or immediately after) after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reels could not be stopped and displayed from the player's perspective. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is pressed at the timing when a winning combination is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation has been accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been successfully executed, the game medals will be paid out after the power is restored. (This includes not only the payout from the outlet, but also the increase in the display (number of credits) on the credit number display device), and the structure is such that it is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done. Note that the timing at which the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power outage may be referred to as the timing at which the power outage occurs. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, if the reel rotation failure or power outage does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In the case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is Even if a power outage occurs in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination It may be configured to perform a performance. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the case is not limited to this. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (applicable to other actions as well). ). Note that in this example, "the supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" and "the stable supply of power to the gaming machine has stopped" does not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but rather that the power supply to the gaming machine has stopped. This may also be the case when the power supplied to the game machine becomes less than the power supplied during operation of the game machine due to a power outage or the like, or when the supply of power to the game machine is cut off.

<Effect 4> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (if it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally) For example, in a game that resulted in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss did not stop and display on the reels from the player's perspective, but the loss was fixed due to processing within the gaming machine that corresponded to the player's operation of the stop button. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to is normally executed) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels correspond to the winning combination. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 4 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 5> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the first stop button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops. → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → 3rd reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective. → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reel is stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a game where there is a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective.) (However, if the game machine internally processes in response to the player's operation of the stop button and successfully executes the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss) → Power is restored → Game medals are paid out. It may also be configured so that it operates as described above, in which the above is not executed. By configuring this way, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the winning combinations from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is successfully executed, game medals will be issued even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that no payout is performed, and thus the game machine can be made fair, and it can be made a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above effect 5 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game where the bell is not won (a game where the replay winning combination is won, a game where the watermelon is won, etc.), the reel rotation failure may occur. It should be noted that this can also be applied when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to the rotation failure, but in the determination process of step 1269, Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the configuration is such that a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Effect 6> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is not normal). This is a case where it is determined that the game has been completed.For example, in a game where the player has not won the bonus role and the game is a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. (If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the user) → The bonus does not start and the bonus freezes at the start of the bonus It may also be configured so that it operates as described above in which the above is not performed. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the bonus role from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is executed normally, the bonus will be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not start, thereby making it a fair gaming machine, and also making it possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other effects when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur). The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or during the bonus, the following effects occur. The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and a freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 7> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the first stop button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops. → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective. → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is displayed on the reels, but in the determination process of step 1269, The symbol combination is determined to be normal (this is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game where the bonus combination has not been won and the game is a loss). , the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped due to processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. If the control is normally executed) -> power return -> bonus does not start, and freeze at the start of bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the bonus winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed, the game will not be played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that the bonus of medals is not started, and it is possible to make the game machine fair and not to cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 6 is not limited to losing only; for example, in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus), and the bonus role is not won (the re-playing role is won). It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which a watermelon is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above-mentioned effect 6, the effect in a game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following actions will occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs). The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the reel from the player's perspective, and in step 1269 In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→The bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power supply has not been cut off during the game in which the bonus combination has been won or during the bonus, the following effects will occur. The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the determination process of step 1269 For example, the symbol combination is determined to be normal, the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In addition, in the above example, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. , execution or non-execution of the freeze may be made different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Effect 8> The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player. Unable to move (rotate) → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is not displayed in a stopped state on the reels, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → Bonus It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the bonus is started and the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role will be displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is not being stopped and displayed. The system can also be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is a significant problem for players whose bonus is prevented from starting due to poor reel rotation when the bonus should have started. It is possible to configure the system so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 9> The reels start rotating as a game executed during the bonus or as a game in which a bonus winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power off occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Turns off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) on the reel stops from the player's perspective Although not shown, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → power is restored → bonus starts, and the freeze at the start of bonus is executed. Good too. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is moved at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not being stopped and displayed. However, the bonus can be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which can be a significant problem for players where a power outage prevents the bonus from starting in a situation where the bonus should have started. It is possible to configure the system so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Effect 10> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The reel from the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a losing game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but due to the internal processing of the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. (If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is successfully executed) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. It may be configured to act on the With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reel does not appear as a replayable winning combination. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the internal processing of the gaming machine results in a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed. An automatic bet will not be made, and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 10 is not limited to losing only, but is applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Please add what you can do. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following effects occur (this can also be applied to other effects when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur). The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal, and the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. Furthermore, automatic bet means that the specified number (for example, 3) of game medals that were bet on in the game where the replay combination was won will be pressed by the bet button (max bet button) when the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Bets are automatically placed without any operation or insertion of game medals from the medal slot. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur. The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up anew (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) )
The following effects can be exemplified.

<Effect 11> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the first stop button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops. → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective. → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed combination is stopped and displayed on the reels, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been successfully completed. For example, in a losing game, from the player's perspective, there is a symbol combination that corresponds to the replay combination on the reels) is stopped and displayed, but if the processing inside the gaming machine that corresponds to the player's operation of the stop button successfully executes the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss) → power return → replaying the winning combination It may be configured so that the automatic bet corresponding to the stop display is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again as described above. With this configuration, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the re-game winning combination is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be a loss due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be moved at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the winning combination is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination will be stopped and displayed. Also, no automatic bet will be made and the replay lamp D290 will not be lit again. In addition, in effect 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination to which the RT state will change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state is displayed in a stopped state from the player's perspective, the gaming machine When the internal processing results in a loss and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for stopping and displaying is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the role to which the RT state other than the re-gaming role will change is stopped and displayed) ). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the above-mentioned effect 11 is not limited to losing only, but can be applied, for example, in a game where the replay combination has not been won, when a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Let me add what you can do. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following actions will occur (this can also be applied to other actions if no rotation failure or power outage occurs). The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, and the symbol combination is changed in the determination process of step 1269. The combination is determined to be normal, and the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 does not light up again. On the other hand, if a power outage does not occur in a game in which a replay combination has been won, the following effects will occur. The reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is stopped → operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → display the second reel stopped → operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 The symbol combination is determined to be normal → automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up anew (if you won the replay combination in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up) An example of this is the following:

<Effect 12> The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First reel stop operation → Operate the 1st stop button to display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel ( (Accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role is not stopped and displayed on the reels, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process in step 1269. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming role is made, and The game lamp D290 may be configured to function as described above, in which the game lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game where the winning combination result is a replay, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel will be replayed from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left reel , middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is successfully executed, the replayed role is supported. An automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 12, if a re-gaming combination has been won that would cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 13> The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First reel stop operation 1st stop button is operated → 1st reel is displayed as stopped → 2nd reel is stopped and the 2nd stop button is operated → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → Power is cut off and power is not supplied to the gaming machine Stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → Third reel The reels cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the automatic bet corresponding to the judgment that the power is restored→the replay combination stop display is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game where the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replay is displayed on the reels from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left If the stop button operation corresponding to the reel, middle reel, right reel is accepted, and the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is executed normally, the replayed role is An automatic bet is made even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 13, if a re-gaming combination is won that will cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 14> The reels start rotating as a game in which the RT state transition winning role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → stop Button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel stops from the player's perspective Unable to move (rotate) to the planned position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed in a stopped state, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → RT state transitions It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will display symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel , right reel), and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if it is not displayed in a stopped state, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. Note that the RT transition combination is a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state, thereby transitioning to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. The difference may be whether or not this happens. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition role. However, in RT state B, there may be cases where the prescribed winning combination A is not won.

<Effect 15> The reels start rotating as a game in which a winning role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → stop Button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed stopped from the player's perspective However, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored). It may be configured to function as follows. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the RT transition combination from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel) is If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is The RT state will shift even if the combination is not displayed in a stopped state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 16> The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition winning combination (sometimes referred to as the RT transition winning combination) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel stops Display → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel is visible to the player cannot be moved (rotated) to the scheduled stop position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed in a stopped state, but in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → RT state is It may also be configured to function as described above without migration. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition combination has not been won, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will not correspond to the RT transition combination. Even if the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 17> The reels start rotating in a game in which the RT state transition winning combination (sometimes referred to as RT transition winning combination) is not won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed. → Stop button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel stops Display → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Change the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state Update → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed from the player's perspective However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the RT state may not be changed. With this configuration, in a game where the RT transition winning combination has not been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels are changed to the RT transition winning combination from the player's perspective. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player in the AT state, the player can operate the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination that causes the RT state to shift (falls) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be stopped, the RT state will not shift, causing unintended inconvenience to the player. To provide a game machine that does not generate profits, allows the game to proceed along the transition of the game state inherent in the game machine, and allows the manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Effect 18> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the first stop button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel moves to the expected stop position (rotation) as seen from the player. ) Not possible → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker, and the reel rotation does not stop when the game is a loss. Start → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the reels (when the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line on the first and second reels will not be displayed) The combination may be configured to work as described above, in which the combination is stopped and displayed) → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, the effects when no reel rotation failure occurs are as follows: The reels start rotating as a losing game → Update the reel drive state to constant speed → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel stops from the player's perspective Move (rotate) to the scheduled position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped position on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, it was a loss. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. 1st reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → the 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the 1st reel and the 2nd reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. By configuring this way, in a game where the winning combination result is a loss, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol will be changed to the first stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at the second stop, the tenpai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be at the tenpai position if the bonus symbol is to stop at the scheduled stop position in this example. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly sense that the reel rotation failure has occurred based on the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if the bonus symbol did not stop at the stop, in other words, the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker.

<Effect 19> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect a power outage → Power Timing processing is executed → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is on the active line on the first and second reels. Stop display → Power return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker Also, the reels start rotating as a lost game → Update the reel drive state to constant speed → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Stop button is not accepted Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, press the second stop button Operate the stop button → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Validity on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the line (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop on the active line on the first and second reels) It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the display is displayed) → power is restored → tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows: As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is not accepted. Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective Move (rotate) to the position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped position on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, the game ended in a loss. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first Display that the reels are stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first and second reels as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred. By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if it did not stop as a stop, in other words, the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 20> The reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a loss → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective Unable to move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The reels start rotating as the game is running internally or has won a bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button becomes valid → the first reel stops As an operation, operate the first stop button → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player. (Rotation) Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels when viewed from the player (If the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the first The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the reels and the second reel)→The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as a function when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the reels start rotating when the bonus is in progress or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing Execute → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation for the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation for the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels as seen from the player → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound comes from the speaker In addition, the reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled. → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. It is configured to work as described above. You may. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols forming the bonus symbol Even if the combination stops as the first stop and second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol reaches tenpai, if the combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol would not be tenpai. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound will not be output, and even if the reel's apparent stopping position is not normal due to a reel rotation failure, the player will be able to quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. can do. Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is not configured. Even if the symbol combination does not stop as the first stop and second stop, in other words, the bonus symbol does not reach tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is expected to become tenpai. In this case, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the reel's apparent stopping position is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what is going on. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Effect 21> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect a power outage → Power Timing processing is executed → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is on the active line on the first and second reels. Stop display → Power return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker Also, the reels start rotating as a lost game → Update the reel drive state to constant speed → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Stop button is not accepted Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, press the second stop button Operate the stop button → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Validity on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the line (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop on the active line on the first and second reels) It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the display is displayed) → power is restored → tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows: As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is not accepted. Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective Move (rotate) to the position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped position on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, the game ended in a loss. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first Display that the reels are stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first and second reels as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred. By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly sense through the output from the speaker that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage. Can be done. Similarly, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power is cut off immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai when it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. can. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 22> The reels start rotating when the game is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detects a power outage → Executes power outage processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Bonus appears on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus confirmation sound is not output from the speaker. Also, the reels start rotating as the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power to the gaming machine is cut off. Supply stops → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the user (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination on the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line) -> Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when a power outage does not occur is that the reels start rotating when the bonus is in progress or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is performed. Execute → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation for the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation for the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel Move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker In addition, the reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player ( (Rotation) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the player → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. It's okay. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is created. Even if the symbol combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be at tenpai. will not output the bonus confirmation tenpai sound, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker indicating that there is an abnormality in the reels due to the power outage. can be detected quickly. Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbols are not displayed. Even if the constituent symbol combinations do not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, the bonus symbols do not reach tenpai, if they stop at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbols will become tenpai. If it was scheduled, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will alert the player to an abnormality in the reels due to a power outage. It is possible to quickly detect that something is occurring. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 23> The reels start rotating as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player. Unable to move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up. Also, the number of credits is 1 or more and the reel is displayed as a game in which the replay combination has not been won. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel is stopped by operating the first stop button → First reel stops Display → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed → Max bet lamp It may be configured so that it operates as described above, in which the light is turned on. In addition, the effect when the reel rotation failure does not occur is that the number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which the predetermined replay combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Execute constant speed state maintenance processing → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Press the second stop button to stop the second reel Operation → Display that the second reel is stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel is stopped by the player Look and move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up. Also, the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay combination has not been won. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. 1st reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game where you win a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay does not stop and display. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game where you have not won a replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the replay will be canceled. As in the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the game are not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 24> The reels start rotating as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power off occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Turns off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up In addition, the reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay combination has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power outage occurs. Power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up as described above It may be configured to act on the In addition, the effect when a power outage does not occur is that the number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which the predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Execute speed state maintenance processing → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third reel is stopped by operating the third stop button (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel is displayed as Move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up, and the game has a credit number of 1 or more and has not won a replay combination. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first The reels are displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Accept the operation of the third stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game that has not been won for replay, if the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 25> This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, and a winning combination has been won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by awarding gaming medals corresponding to the winning combination to the player. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. 1st reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) →Update the reel drive state to reel deceleration state →Reel rotation failure occurs →The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective →The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination does not stop and display →Bonus It may be configured so that it operates as described above, in which the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, the effect in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur is that the game is during the bonus execution, and the winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player. As a result, the reels start rotating as a game in which the bonus end conditions are satisfied → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel 1st stop button is operated as a stop operation → 1st reel is displayed as stopped → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → 3rd stop button is displayed as a 3rd reel stop operation (receives operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered prize winning combination It may be configured to work as described above, in which the stop display → the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after winning the winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, when the bonus ends, the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can immediately know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can sense the progress of the game and does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26> This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, and a winning combination has been won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by awarding gaming medals corresponding to the winning combination to the player. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. The 1st reel is displayed as stopped → the 2nd reel is stopped by operating the 2nd stop button → the 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → the power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → as the 3rd reel is stopped Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage processing → The third reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination cannot be moved (rotated) to the position → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is not stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is that the game is in the execution of a bonus, and a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player. The reels start rotating as a game in which the bonus end conditions are satisfied → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation on the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Press the third stop button as a stop operation on the third reel Operation (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered prize combination stops. It may be configured to work as described above, in which the display → bonus ends and freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, immediately after winning the winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, allowing the player to know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be detected quickly and that does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

Furthermore, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration process in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example described above, the execution period of the reel acceleration process when a reel rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration process = A reel acceleration process Execution period of reel acceleration processing until malfunction of reel rotation occurs when malfunction of reel rotation occurs during execution of B reel acceleration processing = reel acceleration processing period when malfunction of reel rotation occurs during execution of B reel acceleration processing When the execution period of the reel acceleration process after a rotation failure occurs = C, the configuration is such that A=B+C. In addition, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed when a drum rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration process = The drum rotation when a drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the D reel acceleration process. Number of executions of interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing until a defect occurs = Number of times interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing is executed after defective rotation of the reel rotation occurs when a rotation defect occurs during execution of E-reel acceleration processing =F, the configuration is such that D=E+F.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and calculates error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower 1 byte of the checksum or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order; in this example, the main control board M determines it and sends it to the sub control board S) This is a table showing the correspondence. For example, when the pressing order is "middle→right→left", the instruction number is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 The image shown is shown in the figure. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the press order display device D270. Here, when executing the push order navigation, if the display on the push order display device D270 is displayed as a 2-digit number, the display on the push order display device D270 may be the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display or not. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 displays "=" in the left digit, such as "=1". By configuring this, when the display on the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the display on the push order display device D270 is "=" on the left side and a number on the right side. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is a push order navigation display, so as to prevent the player from misperceiving it. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "40 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section," the advantageous section display YH lights up, and a display of "25 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. is displayed. Furthermore, among the conditional devices in which the winnings that are stopped and displayed differ depending on the reel stop order, there are conditional devices that involve payout of medals, such as a bell, and replayable combinations that have the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the conditional devices with different winnings to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the conditional device related to the replayed winning combination may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to issue instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. Note that an advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right portion of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes valid. When the player stops playing, he or she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals left. If there are medals remaining, the payment button D60 is operated. In other words, by turning on the light before the settlement button D60 becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the user from accidentally quitting the game even though it is an "advantageous period" from the next game. be able to.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the game section on the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section display In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, it will notify that the current gaming section is the "normal section", and on the other hand, the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section." In addition, "normal sections" and "advantageous sections" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode of the section indicator (for example, "normal sections" are marked "green" and "advantageous sections" are marked "red"). Alternatively, the light may be turned on during the "normal section" and "flashing" during the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to change depending on "BB internal game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "state during AT", etc. in the "advantageous section". You can. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the fact that the current gaming section is a "standby section" can be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section." However, the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" will be made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, so that the player can recognize whether the current gaming section is the "advantageous section" or not. It is preferable to make it easier.

Furthermore, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 that indicates the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. (In a state where the player has a relatively low profit, the player may not be notified of the disadvantage that the remaining number of games in the "advantageous section" is being subtracted.) However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to turn on the zone indicator to inform the player that the game is in the "advantageous zone." At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator be installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control processing executed on the sub control board S side will be explained with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing> First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM and calculating a checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated at power-on matches the checksum value calculated and stored at power-off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the 1-command process to be described later. It is determined whether the state has been recovered from the state in which the power supply was interrupted, that is, whether the state has been completely recovered.

If Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that a complete recovery has occurred, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and is executed when the power is turned off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the judgment process in step 2008 that the two checksum values do not match, in step 2014 CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. Note that after executing the process in step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process shifts to sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing> Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined period of time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power-off processing> Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process that is started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation results, the address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is ended. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of instantaneous power interruptions. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<One-Command Processing> Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the production-related determination process when operating the start lever, which will be described later. do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the timing to accept the first reel stop. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the process when the first reel stop is accepted, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second reel stop acceptance process, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop reception timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls a subroutine for the third reel stop performance related determination process, which will be described later. and execute it. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third drum stop acceptance process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process (not shown) at the time of stop display symbol, and in step 7100 to move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately moves to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a process for determining performance related to start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "high probability state." If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the number of high-security failure games remaining at the moment (high-probability state How many more games are guaranteed? Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for deciding whether or not to execute a battle effect, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle effect will be executed in the game. If Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is configured based on the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the game, the AT-related state of the next game, and the current number of high secured obstacle games. Based on this, a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to decide whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that even in the case of No in step 3006, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (see FIG. ), a stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of an AT performance determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the "resurrection possibility state". In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a restoration propriety effect determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the preview presentation and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). It should be noted that the stay stage is an effect mainly consisting of a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured such that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendencies of various effects such as background effects, preview effects, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect, which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. If Yes in step 3054, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether to execute a battle performance execution lottery (battle performance (win)) that has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. (lottery) will be held. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle performance execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (win), and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). Here, the battle performance is a continuous performance that is performed over multiple games, and by winning the battle performance, that is, by executing the battle performance (victory), you can win the BB role and enter the AT lottery. It is structured so that it is certain that you have won. The configuration regarding battle performance is not limited to this, but if the player wins the BB role even if he or she does not win the AT lottery (after the BB ends, the player will move to a "low probability state" or "high probability state") ) may be configured to perform a battle performance (victory).

Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), and these are the winning hands that can overlap with the BB winning combination. It has become. In other words, the player has a sense of expectation that the rare winning combination has been won at the same time as the BB winning combination because the rare winning combination is stopped and displayed.If Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is , a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a fake battle performance (a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a battle performance (defeat)) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is a lower probability than the predetermined probability in step 3056) ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the fake battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. If Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be a battle effect (defeat), and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). Further, in the case of No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process in step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be performed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-guaranteed obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, it is possible to execute a continuous performance such as a battle performance over multiple games. If the number is less than 4, for example, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects will not be executed, so even if the continuous effect is in the middle of execution, it will go to the "low probability state". The battle production can be performed only if it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from going out due to the transition (setting the "normal section") and ensure that the advantageous section indicator YH remains lit until the end of the battle production. By implementing this, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine without damaging the player's expectation of winning the BB.

In addition, when winning a rare role, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects (defeat) can be executed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game can always be played with a sense of anticipation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. It should be noted that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is only a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a table used when the game is in a "low probability state" and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types: a table, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" shows the relationship between the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, the stay stage of the current skeleton game, and the corresponding set number. stipulated. If it is in a "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages: a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stages are a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in the game is 980 ~ 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to shift to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0~ 19 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 20 to 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 250 to 499 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. If the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers for shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 750 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 is assigned as the number for shifting from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to transition to the "high probability state", a number from 750 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the current skeleton game, and the number of placements is specified. has been done. The current stay stage and transition stage are comprised of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, a number from 0 to 879 is assigned. 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage.

0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers. 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the conference room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game moves from the conference room stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, a number from 100 to 949 is assigned. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the game shifts from the conference room stage to the cave stage, 950 to 999 are assigned as numbers.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the game changes from the cave stage to the desert stage, 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers. If the current stage of stay is the cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as numbers. 100 to 199 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the conference room stage. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, a number from 200 to 999 is assigned.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, and the stay stage of the current corpse game. , the relationship with the position number is specified. The current stay stage and transition stage are comprised of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the desert stage to the town stage in the game is 980 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a town stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 19. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number between 20 and 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set is 0 to 0 when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. 29 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 30 ~ 59 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", the number to be set is 60 to 999 if the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number 0 to 29 is set when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the cave stage to the town stage in that game is 30 to 59. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the cave stage to the conference room stage in that game is 60 to 99. is assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number from 100 to 999 is assigned as the number if the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to shift to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained.

If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a low probability state, a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as a number when transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

In this way, when the state is in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is in the "high probability state", four stages can be selected: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section," while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section," and two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section." Stay stage 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the "advantageous section", the player will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when transitioning from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state", that is, when changing from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the "advantageous section" stage. By selecting the performance stage in advance, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation and continue playing the game.

Note that some of the production stages selected in the "normal section" overlap with the production stages selected in the "advantageous section" (some production stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but are not selected in the "advantageous section") may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is changed. If the number of games decreases (less than 3 games), avoid moving to a highly anticipated stay stage that is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring this structure, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed due to being stuck in a "normal section" with a small number of games even though they have moved to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are arranged in the order of ``desert stage, city stage, cave stage, and conference room stage'' from the ``advantageous section'' with low expectations (hard to be selected in the ``advantageous section'').

The structure of the stay stage is not limited to the one in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is the expectation level of the "advantageous section", the expectation level of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation level of winning the BB. It may be configured to indicate the level of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in a game where the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and when the AT lottery is not executed after winning a single rare role). ), the level of expectation of winning the AT lottery is configured to differ depending on the stage of stay to which the player has transitioned, and the level of expectation is arranged in the order of ``desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage'' in descending order of level of expectation. Alternatively, the level of expectation for winning the BB role may be different depending on the stage of stay, and the level of expectation for winning the BB role may be arranged in descending order of ``Desert Stage, City Stage, Cave Stage, and Conference Room Stage.'' Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is certain that the BB internal lottery has been won or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the final AT game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT continuation of the production related to the game (success) (AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words Then, there is a production that notifies that the state related to AT in the next game will be "AT in progress") or a production that encourages AT continuation (failure) (it is certain that AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). Instead, it is determined that the next game's AT-related state will be an "AT in progress state" or a "resurrection possibility state", and the process moves to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation provocation performance (success) versus the AT continuation provocation performance (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4:1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous incitement effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the AT continuous promotion effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the AT continuous promotion effect (failure) may be executed. In the next game, a revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player is configured to feel as if he or she has won the revival lottery (in reality, he has won the continuation lottery, and the main control board M The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation incitement effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, although it is rare to win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection availability state" {2320/65536 lottery wins in one game (in case of setting 1)}, it is possible to win the continuation performance. By configuring the system so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, it is possible to increase the rate of execution of the resurrection effect (success) when the resurrection effect is executed, and the player can expect more from the resurrection effect. It can enhance the feeling.

If the result in step 3106 is No, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be an AT continuation promotion effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If the result in step 3104 is No, in step 3112 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect of the game to be the AT final effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not this is the next game in which the AT continuation promotion effect (failure) was executed. If Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (same as the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "revival possibility effect state"). In this process, it is determined that the effect is the effect that the "AT state" has continued, and the process moves to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process moves to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added to the game. If Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an additional effect related to the game (an effect notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET", etc.) ) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the performance related to the game to be a performance during AT (a performance executed during AT such as "AT state"), and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2300 (processing in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine illustrating a process for determining whether or not a revival is possible, which is called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the performance related to the game (successfully) (the same performance mode as the performance executed in step 3116 described above), This is a performance that notifies you that you have won the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", and in the next game, it will transition to the "AT state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the performance related to the game to a revival performance (failed) (in the ``resurrection possible/impossible performance state'', the CPUSC did not win the revival lottery. This is an effect that notifies the user that the game will move to a "low probability state" in the next game), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

In addition, as mentioned above, the "resurrection possibility state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuation lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game of the "AT middle state") which is the "advantageous section". Even if there is no return, the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended in the next game, which is the "resurrection possibility state", so the player should check whether the advantageous section indicator YH is lit or not. If only this is done, it will be difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection performance will be successful, and attention will be paid to the result of the resurrection performance. Furthermore, as described above, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility effect state". In other words, the manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed will be different between the next game in which the player wins the continuous lottery in which a revival effect (success) is executed and the game in which he wins in the revival lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, the system is configured such that in the next game after the AT state ends, a transition is made to a "resurrection possibility presentation state" for one game, and a resurrection lottery is executed in the "resurrection possibility presentation state". By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, the effect of the revival effect is Although it has been prevented from being possible to determine whether or not AT ends without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The AT-related state is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, the revival flag is turned on in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the resurrection flag is turned on in the game before the revival lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained. (2) It is configured so that the revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured so that whether or not the "AT state" ends is determined solely by whether or not the player wins the continuation lottery, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the final AT game (one game before the final AT game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of productions include "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation (successful) → Final game at AT: Production to indicate that the next set of AT will start", "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation" Production (continues to next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (success)", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (success)", "AT It may be configured such that the previous game before the final game: AT continuation promotion effect (failure) → AT final game: revival effect (failure), etc. are executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. It may also be configured to perform an AT continuation inciting performance or a revival performance. (3) In a game where a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and from that predetermined timing, the resurrection effect (success) is announced. In other words, it may be configured to notify the player that AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is (1) the bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the player has won the continuous lottery. (2) This is the start lever operation timing for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect mode is the same as the resurrection effect (defeat). (3) The timing of pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop of the game where the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the first stop is turned on), (4) The resurrection effect (success) ) is executed, the timing when the stop button is pressed and the stop button is released after the first stop (timing when the first stop turns from on to off) is executed, and (5) the revival effect (success) is executed. Timing of pressing the stop button that causes the second stop related to the game (timing when the second stop is turned on), (6) Pressing the stop button that causes the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed The timing when the second stop button is released (timing when the second stop turns from on to off), and the timing when the stop button is pressed which is the third stop related to the game in which the (7) resurrection effect (success) is executed (the third stop) (8) Timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game where the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop turns from on to off) ), etc., (9) bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and (10) the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed. It may also be the start lever operation timing for the next game, etc. In addition, if the configuration is such that the timing is determined by lottery among the various timings as in (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button that is the first stop is pressed, , even if the player has not won either the continuation lottery or the revival lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH continues to light up, so the player presses the stop button which is the third stop, and then presses the stop button. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the key or the start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Start lever operation process> Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation process that is called and executed in step 2300 of FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is an AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is in the AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-progress process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is not the AT-in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state or not. Determine whether If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". ”. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional specialization processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal It is determined whether or not it is a game. If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the subroutine of advantageous BB internal medium processing when the start lever is operated. is called and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308 CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1" or not. Determine. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board It is determined whether the state is related to an AT that does not occur and is a "low probability state," "normal BB internal medium game," "normal BB state," etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is without push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the configuration is not such that the sub control board S side can execute effects related to push order navigation when the sub control board S side receives a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command. If you win the AT add-on lottery, the main control board M side sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that you have won the AT-add lottery and the number of AT add-on games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. Furthermore, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and presentation mode of the effects related to the push order navigation.

If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the image to be avoided as a press order navigation display to the first number display mode group. is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In this way, in the present embodiment, when the number of games passes and the AT counter value becomes 0 from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress state", the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay, the number of AT games will not be added, so white 7 or black 7 It is configured so that the order of presses that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, if the AT counter value becomes 0 after the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", the situation is still in the "advantageous section". '', the push order navigation can be generated in a game where the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not be generated in a game where the push order replay is won.

In the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, in the case of No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the (step 2110).

<Processing during AT when the start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing the process during the AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the conditional device related to the game, in step 2354, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2356, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the presentation group number in the same manner as in a state related to an AT where press order navigation is not executed, and uses the presentation group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to grasp that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order. For example, the push order navigation display when executing the push order bell and the push order navigation display when replaying the push order are placed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color for the numbers is the same). ) can be applied when configured to be displayed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the press order navigation display when the press order navigation is executed, and a press order bell is displayed. It may be configured to display different performance images when executing the push order navigation and when executing the push order navigation related to the push order replay.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning Prize - A1, the numbers that indicate the push order corresponding to "Left → Middle → Right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, then in step 2362, CPUSC of the sub control board S indicates that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push-order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode to be described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2376 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2378 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the result in step 2376 is No, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2380 is Yes, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid the occurrence as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a number display mode group.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2380, or if the process in step 2382 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110).

If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode A (display mode described above). (display mode more conspicuous than B) on the effect display device S40. Here, if there are four or more games, display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2386 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the result in step 2386 is No, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2390 is Yes, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2390, or if the process in step 2392 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). In this way, when the number of AT remaining games is small, in other words, when the AT remaining number of games is displayed in display mode B, which is more conspicuous than display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect that displays "Aim for 7!" with an arrow image is not executed, and the white seven and black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line.The middle reel, which is the push order, is moved to the first stop reel. It was configured to execute push-order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. In this case, the display of the arrow image or the message "Aim for 7!" can be configured so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display of the number of AT remaining games in display mode B. Similarly, continuous effects (for example, , battle effects), the configuration is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" are not displayed while the battle effects are being executed, so as not to impede the visibility of the battle effects. be able to. Moreover, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" is displayed to be terminated, the battle effect during the battle effect is displayed. If a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the “AT status” is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward press black 7 replay or reverse press white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added in the game where the AT addition lottery was won. First, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Start lever operation specialization precursor processing> Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization precursor processing that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, then in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays 6 choices of push order bells as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders is displayed in the second number display mode group on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A2, the number indicating the push order corresponding to "Left → Right → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, is surrounded by stars. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a second number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push-in-order instruction command has been received or not. to judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2416, in other words, if a forward push instruction command has not been received, then in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment in the second numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing in steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428, the background image during AT is displayed as an effect. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the process moves to the next process (processing in step 2110).

<Start Lever Operation Specialization Process> Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization process that is called and executed in step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed in the first number display mode group on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a press order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push-order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the push-order instruction command. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2466, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40. That is, since the pressing order is sequential, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and from left to right. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. Determine whether If Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and from right to left. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing toward .

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a sequential press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid sequential presses "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a press order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes in steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or in the case of No in 2474, in step 2480, the background image during AT is displayed as an effect. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever> Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the internal processing of the BB which is advantageous when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2710, CPUSC of the sub-control board S The condition device determines whether the bell is a pressing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a press order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the push order is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a press order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays. Determine whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, reverse press instruction command, forward press avoidance command, and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to avoid occurrence as a push order navigation display with the first number. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode groups.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the CPUSC displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has passed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is , it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the first stop of the drum> Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the process at the time of receiving the stop of the first drum stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Determine whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the first stop, in step 2506, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set in the press order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, CPUSC of the sub control board S is It is determined whether the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a general term for forward press black 7 set replay and reverse press white 7 set replay. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation in a dark color (it continues to be displayed in a dark color during the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, then in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and the push order fails. The effect is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when second drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a process when second drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a stop button based on the correct push order as a second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is The display related to the 2-stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the press order navigation displays. It is erased, a press order failure effect is executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, the push order navigation is not displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately , to proceed to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<3rd drum stop performance related determination process> Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the 3rd drum stop performance related determination process that is called and executed in step 3200 of FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. If Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB winning combination is won, in step 3204 CPUSC of the sub control board It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. If Yes in step 3204, in other words, if it is a BB role won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start performance determination table during non-AT, and Based on the related state and the BB role, a BB start performance (a performance executed when the BB role is won) is determined and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

Next, if No in step 3204, in other words, the winning BB role during AT (“AT in progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “resurrection possibility state”) If so, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start performance determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start performance based on the AT-related state and BB role of the game, and executes the next BB start performance. The process proceeds to step 2600.

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the performance based on the performance executed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start performance determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start performance, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states regarding AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game." There are three types of BB start performances: normal performance, high expectation performance, and premiere performance. Furthermore, depending on the type of BB start performance for a BB won during non-AT, the level of expectation for transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is different, and the level of expectation for the transition to the "AT state" is different from the one with the lowest level of expectation to the "normal performance". → Highly anticipated production → Premier production.”

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is normal BB internal medium game, the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256. . When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. If the BB role is BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premier performance is 0/256. It is.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the normal performance is 179/256 It is. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a high expectation performance is 77. /256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be the premium performance is 0/256 It is.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect will be the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 77/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "Normal BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premium performance. The probability is 0/256.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the normal performance. The probability is 67/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 157/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premium performance. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium performance will not be affected. is never selected, and the normal performance is set to be more likely to be selected than the high expectation performance.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win BB with setting differences (Type 1 BB-B), the premium presentation will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the regular presentation will be selected over the high expectation presentation. It is destined to rise.

If it is an "advantageous section" and you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium performance will be selected. With this configuration, it is certain that by selecting the premier performance and winning the BB with no setting difference, the transition to the "AT state" will occur after the BB with no setting difference ends. can be shown to the player. In addition, if you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C), which is an "advantageous section", there is a higher possibility that the high expectation performance will be selected than the normal performance. (The probability that the normal performance will be selected is low). By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start performance related to the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" and the BB without the setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" The distribution is the same as the distribution of BB start effects related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). However, this is not limited to this, and the distribution of BB start effects related to BBs with different settings (Type 1 BB-B) won in the "regular BB internal medium game" and the "regular BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effects for winning BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring this way, the BB start effect for BBs with a setting difference may be distributed differently. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether it is a performance or a BB start performance related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state regarding AT: "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects: effects that can be added on and effects that cannot be added on. The add-on possible performance is a performance that suggests that an AT add-on lottery may be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on impossible performance is a performance that suggests that the AT add-on lottery may not be executed during the execution of the BB. As for the BB that is won during AT, there is no factor as to whether or not it will win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT additional lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, game medals can be obtained even in BB with a setting difference in which the AT additional lottery is not executed, and after the BB ends, the AT is advantageous to the player, so that the BB that is executed is the AT additional lottery. It is configured to clearly notify whether or not it will be executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be an additional performance is 0/ 256, and no additional effects are executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a non-additional performance is 256/ 256, and the no-addition effect is always executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is an add-on effect. The probability of this is 256/256, and the add-on effect will definitely be executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a non-addition effect. The probability that this will happen is 0/256, and the effect that cannot be added on will not be executed.

<Processing at the time of accepting the third drum stop> Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the process at the time of receiving the third drum stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a press order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2608, CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the press order success effect. "GET!" is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct press order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board !” is not displayed.

In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or in step 2608 or 2610 If the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT additional games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games, and to display the number of AT games.

Next, if Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the AT additional game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs AT addition on the effect display device S40. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, the number of AT add-on games can be notified as follows: (1) All of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, (2) A portion of the number of add-on games will be announced in the relevant game, and the remaining number of games will be announced after the relevant game. (3) The number of add-on games is not announced for the game, and the number of add-on games is not announced for the game after the game (for example, when winning 7 replays, when winning a common bell (when winning a combination that does not normally have an add-on), or when playing multiple games. After executing a game (continuous performance), a game where the number of remaining games on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", or operation of the bet button D220 for the next game after the game where the number of remaining games becomes "0", operation of the start lever D50. ) can be used to notify.

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "add-on special state", the number of AT add-on games will not be displayed even if you stop it according to the push order navigation (the AT add-on lottery is not performed for the common bell). do not have).

By configuring as described above, according to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section", a period that is advantageous for the player can be determined. can be configured to be able to appropriately notify. In addition, by providing a "resurrection availability state", when a continuation performance is won and the revival performance (success) is subsequently executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the revival performance (success) is executed is Since it is in the "AT state", the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, but on the other hand, even if the continuation performance is not won and the revival performance (failure) is executed afterwards, the revival performance (failure) will be executed. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be a "resurrection possibility state" and the state related to the AT to be an "advantageous section," the advantageous section indicator YH will light up. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in a game in which the resurrection effect is executed. In a gaming machine that is configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to ensure a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", it is configured so that the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, it is possible to shift to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to this is not limited to the one in this example. For example, it is configured so that a rare hand such as cherry can win the AT lottery (it can also be won even if it is not a BB role), and if the player wins the AT lottery, The state related to AT may be configured to shift to an "AT precursor state" and then shift to an "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state."

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB, etc., and allows the player to select from a plurality of items to check various settings and information regarding the gaming machine. There is a screen that allows you to An example of how to select and decide an item is to operate the cross key SB2 (having four buttons: up button, down button, left button, and right button) to move the cursor to the desired item, By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (the cursor is on it) is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Furthermore, the menu screen may have multiple display modes; for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there are differences between the two, all are referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen> Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: The player may be configured to be able to adjust the volume output from the game machine. For example, after displaying a screen that corresponds to volume adjustment, operating the right button of cross key SB2 will output the volume. It may be configured such that the volume increases and when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the output volume decreases. (2) Light intensity adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). For example, after displaying the screen that corresponds to light intensity adjustment, operating the upper button of four-way controller SB2 will make the light intensity (brightness) stronger (brighter), and operating the lower button of four-way controller SB2 will decrease the light intensity (brightness). (dark). (3) Character customization: You can now select and change the characters that appear during the game (main character, push order navigation voice, opponent characters, characters that support game progress that are always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) After displaying a screen corresponding to character customization, the user moves the cursor to the desired character using the cross key SB2 and selects the character by operating the sub-input button SB. (4) Reel array table: The reel array may be configured to be displayable on a screen corresponding to the reel array table. (5) Payout table: The payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting re-games and winning combinations when stopped and displayed) may be configured to be displayable on the screen corresponding to the payout table. In the case where the payout table is divided into multiple screens and displayed, the screen of the payout table may be switched by using the left and right buttons of the cross key SB2, for example.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed in step 7104. Here, the state in which the menu screen can be displayed means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (the menu screen may be configured to be displayed over time) is performed, such as operating the sub-input button SB. As a specific example, the configuration may be as follows. (1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winnings, setting or sending a command related to the game end to the sub-control board S side as the game end process The game does not proceed (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the replay stop display, new start The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without any operation of the lever, no new start of rotation of the reels, etc. (Until then, operate the sub input button SB. (The menu screen does not appear even if you do so.) Note that the bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a bet is made by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170 (an automatic bet based on a stop display for replaying). may also be included in the bet operation). (2-1) It may be configured such that the menu screen is not enabled to be displayed during the execution of the game (when game medals are bet, during a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and while the reels are rotating). (2-2) It may be configured such that the menu screen can be displayed while the game is being played (game medals are being bet, etc.). (3) While a predetermined performance is being executed (during a performance that notifies you of whether or not you have won a bonus, while performing a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games, a performance that notifies you of whether you have won the AT game number addition lottery) , etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed. (4) It may be configured such that the menu screen is not enabled to be displayed while the replay combination is being stopped and displayed. In addition, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, when the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is turned off. The display may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7104, in step 7106 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. Note that in this example, the operation for displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but even if the operation for displaying the menu screen is changed, it may be configured to have multiple operations for displaying the menu screen. . In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to a standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is counting time). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to transition from the menu screen to the standby screen, which will be described later). The timer is started by setting a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 seconds, which is longer than a predetermined time A, which will be described later). Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is counting time), and performs the next process (the process of step 7200). to move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen termination condition is satisfied. The menu screen termination condition is a condition for terminating the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example that is satisfied. It may be configured as follows. (1) It may be configured such that the condition is satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of rotation of the reels. (2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, the time limit may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, predetermined time B, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen. (3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and determining a predetermined item on the menu screen and performing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item, for example, when the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By adjusting the volume and operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment will be displayed. After adjusting the desired volume by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium volume, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as the normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7114, in step 7116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, if the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the main character is walking in the forest, when the menu screen finishes displaying, the menu screen will be displayed again. A screen in which the main character is walking through the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 7200).

Further, if No in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the menu standby timer to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set for a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 In other words, the time taken until the standby screen is displayed is reset from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to use only one timer for displaying the standby screen. may be configured for use. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the system waits for the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer. It may also be configured to be set on a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on → off, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then, when the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the sub input button SB is operated. The configuration may be such that when the menu screen is started to be displayed, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) is set in the standby timer.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period of time (the game is not in progress), and is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG, and is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG. A moving image related to the story is played repeatedly, a message saying "saving power" is displayed, and a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, while the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires an operation by the player, the configuration is such that no operation by the player is required as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

If Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer counting flag (a flag that turns on when the standby timer is counting, which will be described later) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button changes from on to off is the timing at which the game ends. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208 CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. A predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above) is set to the predetermined time B, and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub input button SB may be operated on the menu screen. Accordingly, the condition may be that the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed has been displayed (the display of the menu screen has ended).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that even if the answer in step 7206 is No, the process moves to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu standby timer counting flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). Note that even in the case of No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

In addition, if No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer counting flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing termination condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition that causes the standby timer to stop timing and clear the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and that there is a new bet operation or a new start lever operation. In addition, the condition for ending the standby timer is that the reels start rotating anew. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212; on the other hand, if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

Further, if No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen termination condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation. Started, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. Note that it may be configured to be able to transition from the standby screen to the menu screen (displaying the menu screen); for example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the standby screen is being displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). For example, if a screen in which the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, and the standby screen is displayed because the main character has not progressed in game A for a predetermined period of time, the main character can restart the main character by executing a bet operation. A screen showing him walking through the forest will be displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to the standby screen according to this embodiment. First, in case (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated in the menu screen displayable state. Thereafter, while the menu screen is being displayed, five minutes (predetermined time B, which is 300 seconds) elapse without any operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220, and a standby screen is displayed. Next, in case (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and when the player stops the third stop button, all the reels stop, and the player stops the reels by pressing the third stop button. Three minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) have elapsed since the timing of the release, and since there was no operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220 during that time, a standby screen is displayed. In this example, in this example, a predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and a predetermined time A has elapsed since the game ended (after the third stop button was turned from on to off). It is configured such that a standby screen can be displayed at , and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>> Here, we will explain the configuration of the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, including the configuration of this embodiment. The details are explained below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the embodiments described above, and there is no problem in appropriately combining one or more of them.

< Timing to start measuring the standby timer > The timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing is as follows: (1) As the final stop operation, press the third stop button (rotate to the end) (2) Start timing from the execution timing of display judgment, (3) Start timing from the timing of payout completion based on winnings. (4) Start timing from the timing when a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side as a game end process. (5) The sub control board S side receives a command related to the game end. It may be configured to start time measurement from the timing. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in a standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing to start measuring the menu standby timer> As the timing to set the initial value to the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed and start timing, operate the sub input button SB to display the menu screen. The configuration may be such that the time measurement starts from the specified timing. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in a menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. Note that the predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub-input buttons> The configuration may be such that the initial value can be reset to the menu-standby timer in a situation where the menu-standby timer is counting time. For example, when the menu screen is displayed, the sub-input button SB or It may be configured such that an initial value of a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) is set in the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB2. As an example, when the menu screen starts to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds and time measurement starts, and after 100 seconds, under the situation where the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, the cross key SB2 is pressed. The configuration may be such that the menu standby timer is reset to 300 seconds upon operation. In addition, the menu screen is configured to start displaying by operating the sub-input button SB, and while the menu screen is being displayed (by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 after starting to display the menu screen) The screen to which the menu has transitioned may also be used as a menu screen). By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross-key SB on the transition destination screen (which may also be a menu screen), by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross-key SB2 after the screen starts displaying. The menu wait timer may be configured to be able to reset its initial value.

<Configuration regarding the stop button> When the standby timer is counting, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then place the bet. The standby timer may be configured not to reset its initial value even if the stop buttons (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) are operated in a situation where no operation is being performed. As an example, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, the standby timer is set to 180 seconds, and the timer starts counting. After that, in a situation where no bet operation is performed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if you press the stop button, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured so that it remains as it is.

<Configuration related to bet operation> When the standby timer is counting, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, then place the bet. When the operation is executed (when a bet is made by operating the bet button D220, or when a bet is made by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170), the standby timer stops counting and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), and then execute the bet operation. , the standby screen may not be displayed over time if no other operations are performed. In addition, when configured in this way, the standby screen will not be displayed due to the passage of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output will change when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed since the bet operation. It may also be configured to make 0 or small. With this configuration, when the remaining game medals are less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, by operating the bet button), When the player finishes playing the game, or when the player ends the game with less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bets are placed), the bet button is pressed when the staff at the game parlor cleans the game machine. Even if a bet is placed due to the operation of the button, the sound will no longer be output at an unintended volume. In addition, even if the third stop button is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and no bet operation is performed after that, the timing of turning off the third stop button (which may also be the timing when the reels stop) The volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Display conditions for the standby screen> The standby screen is configured to be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer, menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen changes from "1 to 0". You may. With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or when some abnormality occurs in timer measurement, the timer value reaches ``0'' without passing through ``1'', such as ``20 → 0''. Even if the standby screen is cleared (zero cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended standby screen from being displayed (after that, the timer value will be reset and change from 1 to 0. (It may be configured to display a standby screen if the A flag for displaying a standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Configuration regarding payment button> When the standby timer is counting, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then the credits will be In a situation where one or more exist, if you operate the settlement button to perform credit settlement, after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of the operation of the settlement button, or at the timing when credit settlement is completed. The standby screen may be displayed at the timing when the last game medal is returned to the discharge port D240.

<Configuration related to the setting key switch> As the final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), turn it off, and then press the setting key while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the switch was turned off → on. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), then open the front door while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the setting key switch was turned from off to on and the front door was then closed.

Also, as a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), turn it off, and then turn the setting key switch off → on while the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned on and then turned off. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), then open the front door while the power is on. When the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON, the standby screen is displayed after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door was closed after turning the setting key switch from ON to OFF. It may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting an operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration related to the occurrence of a predetermined error> As a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), then turn it off, and then, a predetermined error related to the main control board M side (For example, an error that occurs when game medals stay in the medal selector DS) occurs, and the standby screen is displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the predetermined error was canceled. It may be configured as follows.

<Configuration related to the front door> As a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turn it off, the standby timer starts counting, and then the front door The standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the switch is opened and the open state is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), the standby timer starts counting, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, the standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the front door is closed.

<Configuration 1 regarding during AT> In a situation where non-AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation. ) If a predetermined period of time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of turning on and turning off, the standby screen can be displayed, while the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). Under certain circumstances, if a predetermined period of time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, The configuration may be such that the standby screen is not displayed. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed even when a predetermined period of time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation, even during execution of a continuous performance, execution of a bonus, or during ART. In addition, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation in a game where the push order navigation is executed. If a predetermined period of time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the stop button (stop button) was turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, but during AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In a certain situation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation in a game where the push order navigation was not executed for a predetermined period of time. The configuration may be such that a standby screen can be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 2 related to during AT> When a menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), (1) a predetermined period of time B (for example, , 300 seconds), the standby screen can be displayed. (2) After a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) is returned to. It may be configured so that.

<Configuration 3 regarding during AT> In a situation where the AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation. ) is configured so that a standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the game is turned on and then turned off. ), the menu screen is displayed, and if a predetermined time B (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen, the standby screen can be displayed. If the menu screen is displayed in a situation where the status is "AT in progress" and a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (menu screen display) The screen may be configured to return to the previously displayed screen. That is, when comparing the time values, it may be configured such that "predetermined time A=predetermined time B<predetermined time C". Note that the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same time value, and it is sufficient that the predetermined time C is the longest time.

<Other Configuration 1> The menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. Note that the menu screen displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2) ) A screen that is displayed by performing a predetermined operation (selecting and deciding a predetermined item) from the menu screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button, (3) A screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button The screen may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. In addition, even if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed. If a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while a menu screen displayed by operating an input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed. Also, if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 and place a bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen will be displayed, and if you operate the bet button and bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen will be displayed before the menu screen is displayed. It may be configured such that a screen (normal screen displayed during gaming if a standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) is displayed. Also, if you insert game medals from the medal slot D170 and place a bet while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen will be displayed, and the standby screen will be displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is 3, which is the specified number. In the above situation, when you operate a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows you to bet 3 coins with one operation) to bet, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen (the standby screen appears immediately after the power is turned on) , the normal screen that is displayed during the game) will be displayed, and if the standby screen is being displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of 3, press the bet button. (For example, a max bet button that allows you to bet three coins with one operation) may be operated to make a bet, and a menu screen may be displayed.

<Other configuration 2> The standby screen has a plurality of display modes, and a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined condition that by inputting a password on the menu screen, the player is playing while inheriting the previous game history) ), a video introducing the story will be displayed as a standby screen, but if the specified conditions are met, a video introducing the character will be displayed as a standby screen. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the story introduction and character introduction may be displayed as a standby screen in both cases where the predetermined conditions are not satisfied and cases where the predetermined conditions are satisfied, but whether the predetermined conditions are satisfied or not. The frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different depending on whether the story introduction or the character introduction is displayed.

<Other Modification Examples> In addition, in this example, there is a 1st BB combination in which the 1st BB is executed by winning a prize, and a 2nd BB combination in which the 2nd BB, which is lower in profit for the player than the 1st BB by winning the prize, is executed. The winning combination may be configured so that the first BB winning combination and the second BB winning combination can be won repeatedly (a combination of "first BB+second BB" is provided). With such a configuration, if "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the high-profit 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be displayed in a stopped state (the fact that the second BB has been won is carried forward even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, if you win "1st BB + 2nd BB", by executing the high-profit 1st BB first, you can win "1st BB + 2nd BB" in a situation where, for example, the closing time of the game hall is approaching. In this case, the low-profit 2nd BB is executed first, and the gaming hall closes during the execution of the 2nd BB, and the game has to end without being able to execute the high-profit 1st BB. can be prevented.

After the operation of the 1st BB is completed, the winning of the 2nd BB may be announced immediately, or it may be announced after a delay (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification), and a configuration is adopted in which this is hidden. In this case, the winning probability of the replay may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Furthermore, when the item is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winning chance time!!") . In such a configuration, if there is no provision for the case where the 2nd BB does not win after the end of the 1st BB, it becomes certain that the effect occurs = the 2nd BB wins, so only the 1st BB wins. However, even after the operation of the first BB is completed, it is preferable to perform a performance that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (the performance mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). , for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winnings chance time!!"). Furthermore, even if you win only the 1st BB and after the operation of the 1st BB is finished, you win the 1st BB again, the system is configured so that the execution of the performance indicating the possibility of winning the 2nd BB is not stopped. You can. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the winning of the 2nd BB is falsely announced, and then the winning of the 1st BB is announced (for example, display of "BB success chance time!!"→display of "Unfortunate"→display of "1st BB"). 1BB winning!!” etc.) Furthermore, if you win twice during AT and the second BB is hidden after the first BB has finished operating, the effect display device S40 returns to AT after AT preparation etc. However, the internal reduction of the number of remaining games may be continued and suspended. Incidentally, if the first BB and the second BB are won twice, the number of coins paid out from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example, (1) If the first BB and the small winning combination A are won twice, the first BB is prioritized and stopped. (2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are won twice, the small winning combination B is prioritized and stopped. That is, there may be provided a small role for which the stop control is given priority over the BB role, and a small role for which the stop control is given priority for the BB role. (3) In the case where the 1st BB and the minor role A are won twice, when the minor role A wins, or some symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role A (for example, at the first stop, the first 2) is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (a notification that allows the small winning combination A to win) is made. In other words, the one that would normally notify the 1st BB winning combination, which would normally have priority over the small winning combination A, is replaced by the result of the first stopping or the second stopping (the stopping mode after the execution of the first stopping or the second stopping). Accordingly, when the first BB combination cannot be won (the small combination A can be won) regardless of where the third stop is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is made. Further, when a small winning combination A is won as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is made. With this configuration, it is possible to execute notifications that are most advantageous to the player according to various game situations that change during the game, and also to make it possible to perform notifications that are most advantageous to the player according to the various game situations that change during the game, and also to match the actual notifications with the contents notified by the effect display device S40 etc. It is possible to prevent winning combinations from being inconsistent. (4) If the first BB and the small winning combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is made during all the reel rotations.

Further, it may be configured to have a display device (7 segments, etc.) that is controlled by the main control board M and displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbols (or symbol combinations) that are stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp lights up in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack capable of outputting (but not inputting) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and the structure may have the following characteristics. (1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from multiple levels using the sub-input button on the gaming machine. (2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, if an error occurs, the game machine will output an error notification sound at a predetermined volume (for example, an error notification sound will be output from the speaker installed in the game machine). ). (3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or during the BB execution, the game machine may be configured to output the effect sound even when playing the game using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphones are removed, the volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be immediately cleared (set to the initial value). For example, if no operation is performed for 10 minutes, all volumes may be cleared (to initial values). However, if the earphones are still inserted, the volume for when using the earphone jack does not need to be cleared (to the initial value). It is preferable to install the earphone jack in a location that does not interfere with the game (for example, in a location where the earphone cord will not get tangled around the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever when earphones are inserted into the earphone jack). ).

In addition, in this example, (1) the re-gaming combination will be re-played after the BB ends if more than a certain number of coins are acquired during BB execution, and after the BB ends if less than a certain number of coins are acquired during the BB execution. The winning probability may be changed. (2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which the system transitions when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the probability of winning a re-gaming combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after "RT1" ends, or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state). (3) When a predetermined winning combination is won, the RT state is transferred. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made in a one-to-one correspondence with winnings, but is transitioned at a constant probability regardless of the condition device or winning (for example, an RT transition lottery is executed with a constant probability every game). (4) Equipped with a 0-card RT transition, making it possible to win a 0-card winning combination multiple times, and to make it possible to win a 0-card winning combination twice. In other words, a 0-card winning combination is created, which is a winning combination in which one or more cards do not win, no matter what order the button is pressed or at what position the stop operation is performed. It may be possible to make it possible to win a 0-card hand and a 7-card hand, or a 0-card hand A and a 0-card hand B. In addition, when a 0-card combination is won repeatedly, it may be configured such that either a 0-card combination that is transferred to RT or a 0-card combination that is not transferred to RT is won depending on the order of pressing. It is also possible to win the 0-card role and the BB role multiple times, and give priority to the 0-card role to win the prize.

In addition, as in this example, there are 6 choices for the pressing order of the bell ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", There are 6 choices: "Right → Left → Middle" and "Right → Middle → Left"), and the push order for replay is 3 choices (first stop is left, middle, right). In this case, as the push order display on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the push order navigation display with 6 options is displayed. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, the press order display for the 6 options is "=1" for "left → middle → right", "=2" for "left → right → middle", and "=2" for "center → left → "=3" for "right", "=4" for "center → right → left", "=5" for "right → left → center", "=5" for "right → center → left" In this case, it is displayed as "=6", and as the press order display for the three options, "=7" is displayed when the first stop is on the left, and "=8" is displayed when the first stop is on the middle. , if the first stop is on the right, "=9" may be displayed.

Note that this example may be configured as follows. (1) The number of AT played games, which is the number of games played consecutively in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", is configured to be displayable on the production display device, If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the state shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal gaming state," and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress," the previous AT While the number of played games is taken over and added up, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1,500 games), and after the "AT state" changes to the "normal gaming state", the game is played again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress" state, the previous number of AT games is not inherited, and the number of AT games is newly counted from 0 games. (2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reels start rotating, a display prompting you to stop the reels will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, "Stop the reels"). (2-1) If you do not press the stop button for a predetermined period of time after the reels start rotating in a game where push order navigation is displayed (2-1) The display areas of the push order navigation display and the display prompting to stop the reels on the display device S40 do not overlap (2-2) The display prompting to stop the reels is not displayed. (3) If you turn the power on in a game where push order navigation is occurring, the reels will rotate at a constant speed before the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (the display on the push order display device D270 and/or the display on the effect display device S40) is re-displayed at the timing of . (4) The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game where a common bell is won is different between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT, or a state related to an AT where push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won is different between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT that is a state related to an AT where push order navigation can occur. (5) If the RT state has the highest winning probability for replaying (in this example, "RT1"), the percentage of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push order navigation does not occur. expensive. For example, the total winning probability of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT. It may be configured as described above.

Here, the features of the above-mentioned game section will be explained in detail below.

<<Normal section>> (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) Conditions where the player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed Commands (signals) related to the device are not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) It is possible to perform a lottery to move to the "advantageous section" except during the internal winning of BB and during the execution of BB.

<<Waiting section>> (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) Conditions where the player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed Commands (signals) related to the device are not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed. (5) After BB wins a prize in the "standby state", the next game will be in the "advantageous section".

<<Advantageous section>> (1) A push order navigation may be displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) A push order navigation may be displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) Conditions where a player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed A command (signal) related to the device can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, a transition from a "high probability state" to an "AT middle state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for increasing the number of AT games, etc. may be performed. (5) During the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit. (6) When the counter value of the number of games remaining in an advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, if the BB or push order navigation is not executed at least once in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is basically However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500), the BB and push order navigation will be played once in the "advantageous section". The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" can end even if the "advantageous section" is not executed. (7) Measurement of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is performed in all games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added every game even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points related to the selection lottery for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below. (1) The presence or absence of setting in the "advantageous section" is determined based on the result of the prize lottery, and the presence or absence of setting in the "advantageous section" is not determined based on the progress of the number of games. (2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities depending on the set value is established, the lottery setting for the “advantageous section” will not be executed if the conditional device is satisfied. (3) In the case where a certain conditional device is satisfied and a lottery setting for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different. (4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the setting value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, setting 1 shifts to "high probability state", setting 6 shifts to "AT state", etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value). (5) Setting in the "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, you will basically be in the "advantageous section" from the next game (setting in the "advantageous section" with the BB combination established in the "normal section" If you win the lottery, you can be placed in the "standby section" for the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below. (1) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (a common condition for all set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is satisfied) . (2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities depending on the set value is established, a lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the conditional device is established. A lottery for adding on the number of AT games is also not performed. (3) If BB has been internally won, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" will not be executed. A lottery for adding on the number of AT games is also not performed. (4) During a BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the setting value, the performance of the "advantageous section" will be changed during the BB execution. is not executed. A lottery for adding on the number of AT games is also not performed. (5) During a BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, the performance of the "advantageous section" is changed during the BB execution. can be executed. A lottery for increasing the number of AT games may also be performed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. Furthermore, the following configurations may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>> (1) The system is configured to have a "fake high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is in an "advantageous section" but is more difficult to win the AT lottery than a "high probability state". (2) The continuous performance consists of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined number of G or more. (3) If there is a regular role that does not win the AT lottery 100% and a special role that wins the AT lottery 100%, and a continuous performance is executed using the regular role as an opportunity, and the player does not win the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous performance, a performance is performed to notify that the AT lottery has been won even during the continuous performance (the continuous performance is replaced). (4) The more games remaining with high guaranteed obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with high expectation level (expectation level of bonus winning, expectation level of AT lottery winning), and the remaining games with high guaranteed obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with low expectations. (5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the number of high-guaranteed obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game complete performance with a high expectation level (expectation level of bonus winning, expectation level of AT lottery winning). (6) If the remaining number of high guaranteed obstacle games is less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), consecutive performances that result in a loss will not be executed, but consecutive performances that will result in a win (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) will not be executed. can be executed. In other words, if the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), a one-game completion effect can be performed in both cases of loss and win, but continuous effects can be performed in both cases of loss and win. It can only be performed if (7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (4 games), the continuous performance will not be executed. (8) The tendency to select performances is different depending on whether the ceiling G number in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value or greater than a predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous performances, degree of expectation of jackpot for a predetermined performance, etc.). (9) If a new transition is made to an "advantageous section" in the middle of a losing performance (for example, a losing performance) in the "normal section", (9-1) Rewrite the continuous performance (into the "advantageous section" transition game) Stage change production (such as ``When you turn around, there's a character and a line suggesting a stage change''). The rate at which a performance is rewritten in the middle of a continuous performance (defeat) is higher than the rate at which a performance is rewritten in the middle of a continuous performance (victory). (9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous performance to the end. When the transition to the "advantageous section" occurs during the execution of a continuous performance, the rate at which the sub control board S side in the game notifies the transition, and when the continuous performance is not executed, the rate at which the transition is notified in the game The rate at which the control board S side notifies that the transition has been made is different.

<<Point 2>> (1) The stay stage (referred to as stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section" is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, it can be selected by operating a sub-input button. (2) Stay stage A group 1: The lottery result of whether it will be an "advantageous section" will be announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game, stay stage A group 2: Whether it will be an "advantageous section" or not. The lottery results will be announced later at the end of the game (or when betting on the next game (when the start lever is operated when the replay stop message is displayed)). (3) If the state changes from an "advantageous section" and a stay stage other than the stay stage A group to a "normal section," select a stay stage from the stay stage A group. When the state changes from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the performance group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained. (4) The AT expectation level when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group is different from the AT expectation level when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage is other than A group. For example, from the lowest AT expectation level, "Advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A group -> Advantageous section indicator is lit and stay stage A group -> Advantageous section indicator is lit and stay stage other than A group" (5) Percentage of stay stage transitions (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) triggered by a game performance that changes from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" (including 1G complete production and continuous production) There is a difference between this and the rate at which a shift in stay stage occurs due to a game performance that changes from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section."

<<Point 3>> (1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games of the number of highly guaranteed obstacle games), the higher the level of expectation (the level of expectation of winning the AT lottery, the level of expectation of winning the bonus) The probability of choosing a stay stage with a high expectation level (the expectation level of winning the AT lottery) is high, and the lower the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (number of remaining games of the number of high guaranteed obstacle games), the higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation level (the expectation level of winning the AT lottery). , the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation level of winning the bonus) is high. (2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" is less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts. (3) If a performance with high expectations is selected in a situation where you are not staying at a stay stage with high expectations (expectations of winning the AT lottery, expectations of winning a bonus), the expectations (Expectation level of winning the AT lottery, expectation level of winning the bonus) (Expectation level of winning the bonus, expectation level of winning the bonus) are high.

<<Point 4>> (1) If you win a BB in the "resurrection possibility state", (1-1) you may or may not perform an AT additional lottery during the BB. Good too. (1-2) After the BB ends, the state may be shifted to the "AT state" or may not be shifted. (1-3) AT additional lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-4) When transitioning to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "resurrection possibility state". (2) The AT additional lottery may or may not be executed in the "resurrection availability state". If you execute the AT additional lottery, if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay in (3) "Resurrection possibility state", an avoidance navigation will occur and the revival performance (success) The number of additional games will be announced at a timing after executing. (4) If you win a winning combination that can move to the "advantageous section" in the "resurrection possibility state", the advantageous section indicator will turn off at the start of the next game, while the "resurrection possibility state" If you win a combination that can move to an "advantageous section" in the next game when you do not win the revival lottery in , the advantageous section indicator can light up at the start timing of the next game. (5) In the case of a specification in which the AT additional lottery is not performed even though it is an advantageous section in the "resurrection possibility state", (5-1) A hand that can perform the AT additional lottery in the "resurrection possibility state" ( For example, even if you win Watermelon A), the number of AT games will not be added, but if you win a hand (for example, Watermelon A) that can be added with 1G ("AT state") that executes a revival effect (success), AT The number of games can be increased. (6) If you plan to execute "Battle Effect 3G + Revival Effect (Failure) 1G" as the final stage of AT, the bonus will be given if you win the bonus in the revival effect execution game and the resurrection effect (success) is executed. The number of AT games will not be added during the bonus, but the number of AT games will be added during the bonus if you win the bonus in the battle performance execution game (any 3G) and the resurrection performance (success) is executed. It is possible. Furthermore, the performance trends during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>> (1) If there are gaming state A and gaming state B as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section", (1-1) the winning expectation of the AT additional lottery is "gaming state A>advantageous". State B" (the number of AT games is relatively easier to add or the number of AT addition games is larger in gaming state A than in gaming state B). (1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state A is different from the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state A. (1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state B is the same as the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state B.

<<Point 6>> (1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display can be changed to when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to the third stop. (C) and before (C). (1-1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are arranged in the order of "A<B<C" from least noticeable to the player. (2) When the state changes from "AT in progress" and "RT1" to "low probability state" and "RT1" where AT has ended, if you win the push order combination, press on the push order display device. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (it is displayed as "???"). (3) In a game in which a falling avoidance suggestion display is displayed, if a prize of 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as after the second stop. . (4) If the start lever is operated when the start lever is recovered from a power outage and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device has not been completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed with the sound from the speaker (for example, "Left!"). (5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as an "additional special state", if a falling winning combination is won, a falling avoidance suggestion performance is displayed with priority. (6) Even if a falling winning combination wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained. (7) In the case where the falling combination is configured to be a push order combination (the order in which it is pressed determines whether or not to display it in a stopped manner), if a push order combination that is not a fall combination (such as a push order bell, etc.) is won and the push order If the navigation is executed and it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may go dark, but if the winning combination is won, it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In this case, the display on the effect display device does not darken (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect does not darken).

<<Point 7>> (1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT preparation state" after completion of BB related to BB with setting difference (same as Modification Example 1 from this embodiment). (1-1) Win the AT additional lottery by winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3" (you may win 100% or you may win with a predetermined probability). (1-2) The RT state to which the BB transitions after the end of the BB is different depending on the type of BB combination, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role that performs the add-on lottery, the The lottery winning probability and the number of AT add-on games) are made different. (1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (high replay probability), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3, and the bonus is added by Promotion Replay A and Promotion Replay B. The winning rate or average number of additional games is different. (1-4) If bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2, and there are promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is differ. (1-5) Bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay are different between RT1 and RT2. (1-6) After the completion of BB with setting difference, it shifts to a dedicated RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then shifts to "additional specialization state" with promotion replay as a trigger.

<<Point 8>> (1) It has type 1 BB-B1 and type 1 BB-B2, and after the completion of type 1 BB-B1, it shifts to "RT3", and after the completion of type 1 BB-B2, When configured to migrate to "RT4". (1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" are different in the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role for executing the add-on lottery, the winning probability of the add-on lottery, the number of AT add-on games). (1-2) The BB start performance for type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start performance for type 1 BB-B2 have different performance tendencies (B
The selection rate of the B start effect is different). (2) When the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06 in the "AT preparation state" and "RT3", the state shifts to "RT4" and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", a re-gaming combination promoted to "RT3" is won. Further, when the game changes from "RT4" to "RT3", the treasure box opening additional effect will not be performed even if subsequent replays - E1 to E3 are won. (3) There are multiple types of BB roles, and even if a BB role is won, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually distinguish which BB role has won, and after the BB ends depending on the type of BB. The RT state of the game system is made different, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery when winning the promoted re-gaming combination is different depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during BB will be different depending on the type of BB (such as acquiring a gold treasure chest, acquiring a silver treasure chest, acquiring a bronze treasure chest, etc.). (The number distribution is different).

<<Point 9>> (1) The ratio of the same performance mode between the BB start performance related to BB with setting difference won during AT and the start performance related to BB without setting difference won during AT, and the ratio during non-AT. The proportion of the same performance mode is different between the BB start performance related to a BB with a setting difference that was won during non-AT and the start performance related to a BB without a setting difference that was won during non-AT.

<<Point 10>> (1) When winning a BB with a setting difference in the "advantageous section", the probability that a production that suggests the setting value will be selected is higher than when winning a BB with no setting difference in the "normal section" The probability that a production that suggests a set value will be selected is higher. (2) For BBs that are won during non-AT, different BB start performances are selected depending on the setting difference, but for BBs that are won during AT, the same BB start performance is selected regardless of the setting difference. (3) Proportion that the BB start performance is the same between BB with setting difference won during AT and BB without setting difference winning during AT, and BB with setting difference won during non-AT and non-AT The rate at which the BB start performance has the same performance mode is different between the won BB with no setting difference and the BB with no setting difference.

<<Point 11>> (1) When winning the "No setting difference combination (the winning probability does not differ depending on the setting value) + BB", the "advantageous section indicator lights up", which can be executed when the "No setting difference combination" is won. The probability of selecting ``Advantageous section indicator turned off + Effect A'', which can be executed when winning a ``Role with setting differences (a role whose winning probability differs depending on the setting value)'', is greater than the probability of selecting ``+ Effect B''. is higher {"Rare role + BB time" is a production that encourages the winning of BB (for example, a production that encourages the transition to a stay stage where you can stay in a high probability state) rather than a production that encourages transition to a high probability state (for example, a production that moves to a stay stage where you can stay in a high probability state) For example, battle effects) are easier to execute. (2) When a predetermined winning combination (for example, cherry) is won, the system is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is changed to 50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%. → 50G", and if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, and in other cases, the battle is won. Furthermore, the degree of expectation regarding the length of the number of high-probability games (20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. In addition, in the case of the above example, at the 20th G with a high degree of certainty, an effect is executed to incite whether or not to continue (it is an effect to incite whether it will be 20 games or 50 games, and if it is successful, it is certain that it will be 50 games). .

<<Point 12>> (1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section," and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the setting value. (1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed. (1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more easily executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section." (1-3) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings. (1-4) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings. (1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the event of a loss.

<<<Configuration applicable to this example>>> The configuration applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations detailed below is applicable to all the embodiments described above, and the first configuration described in detail below may be applied, or multiple configurations detailed below may be applied. Let me add some things you can do.

<<Structure of Memory Map>> First, with reference to FIG. 59, one of the memory maps in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is shown. The structure of this section will be explained in detail. The areas shown in the figure include, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": an area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": an area for external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM checksum data": Data used in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and is calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. (4) "Control command buffer": Sub An area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side. (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when recovering from a power failure, and is stored in the current stack pointer at the time of a power failure. (6) "Unused area": An area for storing areas that are not used for games, (7) "Evacuation data" Areas are used in the order of ``1 to saved data 8'': RAM, where data to be saved by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, etc. is most likely to be written according to the design. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer will be moved to a higher address than "7FF8H". A situation may arise in which the stack pointer points to the address of In this case, there is a possibility that the saved data will be stored beyond the area of "saved data 1 to saved data 8" that has been secured in advance as an area for data to be saved. In consideration of such a situation, the address that the stack pointer may point to in the event of the above-mentioned unexpected problem (address close to "7FF8H") is set to data that does not affect the progress of the game (has little impact). data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from "saved data 1 to saved data 8" that have been reserved as areas for data to be saved in advance, the game To provide a game machine that does not cause any disadvantage not only to players but also to game parlors. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that will not be used while the game is in progress after power-off recovery, and (4) "control command buffer" , even if commands cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, the progress of the game is unlikely to be affected, and (3) "RAM checksum data" cannot be used in situations where the game is in progress after the power is restored. Since (2) "external signal data" is data to be sent to the hall computer, it is data that has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data related to setting values that affect the outcome of the game, so if the setting value is changed to a lower value, for example, it will cause a significant disadvantage to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur to the gaming parlor. As mentioned above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for the normal progression of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the same figure, (1) "setting value data" is the highest data (data stored at the highest address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "setting value data" and (7) "saved data 1 to 8" contain (2) "external signal data" and (3) "RAM checksum data." ", (4) "control command buffer," (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer," and (6) "unused area." With this configuration, even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the amount of data saved from the stack pointer to RAM exceeds the design, it is possible to have RAM that is not used for gaming. Accordingly, it is possible to configure the gaming machine so that abnormal conditions are unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if you change the order of the addresses that store the five data. For example, you can store them in the order of "(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)" starting from the upper address. Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)→(5)→(3)→(2)→(4)" from the upper address. Furthermore, (6) the configuration may be such that no "unused area" is provided. Furthermore, even if the data stored in the RAM area in (2) to (5) above is changed, it will not become impossible to insert game medals. (No errors occur that would make it impossible to input the data).

Note that the area for storing "setting value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59, may be configured to store the following data. (A) Total score data: An area for storing data regarding the number of game values, which plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type reel-type game machine that does not use actual game medals. When storing score data in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.) (B) Minimum playing time: Minimum one game. Data for counting time (subtracting the counter value for each interrupt process) (minimum playing time for one game is 4.1 seconds) (C) Counter for number of coins earned when BB is activated: When BB ends A counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) has been satisfied (the counter value is subtracted according to the value that gives the player a gaming value) (D) Counter for the number of coins acquired when MB is activated : A counter for determining whether the conditions for the end of MB (number of paid out coins) have been fulfilled (counter value is subtracted in accordance with the value given to the player with gaming value).In addition, the above It may be configured so that a plurality of (A) to (D) and "setting value data" can be stored (stored at different addresses), or it may be configured so that only one of them can be stored. In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple pieces of data can be stored, each of the multiple pieces of data is stored at a higher address than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure it so that With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power outage) occurred. Although there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H" in some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors.

<<Operations related to replay stop display>> Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the functions in a game in which a replay has been won that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration illustrated below is an example of a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is being displayed.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, When the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for the replay is activated. Stop display. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, an automatic bet operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is displayed as stopped, a bet is made even without inserting game medals or operating the bet button), the 2 bet lamp is displayed. D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that is displayed as stopped, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 At approximately the same time, the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-make lamp D300 light up (the ready-to-make lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1> The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the replay is displayed as being stopped are configured to light up at approximately the same timing. When the input ready lamp D300 is lit after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert game medals, the player recognizes that the player cannot insert game medals by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is lit first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the input ready lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the input ready lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 at almost the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's decision regarding the insertion of game medals and the operation of the start lever D50, and to prevent the incorrect game medals from being inserted. It is possible to prevent the input and the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2> The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the replay is displayed as stopped until the end of the next game in which the replay is displayed as stopped. With this configuration, it is easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is also possible to quickly notify the player that the replay win has been won, so that the progress of the game can be easily recognized. It can be made smoother.

<Configuration 3> The replay lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the start lamp D180 is lit based on the display indicating that the replay has stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and then by lighting the start lamp D180, it becomes possible to operate the start lever D50 due to the replay win. By notifying the player of the situation, the player can easily grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4> The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the indication that the replay has been stopped is before the lighting of the input ready lamp D300. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay has been won, and then the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on to notify that the game medals can be inserted. This makes it easier to understand the game situation.

<Configuration 5> The replay lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit based on the display that the replay has been stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 6> The replay lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit based on the display indicating that the replay has stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 7> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which replaying has been stopped are lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. (They do not light up at substantially the same time as the lamp D213). With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay winning, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 8> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing after the replay is displayed as being stopped. If multiple lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming status, so by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 almost simultaneously, the player can You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Configuration 9> The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming has stopped is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 10> The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the display that the re-gaming is stopped is earlier than the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<Configuration 11> The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 for the next game in which the replay is displayed as being stopped are lit at substantially the same timing. With this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<<Other Effects 1>> Here, an effect different from the configuration shown in FIG. 60 in a winning replay game that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as Other Effect 1. do.

<Configuration 12> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are configured to be always lit from the timing of a bet operation related to the game in which replaying is displayed as stopped until the end of the next game in which replaying is displayed as stopped. Good too. With this configuration, it is easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is also possible to quickly notify the player that the replay win has been won, so that the player can easily notice the progress of the game. can be facilitated.

<Configuration 13> The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming is stopped and the timing of turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped may be configured to be substantially the same. We would like to notify the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) is kept lit, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming status, so we will turn off the 2 bet lamp D212. By doing so, the game status can be grasped smoothly, and the replay lamp D290 is the lighting timing of the 2 bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the replay is displayed as being stopped (this may also be the lighting timing of the input ready lamp D300). By turning on the light earlier than the above, it is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert game medals.

<Configuration 14> The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming is stopped and the timing of turning off the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped may be configured to be substantially the same. We would like to notify the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming status, so we will temporarily turn off the 2 bet lamp D212. By doing so, the game status can be grasped smoothly, and furthermore, the timing at which the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit for the next game in which the replaying lamp D290 is displayed as being stopped (this may also be the timing at which the input ready lamp D300 is lit) By turning on the light earlier than the above, it is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert game medals.

<Configuration 15> If you win a replay in a certain game and also win a replay in the next game of the certain game, the replay lamp D290 is turned on based on the fact that the replay of the certain game is displayed as stopped. It may be configured such that the replay lamp D290 continues to be lit after the lamp D290 is lit until the completion of successive games of the certain game. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 continuously, the player can be promptly notified of the winning of the replay, and the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Configuration 16> Triggered by the third stop operation (or the symbol combination related to replay is displayed as stopped), replay lamp D290, 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, start lamp D180, and input Control of various lamps such as the power lamp D300 may also be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a notification using a lamp according to the timing of the progress of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17> The replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 may be illuminated at substantially the same timing. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay.

<Configuration 18> Based on the display indicating that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, 2-bet lamp D212, and 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp are turned off. It may be configured so that the lamp D211 and the lamp D211 are turned on substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet when winning the replay is three.

<Configuration 19> Based on the display indicating that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, 2-bet lamp D212, and 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp are turned off. The lamp D211, the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input ready lamp D300 may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet in the event of a winning replay is 3, and it is also possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display for replay. can be notified.

<<Other Effects 2>> Here, we will further explain effects different from the configuration shown in FIG. 60 in a winning game for replay that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, using FIGS. 61 to 63. Other effects 2 will be detailed below.

<Operation diagram 2 regarding display of replay stop> Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the operation applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, When the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing (1) in the diagram, the symbol combination for replay is activated. At approximately the same time as the stop display, the replay lamp D290 lights up, and at approximately the same timing, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 go out. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp are turned on. The enable lamp D300 lights up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 3 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Function diagram 4 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and The input ready lamp D300 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Function diagram 5 regarding display of replay stoppage> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously.

<Operation diagram 6 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the appropriate timing, the symbol combinations related to the replay are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp lights up almost at the same time as the replay lamp D290. D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 7 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is activated. The start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up at approximately the same time. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Function diagram 8 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the input ready lamp D300. and lights up almost at the same time.

<Function diagram 9 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the appropriate timing, the symbol combinations related to the replay are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up at the timing (6) in the figure. Thereafter, at timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 10 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the appropriate timing, the symbol combinations related to the replay are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

Note that among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configurations as configurations 1 to 19 described above can produce effects similar to those of configurations 1 to 19 described above.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the stop display timing of symbol combinations related to re-gaming, the operation timing of the stop button, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the re-gaming lamp D290, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, and the lighting/extinguishing of the 2-bet lamp D212. It should be noted that there is no problem in combining any of the configurations (timings) regarding the timing, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 1-bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the ready-to-enter lamp D300.

In addition, although the above example illustrates a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the replay stop display is displayed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that game medals cannot be inserted while the replay stop display is displayed. configuration (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the input ready lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is displayed as being stopped.

In addition, the above-mentioned "almost simultaneously" is sufficient as long as the player can visually recognize that it is simultaneously, for example, processing (turning on/off timing) that is executed within a period of executing interrupt processing 10 times. There is no problem even if it is almost the same time.

<<Configuration Regarding Bet Button Lamp>> The configuration regarding the bet button lamp S50 in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M executes processing to enable the bet button D220 from disabled, and then the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to light up the bet button lamp S50 (main control The board M may be configured to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the bet button D220 has been activated), and then the sub-control board S transmits the bet button lamp S50 sent from the main control board M. It may be configured such that upon receiving a command to light up the bet button lamp S50, processing for lighting up the bet button lamp S50 is executed. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is managed to turn on and off on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is enabled depending on the gaming situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on by using It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the gaming situation.

<<Configuration Regarding Stop Button Lamp>> The configuration regarding the stop button lamp S60 in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The process of the main control board M executes the process of enabling the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) from disabled, and then the main control board M A command is sent to the S side to light up the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button for which the enabling process has been executed) {the main control board M sends the stop button lamp S60 to the sub control board S side D40 (any of the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43) may be configured to send a command to the effect that it has been enabled}, then the sub control board S sends a command to the main control board The configuration may be such that upon receiving a command sent from M to light up the stop button lamp S60, a process for lighting up the stop button lamp S60 is executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is managed to turn on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is enabled depending on the gaming situation on the main control board M side. , the stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player can visually confirm the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and press the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43). It is possible to configure the system so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side even if it is determined whether the system is valid or not.

<<Configuration regarding reel unit RU applicable to this example>> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel type gaming machine according to this example has a reel M50 (M51, M52, and M53). It is rotatably provided via unit RU. Note that FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the reel type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape and is formed with an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols on the three reels M51, M52, and M53 are visible through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30 with an opening part RU10 in between. By placing the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU, which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through Holes RU40> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of through holes RU40, for example, three through holes RU40, are formed in the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. It is formed along. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Pedestal Unit BU>> The pedestal unit BU is made of a metal plate or the like, and has a substantially plate-like shape. The ends of the pedestal part BU are attached to the left side, right side, back, etc. of the back box with screws (not shown), and the pedestal part BU is fixed to the back box. The base part BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU.

<Threaded Holes BU10> A plurality of, for example, three, screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end of the base portion BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the base portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

Note that the numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 only need to correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction, and it is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the base portion BU. Further, the configuration may be such that only the reel unit RU is attached to the pedestal part BU using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU, or the reel unit RU can be attached to the pedestal part BU by using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU. It may be configured such that both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) are attached to the base part BU.

<<Method for fixing reel unit RU>> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal part BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU is connected to the corresponding pedestal part BU. By positioning the reel unit RU so as to communicate with the screw hole BU10 and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU is positioned at a certain position on the base part BU. It can be attached and held. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached using a threading member such as a screw or bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a member such as a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal part BU using an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In addition, in this example, a configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal part BU is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this. A through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU, and a through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU, and the inside of the casing is inserted with a screw BS. The reel unit RU may be configured to be fixed (fixed in a hanging manner), or may be configured such that through holes RU40 are provided on both side surfaces of the reel unit RU and the reel unit RU is fixed inside the housing with screws BS. In addition, even in such a configuration, the configuration regarding the position of the screw BS and the falling position of the screw BS (for example, the configuration regarding the screw BS located at the position closest to the location where the front door DU opens and closes) will be explained in detail below. ) is applicable.

<<Hopper H40 and Medal Auxiliary Tank HS>> FIG. 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear right side, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear left side. Note that FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) also include arrows indicating movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. Arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66(a) and (b) for both positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as the main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank made of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged in a circular manner, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. Ru. The opening H30 is formed to open upward. The medals inserted from the medal input port D170 described above are introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 via the opening H30. Note that the hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as the hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, etc.

Furthermore, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right sloped part H54, and a left sloped part H56. The right side inclined part H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and game medals introduced into the right side of the hopper H40 are guided by their own weight toward a hopper bottom part H52, which will be described later. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medals introduced into the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged to cover approximately the upper left half of the disk H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being stacked and unable to fall at the hopper bottom H52, and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

By providing the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57, all game medals introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 through the opening part H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom part H52. The medals guided by the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 are stored in the hopper bottom part H52. In this way, the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 function as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged at the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned hopper motor H80, and the rotation of the disk H50 causes the game medals to be ejected from the game medal outlet H60. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide portion H62> A discharge guide portion H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and an inclined surface H64 formed at an angle. When the hopper H40 is placed in the back box, the right side of the slope H64 is located lower than the left side of the slope H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but it is formed to widen slightly as it goes downward (from the left side to the right side).

As the game medals are stored in the hopper H40, the discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. This is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the slope H64, and the game medals guided by the slope H64 are discharged into the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge slope portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As mentioned above, the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 function as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide part H62 functions as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40. It functions as a discharging inclined part for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined part H54 and the left inclined part H56.

Further, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medals from the left side toward the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclination downward to the right. The final target of the left inclined part H56 and the covering part H57 is the hopper bottom H52, and the final target of the discharge guide part H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the slope H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the slope H64 is provided. The protruding wall H58 can prevent medals placed on the slope H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS> The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. Note that the detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Screw BS of reel unit RU falls off>> In the reel-type gaming machine, the front door DU is attached to the back box so that it can be opened and closed (the front door DU and the back box are combined to form a housing). ). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (the left side seen from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, a shock is generated due to contact or collision with the back box and is propagated to the back box. Since the impact occurs on the right side of the reel-type game machine, the impact on the right side of the reel-type game machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the reel-type game machine.

As mentioned above, the reel unit RU is removably attached to the base part BU by the screw BS. The screws BS are screwed into the screw holes BU10 of the pedestal part BU at three locations: the left side, the center, and the right side, and the biggest impact is applied to the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10. Therefore, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to impact, and when the screw screw is released, the right screw BS will fall off and fall. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to impact, and there is a possibility that the impact loosens and falls off. Although it is assumed that the left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 will be able to reduce the impact to some extent, it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation, usage time, etc.

<<Position of Screw BS and Hopper H40 (1)>> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below at least the right side screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The fallen right screw BS reaches the slope H64, rolls on the slope H64 while being guided by the slope H64 by its own weight, and moves along the slope H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it can be ejected from the hopper H40, the fallen screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is It is possible to prevent the rotation of the disk H50 from being disturbed or damage the disk H50, and to stably operate the hopper H40.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 is arranged so that all three left side screws BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. and the reel unit RU may be positioned. No matter which screw BS falls off, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. In addition, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal part BU is illustrated, but the screw is not limited to this, and the front door DU is likely to receive impact due to contact or collision with the back box. Regarding members such as screws attached to the right side (the right side as viewed from the player), it may be configured so that when they fall off, they are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Position of Screw BS and Hopper H40 (2)>> FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screws BS mentioned above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the center screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right side screw BS. Note that in FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by its own weight, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

This prevents the fallen right side screw BS and the center screw BS from entering the hopper H40, prevents the fallen screw BS from interfering with the rotational movement of the disk H50, or damaging the disk H50, and prevents the hopper H40 from entering the hopper H40. It can be operated stably.

In the above example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS were targeted, but the hopper H40 and reel unit RU are positioned so that the left side screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Good too. No matter which screw BS falls off, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and rested on the slope H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is greater than or equal to the height at which the screw BS bounces back when it falls onto the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from interfering with the operation of the disk H50 or causing it to malfunction.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibrations caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS will not enter the hopper H40 and the medal auxiliary By configuring the screw BS to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the game hall can easily collect the screw BS that has been removed.

<<Hopper H400>> In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 as seen from the player) (arrow 2A) and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS. It will be stored. By configuring the fallen right side screw BS to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40, it can be used in common with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, so that when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the fallen right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without intruding into the hopper H40.

<<Extending portion RU50>> In the example described above, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, an extending portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the base portion BU. By providing the extension part EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but can be guided by the extension part EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN allows the position where the screw BS is attached to match the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged can be increased.

<<Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS>><Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode> As shown in FIG. 68, at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrode are formed in the back side of the medal auxiliary tank HS. has been done. Moreover, two fullness detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the lower part of the back surface of the back box. The two fullness detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to protrude toward the front. The two fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed to correspond to the two fullness detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is placed at the bottom of the back box, the two fullness detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69(c)) gradually rises and approaches the two fullness detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69(c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (for example, an envelope line) connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL of the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For simplicity, the uppermost portion UL is shown as a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE, and the two full detection electrodes DE are electrically connected through the plurality of medals, a voltage is generated between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. By forming the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that there is continuity between the two full detection electrodes DE. By doing so, it is configured such that a medal full error can be detected when game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE.

Note that the number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, if three full detection electrodes are provided, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one new full detection electrode is provided below the two full detection electrodes, and one new full detection electrode is It can be configured such that a medal full error can be detected by electrical connection between the full detection electrode and one of the two full detection electrodes described above, and by such a configuration, the medal supplement Even when the game medals are not stored evenly in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored biased toward the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<<Material of screw BS and material of medal>> The material of screw BS can be magnetically attached and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Furthermore, the material of the medal is non-magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of plated brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<<Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE>> The aforementioned left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are used to attach the reel unit RU to the pedestal part BU. used for. FIG. 69(b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. This screw BS is one whose total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69(b)) is shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69(a)). Total length BL<distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS (for example, right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it will be shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screws BS alone There is no conduction with the two full detection electrodes DE (the screw BS is not caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). Note that the total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69(a) is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS, showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship between the length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE>> The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69(b)) is the same as the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE. (radial length HR of the seating surface of the screw BS<diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be caught on one of the fullness detection electrodes DE, and the screw Even if the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be removed immediately, and the screw BS alone will not become electrically conductive by chance.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), one of the two fullness detection electrodes DE (for example, the fullness detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69(c)) is already stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the screw BS temporarily contacts the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)). Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS will not be hooked to the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can immediately detach from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)). , a conductive circuit is not formed through the screws BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

In this example, we have explained the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS The screw BS is detachably attached to the pedestal part BU, and there is a possibility that the screw BS will come off as well. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<<Configuration of Reel Band>> FIG. 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70(b) is a perspective view showing the reel band MO in a curved state. FIG. 70(c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO. FIG. 70(d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" symbol. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and the BB starts when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the active line. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like elongated shape (band-like shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the pattern can be illuminated from the back with the light emitted from the rotating drum backlight.

The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW, thereby forming an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW mainly consists of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and their centers are located on the same rotation axis. Further, the interval between the two frames is arranged to be approximately the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Overlapping portion M58 and cut M59> The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps (overlapping part M58) near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the reel band MO is pasted above the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. In addition, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching it to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is pasted along the entire circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55, and finally, The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end M57, and the pasting is completed up to the first end M55. If the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the first end M55 will be pasted in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 will be pasted on top of the reel strip MO. The portions M55 are in an overlapping state.

On the other hand, start pasting the reel strip MO onto the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50, attach the reel strip MO to the first end M55. Paste it along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, and finally paste the reel band MO above the first end M55 and paste it up to the second end M57. It ends. If the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the second end M57 will end in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 will be pasted on top of the reel strip MO. M57 will be in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the second end M57 is finished in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55. In the case where the second ends M57 overlap, when the reel M50 rotates during a game, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (air resistance is large). , air is likely to enter between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below it, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 is likely to gradually peel off.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is finished being attached in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps on top of the reel band MO, when the reel M50 rotates when playing the game, the second end M57 overlaps the reel strip MO described above. Compared to this, air is less likely to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 becomes difficult to peel off.

From the above, when attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW, start attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO after the pasting is completed in this direction.

<Various Errors> In this way, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, an overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the first end A cut M59 is formed by either end of M55 or second end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of resin such as plastic, errors may occur during molding. Further, when assembling the reel frame MW, deformation may occur and errors may occur. Furthermore, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO may be attached with distortion or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( In some cases, the outer circumference) may be installed slightly different from the designed value. When a large pattern (for example, "White Seven") is configured to be located on the reel strip MO below the superimposed portion M58, due to these various errors, the mounting position of the reel strip MO may not be as desired. When the reel band MO on the upper side of the superimposed portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol, the large symbol may be covered by the upper reel band MO.

Also, depending on the gaming state, the player may hit the bonus symbol, and if the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may hit the bonus symbol. , when the bonus symbols are stopped, the cut M59 may also be visible when viewing the bonus symbols. If the various errors described above occur, it is assumed that the player will be able to visually recognize not only the symbols but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the positional deviation of the symbols. When the bonus symbols are stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will be happy to pay attention to the bonus symbol because it is a symbol combination that will bring a high profit to the player. If you visually recognize a shift in the position of , there is a possibility that the joy of seeing the symbol combination that becomes the bonus symbol stopped and displayed may decrease.

<In the case of bonus symbols> In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol, such as a bonus symbol, is placed at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, if the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) with the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, then the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A shorter pattern (longitudinal length SL) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the design with a short length in the longitudinal direction at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbols can be placed at a position apart from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even if the various errors described above occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59 or the positional deviation of the symbols. In addition, in the same figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell pattern (a pattern that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol may be different. There is no problem. In addition, the symbols placed near the cut M59 are not limited to only the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols, such as replay symbols (symbols that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to replay). Alternatively, a watermelon pattern (a pattern that can form a pattern combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. In addition, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) in the lateral direction.

In the above example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol with the longest length in the longitudinal direction (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL is SL. The arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the length of the symbol in the transversal direction (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) as LT, and the short dimension of the symbol whose length in the transversal direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly along the longitudinal direction and the part of the symbol that protrudes most protrusively downwardly. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the transversal direction are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly and the part of the symbol that protrudes most downwardly along the transversal direction.

<In the case of small winning symbols> Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols may not be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the timing of the operation of the stop button even if they are a winning symbol, in other words, symbols exceeding the maximum number of sliding symbols may be used. Symbols that have at least one spot placed apart from each other (sometimes referred to as symbols that correspond to rare roles, symbols that can be missed, etc.) are also targets of attention, and the game It is a pattern that people are trying to visually recognize. In addition, in games where a player wins a rare role, the winning of the rare role may not be announced before operating the stop button, and even in such cases, the player wants to win the rare role, so The stop button is often operated at the timing (operation mode) of the stop button when it is easy to obtain a winning combination (highest profit for the player). Furthermore, there are gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations that pay out one less coin if a prize is won, and in such cases, the operation timing of the stop button (operation The stop button is often operated in the mode). Note that operating the stop button at the timing (manipulation mode) of the stop button that provides the highest profit for the player is sometimes referred to as an optimal gaming method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when playing a game using the optimal gaming method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the active lines are the upper left reel, the upper middle reel, and the upper right reel (straight line in the upper row), the middle row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the middle row of the right reel (straight line in the middle row). Left reel lower row, middle reel lower row, right reel lower row (lower straight line), left reel upper row, middle reel middle row, right reel lower row (lower right reel), left reel lower row, middle reel middle row, right reel upper row (right reel upper row) ) and 5 lines, and the prescribed number is 3. In addition, there are watermelon and cherry roles as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" will stop and display on the active line in a straight line, and when the cherry role wins, the characters will stop and display in a straight line. is configured such that "cherry-any-any" (any indicates that any symbol can be used) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the active line. Furthermore, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare combinations, the symbols have at least one location where they are placed apart from each other by a distance greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO. In addition, in the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is located in When a player wins a rare combination, they often operate the stop button aiming at a position on the reels where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare combination and where it is easy to win the rare combination. When a certain watermelon combination or cherry combination is won, by playing the game using the above-mentioned optimal gaming method, it is possible to win the rare combination. Specifically, the operation timing of the stop button that allows you to win the rare combination is to stop during three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located on the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located on the lower row. By operating the button, it is possible to win a prize regardless of whether the watermelon prize or the cherry prize is won. When the stop button is operated at such operation timing (optimal gaming method), the range of 9 frames from the cherry symbol on the top row to the watermelon symbol on the bottom row is the range that can be stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. (There is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames below the cherry), and the gap of the cut M59 is It is possible to prevent the player from visually perceiving the deviation of the position of the symbols or the position of the symbols.

As shown in the figure, symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reels where it is easy to win the rare combination are placed near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By configuring so that the first end M55 and the second end M57 are not located at a position on the reel that is frequently stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the first end M55 and the second end M57 from being located at a position where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed. Even if a deviation occurs, the configuration can be such that the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbols are difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In this example, the number of steps for one rotation of the reels is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336 ÷ 20 = 16 with a remainder of 16, the 20 pieces (symbols) are divided into 16 pieces (symbols) with 17 steps and 4 pieces (symbols) with 16 steps. The reels are made up of. In addition, it is better to configure the cut M59 so that it is not visible to the player as much as possible, so that the pieces (symbols) adjacent to the cut M59 have 16 steps, which is a relatively small number of steps. is suitable.

The configuration of the reel-type gaming machine in this example eliminates the need for inserting and paying out physical game medals used in general reel-type gaming machines, and instead uses pseudo game media converted into data. It may also be configured such that the game can be progressed. In addition, when configured in this way, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel-type gaming machine can be increased to the extent that there is no need to insert or pay out physical game medals (for example, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel-type gaming machine can be improved). (The front door and back box are integrated, so the gap where foreign objects are inserted is sealed), reducing the risk of unauthorized game medals being used, It can also be configured to improve security against fraudulent acts such as (so-called cheating) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed reel-type gaming machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed reel-type gaming machine is applicable to any of the embodiments (or configurations) described above. Incidentally, the configuration may be such that the credit and credit number display device D200 is not provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are summarized as one total score, and the main control board M, payout control The process of increasing and decreasing the total score and the process of displaying the total score may be performed on the board H (also referred to as a gaming value control board or a gaming value control means) or another board.

In addition, it corresponds to the physical game medals used in general drum-type game machines, and has "scores" as a pseudo game medium used for playing games in enclosed drum-type game machines. may be configured. Note that "scores" may also be referred to as "score information," "points," "points information," "gaming value," or "gaming value information." Physically real game medals can be directly held and handled by the player. On the other hand, in an enclosed drum type game machine, the player can play the game without directly handling physical game medals. The points are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media converted into data so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform arithmetic processing. Further, "credit" is a score that is temporarily stored in a bettable state or a settleable state among scores, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" refers to all the scores that can be input into the enclosed drum type game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general drum-type game machine that uses physical game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the enclosed drum type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification may be replaced with "scores", "score information", " There is no problem in treating it as "points held", "points information", "gaming value", "playing value information", etc., and as appropriate, "scores", "score information", "points held", "points information", etc. , "gaming value", and "gaming value information". Note that it is not necessary to have "credits". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with a total score display device.

(Second Embodiment) The present embodiment is configured to include an AT-in-progress state as a state related to AT that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), by executing push order navigation, Although an advantageous situation for the player is provided and the interest of the game is improved, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a reel-type gaming machine that can perform AT, which is different from the configuration of this embodiment, is defined as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment in the same figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, in step 1450, after executing the conditional device number management process described above, step 4100 (second) is performed. In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, after executing the above-described AT state start control process in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze execution determination process at the time of stop, which will be described later, and then proceeds to step 3500. Transition. The details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, freezing occurs when the reels start rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reels stop (when the last reel stops, when the third reel stops). (The reels do not start rotating for a predetermined period of time, or a bet operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined period of time) may occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which is related to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT has newly become "AT in progress" from the game. Here, "newly in the AT state" refers to the case where the AT-related state becomes "AT in progress" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as the first AT win). As an example, (1) Winning BB in "high probability state" → Transition to "advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB is (2) If you win a cherry in the "high probability state", you will win the AT lottery at 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, you will enter the premonitory state { This is a state related to AT that creates a sense of expectation in the player regarding whether or not he or she has won the AT lottery, and even if the player does not win the AT lottery related to winning the cherry, the same state as the "premonitory state" will occur. In the case where the system is configured to have a "fake precursor state" which is a production mode (background production, etc.), the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and the cherry is won based on the winning of the cherry. A game state transition such as winning the AT lottery will result in a transition to the "precursor state" → a predetermined number of games that are the end condition for the "precursor state" has been played, and a new transition to the "AT in progress state" will be changed to a "new This corresponds to "The machine entered the AT state". On the other hand, an example of a case that does not correspond to "Newly AT state" is as follows: (1) Staying in "AT state" → "AT continuous battle state" because the AT counter value has become 0 { Transition to the state where there is a possibility of transitioning to the "AT state" again (playing consecutive games) → Transition to the "AT state" again, (2) Winning BB in the "AT state" → " Game state transitions such as transition to "advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped and displayed and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transition to "AT state" again are "new". This does not apply to ``The device entered the AT state.''

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that, when turned on, causes freeze to be executed at the start of reel rotation) in step 4104. ) on. Next, in step 4106, the CP of the main control board M
The UMC is an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the AT start effect is executed on the sub control board S side. ) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that even in the case of No in step 4102, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1550). Note that the freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in configuring the system to have various types of freeze (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second). That is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the AT start freeze execution flag. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag in step 1570 (second). Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, and sets the freeze execution time and the "AT The freeze execution time at the start (in this example, it is 5 seconds) is set to the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT in progress state" ends, and the new "AT in progress state" is set. In this case, the timer is set and the timer is started, and the process moves to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become zero. If YES in step 1574 (second), the process moves to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT state" has elapsed. Incidentally, even if the answer in step 1568 (second) is No, the process moves to step 1552.

In this way, the second embodiment is configured to execute a freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) when the "AT state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, while the freeze is being executed, the AT start effect will be executed on the sub control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem in changing the execution time, and it is preferable to set it in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the configuration is such that the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. has been done. In this way, by making the freeze execution time at the start of AT relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be an advantageous situation for players in the future, we will be able to increase the interest of players by increasing their desire to play. It can be made into an expensive gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-stop execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" is a case where the AT counter value changes from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value is decreasing, such as in "AT in progress", Cases where the AT counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state", are not included.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 4202, the process moves to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining games counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section has newly become 0" means that in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value is decreasing, such as in the "AT state", the value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value has become 0. This is a case where the number of games changes from "1 to 0", and does not include a case where the advantageous section remaining game counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state". If YES in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, and the execution time of the freeze to be executed when the new "AT state" is entered) and the "AT state". The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, it is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time that is executed when the "AT state" ends) is set to (execution time) and starts the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the CPUMC of the main control board M , the AT end effect will be executed), and the process moves to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process in step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT state" has elapsed. Note that in the case of No in step 4204, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start effect execution in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case where a power outage does not occur during execution of the AT start effect and a case where a power outage occurs will be described in detail.

First, with reference to (a) in the figure, a case will be described in detail in which the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the AT start effect and freeze execution time is 5 seconds. After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for 1 second as a performance mode of the AT start performance. Thereafter, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start performance ends, and the reels start rotating. In addition, when the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START!!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. The scene will switch to a possible background effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts → freeze ends after 5 seconds → reels start rotating and the effect is displayed. The press order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reels start rotating → Reel drive state changes to reel constant speed state, and effect display device S40 It is also possible to display the navigation in the order of pressing. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to freeze execution, the player will not be able to accidentally operate the stop button that corresponds to a different press order from the correct press order. It is possible to prevent a situation where this occurs.

Next, with reference to (b) in the figure, a case in which a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time during power-off). After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, two seconds after the start of freeze execution, a power outage occurs (for example, a power outage occurs at the gaming parlor). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze continues to be executed. After that, when the total time from the start of Freeze execution, excluding the time when the power is turned off, reaches 5 seconds, the execution of Freeze ends, the AT start effect ends, and the reels start rotating. It happens. In this way, in this example, if a power outage occurs while the freeze is being executed (while the AT start effect is being executed) and then the power is restored from the power outage, the freeze execution time will be the same as the state before the power outage. This will continue to be carried out. As an example, if the freeze execution time is 5 seconds, and a power outage occurs 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze will be executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze execution time will be 5 seconds. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, freezing will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

In addition, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of freeze, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power outage, the execution time of the AT start effect will be the same as the execution time of the freeze. The execution will continue from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the presentation mode of the AT start effect will be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or when a power outage does not occur. If a power outage has not occurred, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the execution of the AT start performance, while the AT start performance is being executed. If a power outage occurs, regardless of the timing of the power outage, "AT50G START!!" will be displayed on the effect display device S40 after recovery from the power outage. Note that the display "AT50G START!!" may be referred to as the AT start game number display. In addition, in the figure, the number of games at the start of AT is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display format is The present invention is not limited to this, but for example, in a case where a lottery for increasing the number of AT games can be executed in an "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before transitioning to the AT state, AT in the "advantageous BB state" The number of AT remaining games obtained by adding the number of AT remaining games obtained by winning the number of games addition lottery to the initial number of AT games of 50 games is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. Good too. For example, if 30 remaining AT games are obtained through the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START!!" is displayed as the number of games at the start of AT. You can. In addition, in the figure, only the AT start performance is illustrated, but similarly, the AT end performance is different in the case where a power outage occurs while the AT end performance is being executed, and when a power outage occurs. (For example, if a power failure does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET〇〇" will be displayed two seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET" will be displayed after the power outage returns, regardless of the timing of the power outage.) In addition, this is a performance that is displayed while the AT start performance or AT end performance is being executed, and if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance or AT end performance, the performance is immediately displayed after the power is restored. If so, the present invention is not limited to displaying the number of games at the start of AT, but there is no problem as long as the display is visible to the player and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute freezing when newly transitioning to the AT state and when the AT state ends. The AT start performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status is newly entered, and the AT end performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status ends. In a case configured in this way, if a power outage occurs while the AT start effect or AT end effect is being executed, after the power outage is restored, the information that is scheduled to be displayed from the predetermined timing in the AT start effect or AT end effect will be displayed. By configuring the display so that it is displayed immediately after the power is restored, even if an unintentional power outage (for example, a power outage at a gaming facility) occurs during a freeze, game information such as the number of remaining AT games will be displayed. By configuring the system to immediately display information necessary for the player to grasp the game situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the AT state is newly entered and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , may be configured to be executed at the start of BB, at the end of BB, etc., or may be configured to be executed based on the winning condition device or the gaming state in which the player is staying.

Furthermore, from the above-mentioned configuration regarding freezing in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the execution period of freezing when a power outage does not occur during execution of freezing = A case where power interruption occurs during execution of freezing If the execution period of the freeze until a power outage occurs = B, and the execution period of the freeze after the power outage occurs if a power outage occurs during the execution of the freeze = C, then A = B + C. It is configured like this.

Incidentally, when the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above will be executed.

<<<<Configuration 2 applicable to this example>>>> The configuration applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations detailed below is applicable to all the embodiments described above, and the first configuration described in detail below may be applied, or multiple configurations detailed below may be applied. Let me add some things you can do.

<<<Configuration of Lamp Unit>>> First, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, the lighting of the lamp unit (general term for decorative lamp unit D150 and LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be explained. Detail the configuration.

Note that the LED of the lamp unit in this example is a full-color LED (can be lit in a plurality of lighting colors), and is configured such that the lighting color can be set for each LED by lighting control by the sub-control board S. Further, the lamp unit is configured to light up based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) possessed by the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED, or multiple LEDs may be set in one. It may be set for one group as two groups.

Furthermore, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used to control the lighting of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC sends a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to multiple slave ICs, and each slave IC sends back an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when receiving data. Since the slave ICs are connected to each other, data (lighting patterns) are transmitted in order starting from the master IC, and each slave IC acquires the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform high-speed communication.

FIG. 77 is an image of the lamp unit lighting configuration. In the same figure, the configuration regarding lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items from "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements, element 1 to element 6, as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1> Element 1 has a lighting color: "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", "color Element 1 includes eight types of lighting colors, including "None". The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue". ” indicates that out of N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs light up in red and L LEDs light up in blue (N=M+L). . Note that the combination of the order of the LEDs that light up in red and the LEDs that light up in blue may be one or more than one (if multiple combinations are provided, the lighting color may be " (You may provide multiple lighting colors, such as ``red + blue 1'' and ``red + blue 2''). Moreover, "no color" indicates that the light is off (not lit), and is the lighting color that is selected when the light is always off. As mentioned above, the number of items composing elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and element 1 includes three or more colors such as "red + blue + green". There is no problem in configuring it to have a combination of lighting colors.

<Element 2> Element 2 is the lighting time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 seconds", "3 seconds", "Always", " Element 2 includes seven types of lighting times, including "no lighting". Note that "Always" is a lighting time selected when the light is always on, and "No lighting" is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off.

<Element 3> Element 3 is the lights-off time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 seconds", "3 seconds", "Always", " Element 3 includes seven types of light-off times, including "no light-off". Note that "Always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off, and "Never lights off" is the lighting time that is selected when the lights are always off.

<Element 4> Element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is composed of a combination of element 2, lighting time, and element 3, lights out time. 0.1 seconds off", "0.1 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "0.2 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "1 seconds on → 0.1 seconds off", "3 seconds Element 4 includes seven types of lighting time patterns: "lights on → lights off for 0.3 seconds", "always on", and "always off". As an example of a lighting time pattern, in the case of "light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds", the lighting time of "0.1 seconds" which is element 2 and the light off of "0.1 seconds" which is element 3. It is made up of a combination of time. In addition, "always on" is a lighting time pattern that is selected when the light is always on, and is configured by combining element 2, "always" lighting time, and element 3, "no lights off" off time. has been done. In addition, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lights are always off, and is configured by combining element 2, "no lighting" lighting time, and element 3, "always" off time. has been done.

<Element 5> Element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is element 1, the lighting time which is element 2, and the lighting time which is element 3. In addition, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as lighting element contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting element content are shown as lighting element types. The lighting elements include lighting element type a: "red lighting for 0.1 seconds → lights off for 0.1 seconds" lighting element type b: "blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → lights off for 0.1 seconds" lighting element type c: "0 .1 second red light on → 0.3 second light off” Lighting element type d: “0.1 second red + blue light on → 0.3 second light off” Lighting element type e: “0.2 second red + blue light on → 0. 3 seconds off” Lighting element type f: “0.2 seconds blue + green lights on → 0.3 seconds off” Lighting element type g: “1 second white lights on → 0.1 seconds off” Lighting element type h: “1 second Lighting element type i: "Blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off" Lighting element type i: "3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" Lighting element type k: "Always lit in red" Lighting element type l: "Always lit in blue" Lighting element type m: "Always lit in green" Lighting element type n: "Always lit in white" Lighting element type o: "Always lit in red + green" Lighted Element type p: "Always lit in blue + green" Lighting element type q: "Always lit in blue + white" Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)" 18 types of lighting elements are included as element 5. . As an example of a lighting element, in the case of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds", element 1 "red" and element 4 "light on for 0.1 seconds → light off for 0.1 seconds" It is configured by combining a lighting time pattern (as described above, a lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time and a light-off time). Further, "always lit in red + green" is configured by combining element 1 "red + green" and element 4 "always lit". Further, "always off (no color)" is configured by combining element 1 "no color" and element 4 "always off".

<Element 6> Element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or more lighting elements that are element 5. In addition, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern content are shown as lighting pattern types. The lighting patterns are: Pattern 1: "a→a→a→a" Pattern 2: "b→b→b→b" Pattern 3: "a→b→a→b" Pattern 4: "a→a→g →g” Pattern 5: “g→f→j” Pattern 6: “i→h→b” Pattern 7: “g→f→b” Pattern 8: “i→j→g” Pattern 9: “g→g →g'' Pattern 10: ``k'' Pattern 11: ``l'' Pattern 12: ``m'' Pattern 13: ``n'' Pattern 14: ``o'' Pattern 15: ``p'' Pattern 16: ``q'' Pattern 17: ``r It has 17 types of lighting patterns as element 6. As an example of a lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: "a→a→a→a", element 5 "red lighting for 0.1 seconds→light off for 0.1 seconds" is repeated four times. In addition, in the case of pattern 8 "i → j → g", after executing lighting element type i: "green lighting for 3 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds", lighting element type j: "blue lighting + green lighting for 3 seconds → 0 .3 seconds off" and lighting element type g: "1 second white lighting→0.1 second off". Incidentally, the lighting patterns may be further combined to light the lamp unit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →... Pattern 1→Pattern 4" may be repeatedly turned on until the lighting termination condition is satisfied. Note that the lighting termination condition may be configured to be satisfied when the gaming situation changes such as cancellation of a predetermined error, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of element 5, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of lighting elements of element 5. The lighting element is configured by a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is configured by the combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. has been done.

Although the configuration related to lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, it is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or elements 1 to 6 may be used. You may change the contents of (for example, set element 1 to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a status-based notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of the reel back lamp S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example are shown. An example of a configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as speaker sound) will be described in detail. Note that each item illustrated in the same figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the BB type (the conditions related to BB) The lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of device) and the gaming state in which the BB was won, or the lighting mode (lighting cycle) that combines multiple lighting patterns may be repeatedly executed in one BB until the BB ends. Please note that it may be configured to do so. Further, regarding the error, although a medal empty error is illustrated as an example, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be made different depending on the type of error. In addition, in all configurations 1 to 6, during normal gaming (no error is occurring, the power is not immediately turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting confirmation mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set). The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed is pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, pattern 17. or a combination of one or more. Note that since the game is configured to have various game states such as a low probability state and an AT state during the normal game, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected may be different depending on the game state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. Note that the time of power-on refers to a situation from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>> <Medal empty error occurring> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with relatively low light intensity (light intensity smaller than normal light intensity) Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when power is turned on is output for a predetermined period of time <While the standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (Always on in green) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds”) (Repeat 3 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds” → “0. 2 seconds blue + green lights on → 0.3 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during BB execution Loop (repeated playback) is configured as described above. Note that the performance executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the performance that was being executed before the power outage occurred or the gaming state before the power outage occurred.

As in configuration 1, only different lighting patterns of the lamp unit are selected during an error such as when an empty medal error occurs and during normal gaming, and the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern is By configuring the system so that red is used when an empty medal error occurs, but not during normal play (configuring so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), players and administrators can , it is possible to easily distinguish between cases where an error has occurred and cases where no error has occurred, and the business of the game parlor and the progress of games can be made smoother. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming. This makes it possible to smoothen the operation of the game hall and the progress of the games. In addition, the player can play the game stress-free without being mistaken for thinking that an error has occurred even during normal gaming, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. becomes. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit when displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. Further, while the standby screen is displayed, power consumption due to the use of flashy lighting patterns can be suppressed even though the player is not playing the game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns during settings confirmation mode and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily switch between settings confirmation mode and normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. In addition, the administrator can immediately identify unintended setting confirmation modes, and can also detect unintended setting confirmation modes even if the administrator forgets to turn off the setting key switch. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns between the settings change mode and normal games, players and administrators can easily switch between settings change mode and normal games. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. Further, it is possible to immediately determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator, and it is possible to quickly determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during BB execution and during normal gaming (in a state where BB is not executed), players and administrators can It is possible to easily determine whether the game is in progress (a state in which BB is not being executed), and the player or administrator can clearly determine the gaming situation.

In addition, as mentioned above, there are differences between when an error related to the lamp unit occurs and during normal gaming, differences between when the power is turned on and during normal gaming, differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal gaming, and settings. The differences between the confirmation mode and normal gaming, the differences between setting change mode and normal gaming, and the differences between BB execution and normal gaming include lighting colors (elements) that are not used during normal gaming. 1), may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during normal gaming, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during normal gaming. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or it may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. , it may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during the normal game.

<<Configuration 2>> <When an empty medal error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when an empty medal error occurs until the error is cleared Loop (repeat playback) <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying standby screen> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (Always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights in a special pattern while displaying the standby screen (flashing) Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (Always lit in red) Back lamp lights Mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB execution Middle > Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue + green lighting for 0.2 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds" (Turn off for 1 second) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a dedicated sound during BB execution The configuration is as described above.

<<Configuration 3>> <Medal empty error occurring> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat 4 times "Red on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared. <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lights white) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker Sound: No output <While the standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0.2 second blue + green on → 0.3 second off” → “3 2 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lights red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lights in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During BB execution> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green lighting for 3 seconds → Lights off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + White lighting for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue lighting for 0.1 seconds → Lights off for 0.1 seconds" ) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) dedicated sound during BB execution The configuration is as described above.

<<Configuration 4>><When an empty medal error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always lit in red + green) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Only when an empty medal error occurs until the error is cleared Loop the sound (play repeatedly) <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying the standby screen> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (Always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds” → “0.1 seconds”) (Lights blue for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds → Turns on red for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds → Turns on blue for 0.1 seconds → Turns off for 0.1 seconds) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound : No output <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“Turn on red for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” → “Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” → “0.1 seconds”) 1 second red on → 0.1 second off” → 0.1 second blue light on → 0.1 second off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“Turn on green for 3 seconds → turn off for 0.3 seconds” → “Turn on blue + white for 1 second → turn off for 0.1 seconds” → “Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds”) Back lamp lighting mode: Sound of the speaker lit at normal light intensity: Loop (repeat playback) of a sound exclusively used during BB execution.The above arrangement is made. In addition, the warning sound output from the speaker when a medal empty error occurs is the same warning sound as the warning sound output from the speaker during setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, and separately from the warning sound, when a medal empty error occurs. During the setup mode, the speaker outputs the message "Medal empty error has occurred." During the settings confirmation mode, the speaker outputs "Settings confirmation mode in progress." During the settings change mode, the speaker outputs "In settings change mode." It may be configured to output "This is" from the speaker. Note that for errors other than the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice saying "〇〇 error is occurring" may be similarly output from the speaker.

<<Configuration 5>> <During a medal empty error> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared Loop (repeat playback) <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: On → Off (lights up when playing normally) Speaker sound: Output None <While the standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (Always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (Always white) Lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white) Back lamp lighting mode: At normal light intensity Lighting speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white light → 0.1 second light off" → "0.2 second blue + green light → 0. 3 seconds off” → “3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a dedicated sound while BB is running As shown above It is configured.

<<Configuration 6>> <Medal empty error occurring> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat "0.1 second red light on → 0.1 second off" 4 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) special sound during medal empty error until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound : No output <While displaying standby screen> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0. Red light on for 1 second → Light off for 0.1 seconds" → "Red light on for 0.1 seconds → Light off for 0.1 seconds" → "White light on for 1 second → Light off for 0.1 seconds" → "White light on for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 seconds (Off) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during settings confirmation mode <During settings change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("Lights in red for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds Back lamp lighting mode: Normal Lights up with light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 second blue + green light on") → 0.3 seconds off” → “3 seconds blue + green lights on → 0.3 seconds off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound while BB is running (plays repeatedly) Above It is structured as follows.

In addition, in the figure, six types of configurations, configurations 1 to 6, are illustrated, but these configurations are just examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, back lamp lighting mode, and sound output from the speakers for each gaming situation are shown as examples. may be combined from each configuration or may be changed in any way. Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, we will also discuss the differences between the lamp unit when an error occurs and during normal gaming, the differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal gaming, and the differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal gaming. The differences, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal gaming, differences between setting change mode and normal gaming, and differences between BB execution and normal gaming are as follows: Elements 1 to 6 mentioned above. (See FIG. 77), it is preferable to configure such that one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

In addition, in the same figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the error is not limited to this, and display judgment errors and door opening errors are also considered when an error occurs and during normal play related to the lamp unit. Differences between immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming; Differences between displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming; Differences between setting confirmation mode and normal gaming; Differences between setting change mode and normal gaming The difference between the BB execution and the normal game is that any of the aforementioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77), which is not selected during the normal game, is selected. Depending on the type of error occurring, for example, one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be configured differently depending on the medal empty error and the display judgment error. Any of the aforementioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different.

Furthermore, when the re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed, the lighting mode of the lamp unit may be configured to inform the player that the symbol combination related to the re-gaming combination has been stopped and displayed. In the game executed in the gaming state, the lamp unit is configured to light up when a replay combination is won and the symbol combination related to the replay combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of elements 1 to 6 is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the regaming role is stopped and displayed without winning the regaming role. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he has won the replay combination.

<<<Configuration related to front door opening and payout>>> Next, the configuration related to payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail using FIG. 79. In addition, "Normal" shown in the figure means, for example, when Winning-B (common bell) is won in a "low probability state" and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, Winning 04) is stopped and displayed. This shows a case where 11 game medals are paid out. Also, for "Payout occurs before the door is opened" and "Payout occurs after the door is opened", if the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination (for example, prize 04) corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed. is exemplified. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is explained in detail.

<<Configuration 1>> <Normal Payout> The case where normal payout in Configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as turning on), the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed (when the player releases their finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed. The state in which the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning from on to off), game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is emitted from the speaker S20. Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined period of time.

<The case where the payout is executed before the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned off from ON, and the game medals corresponding to the winning prize 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the output of the dispensing sound, the output of the dispensing sound ends, and at the same time, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door open notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and then continues to be output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific period of time has elapsed since the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to confirm or change settings, the front door open notification sound will continue to be output until the confirmation or change of settings is completed. This allows you to check and change settings without stress. Although the figure shows that the output of the front door opening sound ends at the same time as the output of the dispensing sound ends, the output of the front door opening sound is not limited to this. There is no problem even if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<The case where the payout is executed after the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. Thereafter, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning number 04 are paid out, and from the speaker S20. A payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals starts to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Thereafter, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of outputting the dispensing sound, and the outputting of the dispensing sound ends.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the system so that game medals can be paid out regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, it is possible for the game hall manager to forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be able to be output simultaneously, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above-described configuration 1, it is preferable to use an output mode (timbre, pitch, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish between the front door opening notification sound and the dispensing sound.

<<Configuration 2>><NormalPayout> The case where normal payout in Configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as turning on), the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed (when the player releases their finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed. The state in which the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning from on to off), game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is emitted from the speaker S20. Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined period of time.

<The case where the payout is executed before the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned off from ON, and the game medals corresponding to the win 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure At the same time as the sound A) is output, the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined period of time during which the dispensing sound is output ends while the front door opening notification sound is being output.

<The case where the payout is executed after the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. After that, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where game medals are being paid out, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is finished, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning prize 04 is outputted. Thereafter, a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to the winning prize 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in configuration 2, by configuring the payout of game medals to be executable regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, the manager of the game hall can forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the system so that the front door open notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where it becomes difficult to judge the status of the gaming machine due to the mixing of the tones of the front door open notification sound and the payout sound. can do. Furthermore, in configuration 2, the dispensing sound is configured to be output even while the front door open notification sound is being output, and the volume of the dispensing sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (even when the volume is 0). (including).

<<Other configurations>> When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, it is possible to insert game medals, operate the max bet button (in this example, bet button D220), and operate the bet button. The lamp S50 (also referred to as a max bet lamp), the input ready lamp, and the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) may be turned on effectively. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credits increase or the game medal is It may also be configured such that the bet is placed. In such a configuration, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) (the front door DU Even if the button is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output, and the sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output. It may be configured such that the bet sound made by the player is not outputted.

<<<Configuration regarding power cutoff and payout>>> The following is an example of the effect when the power is cut off while the third stop is pressed when winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect caused by blinking the turn drum backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win a small prize → turn off the power while holding down the third stop button A power outage occurs (such as a power outage in the gaming hall) → the power is restored while holding down the third stop button → the power is restored and the game medals corresponding to the small role are paid out, resulting in the above effect. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where no power outage has occurred and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in configuration 1 described above, the power is restored while holding down the third stop button, and the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is executed. In this case, it may be configured such that the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off while the player presses the third stop button and the power is immediately restored, the game medals will be paid out based on the winning of the small prize. This allows players to avoid any disadvantages. Note that even if any of the predetermined operation members controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc.) is operated, other predetermined operation members may be operated. If the operating member is not operated, it may be possible to pay out game medals based on winnings. For example, when recovering from a power failure, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the system is configured so that game medals based on winnings are not paid out. Good too. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever (the operating member that is turned on among the operating members controlled by the main control board M side (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side It may be configured such that when all the operating members to be controlled are turned off), the payout of game medals based on winnings is executed.

Examples of situations in which the power supply may be interrupted include a power switch turning from on to off, a cable supplying power being disconnected, a power outage occurring at the game center, a cable supplying power being pulled out of a socket, and the like. etc., and in any case, it is applicable to the above-mentioned configuration.

<Structure 2> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → press and hold the third stop button and move forward. Open the door DU (opening the front door DU will cause a door open error), and the power will be cut off (turn off the power switch, etc.) → Press and hold the third stop button and restore the power (power (turn on the switch, etc.) → Close the front door DU while holding down the third stop button to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in the specified direction) → If the door opening error occurs It may be configured such that the above-described effect is such that the payout of game medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed when the small winning combination is released.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where no power outage occurs and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in configuration 2 described above, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is pressed, and the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is released. When executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by suddenly performing the back lamp effect and outputting the payout sound after the door opening error is cleared.

<Configuration 3> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win a small prize → turn off the power while holding down the third stop button A power outage occurs (e.g. a power outage occurs at the game center) → Release your finger from the third stop button (turn the third stop button from on to off) → Power is restored → Power is restored and the above small role is responded to. It may be configured as described above in which the payout of game medals is executed.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where no power outage occurs and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while it is possible to output the payout sound based on the winning of the small role, as in configuration 3 above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after releasing the third stop button. In this case, when the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

In addition, when configured as in the above configuration 1, configuration 2, or configuration 3, as a process after power-off recovery, it is determined whether the third stop button is pressed (whether it is on or not). Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), it may be configured to execute the game medal payout process (the process executed in the game progress control process) based on winnings. In addition, as mentioned above, in a situation where the symbol combination that results in a small winning combination is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is held down, and then the power is turned off while the third stop button is held down. , the payout of game medals based on winnings may be executed by releasing the third stop button after that, and in such a case, the output of a payout sound and a back lamp effect corresponding to the payout may be performed. may be configured so that it is not executed (if the payout of game medals based on winning is executed without power interruption, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<Configuration regarding setting confirmation mode and payout>>> The following is an example of the effect that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example when the setting key switch is turned on while holding down the third stop when winning a small winning combination. . It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. In addition, the configuration detailed below applies when the reels are stopped, the power is turned on, and the main control board side of the start lever, all stop buttons, bet buttons (max bet button), settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON in a situation where the various operating members controlled by the This example shows the case where In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to be notified.

<Configuration 1> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small prize → Hold down the third stop button and press the previous button. Open the door DU (opening the front door DU will cause a door open error) and turn on the setting key switch (does not shift to setting confirmation mode) → Hold down the third stop button and press the front door DU Close the door to cancel the door open error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a predetermined direction) -> The setting confirmation mode does not change even when the third stop button is released.The above configuration may also be used. .

In addition, if configured in this way, it is possible to place a bet while the setting key switch remains on, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while a bet is placed, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while the setting key switch is on. It may be configured such that the reels can be stopped (the game can proceed) by operating the reels. Also, if the setting key switch remains on after that, it may be configured such that bets cannot be placed (input of game medals is also not possible), or bets can be placed but the reels do not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the configuration may be such that the game cannot be played while the setting key switch remains on. It should be noted that in such a configuration, a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is not displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, if the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch is still on (after the effect as in configuration 1 above) and the symbol combination related to replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the setting confirmation mode will be activated. It may be configured so that the mode can be shifted to, or it may be configured so that the mode does not shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the symbol combinations related to re-gaming are stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display that the mode is the setting confirmation mode.

<<<Configuration Regarding Lighting of Max Bet Lamp>>> Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, a max bet lamp (also referred to as bet button lamp S50) applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described. We will explain in detail the effects related to the lighting of the Note that the configuration exemplified below exemplifies a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is being displayed. The max bet lamp is controlled by the sub control board S side or the main control board M side, which is provided inside or near the max bet button, and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is valid. It's a lamp. In the same figure, when the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), it is ON, when the max bet lamp is off, it is OFF, when the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, it is ON, and when 1 bet is lit, it is OFF. OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, The 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off as OFF, the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing) as ON, and the start lamp D180 is turned off as OFF. In addition, in the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 are detected by an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, a second input sensor D30s, etc.) The sensor detects game medals one by one), but as a bet button, it is different from the max bet button, and it is possible to bet one game medal with one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button that allows you to bet two game medals with one operation (off → on) may be provided, and when configured in this way, one bet button can be inserted into the medal slot D170. Even if the same effect as when inserting a game medal (detection of one game medal by the insert reception sensor D10s, first insert sensor D20s, or second insert sensor D30s) is applied to one press of the 1 bet button, there is no problem. do not have.

<<Configuration 1>> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the max bet lamp to turn off and turn on every time one game medal is inserted, the maximum bet lamp can be set to Since the operation of the bet button is disabled, by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid. In addition, by accurately reporting the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can understand the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of game medals is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation where the game medals are not properly inserted due to the game medals being inserted during the invalid period, and it is possible to realize the game progress at a good pace.

Furthermore, as in configuration 1, by configuring the 3 bet lamp D213 to turn on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out, when the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit, Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the prescribed number of three game medals has been bet.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 2, the max bet lamp is configured to turn off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is configured so that the player presses the max bet button. By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the player's operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation. It is possible to prevent situations in which players are distrustful of the performance or behavior of a gaming machine due to slow operation or by inserting gaming medals into the machine.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp goes out, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 turns off, the start lamp D180 is turned on almost at the same time, so that the next game can be started. It is possible to notify the player that it is possible to start the game as soon as possible, making the game progress smoothly, and also preventing the player from inserting extra game medals or affecting the performance of the game machine due to slow operation. It is possible to prevent situations in which people feel distrustful of their behavior.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is flashing, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. Thereafter, the max bet lamp turns off before the timing when the max bet lamp turns on and off (in the middle of lighting) when the max bet lamp blinks. In addition, in the figure, the third game medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is lit and the max bet lamp is blinking, repeatedly turning on and then off. The max bet lamp turns on and then turns off at the timing when the second gaming medal is inserted, but if the third gaming medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. In this case, the max bet lamp remains off after the third game medal is inserted.

As in configuration 5, in a situation where no bet is made, the 1-bet ramp D211 and the 2-bet ramp D21
Even if the configuration is such that all the 2 and 3 bet lamps D213 are turned on, the start lamp D180, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp will be turned on depending on the number of game medals inserted (first, second, third). By varying the combinations of lighting and extinction of the lamps D213, the player can grasp the current gaming situation (how many gaming medals have been bet).

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 lights up at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in configuration 2). The 3 bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 6, the max bet lamp is configured to turn off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is configured so that the player presses the max bet button. By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the player's operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, making the progress of the game smoother and allowing the player to It is possible to prevent situations in which players are distrustful of the performance or behavior of a gaming machine due to slow operation or when the player inserts game medals into the machine.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp goes out, and the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on almost at the same time. In other words, the 3 bet lamp D213 is By configuring the light to turn on as soon as possible after the bet button is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, making it possible to smooth the progress of the game and to It is possible to prevent a situation where a player inserts extra game medals or becomes distrustful of the performance and behavior of a game machine due to slow operation.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6, and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but any lighting mode may be used so that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. Alternatively, as in configuration 5, the configuration may be such that the max bet lamp is on and the max bet lamp is blinking. Also in configuration 5, the configuration may be such that the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit. Similarly, in configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid. Similarly to configuration 7, the configuration may be such that the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is blinking. Also in configuration 7, the configuration may be such that the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled by the sub-control board S side, or may be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side.

<<<Configuration when operating the settlement button>>> Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation when operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration exemplifies a case where three game medals are bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the same figure, the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing) as ON, the max bet lamp is off as OFF, the settlement button is newly detected as an ON operation, and the settlement button as ON. OFF when no operation is detected or no new operation of the settlement button is detected, ON when the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, Turn ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit, turn OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF when the start lamp D180 is off, ON when the ready-to-load lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), ready-to-load lamp The figure shows that the D300 is turned off as OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 as OFF→ON→OFF. In addition, although the figure illustrates the case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal slot D170, the bet button is different from the max bet button, and one operation (off → on) allows one coin to be inserted. A 1-bet button that allows you to bet a game medal or a 2-bet button that allows you to bet 2 game medals with a single operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem in applying the same effect as when inserting one game medal into D170 to pressing the 1 bet button once. In addition, the configuration illustrated below may be configured such that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even when the replay stop display is displayed, or the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled while the replay stop display is displayed. It may be configured such that the game medals that are held cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the betted game medals from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has changed from "on to off". It may also be expressed as "on" or "on for 0.5 seconds or more".

<<Configuration 1>> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, 3-bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. When the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts), and then the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. Certain four game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. In addition, in the figure, a case is illustrated in which the payment process can be executed by turning the payment button D60 from off to on in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period). The execution mode is not limited to this, but for example, in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period), the payment button D60 turns from off to on and continues to be on for a predetermined time or more (the payment button D60 (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

As in configuration 1, by configuring the game medals that have been bet on to be paid out (paid out) before the credits, the player can confirm that the credits have become 0 when finishing the game. Even if the player leaves his/her seat immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to settle the game medals that have been bet. In particular, when ending a game when the number of credits is small, such as 1 or 2, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will end the game without acquiring enough game medals. It is also possible that people's attention is becoming distracted. Even in such cases, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages to players, the game medals that have been bet are settled (paid out) before the credits are paid out. Therefore, in Configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, the 3-bet ramp D213, and the start ramp D180 are , and the input ready lamp D300 are configured to turn off.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (changed from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp lights up and the three bet game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 ( (The payout will start). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off, and the enable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out and the throwable lamp D300 turns on. In configuration 2, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the max bet lamp to be turned on before the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and input ready lamp D300 are turned off, the player may accidentally press the checkout button. If the player accidentally operates the MAX BET button, only the game medals that have been bet will be paid out, and the player will want to operate the MAX BET button again to bet credits. By configuring the system to notify the player, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the payment button D60 is operated once (changed from off to on), and the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 are turned off at the timing when the payment process is started. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (the payout is started), and then the four game medals that are the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are Game medals will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of 3-bet lamp D213→2-bet lamp D212→1-bet lamp D211. In addition, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (changed from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 go out, and the three bet game medals are placed in the ejection slot. It is paid out from D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out and the throwable lamp D300 turns on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 4, the bet game medals are paid out but the credits are not paid out, and the max bet lamp is turned on at a later timing than the input ready lamp D300 is turned on. If the player wishes to change to a one-coin bet after placing a three-coin bet, the player operates the settlement button D60 once to settle the three betted gaming medals, and then transfers one gaming medal. Since the player must make a bet or operate the 1-bet button, in such a case, the game progress can be made smoother by lighting up the throwable lamp D300 before the max bet lamp.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, 3-bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. At the same time as the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In addition, in configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the payment button D60 is pressed and the payment process is started, the input ready lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 goes out. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (the payout is started), and then the four game medals that are the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are Game medals will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of 3-bet lamp D213→2-bet lamp D212→1-bet lamp D211. In addition, after the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 turns off. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D300 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<Differences in operation due to timing of power cutoff>>>> FIG. 88 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S depending on the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cutoff. . FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. 3 is a timing chart showing the second aspect.

The first mode is a mode in which power is cut off after execution of the main program of the main control board M or the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which power is cut off before execution of the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board starts.

In this example, a power outage is a state where the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, such as a state where the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state where the power cable is disconnected, a state where the power cable is disconnected, or a power outage. But that's fine. This also includes cases where the power supply is unintentionally cut off at a gaming facility. The timing at which a power outage occurs is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine stops, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the timing when the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when the power outage occurred. In addition, in this example, "occurrence of power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of a power outage. It is to detect.

In FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power outage occurs. , ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time from the timing when the power is cut off until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level. ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S starts, and ΔT5 is the time until the main control board M reaches the supply level. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is activated. Here, the following relationships are established: ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, and ΔT4<ΔT5.

<<<First Aspect>>><<Change in Power Supply Status>> At time t1, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and at time t3, power is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<<Operation of Main Control Board>><Power Supply Voltage Supplied from Power Supply Unit E to Main Control Board> As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from an off level (time t1) to a supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Although the figure shows an example in which the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, this is not limited to this, and the main control board It may be configured such that the time from when power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). In addition, although the example shows a case where the time from when power supply starts to the sub-control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, this is not limited to the case where power supply starts to the sub-control board. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level varies (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) of the time from when power supply starts to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the same as the time from when power supply starts to the sub control board. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it takes a longer time than the maximum value (maximum time) for the power supply voltage to reach the supply level.

Thereafter, a power outage occurs at time t3. Due to the occurrence of this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and from time t4 onwards, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4). becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E maintains a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (maintenance level) (the power-off processing is executed in a situation where the voltage at the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level from the start of execution of the power-off processing (detecting the power-off) (the time from time t4 to time t5) is at least enough time to execute the timer interrupt processing 20 times. (Timer interrupt processing (Figure 32)
It is structured so that it can guarantee the time that can be called and executed 0 times. In addition, in the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is the time required to execute the timer interrupt process at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, the time from time t3 to time t5, The configuration may be such that the time from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs) until the power cutoff process cannot be executed is at least enough time to execute the timer interrupt process 20 times.

Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and reaches the off level at time t6.

<Startup of the main program> The main program executed by the main control board is started at time ta, which is the elapsed time from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 described above is executed.

As described above, if the setting key switch is off in the judgment process of step 1014 in FIG. is started.

Further, in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, if the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt> If the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and if the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 in FIG. A timer interrupt is activated. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T in which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of Occurrence of Power Outage> When a power outage occurs and the voltage continues to drop to a certain level, the power supply unit E outputs a power outage detection signal. The main control board M has an input port into which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when no power-off has occurred, and is a low-level signal when a power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power-off has occurred, depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects power outage in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. 32. Specifically, in two consecutive timer interrupt processes, the main control board M determines that a power-off has occurred if the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times.

In this way, in this example, the occurrence of power outage is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, if a power outage occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the processing in step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the processing in step 1104 in FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power outage can be detected. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power outage may not be detected.

In this way, if a power-off occurs after the main program has started execution, and a timer interrupt is activated by the process in step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process in step 1104 in FIG. , it is possible to detect that a power outage has occurred through interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power outage has occurred, a power outage process shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of sub-control board>><Start-up of sub-program> The sub-program executed by the sub-control board S starts at time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage became constant. By executing this subprogram, the subprogram start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 mentioned above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S can avoid missing commands sent from the main control board M. can be received. In addition, in the figure, the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the main control board M, and the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the sub control board S, are shown as the same time tb, but the time from when power supply starts to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the time from when power supply starts to the sub control board S until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level are different. It may be configured such that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the main program of the main control board M is started. It is preferable to configure the time to be longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board S until the sub-program of the sub-control board S starts, so that the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is The time from when the supply voltage reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started is the time from when the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S side reaches the supply level until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. It is preferable to configure the time period to be longer than the time period.

<<<Second Aspect>>> FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. The second mode is a mode in which the power is cut off before the main program executed by the main control board M starts execution. That is, this is a mode in which the power is cut off at a time before the elapse of ΔT5 from time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

In this way, in the second aspect, the power outage occurs before the main program starts executing (before the timer interrupt starts), so the power outage occurs due to the main program. This cannot be detected, and the gaming machine stops due to the power cut (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power cut-off process shown in FIG.

<<Operation of main control board>><Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board> Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from an off level (time t1) to a supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

Thereafter, a power outage occurs at time t13. Due to the occurrence of this power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and from time t14 onwards, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14). becomes constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and reaches the off level at time t16. For the sake of explanation, the voltage level is assumed to be approximately constant at the maintenance level, but in reality, the voltage level continues to gradually decrease after a power outage occurs, dropping below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operation guaranteed voltage level), and then The voltage level becomes 0. In other words, in reality, the design is such that it takes 20 interrupts or more from when a power-off is detected to when the voltage drops below the guaranteed operation voltage level. Note that the design may be such that it takes 20 interrupts or more from the time the power is cut off until the voltage drops below the guaranteed operation voltage level.

In this way, in the second aspect, execution of the main program is started after a power-off occurs, but the timer interrupt is not activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be at an off level before the main control board M is turned off. Note that if a power outage occurs immediately before the main program starts (for example, the main program starts up after one timer interrupt processing time has elapsed), the timer interrupt processing can be started, and the power is turned off. The process can be executed without any problems.

Although the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated in the figure, configurations applicable to the gaming machine according to this example include (1) Immediately after starting power supply to the main control board M ( For example, a power outage occurs after the time required to execute one timer interrupt process after starting power supply to the main control board M. (2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M Immediately after the voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, after the timer interrupt processing is executed once after the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level), a power failure occurs → main program execution It may be configured as described above, in which the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level before the main program is started (execution of the main program is not started).

<<<Relationship between setting key switch state and power supply state>>> FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the setting key switch state, power supply state, and situation in the first aspect. 89(b) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the second embodiment.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first aspect>><State 1> First, in state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in the normal state, that is, the game is not executed or the game is ready to be played, the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2> In state 2, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4> Next, in state 4, when power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As mentioned above, in the first mode, the power is cut off after the main program starts running, and the main program shown in FIG. A control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, and the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , transition from normal state to setting change mode. Note that in this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, if the setting key switch is set to ``on'' and the ``power supply status'' is set to ``on'', the system will move to setting change mode, and then the setting change switch or start lever will not be operated. This allows the setting values to be changed. Further, by transmitting a setting change start command to the sub control board S through the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, it is possible for the sub control board S to notify that it is in the setting change mode.

<State 5> Next, when the device is in the setting change mode and the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the “power supply state” changes to “off”. When a power outage occurs, the power outage process in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is changed to the return address by the process in step 1902. It is saved in the storage area as .

<State 6> In state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7> In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is "off", and the process of step 1022 is executed. Through the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in state 5, and execution starts from the process at the return address. As mentioned above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the settings change device control process, and by returning, the settings change device control process is immediately executed. be done. In this way, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and when the power supply is turned off, turning on the setting key switch to turn on the power supply shifts to the setting change mode. This is the basic effect when transitioning to setting change mode, but also if you turn off the power supply during setting change mode, turn off the setting key switch, and then turn on the power supply. Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. By configuring this way, even if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode (for example, a power outage occurs at the gaming parlor), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage, and to prevent abnormalities in the gaming machine. It is possible to make it difficult for such movements to occur.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second mode>><State 1> In state 1 of FIG. 89(b), similarly to the first mode, the gaming machine is in the normal state, That is, the game is in a state where a game is being played or a game can be played, the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2> Similarly to the first aspect, in state 2, power is cut off while the setting key switch remains in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4> In state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5> In state 5, a power outage occurs while the setting key switch is in the "on" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second aspect, the power is cut off before the main program executed by the main control board M starts to be executed. Therefore, in the second aspect, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 becomes "on" (for example, when the timer interrupt processing is (After the time for one execution has elapsed), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, before the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. (state 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address saved in state 2 is saved as is in the storage area.

<State 6> Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7> In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. Through the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in state 2, and execution starts from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state, and the next process to be executed in the normal state is executed. In this way, in the second aspect, even if the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply status is turned on, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. If the power supply is turned ``off'', the system is configured so that it will not enter setting change mode even if the setting key switch is turned ``off'' and then the power supply is turned ``on''. . By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the gaming machine is powered on, if the gaming machine is shifted to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not shift to the setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems.

<<<Control of awarding medals and output control of payout sound>> As mentioned above, when a small role is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed), the system corresponding to the winning small role The number of medals that will be paid out will be awarded to the player.

<<Processing for awarding medals>> The process for awarding medals includes a process for adding and awarding the number of credits, and a process for actually paying out game medals outside the gaming machine and awarding them.

<Addition process of the number of credits> When the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50), the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the payout number until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. Add. This process of adding the number of credits is executed by the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process> When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H to award medals. . The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<Aspects of Medal Granting>> Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, there are two modes: only adding the number of credits, only paying out game medals, and starting from the adding process of the number of credits to the game. There are three types of modes: a mode in which the process shifts to the medal payout process (both the credit number addition process and the medal payout process are executed);

<A mode of adding only the number of credits> When the current number of credits is less than or equal to the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits according to the number of paid out cards until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. to add. If the maximum stored number is not reached even after adding up the number of paid-out medals, the process of awarding medals ends with only the process of adding the number of credits.

<Mode of transition from credit number adding process to game medal payout process> When the current number of credits is less than or equal to the maximum stored number, the CPU 100 of the main control board M increases the payout number until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. Add the number of credits accordingly. When the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals after subtracting the added amount of credits from the payout number from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPU 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of only the game medal payout process> If the current number of credits has already reached the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 to payout the medals from the medal payout device H. Payout the number of game medals.

<<Specific Example>> For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a payout number of 5 medals is to be given to a player, first, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is adds the number of credits one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first credit (time t1)) → 49 (second credit (time t2)) → 50 (third credit (time t2)) t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored credits (50 pieces) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any further.

Next, the CPU 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 coins for the added credit from the 5 coins to be paid out. The two medals are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been dispensed at time t7, and ends the dispensing process. .

<<Various times>><Unit processing time for credit addition process and unit processing time for game medal payout process> In the credit addition process by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, the number of credits is increased from the number of credits m to the number of credits m+1. requires a unit processing time a. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2 - time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first) to 49 (second), and the number of credits is 49 (second). It takes time t3-time t2=a to increase the number of credits from 50 (third credit). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is approximately constant.

Furthermore, in the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n+1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6-time t4=c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is approximately constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing (time t1) of addition processing from 47 to 48 (first image) and the timing (time t2) of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second image). This is the difference between the timing (time t2) of the addition process from 48 to 49 (for the second image) and the timing (time t3) of the addition process from 49 to 50 (the third image).

Moreover, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the timing of the start of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the timing of starting processing for the fifth image (time t6) and the timing of starting the addition processing for the fourth image (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined to have a constant cycle. Note that the following regulations and the configuration illustrated in FIG. 90 are all based on the situation that the game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal payout device H and the game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disk D50. The case where game medals are paid out is illustrated.

In addition, the timing of starting the payout process such as t4 and t6 is as follows:
(1) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off when the fifth game medal is paid out. (2) t4 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fourth game medal, and t6 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fifth game medal. (3) t4 is the timing when the fourth game medal is paid out, the second payout sensor H2 is turned from on to off, and t6 is the timing when the fifth game medal is paid out. (4) t4 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 changes from on to off; (4) t4 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fourth game medal; t6 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 changes from off to on; (5) t4 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 turns from off to on due to the payout of medals; t5 is the timing when a part of the game medals that will be the fourth payout is paid out to the outside of the disk H50; Let t4 be the timing when a part of the game medals that will be the 5th payout is paid out to the outside of the disk H50, and (6) t4 is the timing when all of the game medals that will be the 4th payout are paid out to the outside of the disk H50. (7) A configuration in which the payout process is executed every time one game medal is paid out, with the timing t5 being the timing at which all of the game medals that are the fifth payout are paid out to the outside of the disk H50. In this case, it may be configured as described above, in which t4 is the start timing of the fourth coin payout process, and t6 is the start timing of the fifth coin payout process. Note that details of the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings mentioned above are just design values, there may be slight deviations when the gaming machine is actually in operation. It should be noted that the comparison of time values, timing, etc. detailed in 2.1 is a comparison of design values. Additionally, it should be noted that no matter which of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, the configuration can be made such that the comparison of time values described later is established.

<Switching time e from credit addition process to game medal payout process> As mentioned above, if the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, and not all of the number of payouts has been given, , switches to the game medal payout process. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing.

＜＜Comparison of time＞＞

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c> The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the calculation processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the calculation processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. Consists of both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

Note that, as described above, by adjusting the time required to drive the medal dispensing device H, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a. By doing so, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching Time e> The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and it is possible to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. .

Further, the switching time e can also be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. , it is possible to increase the consumption of game medals, increase the profits of the game parlor, and increase the operating efficiency of the game machine.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from the fixed cycle, and the exhilaration when the game medals start being paid out to the medal tray. A sense of anticipation can be given to the game.

It is also possible to make the switching time e match the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to match the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and the process of adding the number of credits and the process of paying out game medals are equivalent medals. By showing this to the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

<<Output of game media imparting sound>> The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S when starting credit addition processing (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of game medals is finished (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20. As mentioned above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and delivers all of the game medals in the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small role to the player. Determine whether it has been granted or not. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination have been awarded, it finishes outputting the payout end command to the sub control board S, and outputs the payout end command from the speaker S20. End the output of the game media imparting sound. In addition, when the game media added sound is configured to repeatedly reproduce (output) a sound with a fixed period, the game media added sound is immediately outputted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be configured to be terminated, or the output of the gaming medium imparting sound may be terminated at the timing when the period of the gaming medium imparting sound that is being outputted is completed at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium imparted sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparted sound data at least once. The unit-applied sound data is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S in advance. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time of one unit imparted sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the unit imparted sound data from the RAM, and from the time it receives the payout start command to the payout end command. By repeatedly reproducing the unit imparted sound data a plurality of times until the game medium imparted sound data is received, the game medium imparted sound is output from the speaker S20.

<First aspect> The first aspect of the game media imparting sound shown in FIG. 90 is an aspect in which the unit imparting sound data is repeatedly reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this manner, the game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. As mentioned above, even when switching from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, the sound for giving game media is output at a constant cycle, so the player does not feel strange about the payout, and the credit It is possible to give the player a sense of security by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process have the same value.

<Second Aspect> Furthermore, the second aspect of the game media imparting sound shown in FIG. After the end, the unit-applied sound data is played back for a time f, and then, at time t4, when the game medal payout process starts, the unit-added sound data is again started to be played. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game media imparting sound is output at a timing different from the fixed cycle, so it is possible to give the game a sense of exhilaration and anticipation as the game medals begin to be paid out to the medal tray. .

Note that while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H, if the game medals in the hopper H40 run out and a hopper error occurs (for example, if it is determined Yes in the process of step 1279), the secondary The control board S stops outputting the game medium imparting sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout becomes possible, the main control board M sends a payout start command to the sub-control board S again, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game media imparting sound. . Note that this is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium imparting sound will continue to be output, but the volume of the game medium imparting sound will be changed to the level of the sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the hopper error is canceled by outputting at a volume lower than the volume (volume may be set to 0), the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound provided with the game medium is output. It may be configured to restore the volume to the original level.

<<<Arrangement of Integrated Circuits on Board>> FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed circuit board MP. A CPU 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, etc. are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) consists of two longitudinal ends ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other and along the transverse direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is installed so as to stand up within the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is installed in an upright position, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end MS1 is located to the left of the short end MS2, and the short end MS2 is located to the right of the short end MS1.

Hereinafter, the longitudinal end ML1 side will be referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end ML2 side will be referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side will be referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side will be referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100> The CPUC100 has an elongated shape, and the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the transverse direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate orientation in order to make the CPUC 100 perform the desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC 100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC 100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 are formed on the main body of the CPUC 100.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is arranged in alignment with the orientation of the IC, which will be described later. When attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce errors caused by attaching the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction.

Further, generally, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer's name are printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that character information such as the model number and manufacturer's name be easily visible when the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPU 100 so that the first pin of the CPU 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPU 100 can be arranged in an orientation where the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily recognized.

Note that when the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC> Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has an elongated shape, with a length in the longitudinal direction of ILL and a length in the transverse direction of ISL. Like the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the work of attaching an IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation in order to make the IC perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the IC are formed on the main body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP such that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the ICs so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, making it easier to attach the ICs to the printed circuit board MP. At the time of installation, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as attaching the IC in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, various types of character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer's name are generally printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart along the longitudinal direction of the IC from the first pin side. It is preferable that text information such as the model number and manufacturer's name of the IC be easily visible while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As mentioned above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC can be arranged in such a way that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also do it.

Note that when the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance> Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The IC has an elongated shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the transverse direction is RSL.

<Connector> A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S etc. via a connector, and is capable of transmitting and receiving various signals.

<Space between CPUC 100 and IC> As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only a resistor is placed inside a predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and no IC is placed. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL of the CPUC 100 in the lateral direction. Various currents (such as currents that change over time, such as high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can become a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, the IC can be placed at a certain distance (for example, length CSL) from the CPUC 100, and the noise emitted from the IC can be reduced. , the operation of the CPUC 100 can be prevented from being affected.

Further, the predetermined length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 may be at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction. Since current flows through the resistor, the resistor can become a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not placing the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor can be placed at a position separated by a certain distance (for example, length RLL) from the CPUC100, and the radiation from the resistor can be prevented. The generated heat can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between height of CPUC 100, height of IC, and height of other components> FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is the highest, the height IHT of the IC is the next highest, and the height RHT of the resistor is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

An attachment tool (not shown) is used to attach the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP. The mounting tool is a tool that holds the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounts it close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is held between the tips of the attachment tools, the tips of the attachment tools are arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is being held. For this reason, when installing the CPUC 100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and space for the tip of the mounting tool must be created to prevent the tip of the mounting tool from interfering with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool will not interfere with other components. The region CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

It should be noted that only the parts less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are placed only in the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and the area around the position on the printed circuit board MP where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. The configuration may be such that components having a height CHT or more of the CPUC 100 are attached to the outside, or the configuration may be such that all components attached to the printed circuit board MP are components less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100.

In this way, by arranging only the electronic components that are lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be brought close. Even with the use of attachment tools, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above example, the main control board M was explained as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPUs and ICs are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the drum board K, and the power supply board E, etc. It can be applied to

<<<Configuration Regarding AT Lottery >>> Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all of the configurations described above when configured to include an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is one in which an AT lottery is possible. Note that this figure does not include multiple gaming states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery, such as a low probability state and a high probability state, but for example, one gaming state such as the high probability state in this embodiment. The system is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only in . Further, as a difference from this embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of BB.

If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the probability of winning when executing the AT lottery, which is provided in order to reduce the amount of data required to execute the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device with no setting difference in lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the same figure, the condition devices for which there is no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replay combinations or some replay combinations), The bell is pressed in order of pressing, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. Although there is a setting difference between the lottery probabilities of losing and common bells (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so that it is not determined whether or not the lottery probability of losing or winning the common bell is different. ing. In addition, it is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is a different area from the RAM area for storing the aforementioned winning numbers and performance group numbers. With such a configuration, the area for storing winning numbers and the presentation group, which are areas in which information regarding conditional devices with setting differences in winning probabilities and information regarding conditional devices without setting differences in winning probabilities are stored separately. An area for storing numbers, an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area where information regarding conditional devices with a setting difference in winning probability and information regarding a conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. can be configured to avoid confusion.

If Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and stores it in the predetermined RAM area (step 1401-2). The data is temporarily stored (will be overwritten) in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area, and the process moves to step 1401-5. Note that even if the answer is No in step 1401-3, the process moves to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right row of the figure will be described in detail. In this modification example, if you win a condition device with no setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed, if you win Watermelon B, the AT lottery type is set to "0", and if you win Cherry, the AT lottery type will be set to "0". If you win Watermelon A, set "1" as the AT drawing type. If you win the replay, set "2" as the AT drawing type. If you win the push order bell, set "2" as the AT drawing type. It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18/256 when the AT lottery type is "1". 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and the order is "0 → 1 → 2" in descending order of the probability of winning the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT counter to a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the initial number of AT games. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT state initial number of games is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the AT initial number of games is not set in the AT state start control process. (If you win an additional AT game number, the AT game number may be added.) Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to the next process (the process of step 1430). Note that even in the case of No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1430).

In conventional gaming machines, the AT lottery includes a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination, and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to the winning combination). However, by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, The process of step 1401-2 corresponds to this), and the lottery process that is executed when a device with no setting difference is won (corresponds to the process of step 1401-4 in the figure). can be executed in one lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

The configuration of a reel-type gaming machine has been illustrated above as an example of a gaming machine, but the above-mentioned configuration can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, junky ball gaming machines, arranged balls, gaming machines, and casino machines. can.

Of the above-mentioned configurations, configurations related to settings such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, setting key switch, setting/reset button, etc. (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) also apply to pachinko gaming machines that have set values. Applicable.

<<<Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to gaming machine according to this example>>> The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration detailed below is applicable to all embodiments.

Regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as the push order navigation. (1) The display of the operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player on the press order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is called press order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "=3", it is possible to instruct the pressing order of "middle→left→right". Further, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction or an instruction display, and a game in which the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game. (2) Displaying on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S (an image suggesting an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player) is referred to as a push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "123", it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of "left→middle→right". (3) Outputting a sound from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S that suggests an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by outputting "Left" when operating the start lever, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. (4) The fact that the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and left stop button lights up, indicating (suggesting) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible. (5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S The lighting (flashing) of the stop button to indicate an advantageous operation mode is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, thereby making it possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

In the following, a push order navigation will be displayed for games in which a push order combination (a win in which the number of coins paid out or the transition mode of the RT state may differ depending on the push order, such as a push order bell, a push order replay role, etc.) is determined as a winning combination. The timing at which the button starts and the timing at which the push order navigation ends will be explained. By determining the push order combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute a push order navigation that notifies the player of the most advantageous stop button operation mode (reel stop order and stop button operation timing). It is configured like this.

<<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>><Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> First, if there is no wait, in other words, the minimum playing time has elapsed (minimum game interval timer The manner in which the push order navigation is executed when a game is executed by operating the start lever when the timer value of M70 is 0 will be described below.

<Configuration 1> First, the configuration in FIG. 94 will be described. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start rotating (executed in step 1260 in FIG. 18). In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation process, "=3" is displayed as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270, "=1": Instructs the push order of "Left → Middle → Right" "=2": Instructs the push order of "Left → Right → Middle" "=3": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" "=4": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Right → Left" "=5": Specifies the pressing order of "Right → Left → Middle" Instruction "=6": The order of pressing is "right → middle → left" is configured as an instruction.

Note that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode. For example, without displaying "=", the right digit (lower digit) Numbers may be displayed only on the right side digits (lower digits), or a display mode other than numbers corresponding to the stop button (or reels) may be displayed only on the right digits (lower digits). In addition, the digits on the right (lower digits) are displayed corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be operated next time, and the digits on the left (higher digits) are configured to display the order of pressing for the entire game. Good too. In such a configuration, the digits on the right (lower digits) can change the display mode each time the stop button is operated, while the digits on the left (upper digits) remain the same regardless of the stop button operation. This is the display mode.

After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40, "123": Instructs the push order of "Left → Middle → Right" "132": Instructs the push order of "Left → Right → Middle" "213" : Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" "312": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Right → Left" "231": Specifies the pressing order of "Right → Left → Middle" "321": " It is structured as if the order of pressing is "right → middle → left".

Note that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode, and may be a display mode other than arithmetic numerals, such as Chinese numerals. , an image of a character other than a number, an image of a symbol, etc. may be used. In addition to the display mode that corresponds to all stop buttons, for example, "1--" that instructs only the first stop (press order navigation that informs that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop). You may also perform a push-order navigation like this.

Note that "display" may mean that all elements to be displayed have completed displaying, or may mean that the elements to be displayed have started displaying. For example, displaying "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" has been displayed on the effect display device S40, or the display of "123" has started on the effect display device S40 ( This may also mean that an effect has occurred at the start of display, etc.). Similarly, "end of display" may mean that all elements whose display should end are no longer displayed, or may mean that a display transition has started to make the elements whose display should end no longer displayed. For example, ending the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the effect display device S40, or it may mean that the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 ends. This may also mean that the section has started to be erased (for example, an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "clearing the display" may mean that all elements that should be cleared are no longer displayed, or it may be that a display transition has been started to make the elements that should be cleared no longer displayed. . For example, erasing the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the effect display device S40, or may mean that the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 is erased. This may also mean that the section has started to be erased (for example, an effect when displaying is erased has occurred). Similarly, erasing the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 means that the effect display device It may be that "1" is no longer displayed in S40, or it may be that a part of the display of "1" has started to be erased on the effect display device S40 (for example, an effect when the display is erased has occurred).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes valid. Note that after the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40, so as shown in the figure, the stop button is not activated. By displaying the push order navigation in front of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the stop button before confirming the push order (mistaking the push order).

Further, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed (display starts) earlier than the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 will be explained. When "Win-A3" is determined as the winning combination, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information as a control command to the sub-control board as a timer interrupt process in step 1622. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command process of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning/replay winning information received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M (as the command process, the CPUSC performs the push order navigation such as step 2360). (Executes push order navigation display processing for display).

Here, the process for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to winning/re-play winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the CPUSC of the sub-main board (sub-control board S) saves command data, performs command analysis processing, The process of sequentially transmitting commands related to the display mode of the push-order navigation from the performance control board (board inside the sub-control board S) is performed, and the display of the push-order navigation is performed after receiving commands related to winning/replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms to send the command according to the mode. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. As an example, the command sent by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is a command related to winning/replay winning information, but this is just an example, and other commands such as commands related to production group numbers may also be used. It may be designed as appropriate depending on the execution timing of the desired effect.

In addition, when displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, since the push order display device D270 is configured to light up dynamically, the timer interrupt processing If the cycle is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, so it takes a maximum of about 10 ms to complete the lighting. As configured in this way, the push order navigation is displayed after the trigger for displaying the push order navigation (for example, operation of the start lever) occurs on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side. The timing of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side is more important than the time until completion (for example, the reception of commands related to winning/replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) occurs until the display of the push order navigation is completed takes a longer time.

Here, a detailed explanation will be given using the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M as a period during which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to advance the game. Note that for the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in this example, only specific steps will be explained to simplify the explanation, but it should be noted that this is not limited to this. For example, if the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 has been operated in the determination process in step 1251, it executes a reel rotation start preparation process in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 corresponds to a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and for example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) according to the minimum game interval timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be guaranteed until the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not fulfilled, and is also sometimes referred to as the minimum gaming time. Next, in step 6114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state in step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the constant speed state of the reel, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process to In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any timing from when the start lever operation is executed until the stop button operation becomes effective. The configuration may be such that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing of .

In this way, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated until the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been explained according to the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. According to the process executed by the CPU 100, start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation is valid). We will stipulate the period separately. For example, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately after the reel rotation start process, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 94, the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S side, and then the sub-control board This means that S executes the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state, and the configuration for displaying the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is configured as follows. Good too. (1) Start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapses → main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → main control board M presses order display device D270 Display the push order navigation with dynamic lighting → Main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to sub control board S → Sub control board S side receives commands related to winning/replay winning information → Triggered by the command, the sub-control board S side executes the drawing process and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the reel rotation start processing and starts the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to the accelerated state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control The board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives a command related to winning/replay winning information → The main control board M is specified to the sub control board S side Send the command → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → Triggered by the predetermined command, the sub-control board S side executes the drawing process and displays the push order navigation on the production display device S40 → The reel drive state Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum gaming time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → Main control board M The push order navigation is displayed dynamically on the push order display device D270 → The main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S → The sub control board S side sends the winning/replay winning information Receives a command related to → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Triggered by the command, the sub-control board S executes drawing processing and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum Game time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Reel drive state is updated to accelerated state → Main control board M dynamically lights up the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 Display → Main control board M sends commands related to winning/re-play winning information to sub-control board S → Sub-control board S receives commands related to winning/re-play winning information → Main control board M sends sub-control A predetermined command is sent to the board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the sub-control board S side executes the drawing process based on the predetermined command and produces the effect. The push order navigation may be displayed on the display device S40 and configured as described above. That is, the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side is determined by designing the time value from when the sub control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to executing the drawing process. Alternatively, the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side may be determined by designing the timing at which the main control board M side sends a predetermined command to the sub-control board S side.

<Configuration 2> Next, the configuration in FIG. 95 will be described. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, the operation of the stop button becomes valid, a command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and "213" is displayed as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, "=3" is displayed in dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed at the timing after the reel rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. executed.

<Effect 1> By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of stop button is valid), for example, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can be pressed. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting sequential navigation is delayed and a player cannot recognize push sequential navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player. can be provided.

<Effect 2> Furthermore, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 can be changed. By making the timings different, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the player can view the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the burden of playing games.

<Structure 3> In the AT state, when a push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the effect display device S40 but also the effect display device S40 is used as a presentation means for notifying the press order. For example, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the pressing order is determined by a lamp provided in the middle panel (middle decorative panel) (hereinafter referred to as the reel window frame lamp D310) or by the sound output from the speaker S20. It is also possible to configure a system that notifies the user of the following information. In configuration 3, when an instruction game is executed, push order navigation can be executed using the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (near the reels), and is composed of, for example, an LED or the like like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, etc. are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S like the effect display device S40. In other words, when executing the push order navigation using these presentation means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the steps based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the presentation display device S40. 2108
By executing command processing (herein referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in step 2250, it becomes possible to execute the push order navigation. Note that it is preferable that the reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position where the player can easily see the reel, for example, above or below the reel window D160 (from the player's perspective, the reel is located at a position where the reels are visible). It is preferable to provide a space above or below the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be explained using FIG. 97. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation start process, "=3" is dynamically displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "=3" is displayed as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts lighting) as a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310. . Thereafter, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit. The timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, saving the command data and performing command analysis processing sequentially, press the navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from receiving a command related to winning/replay winning information to sending a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, immediately executes the lighting process (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process) Therefore, the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control board S side controls the performance display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. When executing the push order navigation, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to display the push order navigation (lit display) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control board M are not limited to commands related to winning/replay winning information, but may also be commands related to performance group numbers, etc.

In this way, by configuring the display of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification can be provided to the player. This can be executed more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the player presses the button in the wrong order).

Note that the order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured to be "press order display device→effect display device→reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to push order navigation to the lamp board after the sub main board sends a command related to push order navigation to the production control board. A command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. and may be different commands.

As mentioned above, we have explained the case where the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed ( (display start) is not limited to this order. For example, examples of variations of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) include "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device", "effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp", It may be configured such that "reel window frame lamp→effect display device→press order display device" or "effect display device→reel window frame lamp→press order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the production control board, the main control board M dynamically displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (display start) by lighting, or a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. The command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing at which the sub-main board sends a command and the timing at which the main control board M displays (starts displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, (1) dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 (2) The push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first. (3) The push order navigation using the effect display device S40 is executed first. The display order (display start) can be changed.

<Effect> In this way, in a situation where the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel By determining the period from constant speed state to when the stop button operation becomes valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be displayed using the lamp. (in this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit), etc., and it is a user-friendly method in which it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation (an advantageous operation mode of the stop button). We can provide gaming machines.

<Configuration 4> Next, as configuration 4, a configuration will be described in which notification of the push order navigation is performed by audio output from the speaker S20. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game. For example, lines such as "It's on the left," "It's in the middle," and "It's on the right" are output as voices from the speaker, and the corresponding stop is announced. Executes push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be explained using FIG. 98. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation start process, "=3" is dynamically displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "It's middle" is displayed as the push order navigation that outputs the sound from the speaker S20 (the first stop operation is to operate the middle stop button). A voice indicating that the Thereafter, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → audio → effect display device", and the timing at which notification of the push order navigation by audio output starts is at the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, saving the command data and performing command analysis processing sequentially, press the navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes approximately 16 ms from receiving a command related to winning/replay winning information to transmitting a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the command content, immediately executes the voice output process (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). (possible), the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S, upon receiving the command, uses the production display device S40 and the speaker S20. When executing the push order navigation, the speaker S20 is configured to output (audio output) the push order navigation before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control board M are not limited to commands related to winning/replay winning information, but may also be commands related to performance group numbers, etc.

In this way, by configuring the speaker S20 to output the push order navigation (audio output) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation, simple notification to the player can be performed more quickly. In addition, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice without looking at the effect display device S40, and can avoid situations where the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (pressing the button in the wrong order). situation) can be prevented.

As above, we have explained the case where the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Push order display device → audio → effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), it may be configured such that it is "push order display device→effect display device→sound". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to push-order navigation to the production control board, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. Okay, the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20. The command may be a different command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Voice → Press order display device → Production display device", "Voice → Production display device → Press order display device", "Production display device → Voice → Press It is also possible to configure the display device as follows: "order display device", "effect display device→push order display device→sound", etc. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the audio control board and the production control board, the main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (display start) with dynamic lighting, or the push order in the command from the main control board M side and the audio from the speaker S20 that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the navigation may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing at which the sub-main board sends a command and the timing at which the main control board M displays (starts displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, (1) dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 The push order navigation is executed first (2) the push order navigation is executed first using the voice from the speaker S20 (3) the push order navigation is executed first using the effect display device S40, etc. The display order (display start) can be changed.

<Effect> In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start timing of the voice navigation in the order of pressing is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → By determining the period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid, for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by voice (in this example, It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that a player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation.

<<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is a wait>> First, when there is a wait, in other words, the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 is a value greater than 0). ) The start lever is operated in the following situation, and then the execution mode of the push order navigation when the game is played will be explained.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

First, in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 in the timer interrupt process, and the push order display device D270 displays "=". Execute the process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting. Thereafter, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a press order navigation on the production display device S40 (the above-mentioned drawing process). After that, the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process, and the main control board M controls the reels until the reel drive state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), a process is executed to dynamically display (start displaying) "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, here, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the performance display device S40 based on receiving the command related to the performance group number. The command that triggers the process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, but may be executed at the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The command to be transmitted from the main control board M that becomes the trigger may be determined accordingly.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a press order navigation on the production display device S40 (the above-mentioned drawing process). After that, the main control board M dynamically displays "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum gaming time has elapsed and the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process. Executes the process of displaying (starting display) when lit. In FIG. 101, if the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes more than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) until the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device The push order navigation in S40 is displayed before the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In addition, if the start lever is operated in a situation where less than a predetermined time (for example, 10ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) remains until the minimum gaming time elapses, or if the minimum gaming time If the start lever is operated in a situation where the The trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side (for example, the main control board M Since the configuration is such that the time from the reception of commands related to winning/replay winning information from the side until the display of the push order navigation is completed is longer, the push order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As mentioned above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been explained, but when the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) This is not the only timing. For example, as a modification of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) in FIG. 99, during the period before the minimum game time has elapsed, the effect display device S40 is The push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the same time on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum game time elapses during which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts). Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40. Furthermore, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270. The display (start of display) of the push order navigation may be configured to be displayed (start of display) at different timings, such as before and after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

<Effect> In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start) → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until operation of the stop button becomes valid). With this configuration, it is possible to make the timing for displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of differentiating the timing of displaying (display start) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, (1) the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is better than that in the effect display device S40. When displayed before the push order navigation Timer interrupt immediately after the start lever is operated and the main control board M determines the production group number based on the winning role (in this case, the push order bell role) By processing (for example, about 2 ms), it is possible to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, so it is a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly informs the player of information related to the push order navigation. can be provided. (2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit like the effect display device S40, Information related to the current gaming status or winning combination is often configured to be suggested on the effect display device S40, so the player can proceed with the game while visually checking the effect display device S40. I'm going to go. By configuring the effect display device S40, which has a larger size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easier for the player to see, to immediately notify the player of information related to the push order navigation, the effect display Even if the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the device S40, the push order navigation can be checked while viewing the effect display device S40, so each time the push order navigation is displayed, other It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can reduce the burden of playing games on players without forcing them to look at a display device. Furthermore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed and the player cannot recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players.

Furthermore, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, it is possible to avoid viewing the two display devices at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the playing burden on the player, in which the player can visually check the push order navigation on an individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. .

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be described. Note that configuration 4 includes a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights up (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the processing to be performed. Thereafter, a process is executed to display (start displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is a timing earlier than that of the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives a command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is faster than the push order navigation. This is because it can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process, and then, before the stop button operation becomes effective, the press order display device D270 displays the press order navigation as " =3" by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp → production display device → push order display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit. The timing is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Note that even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102, if the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time has elapsed) If the main control board M has sent a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device" or There is a case where it becomes "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device". Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it takes about 32 ms to display "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is necessary to wait until the end of the period before the minimum playing time ( For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side) when the minimum gaming time is about 10ms remaining, the push order display The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Also, in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever is operated (for example, when the main control board M is If a command related to the production group number is sent to the sub-control board S side, it takes time for the sub-control board S side to receive the command related to the production group number from the main control board M side, so the push button The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270. As mentioned above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is as follows: start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state →As long as the operation of the stop button remains valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<Effect> In this way, by configuring the display of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, it is easy for the player. It is possible to execute the notification more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the player presses the button in the wrong order).

Furthermore, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by lighting a lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which it is unlikely that a player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be described. In addition, in configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing during a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound from the speaker S20 as a press order navigation saying "It's in the middle!" (as the first stop operation, press the middle stop button). Executes the process of outputting a sound (sound suggesting operation). Thereafter, a process is executed to display (start displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation using audio from the speaker S20 is started is a timing earlier than the timing at which the presentation display device S40 starts. This is because when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the audio output process from the speaker S20 is the process of drawing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed faster. After that, after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating and the stop button operation becomes effective, and the main control board M Previously, a process is executed to dynamically display (start displaying) "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "audio → effect display device → push order display device", and the timing at which notification of the push order navigation by audio output starts is determined by the push order display. The timing is earlier than the device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Note that even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, if the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time has elapsed) If the main control board M has sent a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → audio → production display device" or "audio → production display device". "Push order display device → effect display device" may occur. Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it takes about 32 ms to display "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is necessary to wait until the end of the period before the minimum playing time ( For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side) when the minimum gaming time is about 10ms remaining, the push order display The push order navigation may be displayed (started to be displayed) by the effect display device S40 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the push order navigation is notified by voice.

Also, in the speaker S20, the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) (the main control board M is connected to the sub-control board (a command related to the effect group number is sent to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side, so the push order display device The push order navigation may be announced by voice from the speaker S20 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270.

As mentioned above, the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 is as follows: start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → start of reel rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<Effect> In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum playing time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum gaming time has elapsed → reel For example, by determining the period until the start of rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button becomes valid, it is possible to determine whether the game machine is equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, etc. Even if the player is not looking at the effect display device S40 while focusing on the reels or the stop button, the push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of audio (in this example, the audio output from the speaker S20). Even if the push order navigation is executed in certain situations, the player can recognize the push order navigation by voice while keeping their eyes on the reels or the stop button. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that is unlikely to be unrecognized.

Examples of the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the production display device S40 have been explained with respect to the case where there is a wait and the case where there is no wait, respectively. The timing at which the push order navigation is displayed on each display device is not limited to these. If the period is from the start of operation of the start lever D50 mentioned above, start lever operation → minimum playing time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid, press the order as appropriate. You can decide when to display the navigation. Furthermore, the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is preferably set to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It is. Furthermore, the greater the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40, the more time will be required. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from the time the winning combination is determined until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 as described above, The timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40 is, for example, a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed (if there is a wait) → start of reel rotation (if there is no wait) → reel acceleration. It is preferable to define the period as follows: state→reel constant speed state→period until operation of the stop button becomes effective. By determining in this way, the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 and the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the effect display device S40 can be made different. Can be done. It is possible to appropriately determine the timing to start displaying the push order navigation on each display device within these periods.

For example, during the period from start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation, press order display device D270, effect display device S40, audio, reel An example of the order in which the push order navigation is announced in the window frame lamp D310 is as follows: (1) Press order display device → effect display device → audio → reel window frame lamp (2) press order display device → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Press order display device → Audio → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (5) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio (6) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Production display device (7) Production display device → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production Display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (9) Production display device → Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Production display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio (12) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device (13) Audio → Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (15) Audio → Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Audio → Production display device → Reel Window frame lamp → Press order display device (17) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Production display device (18) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device (19) Reel window frame Lamp → Press order display device → Effect display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio → Effect display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Press order display device → Audio (22) ) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio → Press order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device → Production display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Production display device → Press order Like a display device, press order navigation is displayed as appropriate during the period from start lever operation → minimum playing time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation becomes effective (display starts) ) can be configured to determine the timing at which the

In addition, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is controlled by the sub-control board S. It is also possible to add a push order navigation that lights up (blinks) to suggest a stop button operation mode advantageous to the player using the stop button lamp S60. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in a timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S lights up (or blinks) a stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button that should perform the first stop operation. Execute the process to do so. An example of the order in which the press order navigation is displayed (display starts) with the addition of the press order navigation using the stop button D40 is as follows: (25) Press order display device → audio → reel window frame lamp → stop button lamp (first Only the 1st stop button lights up (flashing)) → Production display device (26) Press order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the 1st stop button lights up (flashing)) → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (27) Press It is possible to configure the sequence display device → audio → stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) and reel window frame lamp at almost the same time → effect display device, etc., but the order here is This is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are turned on (flashing) at the same timing, but it is also possible to configure the system so that the audio from the speaker S20 is output at the same time. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing (push order display device D270) related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270) or the sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any manner depending on the transmission timing of the command related to notification of the push order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the stop button D40. In addition, when performing press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60, instead of lighting (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels, only the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel for which the relevant stop operation is to be performed is turned on. It is preferable to control the display so that it lights up (blinks). For example, when executing the press order navigation of "213": "Middle → Left → Right" by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button D42 (lit) → operating the middle stop button D42 → middle stop Stop button lamp corresponding to button D42 (unlit) → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (lit) → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (unlit) → Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit) → Operate right stop button D43 → Stop button lamp corresponding to right stop button D43 (unlit) Based on the progress of the game, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel lights up. (flashing), configured to turn off.

In addition, although the case where the sub control board S controls the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is described above, the stop Control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be configured to be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push order navigation by controlling the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be explained.

When controlling the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M, a timer interrupt occurs after the start lever is operated and the production group number is determined based on the winning combination (in this case, the pressing order bell combination). Execute the process of lighting (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 by processing (for example, in the first cycle from the determination of the production group number, it takes about 2 ms to process the lighting of the stop button lamp S60) It becomes possible to do so. With this configuration, an example of the order in which the press order navigation is displayed (display starts) in a configuration in which the press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is added is as follows: (28) Press order display device → stop button lamp (Only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (29) Stop button lamp (Only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame Lamp → Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) and press order display device can be configured as almost simultaneously → sound → reel window frame lamp → production display device, etc. However, the order here is just an example and is not limited to this. For example, in (28) to (30) above, the push order navigation based on the stop button lamp S60 controlled by the main control board M side is performed by the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, and the sound from the speaker S20. , is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, but by changing the timing of executing the timer interrupt process for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side, After starting the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310), the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 may be started. The execution timing of the timer interrupt process related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60) or the sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any manner depending on the transmission timing of the command related to notification of the push order navigation (lamp D310, audio from the speaker S20).

<<Configuration related to end of display of push order navigation>> Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. The timing at which the push-order navigation ends can be designed with some degree of freedom, as well as the timing at which the push-order navigation starts, depending on the period during which the player ends the game. An example of the period during which the player ends the game is the timing when the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all the reels are completely stopped and a prize is won, the payout of game medals based on the winning is completed and the game ends.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation is the period of "3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout based on winning completed" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. It is possible to specify any timing. In this example, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 finishes displaying the push order navigation differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is a push order bell or a push order replaying combination.

In configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, it is assumed that the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed, and the effect display device is It should be noted that the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 has also been completed.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the press order navigation on the press order display device D270 ends, and a press order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts). be done. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Here, the push order navigation disappearing effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, in a situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the production display device S40, the right stop button is operated and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned on from off. is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, a command related to the detection is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. By executing the process of erasing the display of "3", a press order navigation disappearing effect that disappears after the display of "3" is transparent will be displayed.

Thereafter, in a situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Here, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 are both terminated by "pressing the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). (detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M side), but in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is earlier than the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display will be erased completely. This is the same as the start of the push order navigation, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub control board S is unable to draw multiple frames. This can be said to be because the completion of the press order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed due to the processing of displaying the .

To explain in detail how the push order navigation ends, in the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 turns on → lights out → lights out completes, and the push order navigation ends, and in the effect display device S40, The press order navigation ends by displaying the order navigation → starting displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect → ending displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect (deletion completion). In this example, the timing when the push order display device D270 starts turning off is referred to as the push order display device turning off, and the start of displaying the push order navigation disappearing effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push order navigation disappearing effect. Note that the turning off of the push order display device may be replaced with the timing when the push order display device D270 completes turning off, and the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends. The timing between turning off the push order display device and displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation disappearing effect may be as follows: the push order display device turns off → the press order navigation disappearing effect is displayed (display starts), or the press order disappearing effect is displayed. (Display start)→The push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearing effect displayed (display start) at the same time.

In addition, although the configuration in which the display of the push order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, the timing when the third stop button is pressed refers to the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected). This is the timing at which the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for the 3rd stop button is pressed from OFF to ON. The state in which the third stop button is released after the button is pressed (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) , the timing at which the switch from on to off is detected (hereinafter also referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It is also possible to configure the timing to be specified. For example, in the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, in more detail, (if the push order navigation ends not at the same time) (1) Interruption on the main control board M side Through the process, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on.→Press order display turns off.→The third stop button is detected from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to → Sub control board S side receives the command → Display (start display) of press order navigation disappearing effect (2) To detect operation of the third stop button by interrupt processing on main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → Push order display device turns off → Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on Detection → Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Display the push order navigation disappearing effect (display start) (3) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → the push order display device turns off → from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side Sends a command related to detection of the third stop button to → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays push order navigation disappearing effect (display starts) (4) The third stop button is activated by interrupt processing on main control board M side. Detects that the sensor for detecting button operation has changed from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side Receive command → display of press order disappearing effect (display start) → press order display device turns off (5) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off. → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order disappearance effect (starts display) →The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off.→The push order display device turns off (6) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The control board S side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (if the push order navigation ends at the same time) (7) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side causes the Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has changed from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S side receives the command → Press order disappearing effect is displayed (display starts) and the press order display device turns off at the same time (8) The sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Detects that the main control board M side is turned off → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order extinction effect ( It is possible to specify that the press order display device is turned off at the same time as the display starts).

Additionally, the display mode of the push order navigation when the first stop button is pressed and the second stop button is pressed, for example, instead of when the third stop button is pressed, will be supplementarily explained. First, in the push order display device D270, after the lighting starts, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is changed from off to on (or from on to off) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side. The light will remain on until it detects that something has happened and turns off the light. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is changed from off to on (or from on to off) by pressing the first stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side). Sends a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → The press order corresponding to the first stop button disappears Start changing the display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation (for example, display of "2") corresponding to the reel that should be stopped next (hereinafter referred to as "display mode of the second reel push order navigation") (also referred to as "change initiation"). The order in which these are executed is: (9) Display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start changing the display mode of the second reel press order navigation (10) Second reel press order The configuration may be either the start of changing the display mode of the navigation system or the display (start of display) of the pressing order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button. Similarly, when operating the second stop button, (11) Display (start of display) of the press order extinction effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button → 3rd reel press order navigation. Start changing the display mode (12) Start changing the display mode of the 3rd reel press order navigation → Display (start display) of the press order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the 2nd stop button Can be configured.

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 105 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, a press order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is set to "3" instead of "=3". That is, the numerical value is displayed in the right digit of the push order display device D270 as a push order navigation, and the left digit is not displayed. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation and the number of acquired tickets.

The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order extinction effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the production display device S40 (starts displaying) be done. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the symbol combinations associated with the push order bell (symbol combinations resulting in a payout of 11 pieces) are stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when you release the right stop button, the payout for the symbol combination that is being stopped and displayed starts, and the press order display device D270 shows "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11" ” The number of acquired coins will be displayed. After "11" is displayed on the press order display device D270 (after displaying the number of acquired coins), the display on the press order display device D270 is ended (displayed non-displayed). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the acquired number of coins display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is changed to numerical values only in the lower digits of the push order display device D270. If the symbol combination for which game medals are paid out in the instructed game is displayed in a stopped state, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the acquired number of medals. There is a risk that a user may misunderstand the push order navigation or the number of acquired tickets. Therefore, by configuring the system so that "0" is displayed between the end of the display of the push order navigation and the start of the display of the number of acquired coins, regardless of the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1 (or 11 pieces), the player can recognize that the display of the number of won pieces has started. Note that the numerical value of "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as a push order navigation.

In addition, the end timing of the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 can be changed from "3rd stop button not pressed (after release)", that is, display of "3" (function of the push order display device) to display of "0". (Function of payout number display device), but it may also be, for example, the timing at which the display on the push order display device D270 completely disappears, ``payout based on winnings completed''. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is made earlier than the press order navigation of the push order display device D270. You can see that it will end.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", and "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" correspond to the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel where the stop operation should be performed. Yes (for example, "1" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the middle reel M52). The right digit "3" corresponds to the push order "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the effect display device S40, as in the previous configuration. It is something. With this configuration, the push order navigation will be displayed in the order of "23" → "13" → "33", and the stop button will be operated according to the push order. At this timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel stop operation is to be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation ("33" in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, thereby ending the push order navigation by the push order display device D270.

<Effect> In this way, the end timing of the press order navigation displayed on the press order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning prize) For example, by determining the period from judgment to completion of payout based on winning, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 can be determined. By making them different, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the burden of playing games.

In addition, the trigger for ending the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the production display device S40) is determined by interrupt processing on the main control board M side when a sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on. If it is specified that the game will turn off (release the stop button), the game will stop even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with high expectations for the outcome of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned from on to off. Here, if the configuration is such that the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned on from off, the expectation that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player will be reduced. Since there is a possibility that the game will be lost, the push order navigation will not end until the stop button is turned from on to off, so that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce expectations.

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 107 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays (starts displaying) the press order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the production display device S40 At the same time, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends. In addition, in this game, the player has won the replay in the predetermined push order, and it is most advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high replay winning probability) is possible to maintain) (for example, a case where a player wins "Regame-D2", which is a 3-option press-order regame where the first stop is the highest profit).

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, release the right stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off) and the symbol combination related to replaying. is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. ).

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 108 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → The push order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts ) to be done. In addition, in this game, the player has won the replay in the predetermined push order, and it is most advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high replay winning probability) is possible to maintain) (for example, a case where a player wins "Regame-D2", which is a 3-option press-order regame where the first stop is the highest profit).

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, release the right stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off) and the symbol combination related to replaying. is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, in the case where configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and configuration 5 in FIG. To provide a game machine that allows even a player who cannot win a prize to determine which small winning combination has won based on the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the end timing of the push order navigation when the push order combination is the push order bell or the push order replaying combination has been explained. In the effect display device S40, the timing at which the push order navigation ends has been described using only "when the third stop button is pressed" as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the period during which the game ends, the timing for ending the push order navigation can be arbitrarily determined if any of the following occurs: 3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button not pressing → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning. is possible. In addition, in the push order display device D270, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning combination is a push order bell or when the winning combination is a push order replaying combination. ing. As an example when the winning combination is a push order replaying combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is set as "when the 1 bet lamp is lit", and the push order display can be performed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 changes significantly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 is the start of the next game, the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell is "3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button operation (pressing) The timing is later than "stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout based on winning completed", and "3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determined → payout completed based on winning → 1 bet lamp" Also, if the lighting timing of the 1 bet lamp D211 is when the 3rd stop button is not pressed, then ``3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button not pressed → when 1 bet lamp is lit → winning Judgment→Completion of payout based on winnings", and the winning combination will be included within the end period of the push order navigation at the time of the push order bell.

Similar to the timing when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is based on 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning. An example of the order in which the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270, effect display device S40, audio, and reel window frame lamp D310 during the payout completion period is as follows: (1) Push order display device → effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (2) Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Press order display device → Audio → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (5) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio (6) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Production display device (7) Production display device → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (9) Production display device → Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame Lamp (10) Production display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio (12) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio →Press order display device (13) Audio →Press order display device→Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp→Effect display device (15) Audio→Effect display device→ Press order display device → reel window frame lamp (16) audio → production display device → reel window frame lamp → press order display device (17) audio → reel window frame lamp → press order display device → production display device (18) audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Production display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio → Production display device ( 21) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device → Audio (22) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio → Press order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device → Production display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Production display device → Press order display device In this way, 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout completion based on winning During the period, it is possible to configure the timing at which the push order navigation ends as appropriate.

In addition, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is controlled by the sub-control board S. An example of the order in which the push order navigation including the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is completed will be described. The process until the end of the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is as follows: The main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off. sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turn off the light (start turning off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned off from on → the main control board M causes the sub control board S side to stop the first stop button in timer interrupt processing. Sends a command related to button operation → Sub-control board S receives the command → Turns off (starts turning off) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button, and also turns off the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the second stop button. The stop button lamp S60 is turned on (lighting starts). (25) Press order display device → Production display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button (third stop button lamp goes out) (26) Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Stop button (the third stop button lamp is turned off), etc. The timing of ending the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is determined by the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the audio, and the reel window frame lamp D310, which executes the push order navigation by turning on or off the lamp. It may be placed before or after the window frame lamp D310. Furthermore, when operating the third stop button, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game will proceed based on <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> and <<Configuration related to display end of press order navigation>>. . A specific example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) until the push order navigation ends is as follows: 1. Display of push order navigation (start of display) Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (start of display) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (start of display) (effect display device S40) 2. From the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation 2-1. Effect display device S40 Display (start of display) of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → End of display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → Display of the second reel press order navigation Change of mode → Display (start of display) of the press order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → End of display of the press order disappear effect corresponding to the operation of the second stop button →Changing the display mode of the 3rd reel push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270 The push order display device D270 is in a lit state. 3. 3rd stop button operation - end of display of push order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push order display device lights out → display of push order navigation disappearing effect corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button (display start) → 3rd stop button End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game progresses. Incidentally, the example described above is just one example, and for example, 1. The display of the push order navigation (display start) may be configured to include audio output from the reel window frame lamp D310 and the speaker S20, and the timing of the display (display start) of the push order navigation and the push order The order in which the navigation is displayed (display starts) is not limited to this. Also, 2. During the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays (starts displaying) the press order extinction effect corresponding to each stop button, and changes the display mode of the press order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. Also, 3. From the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the display end order of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is detailed. It is also possible to specify (further classification can be made by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to visually check the display devices at the same time, and the player can view the press order navigation on each display device at the timing when the press order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player while playing the game. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the production display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning). period), for example, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices This is a user-friendly system that can reduce the burden on players by allowing them to visually confirm the end of the push-order navigation on their individual display devices at the same time the push-order navigation occurs. We can provide gaming machines.

<Display mode when the push order is incorrect> Here, in a game where the push order navigation is executed, the push order navigation when the game is executed in a different push order (or different operation timing) than the push order navigation. An example of the configuration of the display mode will be described in detail. Here, a case will be exemplified in which a player wins the push order bell and a game is executed in which the correct push order is "left→middle→right."

In a situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is pressed as the first stop operation. (The correct press order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and as an interrupt process on the main control board M side, detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has changed from off to on → main control Transmits a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the board M side to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → The sub-control board S side displays all "123" on the effect display device S40 Execute the process to delete. It may be configured as described above. As mentioned above, in a game where the push order navigation is executed, if a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated, on the sub control board S side, all reels (or stop buttons) While erasing the push order navigation corresponding to , the main control board M side is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. Note that the push order navigation on the main control board M side (the push order navigation using the push order display device D270) is performed during the third stop operation (for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side). The sensor is configured to be erased when it detects that the sensor has changed from on to off.

<<Configuration Related to Reel Control and Push Order Navigation>> Next, the configuration related to reel stop control and display control of the push order navigation (effect display device S40) will be described. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

<Configuration 1> First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game related to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay symbol No. 11 is located in the middle row of the middle reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" on the middle reel changes to the push order navigation disappearing effect. Note that the middle reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the middle reel is controlled to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination that will result in a payout of 11 pieces, which is the maximum number of pieces, when the middle reel is stopped in the correct pressing order. In this example, the number 15 bell is configured to stop at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. In other words, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, a slide of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from Replay A of number 11, and the bell of number 15 is stopped and displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so that the

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be explained based on FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> transitions to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game is calculated, and the distance is calculated for a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms). By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning conditional device in the game concerned on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the winning conditional device in the game concerned is constituted. Rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game approach the winning line, the reel is controlled to transition to the reel deceleration state (6) and to the reel stop state (7). do.

After that, as shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 109, on the effect display device S40, the press order navigation disappearing effect of the middle reel is erased (the display is finished), and the middle reel stops displaying the 15th bell on the winning line. Slip control is continued to prevent this. Note that the middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be operated (such as changing the numbers significantly, adding movement to the numbers, making the numbers shine, etc.) ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues to perform sliding control in order to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or before the push order navigation disappears (display ends). This may be done after the navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends).

Thereafter, after the middle stop button continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time, the bell number 15 on the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is the time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. In this example, when a stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation will be displayed before the reel on which the stop operation was performed is displayed as stopped (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured such that it is possible to delete the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the reel has been stopped and to change the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, we have explained the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of pieces slips. In the case where a stop operation is performed at a position, the timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed is after the reel is displayed as stopped. In addition, even if it is 0 frames, the display mode will be changed to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop button operation should be performed, before the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is designed to change. By configuring this way, even if there is a zero frame, the player must operate the stop button after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, which prevents the player from pressing the stop button in the wrong order. can be prevented. Also, it is better to change the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed as early as possible, and even in the case of 0 frames, the timing should be as early as possible. is suitable.

Further, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but the present invention is applicable not only to the push order bell but also to any condition device that generates the push order navigation. Further, as a presentation means for notifying the pressing order, lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, if a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 or the audio output from the speaker S20 is included, before changing the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel on the effect display device S40. to execute the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (if it is a reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel will be lit; if it is audio, the lines corresponding to the next reel will be output as audio). It is possible to configure

In addition, in this example, as a configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 was explained as an example of the effect means for executing the press order navigation. For example, the configuration may include a reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). good. The push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and the push order navigation using voice is "Left", "Right", "Middle" from the speaker S20. The press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is executed by outputting the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off D41.

For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> includes a reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and a stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). ), (1) Reel window frame lamp D310 (1-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the relevant stop operation was performed (1-2) Reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (2) Sound (2-1) Output of sound corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (3) Stop button D40 (3-1) Lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next Turning off the corresponding lamp (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (4) Production display device S40 (4-1) Pressing order corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed Displaying the disappearance effect (end of display) (4-2) Change in the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the stop operation should be performed next The configuration can be defined. The order in which these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) are executed may be determined in any manner. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each production means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → audio → stop button → production display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. (For example, the processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next), or it may be configured by combining these.

In addition, <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example will be explained using FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is explained as an example. However, the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to only the first stop operation. For example, the present invention is applicable even if the second stop operation is performed or the third stop operation is performed. In addition, at the time of the third stop operation, processing corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed (for example, a change to a "display mode that highlights the push order navigation" in the effect display device S40, a reel window frame lamp The process of "lighting up the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed" in D310 is not executed.

<Effect> With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes stop control with the maximum number of frames sliding, the effect display will not be displayed. The end of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button in the device S40 (from the start of display to the end of the disappearing effect), and the change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button to be operated next (highlighted display) (start) can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so there is no chance that the player will accidentally operate the stop button before recognizing the stop button that should be operated next. can be prevented.

<<<<Third Embodiment Medal Addition Processing by Insertion Sensor>>>> Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as credits will be described (Fig. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal slot D170 pass through the input acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path for the game medals, and meet predetermined passage conditions (the passing game medals satisfy the standards, (e.g., no error is determined), the game medals flow downward through a medal flow path DR in a medal selector DS without an error occurring. Further, a first input sensor D20s and a second input sensor D30s are provided further back than the input acceptance sensor D10s, and game medals that meet the dimensional standards and are accepted pass through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When passing through, if it is determined that the coins have been inserted normally, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals, and credits can be added. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s was turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s Information on the time from when it turns on until it turns off, information on the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns on, information on the time from when the second input sensor D30s turns on until it turns off, etc.) It is designed to be supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined by the on/off status of each of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s.

<<<Third Embodiment Timing chart of game medal detection by input sensor>>> FIG. 110 is a timing chart when game medals pass through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. For example, assume that the first input sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second input sensor D30s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. will be supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. Suppose then that the first input sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals (turns on→off) at timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first input sensor D20s detects a game medal to when it finishes detecting the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4ms≦A<183ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, the time B from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the first input sensor D20s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2ms≦B< 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second input sensor D30s finishes detecting game medals (turns on→off) at timing 4 in the figure. The time C from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the second input sensor D30s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4ms≦C<183ms). If so, it is determined that the passage of game medals is normally detected. In this way, it is determined whether the game medals are normally passing through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned on or off. Game medals inserted at any timing when D20s and second input sensor D30s are turned on or off are detected as betted medals, and credits are added.

<<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>><<Configuration 1>> Next, in the third embodiment, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals, and credit addition is performed. An example of the timing will be explained in detail. 111 and 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing related to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. Note that in the flowchart of FIG. 111, descriptions of the same contents as those in FIG. 17 will be omitted (from step 1220 to step 1225 and from step 1232 onwards). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off in step 1226-2 (fourth). (Image diagram in the upper middle part of FIG. 113: The first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first input sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on in step 1226-3 (fourth). (Image diagram shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 113; the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second input sensor D30s). If Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on in step 1226-6 (fourth). (Image diagram shown in the lower left of FIG. 113; the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first input sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that one normal gaming medal has been inserted and starts the credit addition process in step 1226-8 (fourth). It will be done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off (image diagram shown in the lower middle row of FIG. 113). At the timing when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second input sensor D30s, the second input sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF). If Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that one normal gaming medal has been inserted, and for example, if the number of bets meets the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled. Processing such as setting is executed, and the process moves to step 1232.

<Effect 1> In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. Conventionally, credit addition processing was executed at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. If this occurs, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that it is an error, and executes a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100). It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2> Also, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s remains off and only the first input sensor D20s is turned on, the medal input slot is smaller than the second input sensor D30s. To provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud by preventing the first input sensor D20s provided at a position close to the first input sensor D20s from being carried out (for example, clementing), and to provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud. I can do it.

<<<Third Embodiment Subroutine due to input sensor error>>> Also, if No in step 1226-3 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), or step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226 -4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), and step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. judge. Note that the medal insertion errors here include, for example, an input medal backflow error, an error in the number of input medals, an error in input medal retention, etc., and the on/off status (including time) of sensors such as the first input sensor and the second input sensor. Based on this, it is determined whether any error has occurred (occurrence conditions vary depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on detection of on/off of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If Yes in step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), or step 1226-10 (fourth), medal insertion error processing is executed in step 1226-5 (fourth). be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command is sent to the sub side. , and a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1226-14 (fourth). Note that in 1226-13 (fourth), information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-control board side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the There is no need to perform information setting processing. Error processing will be executed depending on the type of error that occurs, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from a state where no error has occurred. , even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the state where the first error (for example, input medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, payout medal retention error). good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the currently occurring error has been resolved. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the currently occurring error flag is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s has been described. It is also possible to detect errors based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s provided nearby, and an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s will be described below. .

<<<Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Insertion Monitoring Counter>>><<Configuration 2>> Insertion reception sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from medal insertion slot D170 pass. It is being The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a suitable game medal has passed, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on, and the signal thereof is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the input reception sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as an input monitoring counter). Then, the main control board M monitors the input at the timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS and the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs with the insertion of game medals during the period 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. . For example, if the second input sensor D30s does not turn off from on, the input monitoring counter does not subtract, and the input monitoring counter continues to increase, an input medal retention error can be detected. Furthermore, if a situation occurs in which the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off before the input reception sensor D10s, and the input monitoring counter becomes negative because the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter is performed first, It is possible to detect the backflow error of inserted medals.

<Effects> In this way, by configuring so that an error determination can be made based on the detection of game medals by the three sensors: the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the input reception sensor D10s, the number of game medals is reduced. It becomes possible to reliably detect various errors related to input, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and furthermore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<Third Embodiment Output of Medal Insertion Sound>>> In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, but when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, An error may occur while the sensor D30s is on (for example, an error in inserted medal retention due to an abnormally long time when the second input sensor D30s is on). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, it is assumed that, for example, an error may occur after the credit addition process is executed. Ru. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition process and the error sound output from the speaker S20 when an error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s will be explained in particular.

<<Structure 3>> First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. To explain in detail, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit of period B, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit of period C, gives 68 ms. In other words, during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes "Medal insertion reception → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command to sub control board side → Set error detection command (if there is an error)" By executing the process as described above, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>> As a modification of timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs the following process: "Set command related to medal input reception → Execute credit addition process → Send command to sub-control board → Set error detection command (if there is an error)" You may do so.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, the medal is released at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is turned on and the second input sensor D30s is turned on → the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on" Processing related to input reception is executed, and a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side by the subsequent timer interrupt processing, and a medal insertion sound is output from the sub control board S side. That will happen. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and the inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medal In order to determine that a retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined period of time or more), the player outputs an error sound related to the input medal retention error. It is possible to confirm the sound of medals being inserted beforehand, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the user is worried that the game medals are not inserted normally due to the inserted medal retention error and that the player has lost money.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, at timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms after the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is intentionally , the configuration is such that commands related to accepting medal insertion are not sent to the sub-control board side. Thereafter, after setting an error detection command based on error detection by the second input sensor D30s, a command related to medal input reception is transmitted to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the credit addition process → detects the error flag → sets the error detection command → sends the error detection command to the sub-control board → sets the command related to medal insertion reception → sub-control By configuring to execute a process such as "Send command related to medal insertion reception to the board side", the medal insertion sound can be made later than the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable to configure the timing for transmitting the command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-side at a timer interrupt process different from that for transmitting the error detection command.

<<Configuration 6>> As a modification of timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be made different. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → sends an error detection command to the sub-control board → sets a command related to medal input reception → executes credit addition processing → sub-control The process may be performed by "sending a command related to accepting medal insertion to the board side."

<Effect> With this configuration, at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on," First, it is determined that an input medal retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and the system is transferred from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. An error detection command is sent, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After that, after the process related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is outputted on the sub control board S side. becomes. If the situation of "first input sensor D20s is off and second input sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an input medal retention error will occur before the medal input sound is output. In order to determine that the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined period of time or more, the player detects an error related to the inserted medal retention error before outputting the medal insertion sound. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can quickly sense that the game medals have not been properly inserted.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, as timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and after the error is cleared. Configure to output. It is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms after the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is intentionally , the command related to medal input reception is not sent to the sub control board side, which is the same as the second timing, but furthermore, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the input error flag in step 1226-15. The system is configured to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the credit addition process → detects the error flag → sets the error detection command → sends the error detection command to the sub control board → (during this period, the error cancellation process is performed). ...→Set error not detected command→Send error not detected command to sub control board side→Set command related to medal input reception→Send command related to medal input reception to sub control board side" By configuring this to be executed, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error is cleared.

<<Configuration 8>> As a modification of timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub-control board→...(error cancellation processing during this period)...→no error detected Set the command → Send the error-undetected command to the sub-control board side → Set the command related to medal input reception → Execute credit addition process → Send the command related to medal input reception to the sub-control board side. Good too.

<Effects> With this configuration, at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on," First, it is determined that an input medal retention error has occurred (because the situation in which the first input sensor D20s is OFF and the second input sensor D30s is ON continues for a predetermined time or more), and the system is transferred from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. An error detection command is sent, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error no detection command is sent to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is ended. After the process related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is output from the sub control board S side. becomes. If the situation of "first input sensor D20s is off and second input sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an input medal retention error will occur before the medal input sound is output. In order to resolve the error and terminate the output of the error sound, the player Since the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error can be confirmed before the medal insertion sound is output, and the medal insertion sound can be confirmed after the error is resolved, the player can play normally after the error is resolved. It is possible to recognize that game medals have been inserted.

<<<Third Embodiment Medal Error Detection by Shoot Sensor>>> Next, as a third embodiment, error detection using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows the passage member (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment) of the medals after passing through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in the path of the game tokens in the medal selector DS. It is a diagram. In FIG. 114, a shoot sensor D40s is provided below the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s is used for normal medal insertion like the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. In particular, the third embodiment is configured to be able to detect errors (for example, inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

Error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be explained in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals accumulate further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the game medal path inside the chute body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the game medal path inside the chute body, the game medals that pass through the path one after another after that. This results in an input medal retention error condition. In the third embodiment, the shoot sensor D40s detects a position corresponding to three game medals from the position where the game medals are accumulated, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

The detection of game medals by the shoot sensor D40s is similar to the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When a game medal passes, it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and its signal (shoot sensor D40s information on the timing when the chute sensor D40s is turned on, information on the time from when the chute sensor D40s is turned on until it is turned off) are supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M determines whether game medals are normally inserted based on information related to the signal detected by the chute sensor D40s and further information related to the signal detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. It is determined that Specifically, the main control board M determines in advance the period from the timing when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting game medals. A comparison is made with a predetermined period (the time that the shoot sensor D40s should detect, hereinafter also referred to as a theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal is detected from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s. The period until it is detected by the shot sensor D40s is compared with the theoretical period, and if the difference between the periods exceeds the range where it is not detected as an error, an error (in the third embodiment, the shot sensor medal is detected) is detected. (retention error) will be detected. Note that the timing at which the first input sensor D20s detects game medals, the timing at which the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals, or the timing at which the first input sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals, and the second input sensor Any timing when the D30s finishes detecting game medals may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<<Third Embodiment Timing Chart of Detection of Game Medals by Shoot Sensor>> FIG. 115 is a timing chart when game medals pass through the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, assume that the first input sensor D20s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second input sensor D30s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. will be supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. After that, assume that the shoot sensor D40s detects passage of a game medal (off→on) at timing 3 in the figure. A period D from when the first input sensor D20s detects a game medal until the shoot sensor D40s starts detection, and a period from when the second input sensor D30s detects a game medal until the shoot sensor D40s starts detection E is calculated by the main control board M, and using these periods as a theoretical period, it is determined whether the game medals are normally passing through the chute body based on the detection by the chute sensor D40s. Also, by providing the chute sensor D40s, it is possible to detect errors that may occur after it is determined that the game medals have passed through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s normally.

<Effects> With this configuration, for example, any error related to the passing of game medals near the shoot sensor D40s (shoot sensor medal retention error) can be detected, and the player can be informed that an error has occurred. It becomes possible to notify. In addition, since the normal passage of game medals by the chute sensor D40s is determined based on information related to the timing at which the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s starts, the first input If the passage of game medals is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, but the passage of game medals is detected by the chute sensor D40s, that is, it is possible to reliably detect errors related to the backflow of inserted medals. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and in turn, a gaming machine that is user-friendly.

<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> Next, as a fourth embodiment, when the game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230, the game medals pass through. An example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 will be explained.

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 will be described for explaining in detail the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341 (described later), and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the locus of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Front View of Medal Returning Member>>> FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal returning member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, game medals that have not been added to bets or credits by the medal selector DS that detects medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and performs simple authentication (in a state where the blocker is off) When returning the game medals (which reached the blocker) to the medal receiving tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path), and are also paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals are configured so that they pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as a second flow path) and are finally paid out to a medal receiving tray D230.

The medal return member D340 has a first channel through which inappropriate game medals detected by the medal selector DS are returned to the medal receiving tray D230, and a channel through which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass. The game medals passing through the two channels pass through the medal return member D340 and merge when flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 includes at least a medal receiving opening D341 that receives the game medals paid out from the hopper H40, and a medal falling surface D342 where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have. Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving opening, and a medal falling surface D342 on which game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have a space surrounded by , and is configured such that game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

The medal receiving opening D341 is configured to communicate with the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving port D341 is open, the game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 can reliably pass through the medal receiving port D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge). ). In the regulation of the length and distance related to the medal receiving opening D341, the starting point is any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal falling surface D342 is formed into a substantially square shape, and the medal non-falling surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342 is also formed into a substantially square shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-falling surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving opening D341 is provided in an inclined shape downward to the right, and game medals that collide with a collision part (not shown) provided in the front view direction in FIG. 116 fall. It is configured to be inclined substantially parallel to the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 and dropped onto the medal falling surface D342 slide down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medals are reliably guided to the medal receiving tray D230. It becomes possible to do so. Note that the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and may be configured such that both the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are not inclined. It should be noted that the inappropriate medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to fall toward the medal receiving tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in a direction perpendicular to the above-mentioned inclination direction of the medal receiving opening D341. .

<<<Fourth Embodiment Side view of medal return member Locus diagram of game medal flow (perspective view)>>> Next, using FIGS. 117 and 118, the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be explained. This section explains the dimensional regulations. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 is provided. First, the thickness and diameter of the game medal are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). In addition, it is preferable that a, which is the thickness of the game medal, is approximately 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and b, which is the diameter of the game medal, is preferably approximately 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. be.

Next, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 where the game medals fall after being dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is determined by c, which is perpendicular to the medal non-falling surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving port in the direction d is the longest distance from the medal receiving port D341 to the edge of the opening of the medal receiving port D341. In the fourth embodiment, the length (in the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, which has a substantially rectangular shape) is e, and the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341 is The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided for the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions: c≧a...Equation (1) b>d...Equation (2) f≧2b...Equation (3) b >e...Formula (4) In the fourth embodiment, game medals can be applied to either 25Φ size or 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying formulas (1) and (3), it is possible to configure the system to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the gaming medal, and the gaming medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H are not transported from the medal receiving opening D341 to the collision part. Since there is a sufficient distance before collision, the game medals will fall freely due to the weight of the game medals, and if the game medals that collided with the collision part fall onto the medal falling surface D342 (the game medals are lying down). In this state), since the game medals to be next paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are out of the area through which they pass, a collision can be prevented.

Next, by satisfying formula (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is lying down or standing) and the subsequent It is possible to configure the system so that the second game medal that is paid out does not collide with the second game medal, and the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving opening D341. It is.

Next, by satisfying formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one of the medals that collided with the collision part It is possible to configure the system to prevent the situation in which the eye game medals bounce back to the medal receiving opening D341.

By specifying the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as shown in formulas (1) to (4), the game medals can be smoothly paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, and the game medals can be smoothly dispensed. It becomes possible to guide the user to the receiving tray D230. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of specifying the dimensions of formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out thereafter. It is possible to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with the medals, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving opening D341.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341 on the outside side of the medal return member D340; It may be configured such that a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H to flow back into the medal receiving opening D341 after colliding with the collision portion.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Locus diagram of game medals flowing down (side view)>>> In FIG. 118, the medals are paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341, and head toward the medal receiving tray D230. The trajectory of the falling game medals will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 depicts the locus of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is ejected from the medal receiving opening D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is ejected from the medal receiving port D341 in the same way as the first game medal, and the first game medal is placed in the front view direction in FIG. collides with a collision part (not shown) that is The interval from when the first game medal is discharged from the medal receiving opening D341 until when the second game medal is discharged can be determined by the rotational speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. The rotation speed can be set arbitrarily, but as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is The second game medal will be paid out from the payout device H, but the timing at which the second game medal will be paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) approximately at the same time as the first game medal collides with the collision part; 2) The timing may be before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part, (3) The timing may be after the first game medal collides with the collision part. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted in accordance with the timing at which the desired game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding (2) above, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and passes through the medal receiving opening D341, the game medal advances in the horizontal direction by more than the diameter of the game medal (above b) ( It is preferable to set the timing after the firing. In addition, the more time has elapsed since the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H, the more It is possible to reduce the possibility that the first game medal and the second game medal will collide. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the interval between the payout times of game medals becomes too long, and the tempo at which game medals are paid out becomes too long. It gets worse. Furthermore, since the internal size (depth) of the gaming machine casing is limited, the f (the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to guarantee distances longer than that. For the above reasons, it is most preferable to set the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H to be the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision portion. It should be noted that it is desirable to configure the system so that the game medals that are paid out after the third one do not collide with each other. It is preferable to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with each other. Note that even if the medals do not collide with each other in the first and second payouts, but they collide with each other in the second and third payouts, they are paid out into the return member D340. It is possible to create an effect that game medals are not easily jammed. This means that in a gaming machine, paying out two coins occurs more frequently than paying out three coins. Further, the collision portion may be configured to be protected by, for example, metal in order to increase the durability of the medal return member D340 against collisions of game medals.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, the first game medal collides with the collision part and then falls onto the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads toward the collision part in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, by being configured as shown in equation (1), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding. Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has fallen onto the medal falling surface D342 is tilted in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal receiving tray D230. is induced. After colliding with the collision part, the second game medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal may collide with each other. It is possible to prevent backflow of medals that collided with the collision part and bounced back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 1>> The second game medal is released from the medal receiving opening D341 toward the collision part, and the first game medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 after colliding with the collision part. At this time, it is configured to satisfy formulas (1) and (3), in other words, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal. In addition, since the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H have a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 until they collide with the collision part, the weight of the game medals causes them to fall freely. , when the game medals that collided with the collision part fall onto the medal falling surface D342 (the game medals are lying down), the game medals that are next paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall out of the area through which they pass. This means that collisions can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>> For example, by being configured as in equations (2) and (4), it is possible to prevent backflow of medals that collide with the collision part and bounce back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent this.

<<Effect 3>> For example, by being configured as in formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, It is possible to provide a game machine that can prevent a situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<<Effect 4>> The first game medal that fell onto the medal falling surface D342 falls from the medal falling surface D342 and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230, and the second game medal As shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 119, the medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 at approximately the same position as the position where the first game medal fell. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to accumulation in the vicinity of the medal receiving opening D341. We can provide gaming machines.

<<Effect 5>> Since the collision part where the game medals dispensed at high speed from the medal dispensing device H collides has a shock-absorbing material that softens the impact, it is possible to prevent damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with the following.

<<Effect 6>> Game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the initial momentum of the dispensing, resulting in collision between the game medals (return from the medal selector DS) Collisions between game medals and game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, collisions between game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, etc.) occur, and the medal receiving tray D230 is not rhythmic. It is possible to prevent game medals from being lost to other users, and to provide a user-friendly game machine.

Note that the collision part with which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide may be a part of the front door DU, a part of the medal return member D340, or only the collision part may be separated. It may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a body member.

In addition, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide has a plane shape that is approximately perpendicular to the medal falling surface D342. It is sufficient that the game medals collide with each other and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, the medal falling surface D342 has a curved shape and plays the same role as the collision part. Alternatively, any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision part. Further, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Payout Device>>>><<<Timing Chart of Drive Control of Fifth Embodiment Medal Payout Device>>> Next, as a fifth embodiment, medal payout device H The drive control will be explained. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be explained using FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart related to the detection of the hopper motor H80 that is driven when game medals are paid out from the medal payout device H, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2. The details of the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 will be described later, but for convenience of explanation, the first dispensing sensor H10s in FIG. 4 → the second dispensing sensor H2, the second dispensing sensor H2 in FIG. Sensor H20s → first payout sensor H1, and in the initial position where game medals are not being paid out (initial position when the disc is not rotating), the first payout sensor H1: on, and the second payout sensor H2: off. It has become. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is in an on state when the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are released by the release biasing means H70. The game medals are paid out by displacing and flowing down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. In the fifth embodiment, the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 are detected to be on or off, for example, based on the displacement of the discharge urging means H70. Specifically, at timing 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on when the release biasing means H70 is not displaced to the position where game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating the state is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the discharging biasing means H70 starts to be displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out, and as the discharging biasing means H70 starts to move from the initial position, the main control controls the signal indicating that the first dispensing sensor H1 is in the OFF state. It is transmitted to the board M (the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off). At timing 2 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced to the position for dispensing game medals (referred to as the dispensing position in the fifth embodiment), thereby providing a signal indicating that the second dispensing sensor H2 is in the on state. is transmitted to the main control board M (the second dispensing sensor H2 is turned from off to on). Then, at timing 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medals is completed, and the release biasing means H70 starts to move back to the initial position, thereby controlling the main control of the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the OFF state. It is transmitted to the board M (the second dispensing sensor H2 turns from on to off). Then, at timing 4 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 is again displaced to the initial position, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the first dispensing sensor H1 is in the on state to the main control board M (first dispensing sensor H1 goes from off to on). In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from timing 1 to timing 2 falls within a predetermined range A (A<26ms), and the period from timing 2 to timing 3 falls within a predetermined range B (9ms≦ B<60ms), and by detecting that the period from timing 3 to timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9ms≦C<60), it is determined that the medal dispensing device H is functioning normally. It is determined that game medals will be paid out.

<<<Fifth Embodiment Medal Payout of the Medal Payout Device ~ Stop of the Medal Payout Device>>><<Configuration>> Next, using FIG. 121, start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment. A series of steps up to the stop of the medal payout device H will be explained. First, referring to FIG. 121, in order to briefly explain the series of steps from the payout of game medals to the stoppage of the medal payout device H in the fifth embodiment, unnecessary medals are added to the configuration of the fifth embodiment. The structure related to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of the disc H50 that is rotated when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disk H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger in size than the game medals, and the disk H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medals, and the game medals are moved under the disk H50 by the rotation of the disk H50. By moving, game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not driven, and the first dispensing sensor H1 is in an on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is defined as the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70, and for clarity of explanation, an initial position (disc H50) before rotation of the disc H50 is provided on the outer periphery of the disc H50. do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of the disc H50 every time a game medal is paid out. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and further explanation will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that the initial position (disk H50) has been rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by the angle A before the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the dispensing position. Furthermore, the disk H50 does not rotate until the ejection biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after dispensing the fourth game medal, the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position, but since the disk H50 is not rotating during this time, the fourth game medal It can be seen that the fourth game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where it was paid out, in the same way as when it was paid out.

Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medals is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disk H50 stops, but the initial position (disk H50) is a position shifted by an angle B in the rotational direction from the position where the fifth game medal was paid out. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that, especially when dispensing the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not reach a constant speed state immediately from the start of driving, but takes a predetermined time to reach a constant speed state. It takes. In other words, if the discharge biasing means H70 is at the initial position when dispensing the first game medal (hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state to a constant speed state), then the second and subsequent game medals (hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state) Compared to the case where game medals are paid out, there is a delay due to the fact that the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state.

Here, the process from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out will be described in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 changes from a stopped state to an accelerated state and then to a constant speed state. Here, the rotational speed in a constant speed state is assumed to be A (m/t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to constant speed A, and the average rotational speed in the period from speed 0 to constant speed state (period of acceleration state) is expressed as B (m/t ), then B<A. Therefore, the average rotational speed C (m/t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out satisfies B<C<A.

Next, the process from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out will be explained in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, it is in a constant speed state from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. It will remain as it is. Therefore, the average rotational speed from when the first game medal is paid out until when the second game medal is paid out is A.

As mentioned above, the average rotational speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is higher than the average rotation speed C from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Since the average rotational speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out, and the first game medal are If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the time a medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the distance from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is played is the same. The time required until the medals are paid out is longer than the time required from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out in the game medal payout process, the disk H50 is held at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, the rotation direction is shifted by an angle B) and then stopped (rotation distance becomes longer). With this configuration, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be reduced to two times after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates until the second game medal is paid out (the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out, etc. is also the same distance) ), the time required from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made shorter than the time required from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out. This makes it possible to approximate (approximate) the time required for the medals to be paid out, and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can play the game without feeling any discomfort.

The width of the deviation in the rotational direction (angle B) when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80. During this period, by considering the difference between the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state, the ejection urging means H70 is activated to eject the disk H50 after the hopper motor H80 is driven. It is determined how far the rotational direction should be shifted from the initial position before stopping. The difference between the width of the rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the width of the rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state corresponds from a position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80 to a dispensing position of the discharge urging means H70. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position. It should be noted that even if there is a deviation in the rotational direction by angle B, the system is configured so that the detection of game medals by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the timing chart in FIG. Based on this, game medals are detected.

<<Effects>> With this configuration, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out to a player who receives a payout of game medals, the player receives the payout of game medals at approximately constant intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) game medals do not collide with each other. It can be constructed so that no jams occur, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, by configuring the disc H50 to shift by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotational direction and stop after the last game medal is paid out, unauthorized instruments can be removed from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation where game medals are illegally obtained due to intrusion.

<<<<Sixth Embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and sub-control board S is disabled>>>> Next, as a sixth embodiment, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disabled. We will explain the process when this occurs. The case where communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible is especially assuming that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side cannot be sent. There is. For example, in the game progress control process shown in FIG. 16, the main control board M sends various commands related to the game to the sub-control board based on the progress of the game, etc. As a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side at a predetermined time period (T in this example, but the time is set to about 2 ms, for example). is configured to send. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute effects based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and although the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, it is possible to receive commands from the main control board side. It is configured so that it is impossible to send commands to. The gaming machine has a main control board M and a sub-control board S each having programs related to execution processing (the program held by the main control board M is called a main-side program, and the program held by the sub-control board S is called a sub-side program). For example, the sub-control board S has a sub-side program configured to execute a performance using reception of a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. In other words, under a situation where commands cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S is unable to execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. A situation where the sub control board S cannot receive commands from the main control board M may occur, for example, due to poor contact of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. There may be a problem. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, it is configured so that the main side program of the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, can be executed. The game itself related to the main program is configured to be executable even if communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible. In addition, if communication is restored between the main control board M and sub-control board S from a situation where communication is disabled between the main control board M and the sub-control board S, the progress status of the program on the main side will be changed. Based on this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is sent from the main control board side to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to processing after communication is restored from the main control board M. Execute processing based on. In the following, using FIGS. 122 to 126, when communication with the sub control board S becomes impossible while executing various commands on the main control board M, the main control board M and the sub control board An example of processing performed by the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment When the command and channel are one-to-one>>> FIG. 122 shows the process related to payment The flow of the process is shown in chronological order as an example of the process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during execution. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, starting from the Nth game, and processing is performed over the N+1 game. In the sixth embodiment, as a process performed by the main control board M, in particular, a command based on the progress of the game is sent to the sub-control board S, and as a process performed by the sub-control board S, commands are received from the main control board M. One set of processing (one order in the sixth embodiment) is the execution of effects based on the commands. Note that the sub-control board S does not execute the effects based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may execute the effects based on the received commands or may not execute the effects. be. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub control board S executes an effect in response to each command sent by the main control board M, but when executing an effect based on the reception of each command, Please note that in some cases, the performance may not be executed. In a situation where one or more credits exist, when the payment button is operated to perform credit payment, the speaker S20 outputs a payment sound corresponding to the payment of game medals from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound during payment is a channel that corresponds only to the sound during payment. For example, the sub-control board S executes the performance based on commands received from the main control board M. In particular, when executing a process of outputting audio from the speaker S20, The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. In other words, audio is output from the speaker S20 from the audio channel corresponding to the received command. Note that the command and the audio channel do not need to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to starting payment, a plurality of commands related to detection of a predetermined error, etc.) may be associated with one audio channel. With this configuration, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the system to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>> FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M sends a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment is It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of payment, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, communication may be disconnected due to poor connection of the harness etc. that electrically connects the main control board M and sub-control board S, etc. The cases where communication is disconnected are not limited to this. Any situation may be applicable as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the completion of payment to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M does not complete the payment. It is not possible to send a command related to the termination to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment. Note that while the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands for next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, and receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel on which the player first performs the stop operation among the plurality of reels) is received, the main control board M controls the first reel. A command related to acceptance of a stop operation is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation (the second reel is the reel on which the player performs the second reel stop operation among the plurality of reels), the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the second reel stop operation, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 8, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel on which the player performs the stop operation third among the plurality of reels), the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. Based on the command from the control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a voice command that determines the winning combination (for example, the push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out in the Nth game, and performs a reel stop operation. A command related to the case where the symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed (in the sixth embodiment, it is referred to as a "winning command") etc. is transmitted (as a command for the next processing of the N game). It is also possible to configure

In order 9, by determining that all reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11. As order 10, similar to order 1 for the Nth game, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound during payment that is output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound during payment that was output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by sending a command from the main control board M to the sub-control board S based on the detection of the operation of the payment button in the N+1st game, the sub-control board S receives the payment for the N+1st game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the output of the sound during payment is started, while the output of the sound is ended during payment regarding the Nth game (As a process of the sub control board S, Output of sound → Receive command related to start of payment for the N+1 game → End output of sound during payment for the N+1 game → Start output of sound during payment for the N+1 game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, and issues a command related to the completion of payment. Send to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound during payment for the N+1 game.

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game due to an error, it is possible to temporarily shut off the power to the game machine in response to an error. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the output of audio can be terminated while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing When the command and channel are not one-to-one>>><<Configuration 2>> Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are not one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment The channel is assumed to support not only commands based on the detection of operation of the checkout button, but also other commands (here, it is referred to as "error detection command based on detection of door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the completion of payment to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M does not complete the payment. It is not possible to send a command related to the termination to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment. Note that while the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, but the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands related to next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to completion of payment from the main control board M. Since the message cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to medal insertion reception has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, and receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to termination cannot be received, the output of the sound during checkout is not ended and the output of the sound during inspection continues. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 8, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game).

In order 9, by determining that all the reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, as the N+1 game, the process proceeds to order 10. Assume that in order 10, a predetermined error has occurred. The error at this time will be explained using a door opening error as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and it can be any error such as a loading error, a dispensing error, a loading reception sensor retention error, etc. good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred, particularly because the front door DU is open, it sends an error detection command to the sub control board S by detecting the door opening error flag. The sub control board S performs processing to output a door open error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving the error detection command by detecting the door open error flag. Note that here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the payment button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, the sub-control board S receives an error detection command by detecting the door open error flag in the N+1 game while the output of the sound during payment continues from the N-th game. It is configured to end the output of the sound during payment and start outputting the door open error notification sound in the N+1 game.

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while executing a process that involves the output of audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, when an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with multiple commands such as commands related to error detection, the error notification sound is reliably output and the game A user-friendly game machine that can reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, and that can terminate audio output while the game is progressing once communication between both parties is restored. can be provided.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during the period when the minimum gaming time has not elapsed When the command and channel are one-to-one>>><<Configuration 3>> Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. In particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible during a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the reels start rotating. The flow of processing in this case will be explained. First, as processing order 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation (herein referred to as a wait sound) from the speaker S20. <<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed When the command and channel are one-to-one>>, a wait sound is output. The audio channel supports only commands related to start lever operation, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the wait sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, communication may be disconnected due to poor connection of the harness etc. that electrically connects the main control board M and sub control board S, etc. The cases where communication is disconnected are not limited to this. Any situation may be applicable as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the wait sound, the main control board M has started a state in which it is ready to start rotating the reels based on the start lever operation (here, a state in which the reels are ready to start rotating) has started. By determining that the reel rotation start standby state is started, the sub control board S sends a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. The device is configured to execute processing for terminating sound output.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot send to the sub-control board S a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. Note that while the main control board M is executing processing related to starting the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state. However, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

After the main control board M completes the processing related to starting the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has finished the process related to starting the reel rotation start standby state. Then, a command related to the next process of the Nth game is set.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 4, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 5, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 6, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the third reel stop operation based on receiving a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to accepting the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, the command related to stopping the stop display symbol that is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the display symbol is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command to output audio based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game).

In order 7, by determining that all reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub control board S. Based on receiving the command related to stopping the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving a command from the main control board M to start the standby state for starting reel rotation. Since it cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state, and is a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation, from the time when game medals are inserted in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed. During the period, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 8 and order 9. In order 8, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and also causes the main control board M to start rotating the reels for the Nth game. Since the command related to starting the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to medal insertion reception has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation. At this time, the wait sound output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the wait sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state for the N+1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S can control the reel rotation for the N+1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of the start standby state, the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game starts, while the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game ends (as a process of the sub control board S, the output of the wait sound related to the Nth game → Receive command to start reel rotation start standby state for N+1 game → End output of wait sound for N+ game → Start output of wait sound for N+1 game).

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game due to an error, it is possible to temporarily shut off the power to the game machine in response to an error. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the output of audio can be terminated while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process When the command and channel are not one-to-one>>><<Configuration 4>> Next, regarding FIG. 125 Explain in detail. In particular, the flow of processing will be described when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible while game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. First, as processing order 1, when a winning combination for which game medals are paid out in the Nth game (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. A command related to the start of medal payout is sent to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the payout of game medals (herein referred to as medal payout sound) from the speaker S20. In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process, when the command and channel are not one-to-one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only commands related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 but also other commands are supported (herein, "commands related to start lever operation"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, a command related to the end of the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, and by the sub-control board S receiving the command related to the end of the payout of medals from the hopper H40, It is configured to execute a process of terminating the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M It is not possible to send a command related to the end of medal payout to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that while the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out in connection with the winning, and while the determination of whether the game medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning are to be paid out from the hopper H40 is completed, the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, The processing performed by the control board M is progressing.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and after determining that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning has been paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M and the sub-control Restore communication with the board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of medal payout from the main control board M, but the main control board M pays out from the hopper H40 the number of gaming medals to be paid out due to the winning. Therefore, the processing for the Nth game is completed, and the command related to the N+1th game is set.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 3 and order 4. In order 3, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and at the same time, the main control board M finishes dispensing medals for the Nth game. Since the command related to this cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state. Here, as described above, the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, while the output of the medal payout sound continues from the Nth game, the sub-control board S receives a command related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation in the N+1st game, thereby issuing medals in the Nth game. It is configured to end the output of the sound and start outputting the wait sound in the N+1 game.

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, by associating the command with multiple commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, it is possible to end the audio output while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process When the command and channel are one-to-one>>><<Configuration 5>> Next, regarding FIG. 126 Explain in detail. In particular, the main control board M and the sub-control board S during a predetermined period (here, until the reels start rotating (acceleration processing is performed)) from when game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be explained. First, as processing order 1, when a winning combination for which game medals are paid out in the Nth game (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. A command related to the start of medal payout is sent to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In <<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of the payout process When the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the start of medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. The system is configured to execute processing for terminating the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M A command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that while the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and finishes determining whether the game medals should be paid out from the hopper H40 due to the winning, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning. The processing performed by the control board M is progressing.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds from order 3 to order 10. As order 3, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M sends a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S, but the main control board M and the sub-control board Since the communication with S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send to the sub control board S a command related to accepting medal insertion. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but it does not finish outputting the medal payout sound. Continue outputting the medal payout sound. In other words, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is in a state where it cannot receive commands related to the end of medal payout and commands related to medal input reception from the hopper H40. Therefore, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

As order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S, but the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is Since the main control board M is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, so it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, and at the same time, the sub-control board S cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation. Continue outputting the payout sound. In other words, since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is unable to send commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to receiving medal input, and commands related to the start lever operation. Since such a command cannot be received, only the medal payout sound continues to be output.

As order 5, the main control board M sends a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, and therefore cannot output the wait sound. Continue outputting. In other words, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is unable to send commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to medal input reception, and commands related to start lever operation. Since the command and the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal input reception, a command related to start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation. However, the main control board M determines that the reels are ready to start rotating based on the start lever operation, and sets a command for the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 7, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now in a state where it is possible to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 8, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 9, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. Note that the next process for the N+1 game is a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in order to provide a concise explanation, but during this time the main control board M sends the command to the sub control board S as follows: For example, it is also possible to configure the system to transmit a command related to stopping the stop display symbol or a command related to winning a prize.

As order 10, when it is determined that a prize is won by a winning combination (for example, a push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out in the N+1 game, and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the A command related to the start of paying out game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1st game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S transmits the command to the hopper H40 in the N+1st game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is ended (as a process of the sub control board S, the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is Output of medal payout sound → Receive command to start medal payout from hopper H40 for N+1 game → End output of medal payout sound for N+game → Start output of medal payout sound for N+1 game Become).

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game due to an error, it is possible to temporarily shut off the power to the game machine in response to an error. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the output of audio can be terminated while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties.

<<Configuration related to the number of entries applicable to this example>> Here, the configuration regarding the number of entries for internal lottery applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the following configuration is applicable to all embodiments in this example.

First, using FIG. 127, the configuration related to the numerals applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not activated> The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has type 1 BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and type 2 BB (sometimes referred to as MB). (The symbol combination that activates the 1st type BB after winning is a role that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as the 1st type BB role). It has a condition device) and "1st type BB + cherry" (a conditional device that causes the 1st type BB combination and cherry to be won twice). In addition, as a role related to 2nd type BB (this is a role in which the symbol combination in which 2nd type BB is activated can be stopped and displayed after winning, and is sometimes referred to as 2nd type BB role), "2nd type BB alone" (2nd type BB alone) It has a condition device in which the BB combination is won alone) and a condition device in which the second type BB + cherry is won multiple times.

In addition, there are four types of winning combinations (combinations with symbol combinations that pay out game medals when stopped and displayed): Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry. (10400/65536 won) is sometimes called the main minor prize.

``When BB is not in operation'' shown at the top of the figure is a table regarding the numbers set in a state in which type 1 BB and type 2 BB are not in operation (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state, etc.). The "number of coins inserted" is the number of coins inserted when it is assumed that the game is executed with a bet of 3 coins in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is the number of coins inserted when the 1st type BB is in operation and the 2nd type BB is in operation. Although the number is 2, the "number of inputs" is 3. In addition, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals that will be paid out when the "number of inputs" is 3. For example, in a game when type 1 BB is activated, a bet of 2 medals will result in a payout of 15 medals. However, since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5".

The "set number" is a set number determined by an internal lottery for each conditional device, and the denominator is 65536. Moreover, "probability" is the probability that the conditional device is determined by internal lottery.

“Number of games” is the number of games required to calculate various expected values described below. For "Type 1 BB alone", "Type 1 BB + Cherry", "Type 2 BB alone", and "Type 2 BB + Cherry", in the game where you win Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB, you can win Type 1 BB or Type 2 BB. The "number of games" is 1 because this example shows a case in which the symbol combinations related to are stopped and displayed. In addition, for "1 type BB total", after winning "1 type BB alone" or "1 type BB + cherry", the 1 type BB is executed after the symbol combination that will activate the 1 type BB stops displaying ( The "number of games" is 24 because this is an example of a case in which the game is completed. In addition, for "2 types of total", after winning "2 types of BB alone" or "2 types of BB + cherry", the 2 types of BB is executed after the symbol combination that will activate the 2 types of BB stops displaying ( The "number of games" is 8 because this is an example of a case in which the game is completed.

The "expected number of coins inserted" is the expected value of the number of coins inserted per game, taking into account the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of coins inserted x probability x number of games." In addition, the "expected number of payouts" is the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game, taking into account the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

Note that the configuration in the same figure may be applied to the case where the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1> This is a game method in which the game is executed in a game method that provides the highest profit for the player, and in games where the player wins a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry, which is not a push order combination such as a push order bell. , The game is executed in a stop operation mode (operation mode of the stop button, such as the order of pressing the stop buttons, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.) that stops and displays (makes a prize win) a symbol combination with a payout of game medals. In addition, in a game in which a player wins a push order combination such as a push order bell (although not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination), the stop operation mode that results in the highest number of payouts is selected. and run the game.

<Game method 2> In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry, which is not a push order combination such as a push order bell, is won, a stop operation mode (to cause a prize win) to stop and display a symbol combination that pays out game medals ( The game is executed according to the operation mode of the stop button, such as the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc. In addition, in games where you win a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, it may be configured to have a push order combination), the game will be randomly selected regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (randomize the order of pressing the stop buttons and the timing of the stop button operations). Note that "random" means, for example, when it comes to the order in which the stop button is pressed, all 6 kinds of press orders are selected at an equal rate, and when it comes to the stop timing, all 20 frames of stop operation timing are selected at an equal rate. It is to be.

"Inside Medium" is a game after winning either "1st type BB alone", "1st type BB + cherry", "2nd type BB alone", or "2nd type BB + cherry", and 1st type BB Or a game in which the symbol combinations that activate the 2nd type BB and symbol combinations such as bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays do not stop and display (in situations where the winning of the 1st type BB or 2nd type BB is carried over) (games that did not win small roles or replays). In the same figure, at 290/65536, a game in which the winning of the first type BB or the second type BB was carried over and the winning of the small role or replay was not executed was executed, and the "expected value of number of inputs" was approximately 0. .013275146, and the "expected number of payouts" is 0.

<Type 1 BB in operation> "Type 1 BB in operation" shown in the second row from the top of the figure is a table regarding the position number when the type 1 BB is in operation. When the first type BB is in operation, the prescribed number is two, and the configuration is such that a bell, a watermelon, a symbol, or a cherry can be won without winning. Furthermore, the "number of payouts" for all of the bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries is 15, making the bell the most likely to be won (easily determined). Further, one or more (or all) of the "placed numbers" for winning watermelon, symbols, and cherries may be configured to be the same as "when BB is not activated". As mentioned above, in games when type 1 BB is in operation, a bet of 2 coins results in a payout of 15 coins in all games, so the expected number of payouts when the specified number of coins is 3 ("When the BB is not activated") ``Number of payouts'' for ``1 type total'') is 22.5.

<Type 2 BB in operation> "Type 2 BB in operation" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table regarding the number of positions when the type 2 BB is in operation. When the 2nd type BB is in operation, the specified number is 2, and when the game is executed in the specified stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right") , is configured so that only the symbol combinations related to the bell are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the "number of payouts" when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed is 15. As mentioned above, in games when the 2-type BB is in operation, a bet of 2 coins results in a payout of 15 coins in all games. ``Number of payouts'' for ``Total of 2 types'') is 22.5.

<While BB is not operating> The “BB is not operating” will be described in detail again. "No replay" refers to four types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry, and "Replay included" refers to five types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, Cherry, and Replay. It shows. The "winning OUT" in "no replay" is the sum of the expected payout numbers of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and is approximately 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning and winning ball rate" in "no replay" is calculated as "the sum of the expected value of the number of payouts (win OUT)" and "the sum of the expected value of the number of balls thrown in for bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". It is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the ball payout rate that is the sum of the winning combinations, and is approximately 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" in "re-game included" is the sum of the expected number of payouts for bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and re-games, and is approximately 1.649246216. Although the game medals are not actually paid out even if the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed, if a game is executed with a bet of 3 coins and the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed, Since an automatic bet for three coins is executed, the "number of payouts" related to the replay is three. In addition, the "winning and winning ball rate" for "re-play included" is the sum of "the expected value of the number of payouts (win OUT)" and "the sum of the expected value of the number of balls put in for bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and re-play." It is the value obtained by multiplying the value divided by ``value'' by 100, that is, the ball payout rate that is the sum of winning combinations and replays, and is approximately 170.5%.

The "1 type total ball rate" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts for the "1 type total" by the expected value of the number of balls put in, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%. Further, the "total ball rate of 2 types" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts of the ``total of 2 types'' by the expected value of the number of balls put in, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values> Here, when the above-mentioned values are compared, the following relationships are obtained. (1) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for "No replay" (Win OUT) (2) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for "Re-play included" (Win OUT) (3) Expected number of payouts for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for main minor role (4) "Internal medium" "Expected number of inputs" < "Expected number of inputs" of the main minor role (5) "Expected number of inputs" of "Internal medium" < "Expected number of inputs" of "Replay"

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (1) above, by designing so that the "expected number of payouts" for "two types combined" < the "expected number of payouts" for "no replay", it is possible to It is possible to make the "expected number of payouts" of small roles higher than that, and even when the 2nd type BB is in operation, it is not during BB operation (bonus is in operation) but when BB is not in operation (bonus is not in operation). This makes it easier for the player to feel the situation, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special situation.

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (2) above, by designing so that the "expected number of payouts" for "two types combined" is less than the "expected number of payouts" for "replay included", it is possible to It is possible to make the "expected number of payouts" of small roles higher than that, and even when the 2-type BB is in operation, it is not during BB operation (bonus is in operation) but when BB is not in operation (bonus is not in operation). This makes it easier for the player to feel the situation, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special situation.

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (3) above, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of "2 types total" < "expected number of payouts" of the main small role, the main small role The "expected number of payouts" of the winning combination can be increased, and even when the 2nd type BB is in operation, it is possible to make it possible to make the BB inactive (bonus inactive) instead of BB in action (bonus in action). It becomes easier for the player to feel the situation, and the player can play the game without being conscious of the special state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine having one or more of the above configurations (1) to (3), when the 2nd type BB is in operation, the prescribed number is 2 coins, the average number of coins paid out per game is 2 coins, etc. It may be configured to lower the ball output rate (total ball rate of the two types) during the two type BB operation. With such a configuration, the effects of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above are further enhanced.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the numbers, plays the game in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (4) above, by designing the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < "expected number of inputs of the main minor role", even in "internal medium", the main minor role It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a bell is won, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the target, plays in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (5) above, by designing so that the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < the "expected value of the number of inputs" of "replay", even in "internal medium" It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a player wins, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

<<<Seventh Embodiment Gate Technology>>> Next, as a seventh embodiment, a gate mechanism included in the main board case M40 that houses the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (casing) will be described. explain. In the seventh embodiment, the entrance portion into which the resin material (plastic) flows when molding the main board case M40 is referred to as a gate.

<<Molding of Main Board Case>> As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is made of resin material (plastic). The main board case M40 is made by injecting resin material (plastic) from the gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) to form a specific shape, and then molding it through a cooling and solidifying process. The product is generally molded using an injection molding method. The main board case M40 can be molded not only by injection molding, but also by, for example, sandwiching a cylindrical plastic hollow body between molds, blowing air into the mold to bring it into close contact with the wall of the mold, and then going through a cooling and solidifying process. Any molding method may be used as long as the resin material (plastic) is poured into the molded product through a gate, such as a blow molding method to obtain a molded product. After the resin material (plastic) is injected, the gate is cut, and the cut area will have a slight depression compared to a flat surface without the gate.

<<Gate Method>> When a resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate in the injection molding method, various restrictions are placed on the gate. Here, examples of constraints include the inflow speed of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), and the size and shape of the gate portion M80. In other words, by determining the optimal conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size and shape) according to the size of the main board case M40 to be molded, and going through the molding process according to those conditions, high-quality molding can be achieved. This means that you can obtain goods.

Methods for injection injection of resin materials (plastic) can be roughly divided into restriction gates, which limit the inflow of resin materials (plastic) by minimizing the size of the gate, and methods that restrict the inflow of resin materials (plastic) directly without going through a gate. There is an unrestricted gate for pouring plastic). In the various case members used in gaming machines, it is possible to reduce the size of the gate to some extent from the perspective of size, etc., and limiting gates are sometimes used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of the finished product. However, in the seventh embodiment, as long as the main board case M40 has a gate, there is no problem in any method for injecting the resin material (plastic).

<<Gate Type>> When injecting resin material (plastic) from a gate using a restriction gate, there are types of gates with various characteristics. Examples include the side gate type, which injects resin material (plastic) from a gate placed on the side of the molded product, the pin gate type, which molds multiple molded products from one mold, and the pin gate type, which is placed in a tunnel shape in the mold. There are submarine gate types in which resin material (plastic) is injected through a sealed gate. The main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be formed using any of these gate types.

The main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded as described above, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<<Configuration of Main Board Case M40>> First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main board case M40 is molded from resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that is visible to players and game hall managers when the front door DU is opened) is a sticker that includes, for example, the model information of the game machine, etc. In addition to parts such as type stickers, seal members (not shown) containing information related to the game machine, such as caulking recording paper to record the security measures taken at the production factory, etc., are affixed. It also has a gate portion M80 that includes a gate mark (state after cutting the gate) where a resin material (plastic) is injected. Note that the shape of the surface of the main board case M40 in FIG. 128 is an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, the shape may be square, rectangular, or trapezoidal.

<<Accommodation view of main control board M>> Next, FIG. 129 is a front view of the main control board M accommodated in the main board case M40. In addition, when housing the main control board M in the main board case M40, the main control board M is stored so as to be sandwiched between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown) are sandwiched. Generally, the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40 by integrating the case member with screws.

The main control board M includes a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element with a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC05 without a CPU function, resistors R1 to R6, capacitors C01 to C02, and a connector CN01. ~CN04 are implemented. Further, the main control board M is provided with a setting display LEDM 90 capable of displaying setting values, a performance display device SH in which four-digit segments (to be described later) are formed in a horizontal row, and the like. Note that other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may also be mounted on the main control board M, but illustration thereof is omitted.

<<Gate Arrangement of Main Board Case M40>> The main board case M40 is arranged to cover the main control board M (the dotted line in FIG. 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and the main board case M40 is made of plastic. Since it is a raw material, it is configured so that components etc. mounted on the main control board M can be visually recognized through the main board case M40.

As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have the gate portion M80 on its surface. These gate portions M80 are preferably arranged at positions that do not obstruct the visibility of the members arranged particularly on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, it is placed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the type seal, performance display device SH, setting display LEDM90, etc. that are checked by the amusement park administrator or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40. An example of this pattern is More specifically, the configuration is such that the gate part M80 is not arranged at a position where the model sticker, performance display device SH, and setting display LEDM90 are projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M. has been done.

<Effects> By arranging the gate section M80 in this way, when a player's administrator checks information related to the gaming machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LEDM90, the gate section M80 allows for visual confirmation. It becomes possible to avoid interfering with sexuality. Further, by configuring the gate portion M80 so that it is not placed in a position overlapping with various seal members such as a type seal, it is possible to make the seal member difficult to peel off.

Further, it is preferable that the gate part M80 is not arranged at a position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). be. Although the details will be described later, in the main board case M40, the gate part M80 is a fragile part, so there is a possibility that a so-called tampering action may be performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 through the gate part M80. There is a possibility that it will be damaged. Therefore, the CPUMC should be configured so that the gate part M80 is not arranged at the position projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction with respect to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). Therefore, it has a main control chip C that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and a built-in ROMC 110 that stores programs related to the operation control of the gaming machine, so that the gate section M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC that affects the result of the game. This makes it possible to prevent so-called fraudulent activities such as program tampering through the gate section M80.

Further, when current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed near the CPUMC, there is a risk that the noise generated from the IC element may have a negative effect on the operation of the CPUMC. It is preferable not to place it near.

In the seventh embodiment, no IC element is arranged near the CPUMC on the main control board M. Specifically, in any IC element, within the vicinity of the CPUMC (in this case, from the outer periphery of the CPUMC package body to W1, which is the length of the short side of the top surface of the rectangular package body) (dotted line in FIG. Note that W1 has a length equal to or longer than the length of one resistor (R1 to R6) (the length when mounted).

In this manner, in the seventh embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPUMC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise will have an adverse effect on the operation of the CPUMC.

<<Structure of Gate Section M80>> Next, the structure of the gate section M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 viewed from the direction of the side surface A. As explained in FIG. 128, the main board case M40 has a gate part M80 on the surface (for example, the surface that can be seen by players, game hall managers, etc. when the front door DU is opened). , the gate portion M80 has a slight depression compared to a portion of the surface other than the gate portion M80.

In the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, the main board case A side (the above-mentioned surface) has a gate part M80, and the main board case B side does not have a gate part. Here, the A side of the main board case will be explained in detail. The main board case A surface is, for example, the surface close to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, and the main board case B surface is based on the center of the short axis. This refers to the surface close to the main control board M direction. In other words, the main board case side A is the side closer to the front door DU, and similarly, the main board case B side can be said to be the side closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the side of the main board case B from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows details of the structure of the gate section M80. Note that the detailed structure of the gate portion M80 included in the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<<Structural Pattern 1 of Gate Portion M80>> First, as a first structural pattern of gate portion M80, the main board case B surface is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the gate portion M80 is composed of one convex portion and two concave portions, and is a surface extending horizontally from the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80). On the other hand, it is a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, it is preferable that the relationship between A and B is A<B. It should be noted that the one convex portion constituting the gate portion M80 is a gate mark after the gate has been cut. Alternatively, it may be designed so that A=0.

<Effect 1> Since the convex part of the gate part M80 is separated by the distance A from the main board case A side, for example, when removing the main board case M40 from the gaming machine, the person checking the part related to the gate part M80 can This makes it possible to prevent accidents such as the main board case M40 falling due to slipping of the main board case M40 when holding the main board case M40.

<Effect 2> Additionally, since the concave portion of the gate portion M80 is separated by the distance B from the main board case A side, it is possible to smoothly inflow the resin molding (plastic) when molding the main board case M40. becomes.

<Effect 3> In addition, since the main board case B side directly under the gate part M80 on the main board case A side is flat, when the main control board M is visually recognized through the main board case M40, the gate part Even when viewing from the surface related to M80, it is possible to visually recognize the main control board M without reducing visibility due to refraction of light.

<<Structural pattern 2 of gate portion M80>> Next, the second structural pattern of gate portion M80 is configured such that main board case B is recessed (bulging out to the outside of main board case M40). . The gate part M80 in the lower part of the figure is composed of one convex part and two concave parts on the main board case A side, and the main board case A side (the part other than the gate part M80) is extended in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is similar to the first pattern that it is separated from the main board case surface A (flat surface) by a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion.

In addition, the main board case B side is concave, and the distance from the deepest part of the concave part (the part that bulges outward most) to the convex part on the main board case A side is C, and the main board case B side is concave. The distance from the tip of the recess on the case B surface to the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (other than the gate part M80) is D, and in the relationship between C and D, D<C. It is preferable that a relationship is established. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80) to the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (portion other than the gate portion M80). However, the distance is not limited to this. For example, from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case A side (the part other than the gate part M80) to the main board case B side (the part other than the gate part M80). ) to the horizontally extended plane, C' may be set as C<C', C>C', or C≈C'.

<Effect> In this way, the tip of the recess on the main board case B surface is separated by the distance D from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (portion other than the gate part M80), so that, for example, the main board It becomes possible to compensate for the decrease in the strength of the member related to the gate portion M80 on the case A side. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed compared to a flat surface, and if a force that attempts to destroy the main board case M40 is applied, the gate portion M80 will be thinned by the distance of the recess (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1). Therefore, the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80) is configured to be prevented from being easily destroyed compared to a horizontally extended surface. In this way, the main board case B side is recessed by a predetermined distance even from the surface related to the gate part M80, so that the material strength is equivalent to that of the main board case A side other than the gate part M80. It is possible to keep it.

As above, in the seventh embodiment, the arrangement and configuration of the gate part M80 in the main board case M40 have been explained in detail. It is also possible to apply the present invention to other members), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<Eighth Embodiment Power Off and Sensor Detection>>>> Next, as an eighth embodiment, a sensor (for example, an input reception sensor D10s, a first Before the input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the chute sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2 detect the passing of the game medals, the sensors are off, or Power outage in the event of a power outage in either the state where the sensor goes from off to on after detecting a notification, or furthermore, where the game medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor goes from on to off. Processing related to time processing and detection of passage of game medals (in the eighth embodiment, credit addition processing of game medals related to the first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s, and processing related to the detection of passage of game medals by the second input sensor D30s and shoot sensor D40s) The relationship between the counting process of the input monitoring counter related to this and the counting process of the number of game medals to be paid out related to the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be explained.

<<<Relationship between power-off processing and game medal credit addition process>>> First, the game medals inserted from the medal slot D170 pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the route for the game medals. (off→on→off), and the game medals flow downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without any error occurring.

The timing at which credits are added to game medals is as detailed in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description in step S1226-8, the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off, and the second input sensor D30s changes from on to off. When the state changes from off to on, the inserted game medals can be detected as bet medals and added to the credits; A game medal inserted at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on or off may be detected as a bet medal, and may be added to the credit. In the eighth embodiment described in detail below, the timing at which credits are added to game medals is when the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off and the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on. configured to be possible. As mentioned above, in this example, "the occurrence of a power outage" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects a power outage. It is to detect the occurrence.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. Below, the parts expressed as time are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the example range occurs as a comparison of time values, it will not deviate from the design value. It means that it is not. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In order to define the relationship between power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing, the time from when a power outage occurs until the power outage is detected is T1, and the input reception sensor D10s is set from OFF → ON to the second input sensor. The time from D30s on to off is T2, and the time from first input sensor D20s off to on to second input sensor D30s on to on is T3. The relationship between T1, T2, and T3 that is applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Although details will be described later, it should be noted that the starting point of T2 is just an example.

<<Operation pattern 1 of power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing>> Fig. 133 shows the operation pattern of power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing according to the timing chart of each sensor. This is an example. The sensors related to input that this configuration has are an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (a1) to (a8), and as time passes, the timing changes from (a1) to (a8).

In a situation where power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on at timing (a1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at timing (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at timing (a4), the first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on.

Next, at the timing (a5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at timing (a6), the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing (a7), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if the power is cut off after the gaming medal passes the input reception sensor D10s and the input reception sensor D10s turns from on to off, the second input sensor D30s is activated at the timing (a7). After turning from on to off, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power off process, so that the credit addition process can be executed normally. In the eighth embodiment, the interrupt processing for detecting a power outage is configured to execute the power off processing in the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the processing using separate interrupts.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3<T1<T2. By setting T3<T1, the power-off process can be executed after the credit addition process is executed. Further, the relationship T1<T2 and T3<T2 can be said to be an obvious relationship based on the flow process of game medals.

<Effect> In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing the input reception sensor D10s), the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. By configuring the system to perform power-off processing later, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and the game medals are inserted into the game machine (not returned) because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added in spite of the situation.

Note that the configuration regarding the power-on sensor and power-off may be configured as shown in (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3) below. (1-1) After the input reception sensor D10s goes from off to on, the power is cut off (timing (a3) in FIG. 133). (1-2) Before the first input sensor D20s changes from off to on, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power off process (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133). (1-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing. (2-1) Power cutoff occurs after the input reception sensor D10s changes from off to on (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133). (2-2) Before the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power off process (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133). (2-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing.

<<Operation pattern 2 of power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing>> Figure 134 shows the operation patterns of power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing that are reflected along the timing charts of each sensor. This is an example. The sensors related to input that this configuration has are an input reception sensor D10s, a first input sensor D20s, and a second input sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (b1) to (b8), and as time passes, the timing changes from (b1) to (b8).

In a situation where power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on at the timing (b1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing (b2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (b3), the first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on. Next, at timing (a4), a power outage occurs.

Next, at the timing (b5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing (b6), the first input sensor D20s is turned on →
It is turned off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and credit addition processing is executed. Next, at the timing (b7), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the same figure, even if the power is cut off after the game medal reaches the first input sensor D20s and the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on, the second input is performed at the timing (b7). After the sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, the game machine detects a power outage and executes the power outage process, so that the credit addition process can be executed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3<T1<T2. Note that the configuration may be such that T1<T3<T2 holds true. In any of the configurations, as shown in the figure, even if the power is cut off after the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on at timing (b3), the credit addition process ends. Power-off processing can be executed later.

<Effects> In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first input sensor D20s turns from OFF to ON), credits for the game medals can be added. By configuring the power-off process to be performed after the process is executed, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and it is possible to ensure that the game medals are not inserted into the game machine because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though the player has received the credit (not returned).

<<Modified example of the operation pattern of power-off processing and game medal credit addition process>> Furthermore, as a modification of the action pattern of the power-off processing and game medal credit addition process, for example, the timing of the occurrence of a power outage may be , when the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is on, the power-off process is executed after the first input sensor D20s is turned off and the second input sensor D30s is turned off. In other words, the power-off process may be executed after the credit addition process is executed.

<Effect> Even if a power outage occurs while inserting game medals, the inserted game medals are reliably added to the credits by performing power outage processing after the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though game medals are inserted into the game machine.

Further, as a modification of the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing, it is also possible to configure the power-off detection timing to be different. For example, the timing at which a power outage occurs is the same as <<operation pattern 1 of power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing>>, and the timing at which a power outage is detected is set to when the gaming medals pass the input reception sensor D10s. , and before reaching the first input sensor D20s, the processing flow is based on the timing of occurrence of various events based on pattern 1, and it is assumed that power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on. Under certain circumstances, the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on at timing (a1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at timing (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at timing (a4), the gaming machine detects a power outage, executes a power outage process, and then turns off the blocker. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately after the inserted game medals pass the input acceptance sensor D10s, the power-off processing can be performed before the game medals reach the first input sensor D20s. Since the credit addition process is not executed and the blocker is turned off, game medals are returned from the return slot, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

<Effect> In this way, by executing the power-off processing before the game medals reach the first input sensor D20s, if the credit addition process related to the inserted game medals is not executed due to the occurrence of a power-off. The game machine can be configured to return the game medals to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player where the game medals are inserted into the gaming machine but credits are not added. It becomes possible.

In the eighth embodiment, "the time from the input acceptance sensor D10s OFF→ON to the second input sensor D30s ON→OFF" is defined as T2, but it is not limited to this, T2 may be the time from when the game medals inserted through the medal slot are no longer visible to the player until the second input sensor D30s is turned on and then turned off. The time from when the second input sensor D30s is turned on to off may be set as T2, or the time from when some of the gaming medals inserted from the medal slot are no longer visible to the player may be set as T2. The "time from D30s on to off" may be set as T2.

<<<Relationship between processing during power outage and counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter>>> Next, we will discuss the timing when power is not being supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a power outage. The relationship with the timing related to the counting process by the input monitoring counter will be explained. Referring to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medals in the medal selector DS, the medal flow path member (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In FIG. 135, a chute sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Similarly, this is a sensor that detects whether or not medals are being inserted normally, and in particular can detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed (e.g., inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) It is configured like this.

The timing at which the game medal input monitoring counter performs the counting process is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, the main control board M may input the game medals at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off. The monitoring counter performs addition processing from 0 to 1. Then, when the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the shoot sensor D40s is turned on from off, the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Note that the timing at which the game medal addition (subtraction) processing by the input monitoring counter is performed is not limited to this. As described below, for example, when the first input sensor turns from off to on, the input monitoring counter performs an addition process from 0 to 1, and at the timing when the chute sensor D40s changes from on to off. Any configuration may be used as long as it can monitor whether or not the game medals have passed normally, such as a configuration in which the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Furthermore, instead of counting game medals by the input monitoring counter in the order of addition → subtraction, it may be performed in the order of subtraction → addition (0 → -1, then -1 → 0). Note that an example of a configuration in which it is determined that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter is that an error has occurred when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C<-3 or C<3". It may be configured to determine that there is.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting process by the game medal input monitoring counter, the time from when a power-off occurs to when a power-off is detected is T4, from the second input sensor D30s on → off. The time from off to on of the shoot sensor D40s is defined as T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 will be described in detail below. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the installed capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

<<Operation pattern 1 of power-off processing and counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter>> FIG. 136 is a timing chart of each sensor showing the operation pattern of the power-off processing and counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter. This is an example of what is reflected in the following. The sensors related to input shown in the figure are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of the game medal (ON or OFF). In addition, the input monitoring counter is configured to perform addition/subtraction processing at specified timings (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off), and the chute sensor The subtraction process is performed at the timing when the D40s is turned on from off). In addition, in this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (c1) to (c6), and as a process flow, in a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, (c1) ), the power supply is cut off (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first input sensor D20s is on, the second input sensor D30s is off, and the chute sensor D40s is off). Next, at timing (c2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at the timing (c3), the second input sensor D30s is turned from ON to OFF, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at timing (c4), the chute sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction process by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0.

Next, at timing (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (c6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing. In addition, in the same figure, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (c4), but the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (C5) (the timing when the chute sensor turns from on to off). It may be configured to perform subtraction processing of the counter value.

In this way, in the figure, even if the power is cut off at a timing before the game medals reach the second input sensor D30s, the power is turned off after the shoot sensor D40s is turned from ON to OFF at the timing (c5). Since the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes the power outage process, the credit addition process and the addition/subtraction process of the counter value of the input monitoring counter can be performed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T4 and T5 described above is T4>T5. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off just before the addition process of the input monitoring counter is executed (first input sensor D20s is on and second input sensor D30s is off), the input of game medals can be monitored. The power-off processing can be configured to be executed after the addition processing and subtraction processing by the counter are completed.

<Effect> By performing the power-off processing after the counting process (0 → 1 → 0) by the game medal input monitoring counter is executed, the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors is performed. It becomes possible to perform the process normally, and it becomes possible to normally detect errors and the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

<<Operation pattern 2 of power-off processing and counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter>> FIG. 137 is a timing chart of each sensor showing the operation pattern of the power-off processing and counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter. This is an example of what is reflected in the following. This action pattern is configured to differ from action pattern 1 in the timing at which power interruption is detected. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of the game medal (ON or OFF). In addition, addition/subtraction processing is performed at specified timings in the input monitoring counter (in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s changes from ON to OFF, and chute sensor D40s changes from OFF to ON). The subtraction process is performed at the timing when the In addition, in this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (d1) to (d5), and as a process flow, a power outage occurs at timing (d1) (the timing at various sensors at this time is (the first input sensor D20s is on, the second input sensor D30s is off, and the chute sensor D40s is off). Next, at timing (d2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at timing (d3), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, (d4) the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. Next, at timing (d5), the game medals reach the shoot sensor D40s, but since the power-off process has been executed, the game medals are not detected by the shoot sensor D40s. In the example shown in the figure, a case is illustrated in which game medals pass through the blocker before the blocker is turned off.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs before the game medals reach the second input sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing (d4) and shuts off the power. Since the time process is executed, the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter cannot be executed before the power-off process, but the credit addition process can be executed before the power-off process. In addition, the input monitoring counter is configured so that, for example, an error occurs when the counter value reaches 5 (even if the counter value deviates due to the insertion of one game medal, the error is not detected immediately). Therefore, even if there is a power outage such as a power outage while the amusement park is open, a single power outage will not be judged as an error related to the input monitoring counter, so credit addition processing will not be performed. If the game can be executed normally, it is possible to guarantee the continuation of the normal game.

<<Operation pattern 3 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>> FIG. 138 is a timing chart of each sensor showing the operation pattern of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter. This is an example of what is reflected in the following. In this operation pattern, the timing for detecting a power outage is different from <<operation pattern 1 of power outage processing and counting processing by the gaming medal insertion monitoring counter>>, and the timing for performing counting processing by the gaming medal insertion monitoring counter. <<Operation pattern 1 of power-off processing and counting processing by game medal input monitoring counter>> is configured to be the same. In addition, in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed by the game medal insertion monitoring counter at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s changes from on to off, and subtraction processing is performed at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s changes from off to on. The sensors here are a second input sensor D30s and a shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected passage of game medals (ON or OFF). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are indicated as (e1) to (e6), and as a process flow, the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on at timing (e1). Next, at timing (e2), the second input sensor D30s is turned from on to off, and the addition process of game medals by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned from on to off at a timing between (e2) and (e3). Next, power is cut off at timing (e3). Next, at timing (e4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction process by the input monitoring counter is executed, and the counter value of the input monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0. Next, at timing (e5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (e6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the same figure, even if the power is cut off after the game medals have passed the second input sensor D30s and the credit addition process has been executed, the gaming machine will be turned off at the timing (e6). Since the power-off process is executed upon detection of the power-off process, the power-off process can be executed after the addition and subtraction processes of the input monitoring counter are performed.

In addition, in the same figure, it is preferable that the relationship T4>T5 holds between the periods T4 and T5 mentioned above. Since the detection of a power outage is performed after the chute sensor D40s turns from ON to OFF, the period T4 from the occurrence of a power outage to the detection of a power outage is limited to the counting process (addition and addition) of game medals by the input monitoring counter. It is preferable that the period (e.g., period (e2) to (e4)) is longer than the period during which subtraction) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off process can be performed after the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter has been reliably executed.

With this configuration, by performing the power-off processing after the counting process by the game medal input monitoring counter has been executed, the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors can be performed normally. This makes it possible to reliably detect errors and the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s changes from on to off, and the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the chute sensor D40s changes from off to on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of the addition process and the timing of the subtraction process in any combination. (A1) Timing of the addition process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s off → on (A2) Timing of adding process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s on → off (A3) Adding process of the dosing monitoring counter Timing: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (A4) Timing of addition process of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s ON → OFF (B1) Timing of subtraction process of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s OFF → ON (B2 ) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s on → off

In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 138, the configuration of the input monitoring counter related to the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s is described in detail, but the configuration of the input monitoring counter may be applied to the gaming machine having the input acceptance sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of addition and subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing in any way. (C1) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: Insertion reception sensor D10s OFF → ON (C2) Timing of addition processing of input reception sensor D10s ON → OFF (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s OFF → ON (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s ON → OFF (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (D4 ) Timing of subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter: Second input sensor D30s on → off Also, as the game medal passes through the input acceptance sensor D10s, 1 is added to the counter value of the input monitoring counter, and then the blocker is turned off. If the game medal is returned due to the error, the counter value of the input monitoring counter will continue to be incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0 by turning the blocker from off to on after that, so that the game machine is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0. It is possible to configure the system so that an abnormality does not occur in the input monitoring counter determination process.

In addition, in this example, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 and then subtracted by 1. However, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 and then added by 1 (the counter value changes from 0 to -1 to 0). ''), and any of the configurations described above can be applied to this configuration.

<<<Relationship between power outage processing and game medal payout number counting processing>>> Next, we will use FIG. 139 as a timing diagram that may lead to a situation where power is not being supplied to the gaming machine due to a power outage. The timing related to the process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out will now be explained. The process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out is performed, for example, at timing 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number counting process is performed at the timing when a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the on state is transmitted to the main control board M by displacing the release urging means H70 to the initial position again. is configured to take place. Note that the process for counting the number of paid-out coins is generally performed using an addition process in which normally paid-out game medals are added, for example, 0 → 1 → 2, etc. Note that the payout count process is a process in which the game machine counts one (may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that one game medal has been paid out.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the installed capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates significantly from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In addition, in the same figure and FIG. 120, the first dispensing sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the second dispensing sensor H2, the second dispensing sensor H20s in FIG. In this case, the first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off. That is, due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70, the first dispensing sensor H1=on, the second dispensing sensor H2=off (initial position), the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=off, the first dispensing sensor H1 The sensor states are as follows:=Off・Second Dispensing Sensor H2=On First Dispensing Sensor H1=Off・Second Dispensing Sensor H2=Off First Dispensing Sensor H1=On・Second Dispensing Sensor H2=Off (initial position).

<<Operation pattern of processing when power is cut off and processing of counting the number of paid out game medals>> FIG. This is an example of something. The sensors here are a first dispensing sensor H1 and a second dispensing sensor H2. In addition, in this operation pattern, the timing at which the power supply is cut off is determined as follows: Operation pattern A: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off. Operation pattern B: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on → off and the second dispensing sensor The relationship between the power-off process and the process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out will be explained using two operation patterns: when the payout sensor H2 is off.

<<Operation pattern A of power-off processing and game medal payout number counting process>> First, as a process flow of operation pattern A, first, after the release biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position, A power outage occurs (at this time, the timing of the various sensors is such that the first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off). Thereafter, due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=off, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=on, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, and the second dispensing sensor H1=off. 2 payout sensor H2=off 1st payout sensor H1=on, 2nd payout sensor H2=off (initial position), and the payout number counting process is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing using separate interrupts.

<Effects> With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharging biasing means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage process is executed after the payout count process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of game medals being paid out but not being counted.

<<Operation pattern B of power-off processing and game medal payout number counting process>> First, as a process flow of operation pattern B, first, the discharging biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position, The power is cut off after the first dispensing sensor H1=on and the second dispensing sensor H2=off (initial position).The first dispensing sensor H1=off and the second dispensing sensor H2=off occur. Thereafter, due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=on, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=off, the first dispensing sensor H1=on, and the second dispensing sensor H1=off. 2 Payout sensor H2=off (initial position), and the payout number counting process is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing at the execution timing of separate interrupt processing.

<Effects> With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharging biasing means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage process is executed after the payout count process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of game medals being paid out but not being counted.

Note that the execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and is as follows: (1) First payout sensor H1 = off, second payout sensor H2 = off → first payout sensor H1 = off, Timing when second dispensing sensor H2 = on (2) First dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = on → first dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = off It can also be timing.

<<<Ninth Embodiment Stop Button Operation and Reel Stop Control>>> Next, the configuration regarding the stop button and reel control applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described below as a ninth embodiment. Explain in detail.

In the ninth embodiment, reel stop control when operating reel stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 correspond) will be described. In the operation control of the stepping motor related to reel stop control, as described above, in particular, after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state" which is the reel drive state illustrated in (6) of FIG. 35, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In order to do this, all phases of the stepping motor (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) to stop the reel. In the ninth embodiment, the process in which all the phases (for example, the four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (4-phase excitation) may be referred to as "4-phase excitation process". be.

In a reel-type gaming machine, the stop button sensor built into each stop button changes from OFF to ON in response to the operation of the stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43). Or, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute control to stop the rotating reels based on information indicating that the reels have changed from on to off. Note that the operation of the stop button in the ninth embodiment refers to a physical operation, and refers to, for example, pressing the left stop button D41 or releasing the left stop button D41 from a pressed state. . Further, the state in which the stop button is not operated may be referred to as a state in which the stop button is not pressed, for example. Furthermore, when the stop button sensor is turned from off to on in a situation where the stop button is valid, this may be referred to as acceptance of the stop button operation.

In the ninth embodiment, mainly the operation of the stop button for stopping the spinning reels and the reel stop control will be described. In the ninth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control, pattern 1: 4-phase excitation processing is executed after the stop button sensor turns from on to off. Pattern 2: Broadly divided into two patterns: 4-phase excitation processing is executed before the stop button sensor changes from on to off. In the ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reels has these two patterns. Note that, as described above, the four-phase excitation process is control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes the reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop button (this includes the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor changes from off to on and from on to off will be explained. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and when the stop button is pressed a predetermined distance from the initial position (position corresponding to the non-operated state), it turns from off to on (initial position is When the stop button sensor changes from off to on, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel rotation stop process according to the flow shown in FIG. 34. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition for the stop button sensor to change from off to on can be changed as appropriate. For example, the distance may be the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed, or the distance may be half the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed.

<<Pattern in which the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off>> FIG. 140 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 140, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops. In addition, when the left stop button is rotated the maximum distance according to the design, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then the left The time value until the reel stops (sometimes referred to as the slip time) is set to 190 ms, which is the maximum slip time according to the regulations, so there is some margin so that the maximum value according to the regulations is not exceeded. As an example in this example, the designed maximum slip time is set to 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to 185 ms is set as the designed maximum distance.

(a1) to (f1) in FIG. 140 will be explained in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed down a distance of x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. Here, the distance that the left stop button D41 is pushed in from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured so that it can be pushed in by a maximum distance d from the initial position, and it is assumed that the relationship between the pushed distances is 0<x<d. At the timing (b1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant rotation). In addition, when the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped regardless of the operation status of the stop button (such as the time it takes until it is pressed). The reel (left reel M51) moves the maximum designed distance from the timing (b1) and stops.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is in a state of being pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c1). In (c1), the left stop button sensor maintains the on state, and the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the time value from (b1) to (c1) will vary depending on the manner in which the player operates the left stop button D41; The case is illustrated in which the stop operation is performed on the left stop button D41 in a short time (for example, 5 ms), which is a typical time value for execution.

After that, the left stop button D41 is immediately released from the state of (c1), and slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41, and the distance x from the initial position (more precisely, At (d1), which is the state returned to the timing when the value became less than x, the left button sensor turns from on to off. Note that (b1) and (d1) both illustrate a state in which the left stop button is located at a distance x from the initial position, but the distance x from the initial position is determined by the on/off state of the stop button sensor. More precisely, the stop button sensor is on at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and is off at a distance of less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is in the initial position, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is not in the initial position (if it is pressed even slightly). It may be configured so that Note that the time it takes for the left stop button D41 to return to the initial position from the position where it has been pushed the maximum distance d changes depending on the spring constant of the spring that the left stop button D41 has.

Further, in (d1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and in the state (e1) in which the left stop button returns to the initial position, the left stop button sensor remains off, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position. The reel driving state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be earlier than the timing when the left stop button returns to the initial position, or may be at a later timing. It could be timing. In addition, to explain in detail about the four-phase excitation of the step motor, when the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the symbol scheduled to stop and the passing symbol match), the counter of the reel drive pulse output counter After setting the value to 100 (a value equivalent to approximately 223.5 ms), 4-phase excitation is turned on, so more precisely, the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and then the 4-phase excitation is turned on. 4-phase excitation is turned on after .5ms. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0, It is configured to turn off four-phase excitation.

After that, the left stop button remains stopped at the initial position, and the step motor is decelerated by 4-phase excitation for the left reel, and the left reel stops at the position where it has rotated the maximum distance according to the design, and then comes to a mid-stop. The operations of the button D42 and the right stop button D43 become valid (the reception of the stop operation is valid).

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the one stop button has stopped, thereby driving multiple reels at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, even in such a configuration, if the user releases the stop button immediately after performing the stop operation of the stop button 1 (when the user releases the stop button immediately after pressing the maximum distance d from the initial position), the stop button The design value for the minimum time required for the sensor to turn from on to off can be shorter than the design value for the time from when the stop button turns from off to on to the completion of four-phase excitation of the step motor. . In other words, even if you leave immediately after performing the stop operation of the first stop button, the reels will rotate the designed maximum distance and stop, in other words, before the stop operations of the other stop buttons become effective. , since the first stop button is configured to be able to return to its initial position, the player can immediately stop the reel on which the other stop operation was performed and then perform the stop operation on the stop button corresponding to the other reel. It is configured so that it can be done.

In addition, when the user leaves the stop button immediately after executing the stop button stop operation in step 1, the time value for the shortest time required from leaving the button until the stop button sensor turns from on to off, and the time value for the time required for the stop button sensor to turn from off to on. The time value from 1 to 4-phase excitation of the step motor ends varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates significantly from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range exemplified as a comparison of time values occurs, it is considered as a deviation as a design value. This means that you have not done so.

In addition, in the figure, a configuration is excited in which the reel is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately released, and the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the designed maximum distance and stops. This is not limited to, but it is satisfied that the reel is pushed in by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately released, and the stop button sensor is turned from on to off before the reel rotates the designed maximum distance and stops. It may be configured as follows.

<<Pattern 1 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor turns off>> Figure 141 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. . In FIG. 141, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a2) to (f2) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops.

(a2) to (f2) in FIG. 141 will be explained in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b2), the left stop button sensor changes from OFF to ON. Become. At the timing (b2), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant speed rotation).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c2). In (c2), the left stop button sensor maintains the ON state, the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be earlier than the timing when the left stop button returns to the initial position, or may be at a later timing. The timing may be sufficient as long as the reels are rotating at (c2).

After that, the left stop button D41 is immediately released in the state of (c2), and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At a certain point (d2), the left reel stops at a position where it has rotated a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slip) after the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the distance y only needs to be y<d, and may be y=x.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e2), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. . Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and at (f2), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 become effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, but is the timing when the left stop button D41 is turned from on to off (and the left reel is stopped). You can also use it as

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after receiving the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons do not become effective until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops, so that multiple reels can be driven at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, if configured in this way, even if the stop button in step 1 is pressed and released immediately (if pushed in by the maximum distance d from the initial position and released immediately), the reel will reach the maximum designed position. Since the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating a distance and stopping, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button has returned to the initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<<Pattern 2 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor turns off>> Figure 142 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. . In FIG. 142, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops.

(a3) to (f3) in FIG. 142 will be explained in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. At the timing (b3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant rotation).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance y from the initial position (c3). By (c3), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and at (c3), the left reel M51 comes to a stop. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. Note that the distance y only needs to be y<d.

Thereafter, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (d3). In (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. . Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and at (f3), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 become effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, but is the timing when the left stop button D41 is turned from on to off (and the left reel is stopped). You can also use it as

In addition, in the figure, after receiving the operation of stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of stop buttons other than stop button 1 will not work. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the one stop button has stopped, thereby driving multiple reels at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, even in such a configuration, even if you release the stop button immediately after pressing the stop button in step 1 (i.e., if you push it the maximum distance d from the initial position and release it immediately), the reel will not work properly due to its design. Since the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating the maximum distance and stopping, the player cannot stop the other stop buttons if the stop button has returned to the initial position. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

<<<<Tenth Embodiment Performance Display Device SH>>>> The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of accessories, A configuration including the performance display device SH will be described in detail below as a tenth embodiment.

First, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated using FIG. 143. The performance display device SH is formed by 4-digit segments lined up horizontally, the upper two digits (the two digits on the left) are the identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (the two digits on the right) are the ratio segment SH20. It has become. The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information that allows the currently displayed item to be identified, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. Further, a dot point SH30 is provided at the lower right of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification segment SH10, and the structure is configured such that the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 can be easily distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the dot point SH30. ing. Note that there is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<<Installation position>>> The installation position of the performance display device SH may be configured so that it is directly attached to the main control board M. In such a case, it is attached to the main board case M40 that covers the main control board M. It is desirable to install it in a location where visibility is not obstructed by attached stickers, etc.

<<<Display Items>>> Examples of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH include the following items. (a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio "Cumulative advantageous section ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of games played in advantageous sections to the total number of games played (cumulative number of games); It can be calculated by ``total number of games played ÷ total number of games played x 100 (%)''. As an example, if the game progresses as follows: "Start of gaming machine operation → Normal section A → Advantageous section A → Normal section B → Advantageous section B", "(Number of games played in advantageous section A + Games in advantageous section B It can be calculated as follows: (number of games played in normal section A + number of games played in advantageous section A + number of games played in normal section B + number of games played in advantageous section B) x 100 (%).

Note that "cumulative total" refers to the period from the time the gaming machine starts operating at the gaming parlor until the calculation of the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH, from the predetermined measurement start timing to the most recent performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of measurement for displaying on the performance display device SH to the time when the calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH are performed, such as until the calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH are performed.

(b) = Continuous accessory ratio during 6000 games The "continuous accessory ratio" is the ratio of the total number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated to the total number of coins paid out. The continuous accessory ratio in between can be calculated as "the number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games ÷ the total number of coins paid out during 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games is 6000 pieces, and the number of paid out medals due to other triggers is 8000 pieces, then ``6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100≒ It is calculated as follows: 42.9 (%). Note that "6,000 games" refers to 6,000 games before the most recent time when the continuous role object ratio was calculated.

(c) = Accessory ratio between 6000 games The "accessory ratio" is the ratio of the total number of paid out coins paid out by special accessory and normal accessory to the total number of paid out coins, and Accessory ratio" is "(Number of coins paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games + Number of coins paid out when the second type special accessory is activated during 6000 games + Payout when normal accessory is activated during 6000 games. It can be calculated as: (number of coins) ÷ 6,000 total number of coins paid out during the game x 100 (%). As an example, the number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated during 6000 games: 5000 pieces, the number of game medals paid out when the second type special accessory is activated during 6000 games: 3000 pieces, and during 6000 games If the number of coins paid out due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "(5000+3000)÷(5000+3000+8000)×100=50(%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to 6000 games before the most recent timing when the accessory ratio was calculated.

(d) = Cumulative continuous accessory ratio "Cumulative continuous accessory ratio" is calculated by "Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)" can. As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated is 600,000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers is 800,000, then "600,000 ÷ (600,000 + 800,000) x 100 ≒ 42. 9 (%).

(e) = Cumulative accessory ratio "Cumulative accessory ratio" means "(Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 2 special accessory is activated + Cumulative total It can be calculated as: (Number of coins paid out when the normal accessory is activated) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%). As an example, the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out when the first type special accessory is activated: 500,000 pieces, the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out when the second type special accessory item is activated: 300,000 pieces, and the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out by other triggers. If the number of sheets is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000+300,000)÷(500,000+300,000+800,000)×100=50(%)".

In addition, "7U" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed, and "6Y" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates the continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games. The "7Y" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the role material ratio among 6000 games is displayed, and the "6A" displayed on the identification segment SH10 " indicates that the cumulative continuous accessory ratio is displayed, and "7A" displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative accessory ratio is displayed.

In addition, although FIG. 143 is configured to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio as (a), the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured to display the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio as (a). good. Here, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is the total number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes also referred to as instructions) on the main control board M is executed + the total number of coins paid out by the accessory} ÷ all It is a ratio that can be calculated by multiplying the cumulative number of paid out coins by 100 (%), and whether to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio on the performance display device SH is determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. All you have to do is decide.

In addition, in a game where the push order navigation was executed, because the stop operation was performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals that would be paid out would be less than the number of paid out symbol combinations that could have won if the stop operation was performed according to the push order navigation. is paid out, the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that can win if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. .

<<<Display mode>>> The display mode on the performance display device SH may be configured as follows. - The display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (a)..." in approximately 5 second increments. Note that there is no problem even if the interval at which the display is switched is changed; for example, the display may be switched every 3 seconds.・For non-applicable items, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that non-applicable items include, for example, the advantageous section ratio for gaming machines that do not have advantageous sections.・Ratio display values {advantageous section ratio (%), continuous character ratio (%), character ratio (%), displayed in ratio segment SH20} are displayed with the decimal point rounded down (in the case of 100%, (displayed as "99") ・If the ratio display value is 70% advantageous section ratio, 60% consecutive accessory ratio, 70% or more of accessory ratio, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed blinking.・The cumulative number of games played is 400. If the total number of games played is less than 6,000 games, the ratio display will display "00". If the total number of games played is less than 6,000 games, the ratio of continuous characters for 6,000 games and the ratio of characters for 6,000 games will be displayed. Display the identification segment SH10 blinking when the machine is in the game. Including}-If the total number of games played is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will be displayed blinking when displaying the cumulative advantageous section ratio. In addition, if the total number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment will be displayed blinking when displaying the cumulative continuous role object ratio and when displaying the cumulative role object ratio (games that do not have continuous role objects) (including when it is a machine). That is, in order to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played over 175,000 games, and in order to display the cumulative continuous role object ratio and the cumulative role object ratio, it is possible to measure the total number of games played over 17,500 games. It is configured to be possible.

In the tenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to display the above-mentioned information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e). The configuration in which the main control board (CPUMC of main control board M) performs processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) is detailed below. Describe.

<<<Memory Map>>> First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described using FIG. 144. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the built-in ROMC 110 is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "27FFH", and the register area built in each circuit in the main control chip C is allocated to the space from "2800H" to "28FFH". The space from "F000H" to "F2FFH" is allocated to the built-in RAMC 120, and the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH" is allocated to the XCS decoding area (which performs decoding to interpret the given machine language as an internal representation). area) is allocated. By causing the CPU 100 to execute instructions to access these addresses, it is possible to access the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROMC 110 has a first ROM area that is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area that is an area that mainly controls error-related processing that differs from the normal progress of the game. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". Note that the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity that exists in the first ROM area and is accessed by the CPU 100 is the same as that of the data that exists in the second ROM area and is accessed by the CPU 100. (configured to be larger than the data capacity accessed from

In addition, the first ROM area is a first control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC 100 based on this program code) is stored. A first data area where various types of identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) are stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation of the random number generation circuit C140) are stored. settings, operation settings of the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Although the figure shows a memory map image in the first ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of an unused area are merely examples.

In addition, the second ROM area is a second control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by processing of the CPUC 100 based on this program code) is stored. The second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the second data area exists within the second control area and the CPU 100 The program code capacity accessed from the CPU 100 is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPU 100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed by the CPUC 100 is smaller than the program data capacity existing in the first data area and accessed from the CPUC 100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area that is an area that mainly stores information based on the progress of the game, and a second RAM area that is an area that mainly stores information based on processing that is different from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related information. and a stack area that is used when the program needs to store data internally, and the first RAM area is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH". A second RAM area is allocated to the space from ``F200H'' to ``F2C9H,'' and a stack area is allocated to the space from ``F2CAH'' to ``F2FFH.'' (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example. ).

Further, the first RAM area has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information mainly related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly stores temporarily information related to errors etc. and a checksum area that is a work area for detecting errors in information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. Note that the first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. Further, in this embodiment, only the second RAM area has the checksum area (the first RAM area does not have it), and the checksum area has the checksum area of both the first RAM area and the second RAM area ( It is configured to manage a checksum (the sum of information temporarily stored on both sides). In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but the calculation is not limited to this, and the area excluding the unused area (the first The checksum may be calculated for the work area (the work area and the second work area). In addition, the error detection method is not limited to the checksum check method, but may also use other methods (for example, parity check), in which case the checksum area is This is an area for storing error detection information (for example, parity bits, etc.) required when using the method.

It should be noted that the address of the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored may be any address after the address of the built-in RAM without any problem. Although there is no problem in changing addresses that are unused areas, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (addresses between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of a memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 144, the program code that exists in the first control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 and the program code that exists in the second control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 are as follows. They are placed separately on the memory map (with non-consecutive addresses) and have an unused area between them, so it is difficult to visually see the placement positions of both program codes on the program source code or dump list. (The same can be said if there is an unused area in between).

Here, regarding the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent programs etc. that have been modified by unauthorized acts from being written, it is preferable to configure the ROM so that there is no unused area (unfilled area). This is suitable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0s, writing used areas to smaller addresses, etc.). In addition, the first control area and the first data area contain unused data (for example, referenced data in gaming machines with different specs) in order to prevent reference to data that would not normally be referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity. It is preferable to configure the system so that it does not include data used only for testing during the development stage, data used only for testing during the development stage, etc. In addition, the first control area, first data area, second control area, second data area, first work area, and second work area are allocated to smaller addresses and are used within the area (within the area). (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H" are not set as unused areas). It is preferable to do so. In this example, all bits in the unused area are "0", and in areas other than the unused area, one of the bits is "1" (no longer "0"). ing).

In the tenth embodiment, in particular, the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) executes arithmetic processing of information displayed on the performance display device SH or display processing of information displayed on the performance display device SH. When doing so, the configuration is such that the processing is performed in the second ROM/RAM area. The details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area will be described below.

<<Processing in First ROM/RAM Area>> FIG. 145 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in the tenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as in other embodiments). The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter is executed for a predetermined period of time (T in this example, for example, about 2 ms). The program is configured to be executed periodically with a period of

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. It is configured so that an error will occur. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating an abnormality in the update state is set) Determine.

If Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls a count upper limit check process in the second ROM/RAM area as a process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Although not shown, when processing in the second ROM/RAM area is called, the CPUMC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and performs stack processing. The area is switched and settings for using the second stack area are made. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the values of the registers used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process of creating and outputting a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

Thereafter, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played to date. A count upper limit check is performed as a check process to determine whether or not the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total payout counter) related to the total number of game medals paid out to date has reached a predetermined upper limit. Perform processing. The details of the count upper limit check process include, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions at the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total number of games counter set in a predetermined register (referred to as HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. A check process is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the calculation process for the minutes. Note that the data of the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag can be stored in, for example, a B register or a C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the total number of games played to date. As for the details of the counting process of the number of games, for example, the addition value (here, 1), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the number of advantageous section games to date. The number of games played in an advantageous section is the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section. As for the details of the counting process of the number of advantageous section games, first, among the data stored at the address of the game section flag set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area, a flag indicating that it is an advantageous section is selected. When this bit is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game counter is set in the DE register. Thereafter, data addition processing is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the total number of coins paid out up to now and the number of coins paid out during the 6000 games. Note that the number of coins to be paid out is the total number of coins to be paid out, regardless of the opportunity to pay out game medals. As for the details of the process of counting the number of payout coins, first, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (thirteenth) is not "0", The address of a total payout counter (a counter for the total number of payouts and a counter for the number of payouts during 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the cumulative number of paid out bonus items up to now and the number of paid out bonus items over the 6000 games. As for the details of the process of counting the number of coins to be paid out, first, the data of the accessory operating state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is "0", it is determined that the accessory is in operation. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the data is stored in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. , sets the address of the accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of accessory items paid out and the counter for the number of accessory items paid out during the 6000 games). Thereafter, the data stored in the accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register. Note that the "accessory objects" in this process include the first type special accessory, the second type special accessory, and the ordinary accessory.

Next, in step 1637-6 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a counting process of the cumulative number of continuous paid out bonuses up to now and the number of consecutive paid out bonuses over the 6000 games. As for the details of the counting process for the number of consecutive paid out tokens, first,
RB operation state flag data is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the data is stored in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. , sets the address of the continuous accessory payout counter (counter for the total number of consecutive accessory payouts and counter for the number of consecutive accessory payouts over 6000 games). Thereafter, the data stored in the continuous accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register. In addition, the "continuous accessory" in this process is the first type special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio calculation processing. Incidentally, the ratio here indicates the following. (1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: Number of advantageous section games ÷ Total number of games x 100 (%) (1-2) Cumulative ratio of accessories including instructions: {Press order navigation on main control board M (also referred to as instructions) Number of coins paid out in a game in which the following is executed + Number of coins paid out due to accessory items} ÷ Number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (2) Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: Cumulative total during the operation of type 1 special accessory items Number of coins paid out ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (3) Cumulative ratio of bonuses: (Cumulative number of coins paid out while the first type special bonus is in operation + Cumulative total while the second type special bonus is in operation) Number of coins paid out + Cumulative number of coins paid out while the normal accessory is in operation) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (4) Continuous accessory ratio between 6,000 games: 6,000 while the first type special accessory is in operation Number of coins paid out between games ÷ 6000 Total number of coins paid out between games x 100 (%) (5) Accessory ratio between 6000 games: (Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the first type special accessory is active + Type 2 Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the special accessory is in operation + Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the normal accessory is active) ÷ Total number of coins paid out during 6000 games x 100 (%) Above, (1-1) to ( 5) is the target of ratio calculation in the tenth embodiment. In the 10th embodiment, the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio of (1-2), and in (2) to (5) is configured to perform the ratio calculation process every 400 games, but it may also be configured such that the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in (2) to (5), for example. Note that, as described above, either (1-1) or (1-2) above may be configured to be calculated and displayed in accordance with the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio calculation process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (thirteenth). First, in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth), the data set in the predetermined register in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth) (the data here is data regarding the calculation number of the advantageous section ratio). get. Next, a predetermined comparison operation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (thirteenth), and it is determined whether the calculation number is related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous section ratio (determined No), then in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the calculation number is stored in a predetermined register. 400 Set the data (for example, 2 bytes) stored in the game counter, determine whether the data value at this time is "0", and if the data value is "0", in other words Then, if the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (if determined as Yes), in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table previously stored in the second ROM is is set in the specified register. Thereafter, in step 1637-7-6 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing for calculating a ratio is performed on the set address data.

Thereafter, in step 1637-7-7 (thirteenth), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth) was set. Thereafter, in step 1637-7-8 (thirteenth), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the calculation process, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637- In Step 7-9 (13th), as described above, the data for displaying the ratio at 99% is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the same register in which the data acquired in Step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set) may be used. ) (because the ratio segment SH20 is 2 digits). Thereafter, in step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register and the process proceeds to the next step.

In addition, in the case of Yes in step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and in the case of No in step 1637-7-4 (13th), The process moves to step 1637-7-9 (thirteenth), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (thirteenth), the process moves to step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth).

Next, in step 1637-8 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio display processing. FIG. 147 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine of ratio display processing by the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1637-8 (thirteenth). First, in step 1637-8-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, for example. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (thirteenth), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a 1000-digit display request for the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that the 1000-digit display request in the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), the performance display device SH It is determined whether a 100-digit display request in the SH is received. If it is determined that the 100-digit display request on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is acquired and a predetermined Performs calculation processing. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (thirteenth), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a one-digit display request for the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a 1-digit display request has not been received in the performance display device SH, in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical AND operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set. (For example, an operation such as swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits.)

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (thirteenth), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and data obtained by the arithmetic operation is obtained. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (thirteenth), data related to the flashing request flag stored in advance is stored in a predetermined register, and the process moves to the next process.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 145, next, in step 1637-9 (thirteenth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt termination process, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area Modified example 1 >> Next, the calculation processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying information on the performance display device SH is performed in the second ROM/RAM area. A modification example in which processing is performed will be described. As a modification example 1 (sometimes referred to as modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment) of <<processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> in the tenth embodiment, for example, the game progress control processing of the main control board M (see FIG. 16 to 18). Hereinafter, a modification of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area will be described.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Note that a detailed explanation of the same processing as in FIG. 18 will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that unlike the tenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed by interrupt processing, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area regarding the performance display device SH is executed. It is executed in main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 148, the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game section transition control processing of step 3500 is performed. Note that the timing for performing arithmetic processing on the information displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is within the main loop process, for example, it may be before the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> To explain the flowchart, in step 3500, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, in step 3501, the CPU 100 of the main control board M As a process in the first ROM/RAM area, a count upper limit check process in the second ROM/RAM area is called.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game count process. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an advantageous section game count process. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a process of counting the number of paid out accessories. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous accessory payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio calculation process. Next, in step 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

As described above, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, calculation processing related to items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH) is performed in the second ROM/RAM area. processing) is executed as the main loop processing. Furthermore, although details will be described later, display processing on the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt processing.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process, and moves on to the next process.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Since the content of the display processing on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is the same as in the tenth embodiment, the details will be omitted.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Specifically, in step 1636, if the update state of the built-in random number is normal (Yes), in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the main control board The M CPU 100 calls the ratio display process of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt termination process, and moves on to the next process.

In this way, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, as processing related to the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, arithmetic processing related to items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed in the main loop processing. The display processing on the performance display device SH is executed as an interrupt processing.

With this configuration, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the display processing to the performance display device SH that needs to be constantly executed (updated) is executed by interrupt processing, while the constant processing By configuring the calculation processing related to items displayed on the performance display device SH that do not need to be executed (updated) to be executed for each game as main loop processing, the amount of data used can be reduced without executing unnecessary processing. can be reduced.

<<<10th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH>>> Next, a test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the 10th embodiment and the first modification from the 10th embodiment, as for the configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH, whether there are any problems with the segments of the performance display device SH (for example, where the segments are lit) It is configured to have a test display mode for checking whether the lights are evenly lit, etc.). The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be executed (displayed) at the following timings. (1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the settings change device control process starts (start of settings change mode) and ends within 5 seconds. ) The display starts when the settings confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the settings confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an error in the RAM of the main control board M, Display until resolved

FIG. 150 is an example of a test display on the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in the test display mode. First, test display pattern 1 will be explained. Test display pattern 1 exemplifies a case where a test display is executed when the power is turned on. As mentioned above, when the test display is executed after the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display. This example shows a case where the test display ends after 5 seconds.

<<10th Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 1>> Test display pattern 1 consists of a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and a lighting pattern (c) (this is when the test display ends). It is configured with three display modes (display mode). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Furthermore, the lighting pattern (b) is also a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are executed alternately. As a result, all the segments, including the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20, are lit at least once, and the structure is such that it is possible to discover segments that are malfunctioning and do not light up. Note that the lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is a display mode in which all segments (segments) are lit (it is also possible to use a display mode in which two lighting patterns are combined so that all the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit).

Further, the test display pattern 1 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are displayed alternately as (a) → (b) → (a)... , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, the test display of the performance display device SH ends by displaying the display mode of the lights-out pattern (c) that notifies the end of the test display after 5 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds). It is configured. In test display pattern 1, the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds, so for example, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 1 second. The number of lighting cycles that can be tested in 5 seconds is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, so the test display is configured to end after displaying the display mode of lighting pattern (b) for 0.5 seconds. .

Although the figure shows an example of turning off the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 as shown in (c) when the test display is finished, the present invention is not limited to this. First, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above with reference to FIG. 143 (for example, display starts from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<10th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Modifications of Test Display Pattern 1>> Modifications regarding test displays will be detailed below as configurations of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine of this example. .

It is assumed that the lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 143 is 1 second. With this setting, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and when 2 lighting cycles are completed, 4 seconds have passed, and the next lighting cycle (3rd lighting cycle) is 2 seconds. (lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, execute the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) twice and finish the test display. In other words, the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is The test display may be configured to end when the test display is executed, or after the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) is executed twice, the test display is performed by lighting at (a) for 1 second. In other words, the lighting cycle may be repeatedly executed for a predetermined period of 5 seconds, and the test display may be terminated at the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<<10th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 2>> Next, test display pattern 2 will be explained. Test display pattern 2 is assumed to be executed during the setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Note that the test display may be configured to be executed during all errors (or some errors) that may occur in the gaming machine according to this example.

The test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (d), a lighting pattern (e), and a lighting-off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (d) is a display mode in which all the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Furthermore, the lighting pattern (e) is a display mode in which the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are completely turned off. In this way, by alternately executing the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, It is configured to detect segments that are malfunctioning and do not turn on.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are lit alternately as (d) → (e) → (d)... , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered (0 seconds), test display is performed alternately for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d)→(e)→(d), etc. Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (in this case, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered), the test display also ends. That is, the test display ends at the timing when the test display end condition is met, regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

Although the figure shows an example of turning off the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 as shown in (c) when the test display is finished, the present invention is not limited to this. First, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above with reference to FIG. 143 (for example, display starts from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<Test display pattern 3 of tenth embodiment performance display device SH>> Next, FIG. 151 shows test display pattern 3. In comparison with test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2, a test display when the timings at which test displays can be executed overlap will be described as test display pattern 3. Note that the display manner of the lighting patterns in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, etc. are the same as those of the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. FIG. 151 will be described in detail below.

First, to explain the period during which test display pattern 3 is performed, it is similar to test display pattern 1 in that the timing when the power is turned on is used as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is entered within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display that has started to be executed when the power is turned on ends due to the passage of time, the start conditions for a new test display are satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode as a trigger. After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode starts), the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display appears. The process ends.

In test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is entered 2.7 seconds after the timing when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode does not start at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, if the test display starts with the start of the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device SH is configured to light up as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically, lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights up for 0.5 seconds (a) → lights up for 0.2 seconds (b) → lights up for 0.3 seconds (a) → lights up for 0.3 seconds (b) due to setting confirmation mode Lights up→...→The test display is executed as if the test display had ended due to the completion of the setting confirmation mode.

<<10th Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modification 1>> In the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the timing when the power is turned on until the setting confirmation mode ends is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds, which exceeds the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power-on, but if the setting confirmation mode ends early, for example, the setting Assuming that the test display period related to confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the period from when the power is turned on until the setting confirmation mode ends is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, and does not exceed the test period of 5 seconds after power-on. In such a situation, the test display will not be executed from the end of the settings confirmation mode until the end of the test display period after the power is turned on (regardless of the end timing of the settings confirmation mode, once the settings confirmation mode ends) Alternatively, the test display after power-on may be configured to end in 0.8 seconds (until 5 seconds have elapsed since power-on), which is the remaining period of the test display period after power-on. The test display may be restarted, or the test display may be restarted after the power is turned on until the test display ends when the power is turned on. Note that when restarting the test display after the power is turned on, for example, the starting point is the timing at which the settings confirmation mode ends (at this time, it is determined that the test display in the settings confirmation mode has ended and the power is turned on again). , the test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds), and according to the display mode of test display pattern 1, (a) → (b) → (a)... and 0.8 It may be configured to perform a test display for seconds.

<<10th Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modified example 2>> The configuration in which test displays overlap, which is illustrated as a modified example 2 of the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is just an example. and is applicable to all combinations that are executed in duplicate as test displays.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, (1) the display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds; and (2) the display starts when the settings change device control process starts (the start of the settings change mode). , the display ends within 5 seconds (3) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display ends when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Although the configuration is configured such that four test displays such as those described above can be executed after the display starts and are displayed until the error (abnormality) is resolved, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or more of the test displays described above can be executed. It may be configured to obtain. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, any of the configurations related to the test display described above may be applied.

In addition, in the test display in (3) above, the same test display may be executed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the test display may be executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). (Exit display). Further, the display period of 5 seconds in the above (1) and (2) is just an example, and there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the lighting pattern in (1) above and the lighting pattern in (3) above are different lighting patterns, but the lighting pattern is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern (lighting time/lighting out time) is the same. You can also use it as

It should be noted that the lighting pattern for the test display may be a pattern other than the one described above, but it should be set so that it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern as described above in Figure 143 (so that the administrator can visually check it). It is preferable to configure (different periods for switching the lighting mode, different lighting segments, etc.).

Note that even when the performance display device SH is executing a test display, the configuration is such that calculation processing of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation processing of information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. Good too. As a specific example of such a configuration, the following configuration may be used. (1) A power outage occurs → (2) Accepts the operation of the final stop reel → (3) Executes power outage processing before executing calculation processing of items displayed on the performance display device SH → (4) Gaming machine The power supply to becomes 0 → (5) Recovery from power-off → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execute the process → (8) End the test display mode → (9) Display on the performance display device SH the information that is currently displayed on the performance display device SH, corresponding to the latest calculation result. The information displayed on the performance display device SH is the information after the arithmetic processing has been performed, so it may be different from the information before the power outage occurs. In addition, even if a power outage occurs after receiving the final stop reel, if the power outage processing is executed before executing the calculation processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH, then (3) above or later. follows the same flow.

<<Eleventh Embodiment: Configuration related to cancellation/automatic settlement>> As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration related to a gaming machine that can execute game progress suitable for the business format desired by the administrator of the gaming hall. are detailed below.

As an example of the operating format of a gaming parlor, (1) Quantitative: The progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined number of balls are obtained, and the operation of the gaming machine for the day is ended. (2) One-time exchange: Specific timing (3) Lucky number system: It is possible to continue playing if a specific benefit is given, but if a predetermined benefit is given, the game can be temporarily ended. Possible business formats. As a configuration of a gaming machine that can realize such a business form, a gaming machine that can execute and set cancellation and automatic settlement is suitable.

Furthermore, "stopping" means stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is met, and "automatic settlement" means stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met. It is important to carry out the task without doing anything. Furthermore, stopping the progress of the game means that acceptance of the start lever operation becomes invalid, or that bets become invalid (game medals cannot be inserted due to the blocker being turned off, and acceptance of the bet button operation is invalidated). It is.

Here, to give an example of the effect when a certain game ends and then stops, the reels related to a certain game start rotating, then a stop operation is performed, each reel stops, and finally the reels start rotating. The reel driving state of the right reel M53 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (the symbols scheduled to be stopped and the passing symbols match), After setting the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter to 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms), the four-phase excitation of the step motor is turned on. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter will be decremented in the interrupt process executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on. In the case of a game that does not occur, the stop processing is not executed in a situation where the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90), and when it becomes less than 90, the stop processing is executed, If the certain game is a game in which the payout of game medals occurs, a termination process is executed after the payout of game medals is completed (after the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0) (2) ) Regardless of whether or not the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, the discontinuation process is performed after the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter becomes 0 (after the game medal payout is completed). It may be configured as above to be executed. In addition, when configured as in (1) above, there is a possibility that the reel is moving (rotating) until the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter reaches from 100 to 90. , it is possible to configure the system so that the stop processing is not executed, and the stop processing is performed after the reels reach a value below 90, which is when the reels have completely stopped, so that the player can notify the player that the reels have stopped and the game is over. It becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be made to recognize more quickly that he does not need to insert game medals for the next game.

In addition, the payment process related to automatic payment (the payment process that is executed when specific conditions are met) and the payment process that is executed by operating the payment button are configured so that they can be executed as the same process. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executable as separate and different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, a configuration related to cancellation and automatic settlement applicable to this example will be described in detail.

First, the predetermined conditions for executing the selectable abort in this example are (1) None, (2) When all target BBs are completed, (3) When BB1 is completed, (4) When BB2 is completed, (5) The configuration allows selection from eight items: (6) difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets, (7) when three or more AT sets are completed, and (8) when a specific AT ends.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for executing automatic payment that can be selected in this example include (1) None, (2) When all target BBs are completed, (3) When BB1 is completed, (4) When BB2 is completed, (5) ) The number of difference sheets exceeds 500 sheets, (6) The number of difference sheets exceeds 1000 sheets, (7) When 3 or more AT sets are completed, (8) When a specific AT ends, (9) When discontinued. There is.

Regarding (5) and (6) above, if the difference in the number of coins exceeds the specified number and the player is in an advantageous state such as during a BB or during an advantageous period, the advantageous state It may be configured such that it is determined that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the process ends. Further, in this example, the difference number of sheets is set to 500 sheets or 1000 sheets, but the configuration may be such that the administrator can set an arbitrary number of sheets. In addition, to count the difference number of sheets, a counter (sometimes referred to as MY counter, difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum number of difference sheets in one advantageous section, which will force the end of the advantageous section, is provided, The counter may be used to count the difference in number of sheets, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference in number of sheets controlled by a main control board M different from the counter may be used. Further, instead of the difference number of sheets exceeding 500 or the difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets, the predetermined condition may be set to the difference number of sheets 500 or more or the difference number of sheets 1000 or more.

In addition, since the MY counter is updated only with the number of bets of 1, for example, if the number of bets of 1 is set to "3", the counter value of the MY counter will be canceled as a result of playing a prescribed game with 3 coins. Although the number of coins obtained has reached 500 coins, the actual number of coins acquired may be less than 500 coins because the game was executed with a bet other than 3 coins before the reaching timing. If the configuration is such that discontinuation is performed based on the counter value of the MY counter, discontinuation may occur even if the actual number of acquired coins is small, as described above. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number of coins that is separate from the MY counter and counting the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure consistency between the actual number of coins acquired and the execution of cancellation. . Furthermore, since 2-bet bet games (games other than 3-bet bets) are disadvantageous games for the player by design, the 2-bet bet game may be viewed as some kind of cheating/fraud and be stopped based on the MY counter. .

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable that three or more sets of AT (or ART) continue and the timing is set at the end of the AT and advantageous sections. Furthermore, in the case of having an AT that is not so-called set number management, the condition may be such that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

Further, the specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous for the player, such as an AT that has a high possibility of acquiring a predetermined number or more (for example, 500 or more) of game medals. .

In addition, information regarding the predetermined conditions under which cancellation is executed and the specific conditions under which automatic settlement is executed is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referenced when the power is turned on. Accordingly, the predetermined condition and the specific condition are determined. Note that the dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM/RAM area.

Note that the timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition by referring to a specific RAM area is not limited to only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends, or when the termination/automatic payment setting mode is used. , when the setting/reset button M30 is operated, when selecting a decision item during the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode, or it may be configured to be able to be decided at a plurality of timings.

Further, the predetermined condition stored in the specific RAM area and the method of changing the specific condition are configured such that the settings can be changed by operating a stop button or the like during a setting change mode. .

Note that the predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 152 are just examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Further, it may be configured to be determined based on only one item as a condition, or may be configured to be determined based on a plurality of items as a condition.

As a modification example of the predetermined condition or the specific condition, the following configuration may be used. (1) A predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus is within the specified bonus (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not stopped and displayed) This is suitable when the internal situation is relatively disadvantageous for the player (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of coins put in is greater than the number of coins paid out), the probability of winning AT is low, etc.) be. (2) During the execution of the predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus starts, the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of inserted medals is higher than the number of paid out medals). This is suitable when the winning probability of AT is low). (3) Suitable when the probability of winning a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section in a normal section that is satisfied when the normal section shifts to an advantageous section is high (for example, 99/100).

Next, an example of a method for changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155.

First, FIG. 153 is an image diagram of each mode transition. When the setting change mode is entered, "stop/automatic payment setting mode" is displayed on the effect display device S40, as shown in (a) in the figure. Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, the options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (b) in the figure. Note that in (b), since no setting is made to stop, the predetermined condition is "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the termination will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, the options for the specific conditions described above are displayed as the "automatic payment setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (c) in the figure. Note that in (c), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, "1: Absent" and "2: Present" are set as the "notification setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (d) in the figure. If "None" is determined as the "Notification setting mode", even if the cancellation or automatic payment is made, the effect display device S40 will not notify you of the cancellation or automatic payment, and the "Notification setting mode" will not be executed. If "Yes" is determined as "Yes", the effect display device S40 is configured to issue a notification regarding the cancellation or automatic settlement in the event of cancellation or automatic settlement.

Note that when the mode is changed by operating the right stop button D43, the cursor position may be configured to select "1 None" at the top, or may be configured to select the currently determined predetermined condition or specific It may be configured to select a condition or notification setting mode setting.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" shown in FIG. It will switch as (d) → (a)...

In addition, in this example, although the structure which uses the right stop button D43 as an operation member related to a mode transition was illustrated, it is an example to the last, and there is no problem also in the left stop button D41 or the middle stop button D42.

Next, FIG. 154 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection. This figure exemplifies the configuration related to the operation when selecting an item within one mode in the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" described above in FIG. 153.

By moving to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 with the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" displayed, the "stop setting mode" will be displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (e) in the figure. '', the options for the predetermined conditions described above are displayed (similar to (b) in FIG. 153). Note that in (b), since no setting is made to stop, the predetermined condition is "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the termination will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" moves as shown in (f) in the figure, and "2 When all target BBs are completed" is selected.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the options for the specific conditions described above are displayed as the "automatic payment setting mode" on the effect display device S40. Note that in (g), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the left stop button D41, the options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (h) in the figure. That is, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode changes in the order of "stop/automatic payment setting mode" → "stop setting mode" → "automatic payment setting mode" → "notification setting mode" → "stop/automatic payment setting mode". The mode is configured to change to the previous mode by operating the left stop button D41. Furthermore, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the current mode can be moved (in this example, it is moved down one level). In addition, since the cursor selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" in (f), the cursor also selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" when transitioning to (h). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select an initial position (such as "1 None") when a new mode transitions.

Note that the method for determining the predetermined condition, specific condition, and settings for the presence or absence of notification in FIGS. 153 and 154 (method for changing the information stored in the specific RAM) is configured as follows. Good too. (1) The item selected by the cursor at the time of the mode transition is determined (2) The item selected by the cursor continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) (3) The specified operating member (start lever etc.), the cursor will be set to the selected item when staying in each mode. (5) To end the settings change mode, turn the setting key switch from ON to OFF to determine the item that the cursor was selecting while staying in each mode.Configured as above You may.

In addition, as in the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 153 and 154, settings related to cancellation (sometimes referred to as settings of predetermined conditions or settings of a cancellation function), settings related to automatic payment (specific In a state where it is possible to set conditions (sometimes referred to as setting automatic payment functions), it is possible to determine whether the termination function will be enabled or not and whether the automatic payment function will be effective if determined in the current situation. may be configured to be displayed on a display section (for example, payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of the display mode, valid/invalid is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, with “A” indicating valid and “F” indicating invalid; It may be configured to display whether the automatic payment function is enabled or disabled in the digit. More specifically, the display mode is as follows. Cancellation function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Valid, Display "AA" on the payout number display device D270 Cancellation function: Valid, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Display "AF" on the payout number display device D270 Cancellation function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function : Valid, display "FA" on payout number display device D270 Stop function: disabled, automatic settlement function: disabled, display "FF" on payout number display device D270

In addition, the above-mentioned display of whether the cancellation function and automatic payment function are enabled or disabled may be configured to be displayed in the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode before the cancellation function and automatic payment function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, in a situation where a value other than "1 None" is selected in the stop setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", and the stop setting mode will be set. In a situation where "1 None" is selected in the payout number display device D270, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F", and in a situation where a value other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic payment setting mode, the payout number display device D270 will be set to "F". The one's digit of the number display device D270 is "A", and in the situation where "1 None" is selected in the automatic payment setting mode, the one's digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F". Become.

Furthermore, when it is determined whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid, the above-mentioned display of whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid may be displayed. In this case, for example, if a value other than "1 None" is determined in the discontinuation setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination. If "1 None" is determined in the cancellation setting mode, "F" will be displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time from the decision, and in the automatic settlement setting mode. If a decision other than "1 None" is made, "A" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time after the decision, and "1 None" is decided in the automatic settlement setting mode. In this case, it may be configured such that "F" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined period of time after the determination.

Note that the above-mentioned display of validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and the automatic payment function may be configured to be displayed on a display section controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Further, the display mode is just an example, and may be displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, etc. as appropriate.

In addition, when displaying the validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and automatic payment function as described above on the display section controlled by the main control board M, the display section controlled by the sub-control board S (for example, The effect display device S40) may also be configured to (at the same time) display an indication of whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid. In the case of such a configuration, the display mode on the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode that makes it easy for the administrator of the game hall to recognize whether the cancellation function and automatic payment function are enabled or disabled. You may.

Next, FIG. 155 shows the effect display device in the case where the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes" and the "stopping setting mode" is set to "3 At the end of BB1", when the stoppage actually occurs. It is a display image diagram in S40.

As shown in the figure, the performance display device S40 displays a message "BB1 ends" which triggered the cancellation, and a display "300 medals acquired" which is the number of game medals obtained in BB1. When the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", the message "Please call an attendant during suspension" will be displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", by notifying the player that the game has been discontinued, the player can proceed with the game without being confused. Further, although not shown, even when automatic payment is executed, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information to the effect that automatic payment has been executed.

Note that the configuration of the operating members illustrated in the eleventh embodiment is just an example, and any combination of operating members that are controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, as for the cancellation method in the case of suspension, it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot cancel the cancellation but the administrator can cancel the cancellation.For example, opening the front door DU (using the key to open the front door DU) It may be configured so that it can be canceled by operating the setting/reset button M30 (off → on) or by operating the setting/reset button M30.

Furthermore, when automatic payment is executed, the configuration may be such that the game can be played (game medals can be inserted) as soon as the payment is completed, in the same way as when the player operates the payment switch. , The game may be configured to be playable after the administrator performs an operation, similar to the case of stopping the game.

Note that the conditions for transitioning to the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 153 to 155 are just examples, and include (1) transition to setting confirmation mode, and (2) a situation where all reels are stopped. Press and hold the setting/reset button M30 (for example, keep it on for 3 seconds) (3) Open the front door DU and operate any of the operating members controlled by the main control board M as transition conditions. good. In addition, when configured as in (2) or (3) above, it is possible to shift to the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode even during operation of the gaming hall, and change settings regarding cancellation and automatic payment.

Further, the information in the specific RAM area described above may be configured to be cleared when a setting change is made, or may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other Applicable Configurations Related to Stopping and Automatic Settlement> Configurations related to stopping and automatic settlement that are applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that one or more configurations detailed below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example.

It may be configured such that the process of termination and automatic settlement is executed after the process related to lighting/extinguishing the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to match the lighting or extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH with the game section of the next game.

If the difference in number of coins is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 500 coins) and the situation advantageous to the player ends, the difference in number of coins is set to satisfy the predetermined condition or the specific condition. If the discontinuation flag or automatic settlement flag is turned on when the value exceeds the value, and the difference in the number of coins falls below the specified value again before the situation that is advantageous to the player ends (for example, an advantageous section), the discontinuation flag is turned on. Alternatively, the automatic payment flag may be configured to be turned off (cancellation or automatic payment is not executed), or may be left on (cancellation or automatic payment is executed). As a specific example, set one of the following as a predetermined condition: "5. Number of difference sheets is over 500 sheets", "6. Number of difference sheets is over 1000 sheets", "5. Number of difference sheets is 500 sheets or more", "6. Number of difference sheets is 1000 sheets or more" ( Even if a certain game is executed and the difference in the number of coins satisfies a predetermined condition, if a certain game is completed and the specified bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a predetermined gaming state) after the completion of the certain game. In some cases, the termination process may not be executed immediately (by turning on the flag), but may be configured to be executed when the predetermined bonus ends.

In the case where the game is configured to stop due to stoppage or automatic settlement, if the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped in the game that will be stopped or automatic settlement, the stoppage or automatic bet related to the replay will be stopped or It may be configured to perform automatic settlement, or it may be configured to execute automatic bet termination or automatic settlement after executing automatic bet.

Even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the menu screen or QR code (registered trademark) can be displayed by the player operating the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB. may be configured. With this configuration, even if the game is stopped due to cancellation without being aware that the game will be stopped, the game history can be saved without any problem. Further, in such a configuration, even if a power outage occurs, data related to gaming history may be retained.

From the start of the display of the end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous section end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that informs the player that the advantageous state has ended, without operating any operation member (without proceeding with the game) ) If the standby screen is configured to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and if the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to cancellation, the standby screen may not be displayed even after the predetermined time has elapsed. It's okay. Furthermore, if a power failure occurs while the end screen is being displayed, a normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and the standby screen) or a standby screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

If the game is configured to meet the conditions for outputting external signals related to cancellation or automatic settlement when the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the external signal will be output even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement. may be configured to be continuous.

If the game is configured to stop due to cancellation or automatic payment, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit will be lit in red and the back lamp will be turned off, etc., so that the game center manager can easily recognize the stoppage of the game. It may be configured to turn on and off in a lighting mode that is easily distinguishable from when the vehicle is moving (a combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp).

The audio data during payment may be the same or different between payment performed by the player operating the payment button and automatic payment.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electronically stored in credits and one or more game medals are bet, (1) If automatic settlement is executed, either the credit or the bet will be played. Even when the medals are also settled and the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, it may be configured such that both the game medals for credits and bets are settled. (2) If automatic settlement is executed, both game medals for credits and bets will be settled, and if settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the betted game medals will be settled. It may be configured so that only the payment is made. (3) If automatic settlement is executed, both credits and bets will be settled, and if settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the game medals will be saved in credits. It may be configured such that only game medals are settled.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154, if the conditions for ending the termination/automatic settlement setting mode are met during the setting in the termination/automatic settlement setting mode (when the game starts, a power outage occurs) (e.g.), it may be configured to execute a process to confirm the item that was being selected (selected by the cursor) in the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode.

A mechanical switch that can be physically turned on and off may be provided. For example, a mechanical switch for stopping the game and a mechanical switch for automatic payment may be provided, and in such a case, the predetermined condition and the specific condition may be set in advance for the gaming machine. It is also possible to set the condition as follows. Alternatively, a mechanical switch related to termination or automatic settlement may be provided, and the configuration may be configured such that termination or automatic settlement can be set in the termination/automatic settlement setting mode described above (setting possible via software). In addition, when a mechanical switch is provided, the execution conditions for termination or automatic payment are set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to display an error on a display section (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when an input medal retention error is detected). However, (1) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the relevant display section will not display that the game has stopped. (2) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement. (3) When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the display section displays the same display mode as when the error was detected. The display may be configured as described above.

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of automatic payment processing, the execution of the payment processing is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (notification regarding the predetermined error is made). It may also be configured to execute In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the first payout of game medals after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is turned on and off by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). It may be configured such that the payout related to the settlement process is stopped immediately after the payout is deemed to have been paid out.

If a predetermined error (for example, an input medal retention error) is detected during the execution of automatic payment processing, the system will set the predetermined error state after completing the payment processing (notification regarding the predetermined error will be executed). ). In addition, if the system is configured in such a way and the game is configured to stop after automatic payment is executed (performing the cancellation process), a predetermined error state can be set after the cancellation process is executed. Even in this state, it is possible to make notification regarding the suspension (notification regarding the suspension of the game).

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the automatic payment process, the system will set the system to a predetermined error state after completing the payment process (notify the user of the predetermined error). ), and the game is configured to stop after automatic payment is executed (performing termination processing), it may be configured to enter a predetermined error state before executing the termination processing. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly notify that there is an error state.

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reels of a game that is to be discontinued is stopped but before the discontinuation process is executed, the predetermined error will be executed after the discontinuation process is executed. By setting the game to an error state, it is possible to make notification regarding termination (notification regarding game stoppage) even in a predetermined error state.

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reels of a game that is to be discontinued is stopped and before the discontinuation process is executed, a predetermined error is detected before the discontinuation process is executed. It may be configured to cause an error state. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly notify that there is an error state.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB, may be disabled.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is preferable to configure the blocker to be turned off (game medals cannot pass through).

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation where a notification related to cancellation or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, notified by the production control device S40), an error will occur. Notification may be performed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In addition, when executing an error notification in such a case, (1) terminate the notification related to cancellation or automatic payment and execute the error notification (the notification may be displayed on the effect display device S40 or by a speaker) (1-1) After that, if the error is cleared and the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment will be restarted. (1-2) After that, if the error is canceled If the game is canceled and the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment will not be restarted. (2) In order to be able to recognize both the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment and the error notification, It may be configured as described above to notify the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment and the error notification in different areas (or partially overlapping areas) of the effect display device S40. In addition, in this example, even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is configured to be able to execute a process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred.

In the stop/automatic payment setting mode, in other words, even in a situation where any of the screens shown in FIGS. Alternatively, a new screen not shown in FIG. 153 (for example, (e) different from (a) to (d)) may be provided, and the volume or other settings may be changed while the new screen is displayed. The configuration may be such that the amount of light can be adjusted.

When the termination setting is in progress (a situation in which a value other than "1 None" is determined in the termination setting mode), the settings are more effective than when not in the termination setting (a situation in which "1 None" is determined in the termination setting mode). The system may be configured to relatively increase the appearance rate of suggestive effects (effects that suggest the current setting value, and whether or not to execute the effect and the frequency of execution vary depending on the current setting value). By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play while the game is set to be discontinued.

If the predetermined conditions for executing the termination process and the specific conditions for executing the automatic settlement process are set as the same conditions, and if the same conditions are met, after the automatic settlement process is executed. It may be configured to execute a termination process. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is also possible to configure the system so that the stop processing is executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). good.

If only the cancellation function is enabled (the predetermined conditions for cancellation are set, but the specific conditions for automatic payment are not set), or the predetermined conditions for cancellation and automatic payment processing are not set. In the case where the specific conditions to be executed are set as different conditions and the cancellation process is executed, the configuration may be such that the settlement process can be executed by operating the settlement button during the cancellation.

While the payment processing related to automatic payment is being executed, the payment processing by operating the payment button may not be executed (new payment processing may not be performed by operating the payment button).

Note that the situation where the abort setting is in progress is sometimes referred to as "the abort function is enabled", and the situation where the abort setting is not in progress is sometimes referred to as "the abort function is disabled" or "the abort function is not effective". Further, determining the predetermined condition is sometimes referred to as "satisfying the predetermined condition", and the options for the predetermined condition described above in FIG. 152 are sometimes referred to as "specific condition candidates". may or may not include "1 None". Furthermore, satisfying the predetermined condition that has been determined may be referred to as "meeting the specific condition."

In addition, the predetermined conditions of "5. Difference number of coins exceeding 500 coins" and "6. Difference number of coins exceeding 1000 coins" described above in FIG. '', and the predetermined conditions of ``5. Difference number of sheets: 500 sheets or more'' and ``6. Difference number of sheets: 1000 sheets or more'' are defined as ``the number of game media acquired in a specified period is a specified number or more''. It is sometimes called.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 152, in this example, selection candidates for a predetermined condition regarding cancellation (sometimes referred to as specific condition A selection candidates) and selection candidates for a specific condition regarding automatic payment (sometimes referred to as specific condition A selection candidates) are selected. B selection candidates (sometimes referred to as selection candidates) are configured so that some of them overlap, but selection candidates for predetermined conditions regarding cancellation and selection candidates for specific conditions regarding automatic payment are divided into (1) all candidates. (2) All candidates are the same. (3) Only some of the candidates are the same. Note that even in the case of configuration as in (2) or (3) above, it is also possible to make the determined (set) predetermined condition and the determined (set) specific condition the same. However, it should be noted that it is also possible to make them different.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned stopping function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. As a specific example, as a stopping process, the firing function is stopped (the game ball will no longer be fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated), and the entry of game balls into various ball entrance openings is disabled (when the ball enters the winning opening). Examples include processing such as game balls not being paid out even when the ball is pitched, and random numbers not being obtained even when the ball enters the ball entry hole. As an alternative to the difference in number of balls for drum-type gaming machines, the difference number is the cumulative difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out related to winnings (subtracting the number of balls fired from the number of balls paid out related to winnings), or the number of balls paid out related to winnings. The total number of balls paid out is the cumulative number of balls put out.

(Twelfth Embodiment) In the tenth embodiment, the configuration including the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example is not limited to that of the tenth embodiment. . Therefore, the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

First, FIG. 156 is a display example of the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment. In the figure, only the differences from the tenth embodiment will be explained in detail.

<Display Mode> The display mode of the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment is configured as follows.

As display items, (a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio or cumulative instructional accessory ratio (b) = Continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games (c) = Accessory ratio for 6000 games (d) = Cumulative Continuous accessory ratio (e) = cumulative accessory ratio (f) = cumulative accessory state ratio is displayed.

In the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) → (a)...・" The display changes in approximately 5 second increments. Note that if the power is cut off in the middle of the lighting pattern, the following configuration may be used. Here, a case will be exemplified in which the power is cut off two seconds after the lighting pattern (c) is reached. (1) Starts lighting from the beginning of display item (a) (2) Starts lighting from the beginning of display item (c) (3) Starts lighting from 2 seconds after display item (c) You can. In addition, when configured as in (2) and (3) above, it is also possible to configure the display item (a) to start lighting from the beginning when RAM clear is executed (at the end of setting change mode). good.

In addition, the cumulative number of games may be the number of games played since the power was turned on, the number of games played since the RAM was cleared, the number of games played since the time of factory shipment, or the number of games played since the specified RAM area is It may also be the number of backed up games.

(f) = Cumulative status ratio of accessories, etc. “Cumulative status ratio of accessories, etc.” Number of games + cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated when the type 1 special accessory is not activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated It can be calculated as follows: (Number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated) ÷ Total number of games played x 100 (%). As an example, the cumulative number of games played when type 1 special accessory is activated: 300 games, the cumulative number of games played when type 2 special accessory is activated: 100 games, and the cumulative number of games played when normal accessory is activated: 100 games. , 200 games played when the first-class special accessory is not activated when the first-class accessory continuous operation device is activated, and the second-class special accessory is not activated when the second-class accessory continuous operation device is activated. If the number of games played at the time is 50 games, and the total number of games played is 30,000 games, it is calculated as "(300+100+100+200+50)/(30,000)×100=2.5(%)".

In addition, when calculating the above-mentioned cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc., if the game machine does not have a type 2 special accessory as a specification, the number of games played when the cumulative type 2 special accessory is activated , The cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated when the second type special accessory continuous activation device is activated is not used, and the cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated is calculated as "(cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + cumulative normal number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated. Calculated as follows: Number of games played when the accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type special accessory continuous operation device is activated) ÷ Total number of games played × 100 (%) I will do it. In this way, when calculating display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, display items are calculated without using elements that are not included in the specifications of the gaming machine (display items other than the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc.) The same applies to items).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the game executed while inside the BB or RB (RT2 in FIG. 28, etc.) Number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated + Total number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated Number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated when the second type special accessory continuous operation device is activated) (Number of games played is not counted) It is configured like this.

Note that if the storage area for storing the total number of games, which is the denominator information used when calculating display items, is at the upper limit (for example, if the storage area is 3 bytes, "FFFFFF(H)") If "+1" is added as an update process and the digit overflows, the total number of games may be configured not to be updated from the next game onwards. In such a configuration, the numerator information, such as the cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated, may also be configured not to be updated, or information indicating that the total number of games has overflowed. The configuration may be such that "1" is stored in the storage area that stores "1". Furthermore, it may be configured to refer to the storage area that stores the total number of games played and manage whether to turn on or blink the display on the performance display device SH (storage area and display items used for lighting/blinking management). (It may also be used as the storage area used for calculations.) Note that the configuration regarding overflow is not limited to the storage area that stores the total number of games played, but can be applied to any information that is used when calculating display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH. It is possible.

Moreover, "5H" ("5H.") displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc. is displayed.

In addition, in the performance display device SH according to the twelfth embodiment, when the ratio display value is 50% or more of the cumulative accessory status ratio or more, the ratio segment SH20 is displayed blinking.

In addition, as described above, the display item (a) may be configured to display either the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed. When displaying the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, "7P" ("7P.") is displayed on the identification segment SH10, and "7U" ("7U.") is displayed on the identification segment SH10 when displaying the cumulative instruction-included accessory ratio. It is configured like this.

Further, as described above in the tenth embodiment, the processing related to the performance display monitor SH according to the twelfth embodiment may be configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. If so configured, step 1637
-7 (13th) ratio calculation process is executed as a process in the second ROM/RAM area. In addition, as mentioned above, when calculating the "cumulative state ratio of accessory objects, etc.", "(cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the cumulative second type special accessory is activated)" Number of games played + cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated when the type 1 special accessory is not activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated The number of games played when the type 2 special accessory is not activated) ÷ the cumulative total number of games played x 100 (%). Number of games + cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + cumulative number of games when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type special accessory is activated The number of games played + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory continuous activation device is activated and the second type special accessory is not activated'' and the ``total total number of games played'' used as the denominator are stored in the second RAM area. The Rukoto.

Here, after the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal by referring to the checksum after the power is turned on (for example, after executing the processing in steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13), the power-off processing is executed. The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) period or setting confirmation mode period), due to the occurrence of noise, the numerator data used to calculate the "total accessory status ratio", in other words, the data stored in the second RAM area "Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated There is an abnormality in one or more of the following information: ``Number of games played when type 1 special accessory object is not activated during operation + cumulative number of games played when type 2 special accessory object is not activated when type 2 special accessory object continuous operation device is activated.'' occurs and the value is changed, and the numerator is "total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated" than the denominator, which is the "total number of games played" Number of games played at the time + Cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type accessory continuous operation device is activated + Total number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated Even if the number of games played when the actuator is activated and the second type special accessory is not activated becomes a larger value, in the twelfth embodiment, the ratio calculation, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM area, is performed. In the process, a calculation regarding the "cumulative accessory state ratio" is executed, and based on the result of the calculation process, a display process is performed on the performance display monitor SH {for example, the ratio display process of step 1637-8 (thirteenth)} (executes the same processing as when no noise is occurring). In addition, the "cumulative accessory status ratio" is just an example, and includes the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, the accessory ratio for 6000 games, Concerning the cumulative continuous accessory ratio and the cumulative total accessory ratio, if noise occurs and the information used for calculations stored in the second RAM area changes, the above-mentioned "cumulative accessory ratio" It may be configured to have the same effect as in the case of "equal state ratio". In other words, after the checksum is referenced after the power is turned on and it is determined that the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, after the processes in steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed), the power-off processing is executed. The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) (in other words, the period during which the game can be executed, the period during which the game is being executed, the setting change mode period and the period of the setting confirmation mode), the configuration is such that determination (error check processing) as to whether the numerator value is larger than the denominator value is not performed. With this configuration, even if the numerator value becomes larger than the denominator value due to noise etc. during a game just before closing time, the error will not cause any disadvantage to the player. , it becomes possible to advance the game.

Note that after executing the power-off processing and calculating the checksum (for example, after executing the process in step 1906 in FIG. 36), the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced to calculate the power-off recovery data. During the period (in other words, the period during which the power is off) before it is determined whether or not the If an abnormality occurs in one or more of the numerator data or denominator data used to calculate the "cumulative accessory condition ratio" due to this occurrence, the value is changed. (1) If the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs; if the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area is (2) If the determination is No in step 1016, an unrecoverable error occurs; if the determination is No in step 1028, the initialization is performed for the calculation stored in the second RAM area. It may also be configured such that the RAM is initialized without including any information.

The configuration regarding the effect when noise occurs is described in detail for the case of calculating the "cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc." as an example, but the configuration regarding the effect when noise occurs that is applicable to this example is explained in detail. The configuration is not limited only to the case of calculating the "cumulative accessory status ratio", but also "cumulative advantageous section ratio or cumulative instructional accessory ratio", "continuous accessory ratio during 6000 games", " It can also be applied to the case of calculating the "accessory object ratio for 6000 games", the "cumulative continuous accessory ratio", and the "cumulative accessory ratio".

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration related to the display in the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the twelfth embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have the performance display device SH. More specifically, even in a gaming machine that does not have the performance display device SH, similarly to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to execute calculations on display items and transmit the calculation results from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the information used to calculate the display items may be measured (counted) and the measurement result (count result) sent from the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (the calculation may be performed outside the gaming machine). ).

(Thirteenth Embodiment) The drum-type game machine of this example may be a medalless drum-type game machine that does not use game medals. An example of such a configuration will be described in detail below as a thirteenth embodiment. Note that any of the above-mentioned configurations may be applied as a configuration that does not affect whether or not game medals are used. Note that a medalless drum-type gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine that does not use game medals (including physical medals or metal pieces for detection by a sensor) but uses points.

<<<Functional block diagram related to medal-less drum-type gaming machine>>> First, FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram applicable to the medal-less drum-type gaming machine of this example. The figure shows a hard interface that shows physical connections using cables, and a soft interface that shows how commands are sent.

<<Inside the gaming machine>> Inside the medalless reel-type gaming machine, there is a main control board that controls the progress of the game, a payout control board that controls points, and information that can be sent and received from outside the gaming machine. It has a connecting terminal plate. Although not shown, the gaming machine may have an external terminal board for outputting external signals to the outside.

<Main Control Board> When the 1-bet button is operated in a valid state, a 1-card insertion switch signal, which is a signal to bet one score, is transmitted to the main control board. Note that if a new 1-piece insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board in a situation where 1 point has already been bet, the number of bets will be 2 points. Additionally, when the 3-bet button (sometimes referred to as the max-bet button) is operated in a valid state, a 3-card insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board, which is a signal to bet the score by 3 points. Ru. Incidentally, the prescribed number of gaming machines according to the figure is three points. Further, when the return button is operated in a valid state, a return button signal for returning the betted points to the player is transmitted to the main control board. Note that the betted points are sent to the payout control board, which will be described later, and the payout control board adds the points as a return of the points (hereinafter referred to as "return to the payout control board" or "return to the payout control board"). ), the returned points are added and displayed on the total score display device.

Further, the main control board transmits the inserted number data, which is information regarding the display of the betted score, to the inserted number display device, so that the betted score is displayed on the inserted number display device. In addition, when points are awarded to the player due to the stopped display of the winning combination (due to winning), the main control board displays the winning number data, which is information related to the display of the winning number. By transmitting it to the device, the awarded points are displayed on the winning number display device. As an example of the display mode, if the score to be awarded is 8 points, the score to be awarded may be directly displayed as "0 → 8", or "0 → 1 → 2 →... → 8" may be displayed in stages ("0" in the above may be hidden).

Although not shown, the main control board also receives a medal insertion signal, which is a signal related to the fact that a score has been bet (inserted), and an activation signal, which is a signal related to the game status (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played). The device may be configured to be able to transmit the status, a door open signal that is a signal related to the opening of the front door, and a security signal that is a signal related to the error occurrence situation to the external terminal board.

Further, the main control board is configured to be able to send and receive control commands to and from the payout control board (bi-directional communication possible). Here, the control commands are commands related to the progress of the game, including commands related to payout of points, commands related to settlement of points, input request commands to request input of points, and electromagnetic signals related to points stored in the gaming machine. Commands for the number of medals, etc. Further, the payout control board is configured to be able to transmit a game enable signal, which is a command indicating that it is currently possible to proceed with the game, to the main control board.

Note that the main control board and the payout control board may be connected to the connection terminal board without using the external terminal board. In this case as well, the number of parts can be reduced and the configuration can be simplified, and signal deterioration can be prevented and communication can be performed appropriately. When the main control board and the payout control board are connected to the connection terminal board via the external terminal board, the external terminal board connects the main control board and the rental machine via the connection terminal board. . The external terminal board receives a medal insertion signal, operating status, door open signal, and security signal from the main control board. The external terminal board also receives a medal payout signal, which is a signal indicating that points will be paid out (given to the player), from the payout control board. The external terminal board also receives a medal insertion signal, which is a signal related to the fact that a score has been bet (inserted), an operating state, which is a signal related to the game status (for example, whether a bonus is being played or not), and a front door signal. The door open signal, which is a signal related to opening, the security signal, which is a signal related to the occurrence of an error, and the medal payout signal, which is a signal that points are paid out (given to the player), are sent to the outside of the gaming machine (main body). In the example, the configuration is such that it can be output to a rental machine.

<Payout Control Board> The payout control board is connected to the main control board for bidirectional communication. Further, an external terminal board, a total score display device, and a counting button (sometimes referred to as a settlement button) are electrically connected to the payout control board. When the counting button is operated in a valid state, a counting button signal, which is a signal indicating that a payment operation has been executed, is transmitted to the payout control board. Further, the payout control board is capable of transmitting game medal number data, which is information related to displaying the current total score owned by the player, to the total score display device, and the total score is displayed on the total score display device. It is configured like this. In addition, when the counting button is operated to perform score settlement, (1) the betted score and the score stored in the payout control board (the total score display device stored in the payout control board) (2) When there is a score that has been bet, only the score that has been bet is settled, and when there is no score that has been bet, it is stored in the payout control board. It may also be configured to settle the points that have been scored. Further, when the counting button is operated to perform score settlement, only a part of the scores stored in the payout control board may be settled or all of the scores may be settled. Further, if an error occurs in the gaming machine or if a game is in progress, the operation of the counting button can be disabled to prevent the payment process from being executed. By doing so, it is possible to add or subtract scores at appropriate timing, and it is possible to avoid doubts about the proper calculation results. Incidentally, even when an error occurs or when a game is in progress, the counting button may be enabled so that the settlement process can be executed at all times.

In this example, the aforementioned total score display device includes game medals (game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200) that are electrically stored in the storage device of a game machine that uses game medals. Although it is configured to display a score corresponding to the total number of game medals including the game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine such as the medal tray D230, the total score display device and the storage device are not limited to this. You may use it together. In such a configuration, the total score display device will display a score corresponding to the number of game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230 in the game machine that uses the game medals. .

<<Rental Machine Operation Unit>> The members provided in the machine rental operation unit provided outside the medalless drum-type gaming machine will be described in detail below. When the replay switch is operated in a valid state, a replay switch signal, which is a signal indicating that the replay switch has been operated, is transmitted to the rental machine. By sending a replay switch signal to the rental machine, the player plays the game using the points accumulated in the previous games (for example, the points stored electronically in the membership card). Scores related to replays will be stored in the gaming machine (for example, stored in the storage area of the payout control board). In addition, in a case where the game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) are stored in the gaming machine by operating the replay switch once, the points accumulated by the player from previous games is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 50 points), (1) a replay switch signal is not sent to the rental machine, (2) points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, (3) the predetermined It may also be configured such that scores less than a number are stored (added) in the gaming machine.

Further, when the lending button is operated in a valid state, a lending button signal, which is a signal used when storing points to be lent in the lending machine, is transmitted to the lending machine. By transmitting the lending button signal to the gaming machine, the points are transferred from the card in which the points purchased by the player on the day are stored to the gaming machine. In addition, in a case where the gaming machine is configured to store a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) by operating the lending button once, if the points stored in the card are less than the predetermined number (for example, 50 points), (less than the predetermined number of points), (1) the lending button signal is not sent to the lending machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, (3) the points less than the predetermined number are stored in the gaming machine. (addition). In addition, if the return switch is activated while the return switch is enabled, the card that stores the points purchased by the player on the same day will be returned to the player (the remaining points that were not lent out will be returned to the player). stored). Further, the player may be configured to be able to change the points that will be stored in the gaming machine by operating the lending button once.

In addition, the rental machine transmits the remaining points data, which is information related to displaying the points stored in the card purchased on the day mentioned above, to the remaining points display device. The accumulated points (sometimes referred to as the number of remaining points) are displayed (if the card purchased on the day is inserted in the rental machine). In addition, when the lending machine is able to lend out scores (scores can be transferred to the gaming machine), the lending machine transmits a lending available LED signal to the lending available LED, so that the lending available LED becomes available for lending (for example, , lights up), and the player can recognize that the item can be borrowed. Note that modes that can be rented may be lit and modes that cannot be lent may be turned off, or modes that are lentable may be lit in green, and modes that are not lentable may be lit in red. An example of whether or not it is possible to rent is if the membership card inserted into the rental machine or the card purchased on the day has points stored (more than a predetermined number of points stored). It may be configured so that

If communication is not possible between the gaming machine and the rental machine, it is preferable not to proceed with the game for score management purposes. For example, the game can be prevented from proceeding by not accepting operations on the start lever or bet button.

<<Lending machine>> In addition, the lending machine sends to the hall computer ball output performance information, which is various information regarding the balls put out of the gaming machine, and a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that the score has been bet (inserted). , a medal payout signal that is a signal that points will be paid out (given to the player), an operating state that is a signal related to the game status (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played), and a signal related to the opening of the front door. The device is configured to transmit a door open signal, which is a signal, and a security signal, which is a signal related to an error occurrence situation. In addition, the rental machine is configured to send information regarding the maximum difference in the number of coins (sometimes referred to as MY) on the day and gaming machine installation information, which will be described later, to the management computer, each company's center, and the gaming machine information center. There is.

In addition, as shown in the figure, the main control board, payout control board, connection terminal board on the gaming machine side, connection terminal board on the lending machine side, SC board, hall computer, management computer, company center, and gaming machine information center are as follows: Connected by a connecting cable. Here, the manner of communication between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the rental machine side will be described in detail using FIG. 158.

FIG. 158 shows an example of the communication contents of the connection cable used for communication between the connection terminal board on the game machine side and the connection terminal board on the rental machine side. The connector of the connection cable is made up of nine pins, and (1) the first pin serves as an insulated GND (pin for insulating from GND) and is connected from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). It is used for signals sent to (2) Pin No. 2 serves as the GND (sometimes referred to as ground) for the transmission signal sent using pin No. 6, and the signal sent from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). It is used for. (3) The No. 3 pin is used as the GND for the received signal sent using the No. 7 pin, and is used for the signal sent from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (4) Pin number 4 is a signal sent from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine as a connection confirmation signal to confirm that the lending machine is connected to the gaming machine (payout control board). It is used for. (5) Pin No. 5 is used as an insulating GND (pin for insulating from GND) for signals sent from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (6) Pin No. 6 is a signal sent from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the lending machine as a signal (transmission signal) sent from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the SC board (rental machine). It is used for. (7) Pin number 7 is sent from the SC board (rental machine) to the payout control board (gaming machine) as a signal (reception signal) that the payout control board (gaming machine) receives from the SC board (rental machine). It is used for signals that (8) Pin No. 8 is used as an insulating 5V pin (pin for insulating it from other 5V pins) for signals sent from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (9) Pin No. 9 is used as an insulating 5V pin (a pin for insulating it from other 5V pins) for signals sent from the rental machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). In addition, the pin No. 6 and pin No. 2 above are twisted (processed by twisting the cables together to put them together), and the pin No. 7 and pin No. 3 above are processed by twisting processing (processed by twisting the cables together to put them together). There is.

In this example, the signal to be sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine is transmitted from the No. 6 pin. In other words, all the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine are transmitted from the No. 6 pin. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental machine.

In this example, the signal sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine is transmitted from pin No. 7. In other words, all the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine are transmitted from pin No. 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be transmitted from the rental machine to the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 159 illustrates the contents of the gaming machine information notification command (sometimes referred to as gaming machine information notification). The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal sent using the No. 6 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG.

The command length of the gaming machine information notification command is variable and may differ depending on the command content, but it is composed of multiple bytes. The transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and consists of the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum, and more. Specifically, it is configured as follows. The length of the first command is 1-byte data ranging from 0xXX to 0xYY (X and Y are arbitrary numbers). The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x01. The third serial number is 1 byte of data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The No. 4 gaming machine type information is information indicating the type of gaming machine, and is 1-byte data. Game information type No. 5 is 1-byte data consisting of 0x00 gaming machine performance information, 0x01 gaming machine installation information, and 0x02HC/fraud monitoring information (HC is hall computer). The gaming machine information No. 6 is either gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information, and is 40 or 42 bytes of data, in other words, data of 2 bytes or more. It becomes. The checksum number 7 is 1 byte of data. Note that the above serial number may be referred to as a serial number.

Regarding the command length mentioned above, when transmitting gaming machine performance information or HC/fraud monitoring information that is 40 bytes as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x2E" and the gaming machine information will be 40 bytes. When transmitting gaming machine installation information of 42 bytes, the total command length is "0x30".

In addition, the game machine type information No. 4 above is composed of a code, a game machine, a group name, and a management medium, and as a specific example, 0x01: reel type game machine, group A, game medal 0x02: reel It is structured like a formula game machine, B group, and game medals.

In addition, the gaming machine information No. 6 above is configured to transmit one type of content corresponding to the gaming machine information type No. 5 above. For example, if No. 5 above is gaming machine performance information, In No. 6 above, information regarding the gaming status, etc. is transmitted as the content of the gaming machine performance information. In addition, the contents of the gaming machine installation information include the manufacturer code of the main control board CPU, the manufacturer code of the payout control board CPU, the product code, the chip ID number, etc., and the contents of the HC/fraud monitoring information include the IN - Contains OUT information, gaming status, etc.

The contents of the gaming machine performance information include, for example, display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH ("total accessory status ratio,""total advantageous section ratio, or cumulative accessory accessory ratio with instruction." ”, “Continuous role material ratio for 6000 games”, “Awareness ratio for 6000 games”, “
``Cumulative continuous accessory ratio'', ``Cumulative total accessory ratio''), and information used to calculate the display item (sometimes referred to as an element; for example, when the cumulative total type 1 special accessory is activated. The number of games played, total number of games played, etc.) may be configured to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine as gaming machine performance information.

A more specific example of the configuration of gaming machine performance information may be configured as follows. Total number of input points: This is the cumulative number of input points (IN, sometimes referred to as total input score) since the power was turned on, and is 2-byte data. Total number of points paid out: This is the cumulative number of points paid out since the power was turned on (sometimes referred to as OUT, total input points), and is 2-byte data. Note that if a re-gaming combination is won and an automatic bet is executed when the re-gaming symbols are stopped (after the symbol combinations related to the re-gaming are stopped and displayed), IN=0 points. Furthermore, when the replay symbols are stopped (a game in which the symbol combinations related to the replay are stopped and displayed), OUT=0 points are set. In this way, the total number of input points and the total number of payout points are calculated by accumulating and calculating the IN and OUT from the time the power is turned on. Note that when the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the total number of input points and the total number of payout points are cleared, and after the power is turned on, they are accumulated and calculated again from 0. With this configuration, the IN/OUT data of the gaming parlor for one day can be easily output to the outside of the gaming machine. MY in one business day: This is the value obtained by subtracting the smallest difference in the number of coins for the player from the largest difference in the number of coins for the player from the time the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and is a 2-byte value. It is data. Note that when a power outage occurs and the power is restored thereafter, MY for one business day is cleared. Note that it may be the counter value of the MY counter described above. Cumulative number of paid out bonuses: Cumulative number of paid out bonuses is: ``Cumulative number of tokens paid out while type 1 special accessory is in operation + Cumulative number of tokens paid out while type 2 special accessory is in operation + Ordinary accessory. This is the cumulative number of coins paid out during operation, and is 2-byte data. Furthermore, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored to normal, or if the settings are changed in a situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the cumulative number of paid out bonuses will not be cleared. There is. Cumulative number of continuous accessory payouts: The cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts is the cumulative number of coins paid out during the operation of the first type special accessory, and is 2-byte data. In addition, even if the power is restored to normal after a power outage occurs, or even after changing the settings in a situation where no RAM error has occurred, the cumulative number of consecutive bonus payouts will not be cleared. ing. Cumulative accessory ratio: Cumulative accessory ratio is ``(cumulative number of coins paid out while type 1 special accessory is in operation + cumulative number of coins paid out while type 2 special accessory is in operation + cumulative number of coins paid out while normal accessory is in operation) (Cumulative number of coins paid out) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)'', which is 1 byte of data. Furthermore, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored to normal, or even after changing the settings in a situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the cumulative accessory ratio will not be cleared. . Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: The cumulative continuous accessory ratio is “total number of coins paid out during the operation of the first type special accessory ÷ cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)”, and is 1 byte of data. ing. In addition, even if the power is restored to normal after a power outage occurs, or the settings are changed in a situation where no RAM error has occurred, the cumulative continuous role ratio will not be cleared. There is. Cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio or cumulative advantageous section ratio: Cumulative advantageous section ratio is "number of advantageous section games ÷ total number of games x 100 (%)", and cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is "{main control The number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes referred to as instructions) on the board M is executed + the number of coins paid out due to the accessory} ÷ the number of all paid tokens x 100 (%)'', and the ratio of the instruction-inclusive accessory and the advantage Which of the section ratios to display may be determined depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, and is 1 byte of data. In addition, even if the power supply is restored to normal after a power outage occurs, or even after the setting is changed in a situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio or the cumulative advantageous section ratio is not cleared. Accessories, etc. condition ratio: Accessories, etc. condition ratio is ``(cumulative number of games played when type 1 special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when type 2 special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games when normal accessory is activated) Number of games + cumulative number of games when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games when the second type special accessory is not activated when the second type special accessory is activated 1 byte of data. Furthermore, even if a power outage occurs and the power is restored to normal, or if the settings are changed in a situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the accessory status ratio will not be cleared. . In addition, the cumulative accessory ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the accessory status ratio are rounded down (discarded) to the nearest whole number. Further, the number of coins to be paid out may be referred to as the number of points to be paid out or the number of points to be paid out. In addition, in the gaming machine performance information, the cumulative accessory ratio, the cumulative consecutive accessory ratio, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the accessory status ratio are displayed on the performance display device. It may be configured to transmit data to be used. In addition, when calculating the state ratio of accessory objects, etc., if the game is executed once in a situation where both the 1st type special accessory object and the 1st type accessory object continuous operation device are operating, 1 will be added to the cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated, and will not be added to the cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type special accessory continuous operation device is activated. 1 will be added to the numerator of the above calculation formula (2 will not be added). In other words, if either the accessory is operating or the accessory continuous operation device is operating, 1 is stored in the RAM storage area that stores the numerator of the above calculation formula. It will be added.

Note that the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured so that error information can be transmitted, and in such a case, the configuration may be as follows. (1) Error information regarding the main control board and error information regarding the payout control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, it is configured to be able to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of error information regarding the main control board and 1 byte of error information regarding the payout control board. (2) Recoverable error information regarding the main control board and unrecoverable error information regarding the main control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, it is configured to be able to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of recoverable error information regarding the main control board and 1 byte of unrecoverable error information regarding the main control board. (3) Recoverable error information regarding the main control board, unrecoverable error information regarding the main control board, and error information regarding the payout control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, it is possible to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of recoverable error information regarding the main control board, 1 byte of unrecoverable error information regarding the main control board, and 1 byte of error information regarding the payout control board. Configure.

Although the medalless drum-type gaming machine according to this example is configured to have a payout control board, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control board in this example does not have a payout control board. The responsible configuration may be configured to be executable by the main control board.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command, the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine type information are , the game information type, and the gaming machine information, and the gaming machine information is data of 2 bytes or more. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information as gaming machine information, the gaming machine performance information is 40 bytes of data, but each byte is divided into 40 pieces from the 1st byte to the 40th byte. The checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is calculated using the data and the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine information type, which are 1-byte data. With this configuration, even if there is 2 or more bytes of data as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte.

Next, FIG. 160 illustrates the contents of the count notification command (sometimes referred to as count notification). The count notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side as a transmission signal sent using the No. 6 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG. is a command that can be sent.

The command length of the count notification command is 7 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, from the command length, command type, counting serial number, counting points, counting accumulated points, and checksum. More specifically, it is configured as follows. The length of the first command is 0x07, which is 1 byte of data. The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x02. The counting serial number No. 3 is 1-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The fourth counting point is 1 byte of data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFA. The cumulative count number 5 is 2-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFFFF. The checksum number 6 is 1 byte of data. Note that the counting serial number described above may be referred to as a counting serial number, and the serial number and rental serial number may be collectively referred to as a serial number.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the counting notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the counting notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, counting serial number, counting points, and counting cumulative points. Although it will be calculated, the counted cumulative score is data of 2 bytes or more. For example, the cumulative count is 2 bytes of data, but the first byte to the second byte is divided into two pieces of 1-byte data, and 1-byte data of the command length, command type, and count. The system is configured to calculate the checksum of the count notification command using the serial number and the count number. With this configuration, even if there is 2 or more bytes of data as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte. Although the details will be described later, the upper limit of the cumulative score is 9999.

Next, FIG. 161 illustrates the contents of a rental notification command (sometimes referred to as a rental notification). The lending notification command is a command that the gaming machine side receives from the lending machine side as a reception signal transmitted using the No. 7 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158, and is sent based on the operation of the lending button. This is the command to get it.

The command length of the lending notification command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, and consists of the command length, command type, lending serial number, number of lending points, and checksum. , More specifically, it is configured as follows. The length of the first command is 0x05, which is 1 byte of data. The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x13. The lending serial number No. 3 is 1-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. No. 4, the number of lending points, is 1 byte of data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The checksum number 5 is 1 byte of data. Note that the above rental serial number may be referred to as a rental serial number, and the serial number and counting serial number may be collectively referred to as a serial number.

Next, FIG. 162 illustrates the contents of the lending receipt result response command (sometimes referred to as lending receipt result response). The lending reception result response command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal sent using the No. 6 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG.

The command length of the lending reception result response command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, from the command length, command type, lending serial number, lending point reception result, checksum. More specifically, it is configured as follows. The length of the first command is 0x05, which is 1 byte of data. The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x13. The lending serial number No. 3 is 1-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The result of receiving the number of lending points for number 4 is 1 byte of data, 0x00: normal, 0x01: abnormal (other values are determined to be abnormal). The checksum number 5 is 1 byte of data.

Next, FIG. 163 is a flow related to gaming machine information notification. This figure illustrates the transmission and reception of information between the reel-type gaming machine and the lending machine. Note that this figure shows a case where HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted as a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

First, the gaming machine is powered on, and gaming machine information notification is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side at a predetermined timing. Note that the serial number in the gaming machine information notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms later, a count notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the counting serial number in the counting notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notification is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Note that the rental serial number in the rental notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the lending serial number in the lending reception result response immediately after the power is turned on is 0. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is 1.

In this way, in this example, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is 0 the first time after the power is turned on, and thereafter it is incremented by 1 each time a command is sent, such as "0→1→2→3→...→255". It is structured so that it will continue to be used. Similarly, the counting serial number is 0 the first time after the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by 1 in the order of "0→1→2→3→...→255" each time a command is sent. Similarly, the first time after the power is turned on, the rental serial number is 0, and thereafter it is incremented by 1 each time a command is sent (each time a rental notification is sent), and then "0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255". It is configured.

Thereafter, gaming machine information notifications are sent approximately every 300 ms, and a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. After that, counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending reception result responses are sent and received, and about 300ms after the gaming machine information notification with the serial number 255 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine, the gaming machine information notification is sent again to the gaming machine side. The serial number will be sent to the rental machine from 1 to 1. That is, the serial number becomes 0 only immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter it changes in the order of "1→2→...→255→1→2→...".

Although not shown, as gaming machine information notifications, gaming machine installation information is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine every 30 seconds, and gaming machine performance information is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine every 120 seconds. It is configured so that If the transmission timings of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information overlap, (1) set a priority and only send commands with high priority; (2) 1 It may also be configured such that all data are transmitted in one interrupt process. In addition, as a specific example of the priority when configured as in (1) above, the configuration is as follows: "gaming machine performance information → gaming machine installation information → HC/fraud monitoring information" in descending order of priority. Alternatively, the information may be configured in the order of priority: HC/fraud monitoring information→gaming machine installation information→gaming machine performance information.

In this way, in this example, a serial number is provided for the gaming machine information notification, and the configuration is such that the consistency of commands can be maintained using the serial number (for example, when the next gaming machine information notification with the serial number 5 is If the serial number of the game machine information notification is not number 6, it can be determined that there is an abnormality). The serial number is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area.

In addition, when transmitting a serial number, it is configured to perform special addition processing on the previously transmitted serial number (serial number stored in a predetermined storage area) and then transmit it. (1) The previous serial number is , N (N is a value less than 255), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 255 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1". It is structured as follows. With this configuration, if 0 is sent as the serial number, devices outside the gaming machine can also recognize that the gaming machine has been turned off, making it possible to quickly detect fraud. It can be configured to do so.

Here, the above special addition process will be explained in detail. First, to explain the conventional general addition process in detail, when N=100, (A1) when performing the normal addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)", "101(D)" is executed. D)". (A2) Furthermore, when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs and becomes "0(D)". On the other hand, to explain in detail the case where special addition processing is executed, (B1) when special addition processing is executed to add "+1" to "100(D)", the result is "101(D)". (B2) Also, when performing special addition processing of "+1" to "255 (D)" corresponding to M, a carry occurs by first performing normal addition processing of "+1". The carry flag becomes "0 (D)" and a carry occurs, so that the carry flag becomes "1". The special addition processing according to this example is configured such that when the carry flag becomes 1, the operation result is "1 (D)" as an arbitrary value, so "255 (D)" corresponding to M is )", the calculation result becomes "1(D)".

Note that the special addition processing according to this example is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the operation result is "1 (D)" as an arbitrary value, but there is no problem even if the arbitrary value is changed. Instead, it may be configured to be "100(D)".

Note that the serial number, counting serial number, and rental serial number according to this example may be 2-byte information, and even when configured in this way, (1) the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 65535). Sometimes, the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, in this example 65535), the result of executing the special addition process is "1". It may be configured as follows.

Although the serial number related to the gaming machine information notification has been described in detail here, the same effect applies to the counting serial number related to the counting notification and the lending serial number related to the lending notification.

Note that the above-described special addition process may be executed at any timing after transmitting the gaming machine information notification and before transmitting the next gaming machine information notification. That is, the system is configured to execute special addition processing to update the next serial number at a timing after the serial number is transmitted.

Furthermore, if the storage area for storing serial numbers related to gaming machine information notifications is the first storage area, and the storage area for storing the counting serial numbers regarding counting notifications is the second storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area are They may be configured to be continuous. Furthermore, if the gaming machine side is configured to have a storage area for storing the rental serial number regarding the rental notification, and the storage area for storing the rental serial number regarding the rental notification is set as the third storage area, the first storage area and the third storage area The storage area may be configured to be continuous, or the second storage area and the third storage area may be configured to be continuous. Note that when the power is turned on again after being turned off, as mentioned above, the serial number stored in the first storage area and the counting serial number stored in the second storage area are The loan serial number stored in the third storage area may be set to 0 (if the gaming machine does not have the third storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area to 0).

For example, if the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area are configured to have consecutive addresses, the serial number may be "F1A0," the counting serial number may be "F1A1," and the lending serial number may be "F1A0." F1A2", when the power is turned on from off and the serial number, counting serial number, and rental serial number are cleared to 0, specify "F1A0", which is the address corresponding to the serial number, and enter 0. By executing clearing and then repeating the process of clearing the next address to 0 twice, you can clear the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number to 0, and clearing the addresses of the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number. The data capacity required for the program can be reduced compared to the case where each is specified and cleared to 0.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to be able to transmit information regarding the performance display device from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine (rental machine, SC board) as gaming machine information notification. In such a configuration, among the gaming machine information notifications, it may be transmitted as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information. good. Note that the information regarding the performance display device may be configured as follows. (1) The display items mentioned above in Figure 156 etc. (cumulative advantageous section ratio, total instructional accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, accessory ratio for 6000 games, cumulative consecutive accessory ratio, The cumulative accessory ratio and the cumulative accessory status ratio) are transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, display items are calculated within the gaming machine, and the calculated results are transmitted outside the gaming machine. (2) Elements for displaying the display items described above in FIG. 156 and the like (elements used for calculations such as the total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are transmitted without being calculated within the gaming machine, and are calculated outside the gaming machine (for example, on the SC board). (3) The display items described above in FIG. 156 etc. (cumulative advantageous section ratio, cumulative instructional accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, accessory ratio for 6000 games, cumulative consecutive accessory ratio, The cumulative ratio of accessories, cumulative percentage of accessories, etc. status) and elements for displaying display items (elements used for calculations such as the number of games played when the cumulative number of first-class special accessories are activated) are input from the gaming machine side. Send outside the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine is configured to be able to send gaming machine information notifications to the outside at predetermined intervals (for example, every 300 ms), but if the gaming machine information notifications are sent to the outside, then the count While the notification is sent, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise, subsequent counting notifications are not sent. In addition, in such a configuration, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be transmitted externally due to the influence of noise, etc., the total score will not be added based on the operation of the lending button. It is configured.

Furthermore, the IN/OUT information may be configured to be able to be transmitted outside the gaming machine as the gaming machine information notification, and in this case, the IN/OUT information may be transmitted as the gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information notification. It may also be transmitted as game machine installation information, or it may be transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. Note that the configuration regarding IN/OUT information may be configured as follows. (1) The symbol combinations related to replays are stopped and displayed as a gaming machine information notification at the timing after the operation of the start lever regarding the next game in which the symbol combinations related to replays are stopped and displayed after winning a replay combination. (2) Sending the information that it is a later game (sometimes referred to as replay operation status information) and the IN information of the number of bets (for example, 3 points) in the game to the outside from the gaming machine side. (2) Replay winning combination At the timing after the symbol combination related to the re-game is won and the symbol combination related to the re-play is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine side sends external information that the game is a game after the symbol combination related to the re-play has been stopped and displayed as a gaming machine information notification. , Then, at the timing after receiving the operation of the start lever, the IN information of the number of bets in the game (for example, 3 points) is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification (3) To the re-gaming combination After winning and the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed, the gaming machine sends OUT information indicating that the score is 0 points to the outside as a gaming machine information notification, and the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped. At the timing after the operation of the start lever for the displayed next game is accepted, IN information indicating that the score is 0 is sent from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification.

Next, FIG. 164 is a flow related to the lending notification command. In the figure, a configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is illustrated for transmitting and receiving information between the reel-type gaming machine side and the rental machine side.

<A: Configuration 1 in which the lending button can be activated while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. After that, while the reels are spinning, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from off to on. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points. It should be noted that, as described above, the "total score" is all the scores that can be input into the medalless reel-type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general drum-type game machine that uses physical game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the medalless reel-type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification may be replaced with "scores", "score information", and "possession medals". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "point information", "gaming value", "gaming value information", etc., and treat it as "score", "score information", "points", "point information", etc. as appropriate. There is nothing wrong with calling it "gaming value" or "gaming value information." Note that it is not necessary to have "credits". The stored total score is configured to be displayed on the total score display device.

Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 30, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, a counting serial number becomes m, counting points = 0, counting accumulated points = A counting notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number p and lending points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan points receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 30+50=80 points (the total score display will also show 80 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1.

<B: Configuration 2 in which the lending button can be activated while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. After that, while the reels are rotating, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from off to on. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 9980 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 9980, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, counting serial number becomes m, counted points = 0, counted accumulated points = A counting notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number p and lending points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score remains at 9980 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 9980 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1.

In the above configurations A and B, scores can be lent by operating the lend button even while the reels are rotating, but the upper limit of the total score in the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example is The value is 9999, and if the upper limit is not exceeded even if the 50 points added based on the operation of the lending button are added, as in A above, 30 + 50 = 80, etc. While 50 points are lent and added to the total score, as in B above, if 50 points are added based on the operation of the lend button, the upper limit of the total score If the total score exceeds 50, the 50 points will not be lent (not added) and the total score will remain at 9980.

By configuring as described in A and B above, in order to execute the next game as smoothly as possible even when the reels are spinning, it is possible to lend out points, and the total score is set at the upper limit. It is possible to configure the system so that the problem of exceeding the limit does not occur.

In addition, in the same figure, when the upper limit of the total score is exceeded when the 50 points added based on the operation of the lending button are added, the loaning of points is not executed. However, if the total score is a predetermined value (for example, 9950), the score is not loaned (lending is not performed even if the loan button is operated). Good too.

In addition, in the same figure, the configuration is such that the loaned points are not added to the total score, and the gaming machine side sends information indicating that the loaned points reception result is abnormal as a loaned reception result response. Without limitation, information indicating that the number of loan points = 0 is sent as a lending notification sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, in other words, if the lending machine side determines that it is possible to add the number of loan points. , information that the number of loan points = 50 is sent as a loan notice sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, and if the number of lending points is not added, the lending notice sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side is sent. It may be configured to transmit information indicating that the score is 0.

<C: Configuration 1 in which the lending button is not activated while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification containing serial number n, total score = 30, and lending button operation disabled information (information indicating that the lending button cannot be operated because the reels are spinning) is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. Approximately 100ms later, a counting notification containing the information that the counting serial number m, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number A lending notice containing information that the number of lending points=0, which is p, is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side.

After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 ( (The total score display also remains at 30 points.) Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, while the reels are rotating, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has elapsed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information that the total score is 30 and lending button operation disabled information (information indicating that the lending button cannot be operated because the reels are rotating). After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes p+1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, in configuration C, since the lending button operation disabled information is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, 0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side as the lending point number.

After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 ( (The total score display also remains at 30 points.)

In this way, while the reels are spinning, a gaming machine information notification containing rental button operation disabled information (information indicating that the lending button cannot be operated because the reels are rotating) is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. By doing so, it is possible to clarify the period between the game in progress and the lending operation.

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total score based on the sending of the loan receipt result response, but the configuration is configured so that the loan points are added to the total score based on the receipt of the loan notification. You may.

<D: Configuration in which the bet button may become invalid during lending> Next, FIG. 165 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, the bet button is enabled, and the gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine. Approximately 100ms later, a counting notification containing the information that the counting serial number m, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number A lending notice containing information that the number of lending points=0, which is p, is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 30 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine turns from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has elapsed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=30. After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes p+1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 30+50=80 points (the total score display will also be 80 points).

In this configuration, the bet button becomes invalid for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) immediately after the timing when the total score is added. This is the timing when 20ms or more have passed since the transmission of the previous rental receipt result response, and approximately 300ms after the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and then, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the total score was added, the bet button becomes valid again.

As described above, in the configuration D, when addition to the total score is performed by lending operation, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period. During the invalid period of the bet button, the system may be configured to notify the player that points are being lent; for example, the display on the total score display device may be configured to blink. Alternatively, the total score may be displayed so as to increase stepwise from 30 to 80. Further, the sub control board S may be configured to output a sound corresponding to an increase in the total score. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to 200 ms, and may be changed as appropriate. Note that the timing at which the addition to the total score by the lending operation is executed and the predetermined period during which the bet button becomes invalid may overlap, or may not overlap (the timing at which the addition to the total score by the lending operation is executed) may overlap. (The bet button becomes invalid immediately after the bet button is placed.)

Furthermore, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total score at the timing when the loan receipt result response is sent, but the loan points may be added to the total score at the timing when the loan notification is received. . Moreover, although the configuration is such that the operation of the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the loan receipt result response is transmitted, it is also possible to configure such that the operation of the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the loan notification is received.

Furthermore, as described above, in configuration D, if the total score is added due to the gaming machine receiving a lending notification that includes 1 or more points as the number of lending points, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, if the gaming machine side receives a lending notification that includes information that the number of lending points is 0 and the total score is not added, the bet button is configured so that it does not become invalid (it does not change from valid to invalid by receiving the lending notification). ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that processes that affect the game, such as addition process to the total score and bet process, are not executed redundantly.

In addition, in the same figure, we have detailed the configuration in which the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time when points are loaned, but this is not limited to just the bet button, and the start lever, the insertion of game medals, the start of reel rotation, etc. It may be configured such that the loan is invalidated for a predetermined period of time when it is lent.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine is being lent out at the time the gaming machine information notification is sent and the lent out period ends before the lent notification command is received, points can be added based on the lending operation. .

Note that the bet buttons described above include the max bet button described above, and can also be applied to the configuration related to lighting of the max bet lamp described above in FIGS. 80 to 83. That is, it is possible to combine the configurations described above with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, such as configuring the max bet lamp to be turned off during the period when the above-described bet button is invalid.

<E: Configuration 1 related to lending reception result response> Next, FIG. 166 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the lending button changes from off to on. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 30, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, the counting serial number becomes m, counted points = 0, counted accumulated points = A counting notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number 5 and lending points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information indicating that the loan serial number 5 is correct is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 30+50=80 points (the total score display will also be 80 points). Note that n and m may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine turns from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has elapsed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=80. After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes 1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response with a loan serial number of 1 and including information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number is not added to the total score, and the loan receipt result response is sent to the lending machine. The score remains at 80 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 80 points). In this way, in the configuration of E, when a lending notification with the lending serial number 5 is received, and then the next lending notification is received, even though the lending serial number should originally be number 6, noise etc. If you receive a loan notification with the loan serial number 1 due to the influence of The information is sent from the machine to the rental machine and is configured so that it is not added to the total score.

<F: Configuration 2 related to lending reception result response> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the lending button changes from off to on. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 30, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, a counting serial number becomes m, counting points = 0, counting accumulated points = A count notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number 255 and loaned points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response with a loan serial number of 255 and information indicating that the loan points receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 30+50=80 points (the total score display will also show 80 points). Note that n and m may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine turns from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=80. After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes 1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number 1 and the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 80+50=130 points (the total score display device will also display 130 points). In this way, in the configuration of F, when a lending notification with the lending serial number 255 is received and the next lending notification is received thereafter, the lending serial number is 1, and in this example, the upper limit of the lending serial number is 255, and the next number after number 255 is number 1, so the next time after number 255, the loan notification for number 1, which is the correct loan serial number, was received, so the loan reception result includes information that the loan score reception result is normal. A response will be sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. In this way, by cycling the lending serial numbers from 1 to 255, it is possible to maintain consistency between the gaming machine and the outside without compressing the capacity of the storage area for storing the lending serial numbers.

<A: Flow 1 related to count notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 200, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20 ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 200 to 150 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, approximately 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting cumulative points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The total score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, resulting in a total score of 150 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing may be approximately 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, or the timing at which the counting notification is sent.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 150 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the counting button remains on, and at least 20ms have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the gaming machine information notification is sent again. It is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=150. Thereafter, approximately 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the display on the total score display device, the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 150→100. After that, approximately 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, which includes the information that the counting serial number m+1, the number of counted points = 50, and the cumulative number of counted points = 100. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, resulting in a total score of 100 points.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+1 and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains at 150 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 150 points).

After that, the counting button turns from on to off, and more than 20 ms has passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the gaming machine information notification is sent again to the gaming machine. is sent to the rental machine. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+2, and includes information of total score=100. Thereafter, approximately 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the display on the total score display device, the count button was turned off, so the display on the total score display device would not be subtracted. After that, approximately 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing information with counting serial number m+2, counting points = 0, and counting cumulative points = 100 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the total The score remains at 100 points.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+2 and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p+2 and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains at 100 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 100 points). After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has elapsed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+3, and includes information of total score=100.

<B: Flow 2 related to count notification command> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and the gaming machine information notification containing the information of total score = 200, which is the serial number n, is lent from the gaming machine side. It is sent to the machine, and then the counting button turns from off to on. Thereafter, approximately 20 ms elapse while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 200 to 150. After that, the counting button turns from on to off, and about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side. The calculated score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 150 points. In this way, in configuration B, after sending the gaming machine information notification, the counting button is turned off → on, and then, after detecting a long press of the counting button (20ms have passed since it turned off → on), the counting button is turned on. Even if the counting button is turned on and then turned off before sending the notification, a counting notification containing the information that the number of counted points = 50 and the cumulative number of counted points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side as a counting notification. It is configured so that the counted score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score to make the total score 150 points.

Note that the timing of subtraction displayed on the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be performed at the same time.The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button is turned from off to on. The timing may be the timing at which a long press of the button is detected, or the timing at which the count notification is sent. If configured in this way, the configuration will be as follows. (1) Even if you turn the counting button from off to on after sending a gaming machine information notification, and then turn the counting button from on to off before sending a counting notification, at the timing when a long press of the counting button is detected. , the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated. (2) Even if the counting button is turned off → on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on → off before sending the counting notification, the total score will be calculated at the timing of sending the counting notification. and can update the display on the total score display device.

Further, the total score display device may be configured to be able to both store the total score and display the total score, and even in such a configuration, approximately After 20ms, in other words, it may be configured to update the total score and update the display of the total score at the timing when a long press of the count button is detected, or update the total score and update the display of the total score at the timing at which the count notification is sent. It may be configured to update the display of the total score.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 150 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=150.

With this configuration, even if the counting button is turned off → on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on → off before sending the counting notification, the total score and the total score Not only can the display on the display device be updated, but also the counted points and cumulative counted points can be sent to the outside of the gaming machine through counting notifications. Even when the operation of the counting button is completed (hand is released), information can be accurately transmitted to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the configuration regarding the counting button according to this example may be configured as follows. <Configuration 1> (1) When the counting button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent (2) The gaming machine Send gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) When sending gaming machine information notifications, send counting notifications after a predetermined period of time (4) Receive rental notifications after sending gaming machine information notifications If the counting button is turned on and then off before doing so, the total score will be subtracted when the next counting notification is sent.

<Configuration 2> (1) When the count button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a count notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent (2) The gaming machine Send gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) When sending gaming machine information notifications, send counting notifications after a predetermined period of time (4) Receive rental notifications after sending gaming machine information notifications If the counting button is turned on and off before the count button is turned on, the total score will not be subtracted when the next counting notification is sent.

<Configuration 3> (1) When the counting button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent (2) The gaming machine Send gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) If gaming machine information notifications are sent, a counting notification will be sent after a predetermined time has elapsed (4) After sending gaming machine information notifications, the counting button will turn off →Even if it is turned on, the total score will not be subtracted at the next time the count notification is sent.

<Configuration 4> (1) When the counting button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification command including the counted points is sent. (2) The counting button is on. When the power is turned off, the total score is not subtracted even if the power is restored while holding down the counting button.

<Configuration 5> (1) When the count button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a count notification command containing the count is sent. (2) During the wait (minimum number of points between games) Even if the count button is pressed when the timer value > 0), the reels start rotating, and if the count button is held down, the stop button cannot be operated. Moreover, the total score will not be subtracted.

<Configuration 6> During execution of the above-described freeze at rotation start and freeze at rotation, the configuration may be such that the settlement process based on the operation of the count button can be executed, or the settlement process based on the operation of the count button may not be executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, during execution of the above-mentioned freezing at rotation start and freeze at rotation, the configuration may be such that the total score can be added based on the operation of the lending button, or the total score can be added based on the operation of the lending button. It may be configured not to be executed.

<Configuration 7-1> Even if the configuration is configured so that the score can be settled when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (door open error has occurred). By configuring the game in this way, the player or the administrator can settle the scores at any timing, regardless of whether the front door DU is opened or not. <Configuration 7-2> The configuration may be such that when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (a door open error has occurred), the score is not calculated. With such a configuration, even if the front door DU is opened and fraud is committed inside the gaming machine, points will not be settled, thereby preventing a situation that would be disadvantageous to the gaming parlor. can do.

<Configuration 8-1> If the front door DU opens (a door opening error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the score will be It may be configured so that the settlement of points can be executed continuously, and by such a configuration, the player or the administrator can execute the settlement of points at any timing regardless of whether the front door DU is opened or not. can do.

<Configuration 8-2> If the front door DU opens (a door opening error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the score is The system may be configured so that the settlement of points is not executed, and by such a configuration, even if the front door DU is opened and fraud is committed inside the gaming machine, the settlement of points is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent situations that would be disadvantageous to the gaming parlor.

<Configuration 9-1> In a situation where the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the power is turned off, then the power is turned on again, and the counting button remains on. In this case (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the accumulated counting points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative score and the like as information related to the payment after the power is turned on. <Configuration 9-2> While the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), a power outage occurs, and then the counting button turns off (the counting button is not operated). ), when the power is turned on again, the cumulative count score in the first count notification after the power is turned on becomes 0, and the count serial number also becomes 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative score and the like as information related to the payment after the power is turned on.

<Configuration 10> The configuration is configured so that even if you start operating (pressing) the counting button while the power is off and turning on the power while holding down the counting button (while keeping it pressed), payment will not be executed. You may. In other words, when performing a payment based on the operation of the count button, after detecting the rise of the count button from off to on, the payment is executed by keeping it on for a predetermined period of time (detecting a long press). It may be configured so that

<<Configuration related to door opening error>> Furthermore, the configuration related to door opening error according to this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> Even in a state where the front door DU is open (a state where a door open error has occurred), the above-mentioned signals sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and signals sent from the outside (rental machine) The information received by the gaming machine may be configured to be able to be transmitted and received. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending reception result responses is It may also be configured to be executable even in a state where the door DU is open (a state where a door opening error has occurred).

<Configuration 2> In the case of an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal), the above-mentioned signal sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and the external (rental machine) The gaming machine may be configured not to transmit or receive information transmitted from the gaming machine (rental machine) and received by the gaming machine. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending reception result responses is It may be configured such that it is not executed in a state where the door DU is open (a state where a door opening error has occurred).

In this example, as described above, the interval at which the HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) is set to 300 ms. In other words, the interval at which gaming machine information notifications are transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) is set to 300 ms. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, when rotating the reel, the reel acceleration process is executed and then the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed. In other words, the reel speed is changed from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed. is configured to transition to a fast state. As described above, one rotation of the reel (one round) is 336 steps, and the execution interval of interrupt processing is approximately 2.23 ms.
In the reel constant speed state, one interrupt process rotates one step, so the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state is 2.23×336≈749 ms. In this way, in this example, the gaming machine information notification can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) at least twice in the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state. With this configuration, even if the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine has abnormal content due to noise, etc., the reel will rotate for one revolution at a constant reel speed. Since the gaming machine can transmit the gaming machine information notification at least one more time within the time required to do so, it is possible to make the information transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine more accurate. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 35, since the average reel rotation speed in the reel acceleration state is slower than the average reel rotation speed in the reel constant speed state, from the start of reel rotation, the reel acceleration state → reel The time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in a constant speed state is longer than the 749 ms, which is the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the constant speed state, as described above. Even within the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution after the reel acceleration state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state from the start of rotation, the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise etc. Even in the event that the reel is at a constant speed, the gaming machine can send the gaming machine information notification at least one more time within the time it takes for the reel to rotate once, so it is possible to send it to the outside of the gaming machine. Information can be made more accurate.

<Establishment of normal lending> In the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example, (1) normal lending is established when the gaming machine sends information to the lending machine as a response to the lending reception result indicating that it is normal. It may be determined that the lending has been completed. (2) It may be determined that the normal lending has been completed when the lending machine normally receives a lending reception result response from the gaming machine side.

<Establishment of normal counting> In the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example, (1) the gaming machine transmits information including the fact that the counted score is 1 point or more as a counting notification to the lending machine; (2) The lending machine receives information from the gaming machine that includes the fact that the number of points counted is 1 or more points as a counting notification. However, it may be configured such that it is determined that normal counting has been established when a lending notice is transmitted to the gaming machine side.

(Example of modification from the thirteenth embodiment) In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the configuration of the medalless drum-type gaming machine that does not use game medals has been described in detail. The configuration of the medalless drum-type gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a medalless drum-type gaming machine applicable to this example will be described in detail below as a modification from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that any of the configurations described above may be applied as a configuration that does not affect whether or not game medals are used, or may be combined with the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment described above. Note that a medalless drum-type gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine that does not use game medals (including physical medals or metal pieces for detection by a sensor) but uses points.

Note that in the following, what is referred to as a "gaming machine" may be replaced with a "main control board" or a "payout control board." Furthermore, the term "rental machine" may be replaced with "SC board".

One or more of the error determination process and the error display process may be configured to be executed in the second ROM/RAM area of the main control board. Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM. In addition, the payout control board is also provided with areas corresponding to the first ROM/RAM area and the second ROM/RAM area, and one or more of error determination processing and error display processing is performed in the second ROM/RAM area of the payout control board. It may also be configured to be executed. Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM.

A counting LED display section is provided near or inside the counting button, and when the counting button operation is valid (score settlement processing can be executed), the counting LED display section displays that the counting button operation is valid (for example, , "Payment possible" may be displayed). Further, it may be configured such that it is possible to notify that the operation of the counting button is valid by turning on and off the LED lamp. In such a configuration, the configuration may be such that a counting process (sometimes referred to as a settlement process) is executed when an operation of the counting button is accepted while the operation of the counting button is enabled. , the counting process (settlement process) may be executed when a long-press operation of the counting button is received while the counting button operation is valid.

<Configuration 1 related to counting process> In a state where a 3-point bet is made, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process (sometimes referred to as the settlement process) is executable (the counting button operation is valid). , If the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet points will be counted, but the total score will not be displayed. The score stored in the device may be configured not to be counted. More specifically, if the operation of the counting button is stopped immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet amount of 3 points will be The counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points. In addition, in a situation where the number of bets is 0 and the total score is 30 points, if the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, "off → 0.1 seconds on → off") (in this case), the total score of 30 points may be counted.

<Configuration 2 related to counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process is executable (the counting button operation is valid), the counting button operation is accepted. If the operation is no longer accepted immediately after the bet (for example, "off → 10ms on → off"), only a part of the betted points will be counted, and the points stored in the total score display device will not be counted. It may be configured as follows. More specifically, if the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the number of bets will be 2 points, One point is counted, and the counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points.

<Configuration 3 related to counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process is executable (the counting button operation is valid), the counting button operation is accepted. If the operation is no longer accepted immediately after (for example, "off → 0.1 seconds on → off"), the betted score and the score stored in the total score display device will be counted. may be configured. More specifically, if the operation of the counting button is stopped immediately after it is accepted (for example, if it becomes "off → on for 0.1 seconds → off"), the bet amount will be 3 points. A total of 33 points, which is the total score of 30 points, are counted and the counting process ends.

<Configuration 4 related to counting process> When 3 points are bet, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process is executable (the counting button operation is valid), the counting button operation is accepted. In this case, the counting process is executed step by step in the order of "bet number → total score", and the counting process ends when the counting button is no longer accepted. Specifically, "counting button off → counting button on → number of bets 3, total score 30 → number of bets 2, total score 30 → number of bets 1, total score 30 → number of bets 0, total score 30 → number of bets 0, It may be configured to operate as follows: total score 29→...→number of bets 0, total score 20→counting button off→counting process completed.

The main control board may be configured to transmit gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information to the payout control board.

It may be configured such that the counting notification, gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, HC/fraud monitoring information, and lending receipt results are transmitted from the payout control board side to the lending machine side.

<Applicable Errors> Furthermore, the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to take effect regarding the following errors.

<Serial communication error> Framing error (error in which the stop bit was not in the position where it should be at the timing when the stop bit should have been received) or overrun error (error in which the stop bit was not in the position where it should be at the timing when the stop bit should have been received) or overrun error (error in which the data captured in the receive buffer was not read by the CPU) , an error in which the next data is imported and the previous received data is lost), it is determined to be a serial communication error, and (1) the gaming machine adds 1 to the serial communication error counter A counter value. (2) On the loaner side, the counter value of the serial communication abnormality counter B may be incremented by 1 and stored.

<Checksum error> If the checksum included in each command is abnormal, it is determined as a checksum error, and (1) the game machine side adds 1 to the counter value of checksum abnormality counter A and stores it. ) It may be configured such that the loaner side adds 1 to the counter value of the checksum abnormality counter B and stores it.

<Command Sequence Error> If an unexpected command is received (for example, the order of the commands is wrong), it may be configured to determine that a command sequence error has occurred. In that case, the gaming machine side may be configured to discard the lending notification received from the lending machine side. For example, after transmitting a game machine information notification, if a rental notification is received without transmitting a count notification, the rental notification is discarded. Additionally, the rental machine may be configured to determine that the command is valid when it receives a gaming machine information notification, and discard the command when it receives a command other than the gaming machine information notification. good.

<Command Timeout Error> If a command is not received within a specified time, a command timeout error may occur. If the gaming machine does not receive a lending notification within 170ms after sending a counting notification, it determines that a command timeout error has occurred, adds 1 to the counter value of the lending notification reception abnormality counter, and invalidates the sent counting notification. , the game machine information notification may be transmitted again. Additionally, if the lending machine does not receive a command from the gaming machine for a period of 300 ms or more, it determines that a command timeout error has occurred, and adds 1 to the command timeout counter (only adds the counter value, It may also be configured such that no other processing is particularly performed regarding the error.

<Serial Number Abnormality in Gaming Machine Information Notification> If the received serial number is not consecutive to the previously received serial number on the rental machine side, it may be configured to add 1 to the value of the serial number abnormality counter. Note that only the addition process of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception process is executed in the same way as when the command is normally received.

<Counting Serial Number Abnormality> If the received counting serial number is not consecutive to the previously received counting serial number on the loaner side, it may be configured to add 1 to the counter value of the counting serial number abnormality counter. Note that only the addition process of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception process is executed in the same way as when the command is normally received.

<Rental Serial Number Abnormality> On the rental machine side, if the rental serial number in the received rental receipt result response is not consecutive to the previously received rental serial number, it is configured to add 1 to the counter value of the rental serial number abnormality counter. Good too. Note that only the addition process of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception process is executed in the same way as when the command is normally received.

<Rental reception result response> When the loaner side receives information that includes an abnormality as a rental reception result response, it determines that the loan is unsuccessful and adds 1 to the counter value of the rental abnormality counter. may be configured. Even in this case, the subtraction process may not be performed on the loanable points (sometimes referred to as machine loan points) or the player's remaining balance that is stored.

In addition, in the above-mentioned serial communication error, checksum error, command sequence error, command timeout error, serial number abnormality in gaming machine information notification, counting serial number abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, and rental reception result response, the display on the production display device, etc. The device may be configured to display the fact that an abnormality has occurred or a counter value related to the abnormality. With such a configuration, it is possible to know to what extent errors have occurred at the end of a day in the development stage of a game machine or at the end of a day's business at a game parlor. In addition, even if the game machine is not displayed on the effect display device, etc., it can be stored in the RAM of the main control board (by storing it in the RAM area that will not be erased by changing the settings). Sometimes, the number of times corresponding to each abnormality can be grasped based on the number of times of these counters.

<<Communication between the gaming machine and the SC board>> The main control chip ID number and the payout control chip ID number may be configured to be transmittable as the gaming machine installation information sent from the gaming machine to the SC board. In such a case, the ID number generation method may be configured as follows.

An example of a method for generating a main control chip ID number is to read the CPU chip individual numbers in ascending order, fill the upper 4 bytes of the number with 0, and fill the lower 1 byte with an identification code (a code that identifies the type of chip). ) is added to make it 9 bytes. As a specific example, when the chip individual number is 0x12345678, it is generated as follows, starting from the upper part: 4 bytes: filled with 0: 0x000000004 bytes: chip individual number: 0x123456781 bytes: identification code: 0x22.

An example of a method for generating a payout control chip ID number is to read the chip individual numbers of the CPU in ascending order, fill the upper 4 bytes of the number with 0, and write an identification code (a code that identifies the type of chip) in the lower 1 byte. ) is added to make it 9 bytes. As a specific example, when the chip individual number is 0x87654321, it is generated as follows, starting from the upper part: 4 bytes: filled with 0: 0x000000004 bytes: chip individual number: 0x876543211 bytes: identification code: 0x11.

Next, FIG. 168 illustrates an example in which HC/fraud monitoring information is set as gaming information in gaming machine information notification. The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the SC board side.

HC/fraud monitoring information includes total score, point input signal (IN), point payout signal (OUT), main control status 1, main control status 2, game machine error status, fraud detection status 1 (main control), and fraud detection. State 2 (payout control), fraud detection state 3 (payout control), and number of game information are transmitted. More specifically, it is configured as follows. The total score is the current total score, and is 3-byte data ranging from 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00. The score input signal (IN) is the number of bets, and is 1-byte data of 0x01 to 0x03 (1 to 3 points). The number of bets is determined when the drum rotating device is activated (when the start lever is operated), and the number of bets is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Furthermore, when transmitting information including the confirmed number of bets from the gaming machine to the SC board side, it is desirable to clear the number of bets stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (to prevent multiple transmissions). For). The score payout signal (OUT) is the number of points to be paid out, and is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0x0F (1 to 15 points). The number of payout points is determined after all the reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), and the number of payout points is stored in a specific area of the RAM. In addition, when transmitting the determined number of payout points from the gaming machine to the SC board side, it is desirable to clear the number of payout points stored in a specific area of the RAM (to prevent multiple transmissions). The main control state 1 is a state related to the state of the game, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, Bit0: RBBit1: BBBit2: ATBit3: Gaming status signal 1Bit4: Gaming status signal 2Bit5: Gaming status signal 3Bit6: Gaming status signal 4Bit7: Unused. The main control state 2 is a state related to the state of the game, and is 1-byte data. Specifically, Bit 0: Replay operation in progress Bit 1: Accessory object in operation Bit 2: Continuous access object in operation Bit 3: Instruction function in operation Bit 4: Accessory continuous operation device in operation Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused Use as configured. The gaming machine error status is 1 byte of data, Bits 0 to 5: error code (000000 (B) = no error, Bit 6: 0 = payout control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = notification only, 1 = notification +HC output. Note that if Bits 0 to 7 are 0, no error has occurred. Fraud detection state 1 (main control) is a state related to an error in the main control board, and 1 byte of data Specifically, Bit 0: Security signal Bit 1: Setting changing signal Bit 2: Setting confirmation signal Bit 3: RAM error Bit 4: Reel rotation device error Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused The security signal, RAM abnormality, rotation drum rotation device abnormality, etc. are the same as in fraud detection state 1 mentioned above, and a specific example of a security signal is that the front door is open. When it is determined that the setting key switch is turned on (not only when changing or checking settings, but also when the setting key switch is turned on while playing (while the reels are spinning), etc.) RAM error is an error (unrecoverable error) when the checksum after power-on is abnormal as described above. is determined to be abnormal if the reel sensor does not detect the index provided on the reel within a predetermined period under a situation where the reel is expected to reach a constant speed (reel drive state is constant speed state). This is an error. Fraud detection state 2 (dispensing control) is a state related to an error in the dispensing control board, and is 1 byte of data.Specifically, Bit 0: Door open signal Bit 1: Setting door open Bit 2: Total score clear detection Bit 3: RAM error Bit 4: Rental signal error Bit 5: Overflow error Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused 0 = normal (total score clearing based on the operation of the total score clear switch is not detected), 1 = total score clearing based on the operation of the total score clear switch is detected. Also, total score clear switch is a storage area that stores the points (or points and number of bets) of the gaming machine when the total score clear switch is operated (predetermined conditions including the operation of the total score clear switch are satisfied). It has a function to clear the points. Note that the points you have are sometimes referred to as the total score. Fraud detection state 3 (payout control) is a state related to an error in the payout control board, and is 1 byte of data. Specifically, the configuration is as follows: Bit 0: Unused Bit 1: Unused Bit 2: Unused Bit 3: Unused Bit 4: Unused Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused. The number of game information is 1-byte data, and is the number (n) of type information/count information, where n is fixed at 0.

As mentioned above, in this example, the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) is configured to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental machine every 300ms, and when points are input (IN) or points are Every time there is a payout (OUT), the HC/fraud monitoring information that is sent immediately after is configured to be sent to the outside of the gaming machine. In this example, if the replay combination is won and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and an automatic bet is executed (when an automatic bet of 3 points is executed), the score payout signal is activated. Information on three points is transmitted as (OUT), and information on three points is transmitted as a score input signal (IN) when the reels rotate thereafter. In addition, even when three points are input, the information of one point may be transmitted as a score input signal (IN) in three separate commands, or when three points are paid out. Alternatively, information on one point may be transmitted in three commands as a score payout signal (OUT). In this way, by configuring the system to send IN/OUT information as gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) at any time, even in the event of a power outage, the generated IN/OUT information can be sent to the lending machine. can be accumulated and stored.

In addition, the information regarding IN/OUT may be configured to be able to be transmitted (including) other than gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). It may also be configured to transmit (including) information regarding IN/OUT as gaming machine performance information, which is a signal transmitted to the machine. More specifically, if a re-gaming combination is won and an automatic bet is executed when the symbol combinations related to re-gaming are stopped, OUT = 0 points, and IN = 0 points during subsequent reel rotation. It may be configured such that IN and OUT are cumulatively calculated from the time the power is turned on, and the calculation results are transmitted every three minutes. In addition, if a power outage occurs, when the power is turned on afterwards, the accumulated IN/OUT information is cleared (the RAM area related to IN information and the RAM area related to OUT information are cleared) and the accumulated information is restarted from 0. and calculate it. With this configuration, the IN/OUT data of the gaming parlor for one day can be easily output to the outside of the gaming machine. Note that the accumulated IN (total IN) may be referred to as the total input score, and the accumulated OUT (total OUT) may be referred to as the total payout score. In addition, in MY (the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of coins that is the largest for the player from the difference in the number of coins that is the smallest for the player from the time when the power is turned on until the power is turned off) for the aforementioned one business day, Also, if a power outage occurs, the system is configured to clear the RAM area related to MY for one business day (clear the RAM area related to the information necessary to calculate MY) when the power is turned on afterwards. It's okay. Regarding information that is stored cumulatively as one business day's worth of information, if a power outage occurs, the RAM area corresponding to the cumulatively stored information is cleared after the power is turned on. may be configured. Note that the information to be accumulated and stored as information for one business day may be configured to store the ball payout rate for one business day, the ratio of accessories for one business day, and the ratio of consecutive accessories for one business day. Regarding this information as well, if a power outage occurs, the corresponding RAM area may be cleared after the power is turned on. On the other hand, the information necessary to calculate the items displayed on the performance display device, such as the cumulative number of coins paid out during the operation of the Type 1 special accessory described above, is not cleared even if the power is cut off ( It may be configured so that the RAM related to the information is not cleared (it can also be cleared by changing the settings when the power is turned off and then turned on and returns to normal (in a situation where no RAM abnormality etc. has occurred)) ).

The lending reception result response command sent from the payout control board to the SC board may include a case where the gaming machine is executing payment processing (counting) as a condition where the lending point reception result is 0x01: abnormal. That is, when the gaming machine transmits the lending reception result response command from the payout control board to the SC board while the gaming machine is executing the settlement process, the arrangement may be such that the lending point reception result becomes 0x01: abnormal.

When the power of the game machine is turned off → on, the game machine is started up in a first period, and after the start-up of the game machine is completed, a game machine information notification with a serial number 0 is transmitted to the SC board. Further, when the power of the SC board is changed from OFF to ON, the SC board is activated in the second period, and after the SC board is completely activated, it waits for connection to the gaming machine.

<If the gaming machine completes startup first> After the gaming machine completes startup, a gaming machine information notification with serial number 0 will be sent to the SC board, but the SC board has not yet completed startup. In this case, the SC board cannot receive commands from the gaming machine such as notification of gaming machine information. Even in such a case, the game machine continues to send various commands to the SC board at predetermined timings (serial numbers are also added as 0, 1, 2, etc.), and after the timing when the SC board completes startup, , the SC board starts receiving commands from the game machine. Further, at the timing when the activation of the SC board is completed, the game becomes possible to proceed and the operation of the counting button becomes effective.

<If the SC board completes startup first> Even if the SC board completes startup, if the startup of the game machine is not completed, the SC board will wait for connection to the game machine, and the game machine will notify game machine information. It is possible to receive commands such as

<<Priority order of gaming machine information notification>> As described above in the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transmit gaming machine information notification to the SC board, and the gaming machine information type is It is configured to transmit any of performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information. Further, the HC/fraud monitoring information includes HC/fraud monitoring information that includes gaming information (game information has been updated) and HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include gaming information. The transmission conditions (transmission timing) of gaming machine information notification including these are configured as follows. (1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information: Sent every 300ms after gaming machine startup is complete (2) Gaming machine installation information: Sent every 60 seconds after gaming machine startup is complete (3) Gaming machine performance information: Send at a cycle of 180 seconds after the gaming machine has started up (4) HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include gaming information: Send at a cycle of 300ms after the gaming machine has started up. In this way, either every 300ms, 60 seconds or 180 seconds. commands are transmitted, so the transmission timings of multiple commands may overlap at one timing. In order to resolve such situations, priorities may be established. More specifically, from the highest priority, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information → (2) gaming machine installation information → (3) gaming machine performance information → (4) including gaming information" If the transmission timings overlap, only the command with a high priority may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the SC board as the gaming machine information notification.

Examples of gaming information include information that any one of the left reel, middle reel, or right reel was operated, and information regarding the position where any of the left reel, middle reel, or right reel was operated. , information regarding the stop position of any of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, information regarding whether the display result of the stopped symbol combination is normal, etc., or information that combines multiple of these. Good too.

In this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured so that it does not include gaming information, and in such a case, (1) Gaming machine installation information: 60 seconds after the gaming machine startup is completed. Send periodically (2) Gaming machine performance information: Send every 180 seconds after gaming machine startup is complete. (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: Send three types of gaming machine information notifications every 300ms after gaming machine startup is complete. The priority order is "(1) Gaming machine installation information → (2) Gaming machine performance information → (3) HC/fraud monitoring information" from highest to lowest.

Note that when the transmission timings overlap, a command with a lower priority will be transmitted if the next transmission timing does not overlap with the transmission timing of a command with a higher priority. Note that the next transmission timing is the timing with the shortest period, and in this example, it is 300 ms later.

As a specific example, if the transmission timing (timing A) of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" and "(2) gaming machine installation information" overlap, at the timing A, If "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is not sent after 300 ms (timing B), "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is not transmitted, "(2) Gaming machine installation information" will be transmitted. If "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is sent at timing B, then 300ms after timing B (timing C), "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is sent. ” is not transmitted, “(2) Gaming machine installation information” will be transmitted.

In the specific example described above, if "(2) Gaming machine installation information" is transmitted at timing C, the next time "(2) Gaming machine installation information" is transmitted is 60 seconds after timing A. It may be set after (configuration 1) or 60 seconds after timing C (configuration 2). Furthermore, if the transmission timing overlaps with the transmission timing of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" which has a high priority, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" will be sent. will be sent.

In addition, if configuration 1 is adopted in which "(2) Gaming machine installation information" is transmitted 60 seconds after timing A described above, at timing A (triggered by the transmission timing of gaming machine installation information). It may be configured such that information indicating that it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control board or a predetermined storage area of the payout control board. By using configuration 1, it becomes possible to simplify the processing. More specifically, the configuration is such that commands are sent at predetermined time intervals in normal cases, and even if an irregular event occurs, the next command is sent at the same timing as in normal cases. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the predetermined time interval to deviate.

In addition, if configuration 2 is adopted in which "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted 60 seconds after timing C, the gaming machine It may be configured to store information that it is the transmission timing of the installation information in a predetermined storage area of the main control board or a predetermined storage area of the payout control board. By using configuration 2, commands are sent at predetermined time intervals under normal conditions, and when an irregular event occurs, the command is sent at an appropriate interval according to the situation in which the command was actually output. You can output commands with .

<A: Flow 1 related to count notification command and lending notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 50, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 50 to 0 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is being operated (remains on and payment is being executed), the points cannot be borrowed. Not executed. After that, about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button turns from off to on, in other words, it may be the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing at which the counting notification is sent, or the timing at which the lending notification is received. You can also use it as Furthermore, the subtraction of the display of the total score when the score is calculated may be configured to be performed in stages. For example, even when the display of the total score changes from 50 to 0, →49→48...→1→0" or "50→45→40...→5→0" may be configured to be subtracted by a predetermined number at predetermined time intervals. If the timing of subtraction of the stored total score and/or the timing of subtraction of the display on the total score display device is the timing of receipt of the rental notification, the rental notification is received by the gaming machine, that is, the rental machine is operating normally. Since there is a relatively high possibility that the lending notice is sent after receiving the counting notice, the score stored or displayed on the total score display device is subtracted after confirming that counting is possible. It can be configured as follows.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine to the gaming machine (because the lending button was not valid). After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains as 0 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. In this way, in this configuration, even if the lending button is operated, if the lending of scores is not executed, the number of lending points included in the lending notification will be 0, and the lending reception result response will indicate that it is normal. Configured to output information.

After that, the counting button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, the count button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), the lend button is enabled, and the loan of scores is executed. It will be done. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has elapsed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. Thereafter, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing information that the counting serial number m+1, the counting score=0, and the counting cumulative score=50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+1 and the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information indicating that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score becomes 0 to 50 points ( The total score display will also be 50 points).

<B: Flow 1 related to count notification command and lending notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 50, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 50 to 0 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is being operated (remains on and payment is being executed), the points cannot be borrowed. Not executed. After that, about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button turns from off to on, in other words, it may be the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing at which the counting notification is sent, or the timing at which the lending notification is received. You can also use it as

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine to the gaming machine (because the lending button was not valid). After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains as 0 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. In this way, in this configuration, even if the lending button is operated, if the lending of scores is not executed, the number of lending points included in the lending notification will be 0, and the lending reception result response will indicate that it is normal. Configured to output information.

In addition, in the same figure, it may be configured to have one or more of the following configurations. (1) If the reels stop when the operation of the stop button is accepted, and the operation of the lending button is accepted while the operation of the stop button is continued, lending can be performed (counting is also not possible). (2) The operation of the stop button is accepted in a situation where the operation of the stop button is not valid, the reels do not stop, and the operation of the stop button continues. If the button operation is accepted, lending can be performed (counting may also be possible) (3) Set key switch while the game is in progress (for example, when all reels are rotating at a constant speed) If the operation of the lending button is accepted in a situation where the setting key switch is turned off → on and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has not been entered by operating the setting key switch, lending can be performed (4) In a situation where the setting key switch turns from off to on while the game is in progress (for example, when all reels are rotating at a constant speed) and the setting key switch is not moved to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by operating the setting key switch, If the operation of the lending button is accepted, lending is not possible (5) If the operation of the lending button is accepted during the setting confirmation mode, lending is impossible (even if counting is possible, (6) If the operation of the lending button is accepted during the setting change mode, lending becomes impossible (counting may or may not be possible). Good too. Further, the above configuration may be applied to all the configurations shown in FIGS. 169 to 171.

After that, the counting button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), but the counting button remains operated (remains on), so the lending button is disabled, and the lending of scores is executed. Not done. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing information that the counting serial number is m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+1 and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains as 0 points).

In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 169, the following configuration may be used. (1) The gaming machine can output a count notification when it is time to output the count notification. (2) If the settlement process is not executed, the gaming machine can output a count notification that includes 0 as the count score ( 3) When the settlement process is executed, it is possible to output a counting notification that includes a value other than 0 as the counting point. (4) If you have points (total score), based on the operation of the counting button It is possible to output a counting notification that includes a value other than 0 as a counting point. (5) After a counting notification that includes a value other than 0 as a counting point is output, a lending notification that includes a value other than 0 as a lending point is received. In this case, the lending of points is not executed and the loaned points are not added to the total score. (6) After a counting notification containing 0 as the counted score is output, if a lending notice containing a value other than 0 as the lending score is received, the lending of the score will be executed and the lending point will be added to the total score. . With this configuration, even if the count button is pressed for a long time, if there are no more points to settle, it is possible to lend out the points. Note that if you want to perform the payment process again, you need to press and hold the count button again after turning it off.

<C: Flow 2 related to count notification command and rental notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 170, a flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 50, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 50 to 0 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (OFF → ON → OFF), but since the counting button is being operated (remains on and payment is being executed), the points cannot be borrowed. Not executed. After that, approximately 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting cumulative points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button turns from off to on, in other words, it may be the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing at which the counting notification is sent, or the timing at which the lending notification is received. You can also use it as

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains as 0 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. As described above, in this configuration, when the lending button is operated and lending of scores is not executed, the number of lending points included in the lending notification is 50, and information indicating that there is an abnormality in the lending reception result response is provided. is configured to output.

After that, the counting button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, the count button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), the loan button is enabled, and the loan of points is executed. It will be done. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing information that the counting serial number is m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+1 and the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score becomes 0 to 50 points ( The total score display will also be 50 points).

<D: Flow 2 related to count notification command and rental notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 170, a flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 50, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 50 to 0 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is being operated (remains on and payment is being executed), the points cannot be borrowed. Not executed. After that, about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button turns from off to on, in other words, it may be the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing at which the counting notification is sent, or the timing at which the lending notification is received. You can also use it as

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains as 0 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. As described above, in this configuration, when the lending button is operated and lending of scores is not executed, the number of lending points included in the lending notification is 50, and information indicating that there is an abnormality in the lending reception result response is provided. is configured to output.

After that, the counting button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), but the counting button remains operated (remains on), so the lending button is disabled, and the lending of scores is executed. Not done. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing information that the counting serial number is m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p+1 and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p+1 and the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display on the total score display device will also remain as 0 points).

<E: Flow 3 related to count notification command and rental notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 50 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 50, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 50 to 0 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but since the counting button is being operated (remains on and payment is being executed), the points cannot be borrowed. Not executed. After that, about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button turns from off to on, in other words, it may be the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, the timing at which the counting notification is sent, or the timing at which the lending notification is received. You can also use it as

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score changes from 0 to 50 points ( The display on the total score display device also changes from 0 points to 50 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. In this way, in this configuration, even if the calculation process is executed by operating the counting button, the score can be lent by operating the lending button. In this case, the display of the total score on the total score display device may be configured such that after the payment processing is executed and the score goes from 50 to 0, the score related to the loan is added and the total score goes from 0 to 50. It may be configured such that points can be added based on receipt of a rental notification even during the execution of the payment process (for example, the score may be added as follows: "50 → 49 →... → 30 → 31 → 30") and addition are executed, resulting in a final value of 50).

Note that the cumulative score included in the counting notification in this example is cleared by turning the power off → on. In other words, the total number of points counted from the time the power was turned on until now becomes the cumulative score. It may be configured as follows. In other words, even if the payment process is executed once (when the payment process ends when the total score goes from 100 to 50, or when the payment process ends when the total score goes from 500 → 450 → 400 → 350), the accumulated points are This will be carried over to the next payment process. In other words, even if a certain player executes the settlement process and ends the game, the accumulated value will be transmitted relative to the value settled by the previous player in the settlement process. By doing this, it becomes possible to mutually monitor the cumulative number of points settled on the gaming machine side and the lending machine side in one business day. In addition, the total number of points counted by one long-press operation of the counting button may be configured as the counted cumulative score, and when the settlement process is executed once, the counted cumulative score increases from 50 to 100. →150→200, and the cumulative score may be set to 0 when counting is completed.

<When the communication between the gaming machine and the SC board is cut off> Next, FIG. An example of the effect of the case) is illustrated. First, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, and a gaming machine information notification having a serial number n is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a lending notice with the lending serial number p is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, a lending receipt result response containing information indicating that the lending serial number p and the lending point receiving result is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having a serial number n+1 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

After that, the communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is cut off (for example, the communication line is disconnected), the gaming stops on the gaming machine side, and the operation of the counting button becomes invalid. Stopping a game means that a new game is not executed; for example, the operation of the start lever becomes invalid, the bet operation becomes invalid, etc. Further, even if the communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is cut off while the counting button is on, the operation of the counting button becomes invalid and payment is no longer executed. Furthermore, the rental machine also becomes unable to communicate with the gaming machine. As a specific example, the lending button is disabled.

Thereafter, a counting notification with the counting serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it. Since the count button is disabled, the count will be 0 regardless of whether the count button is operated or not. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having the serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, but the rental machine cannot receive it. Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it.

Thereafter, communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is restored, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game on the gaming machine side, and the operation of the counting button becomes effective. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having the serial number n+3 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+3 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Since the counting button has not been operated, the number of points counted is 0.

Thereafter, a lending notice will be sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, but since communication has been cut off, the lending serial number will be 0. In this way, in this example, after communication is restored, a lending notice with the lending serial number 0 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. In this case, the gaming machine side stores p, which is the normal rental serial number received from the lending machine last time, and also stores information that the next rental serial number should be p+1. That is, the RAM of the gaming machine (main control board or payout control board) stores both the lending serial number received from the lending machine side and the information obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number received from the lending machine side. It has a separate storage area for storing each rental serial number). With this configuration, if the gaming machine receives information different from the information that adds 1 to the rental serial number from the rental machine, it will display the information that the rental point reception result is abnormal and the previous successful rental machine. The device is configured to send the rental serial number received from the rental device to the rental device.

Returning to the explanation of the diagram, in a situation where p+1 should have been received as the lending serial number, the gaming machine received a lending notice with the lending serial number 0, so the gaming machine informed the lending machine that the lending serial number was p and that it received the lending points. Send a loan receipt result response containing information that the result is abnormal.

Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having the serial number n+4 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+4 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a lending notice with the lending serial number p+1 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, since the lending machine has received p as the lending serial number included in the lending reception result response received from the gaming machine last time, it determines that p is the correct number as the previous lending serial number, and It is configured to send a lending notice with p+1, which is p plus 1, as the lending serial number to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, the gaming machine transmits a lending reception result response to the lending machine side, which includes information that the lending serial number is p+1 and that the lending point reception result is normal.

<When a communication abnormality occurs during payment processing> Next, FIG. 173 shows an example of the effect when a communication abnormality occurs between a gaming machine and a rental machine (which may be an SC board) during payment processing. It shows. First, an operation on the counting button is accepted (for example, the counting button is pressed for a long time). After that, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, the lending machine score (rentable score) of the lending machine is 100 points, and the gaming machine information notification with the serial number n is Sent from the machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a count notification having a count serial number m, a count of 50 points, and a count cumulative score of 50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 950 points, and the loan machine score stored in the loan machine is 150 points. Thereafter, a lending notice with the lending serial number p is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, a lending receipt result response containing information indicating that the lending serial number p and the lending point receiving result is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having a serial number n+1 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+1, a counted score of 50 points, and a counted cumulative score of 100 points is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. The total score stored in the gaming machine becomes 900 points, but the loan machine score stored in the loan machine remains 150 points. Thereafter, 300 ms after the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification with a serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, but a communication error occurs and the rental machine cannot receive it. Here, the lending machine detects that a communication abnormality has occurred, and becomes unable to communicate with the gaming machine within 300 ms after that, and the gaming machine also disables the counting button and stops playing. Thereafter, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+2, a counting score of 0 points, and a counting cumulative score of 100 points is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. In this way, in the count notification output from the gaming machine after the game is stopped, the count serial number is updated (added), but the count becomes 0. Thereafter, the rental machine enters a state of waiting for recovery from the error, and communication with the gaming machine becomes impossible until recovery from the error occurs.

<When a communication abnormality occurs during lending> Next, FIG. 174 shows an example of the effect when a communication abnormality occurs between the gaming machine and the lending machine (which may also be an SC board) during the execution of the lending process. It shows. First, an operation of the lending button is accepted (for example, the lending button changes from off to on to off). Thereafter, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, and a gaming machine information notification having a serial number n is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a counting notification having a counting serial number m is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a lending notice with a lending serial number p and a lending number of 50 points is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number p and the result of receiving the loan points is normal is output from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine does not receive the results. Can not. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 1050 points. Since the lending machine does not receive the lending reception result response from the game machine, it determines that the lending is not completed (or does not determine that the lending is completed).

Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having the serial number n+1 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, the communication abnormality is resolved, and the lending machine receives the gaming machine information notification.

Thereafter, a count notification having the count serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. Thereafter, a lending notice with a lending serial number p and a lending number of 50 points is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Since the rental machine has not received the rental receipt result response and it is unclear whether the previous rental notification has been received, it resends the rental notification with the same rental serial number as the previous one. Thereafter, a lending receipt result response containing information indicating that the lending serial number p and the lending point receiving result is abnormal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. On the gaming machine side, since the lending notice received last time and the lending serial number are not consecutive (not p+1), the gaming machine sends a lending reception result response indicating that the lending point reception result is abnormal. Since the previously sent rental notification and the received rental serial number match, the rental machine completes the rental (it is determined that the rental is completed).

Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification having the serial number n+2 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

<<Configuration of Serial Number Update Process>> FIG. 175 shows the configuration of serial number update process that can be applied to this example. In the figure, this is a process of updating a serial number used when transmitting a predetermined command from a gaming machine (for example, payout control board) to a lending machine (for example, SC board). The predetermined command is, for example, a serial number used when transmitting gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information as a gaming machine information notification command. Note that in both patterns 1 and 2, which will be described later, the maximum value of the serial number counter value is 255, and the configuration is such that when the counter value is 255 and 1 is added, the counter value becomes 0.

<Pattern 1> First, pattern 1 will be explained in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first, in step 5001, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, in step 5003, the gaming machine determines whether the serial number counter value has become zero. If YES in step 5003, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter in step 5005, and proceeds to step 5007. On the other hand, if No in step 5003, the process moves to step 5007 without executing the process in step 5005. Next, in step 5007, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and moves on to the next process.

<Pattern 2> Next, pattern 2 will be explained in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first in step 5002, the gaming machine determines whether the serial number counter value is the maximum value (255 in this example). If YES in step 5002, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter in step 5004, and proceeds to step 5006. On the other hand, if No in step 5002, the process moves to step 5006 without executing the process in step 5004. Next, in step 5006, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, in step 5008, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and moves on to the next process.

<Example of modification regarding communication between gaming machine and rental machine> The medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows as a configuration regarding communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine.

<Configuration 1> The lending notification sent from the lending machine to the game machine is configured to include, in addition to the lending serial number and the number of lending points, the counting point reception result, which is information regarding whether the counting notification received last time is normal or not. It's okay. With this configuration, it is possible to send and receive information regarding whether or not the reception result is normal in both the lending notification and the counting notification, without increasing the number of commands sent and received between the gaming machine and the lending machine. , it is possible to reduce problems related to command transmission and reception while reducing data capacity (reducing the number of times commands are transmitted and received).

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the gaming machine receives information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal, it determines that the counting has been completed, and displays the total score display device at the timing of the reception. Subtract the counted score (the counted score transmitted by the gaming machine) from (subtract from the total score stored in the total score display device and/or subtract from the display of the total score displayed on the total score display device) It may be configured as follows. In addition, if the lending machine sends information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal, it will judge that the counting has been completed and the counted points (the counted points received from the gaming machine) will be used as the point that can be lent out. (sometimes referred to as machine rental score).

Furthermore, when configured as in Configuration 1 above, the configuration may be configured to operate as follows. (1) The lending machine receives a counting notification from the gaming machine side → The lending machine sends a lending notification containing information that the counting point reception result is normal to the gaming machine side → Immediately after the transmission, the lending machine receives a notification from the gaming machine. The power supply is cut off → The gaming machine receives a lending notice containing information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points from the lending machine is normal and stores it in a predetermined storage area → The gaming machine detects that the power has been cut off. and starts executing the power-off processing → the gaming machine finishes executing the power-off processing (2) The lending machine receives a count notification from the gaming machine → the lending machine notifies the gaming machine as a result of receiving the counted points. Sends a lending notice that includes information indicating that it is normal → Immediately after the transmission, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The gaming machine detects a power outage and starts executing the power outage process → The gaming machine is rented out. Receives a lending notice containing information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points from the machine is normal, and stores it in a designated storage area → The gaming machine finishes executing the processing when the power is turned off. Even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off immediately after the gaming machine sends a lending notice containing information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal, the gaming machine will execute the power-off process. Even if the gaming machine is configured so that it can receive a rental notification containing information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal from the lending machine side and store it in a predetermined storage area by the time the gaming machine is finished. good. In this example, in the power-off processing on the gaming machine side, after the gaming machine detects a power-off, the CPU on the gaming machine side (the CPU of the main control board or the CPU of the payout control board) performs control. The period during which the gaming machine is unable to store various notifications from the lending machine in its storage area until it becomes disabled (a reset signal is sent to the CPU) or after the gaming machine detects a power outage. Until then, it is possible to receive various notifications from the loaner side, but during this period, new notifications may not be sent to the loaner side. It should be noted that this configuration is applicable to all configurations in this example.

<Configuration 2> The lending notification sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine may include, in addition to the lending serial number and the number of lending points, the counting serial number of the counting notification received by the lending machine. With this configuration, by comparing the counting serial number sent by the gaming machine with the counting serial number received afterwards, it is possible to check whether the counting notification was sent normally, so that the gaming machine and the rental machine can It is possible to send and receive information on whether the reception result is normal for both lending notifications and counting notifications without increasing the number of commands sent and received, reducing data capacity (reducing the number of commands sent and received). However, problems related to command transmission and reception can be reduced.

<Configuration 3> The configuration may be as follows. (1) The gaming machine can output a count notification when it is time to output the count notification. (2) If the settlement process is not executed, the gaming machine can output a count notification that includes 0 as the count score ( 3) When the settlement process is executed, it is possible to output a counting notification that includes a value other than 0 as the counting point. (4) If you have points (total score), based on the operation of the counting button It is possible to output a counting notification that includes a value other than 0 as a counting point. (5) After a counting notification that includes 0 as a counting point is output, if a lending notification that includes a value other than 0 as a lending point is received. , it is possible to output the result of receipt of loan points indicating that it is normal. (6) After a counting notification containing a value other than 0 as the counted number of points is output, if a lending notice containing a value other than 0 as the number of lending points is received, it is possible to output the result of receiving the lending points indicating an abnormality. It is. By configuring as described above, it is possible to perform the process smoothly by eliminating the situation where the points are lent out while counting and the points are increased and decreased at the same time.

<Configuration 4> When the lending machine determines that the counting notification received from the gaming machine is abnormal (for example, when the checksum is abnormal or the serial numbers are not consecutive), the lending machine sends the lending notification. It may be configured so that it is not sent. With this configuration, if the gaming machine side does not receive the lending notice after transmitting the counting notice, it can understand that there is an abnormality in the transmission and reception of the transmitted counting notice.

<Configuration of Count Button and Return Button> The configuration of the count button and return button in this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> In a situation where 1 point is bet and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (the counting button operation is accepted), the 1 point bet and the total score of 50 points are It may be configured such that a total of 51 points are settled. Note that being settled means that the points are transferred to the rental machine.

<Configuration 2> In a situation where 1 point has been bet and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (the counting button operation is accepted), only the total score of 50 points is settled and the bet is It may be configured so that the one point shown is not settled. In such a configuration, it may be configured such that one point bet is transferred to the total score by operating the return button. In addition, in such a configuration, if the counting button is operated (the counting button operation is accepted) in a situation where 1 point is bet and the total score is 50 points, the total score is 50 points. Only the points are settled, the one point bet is not settled, and a voice saying "The score has been bet" is output (this can be output from the main control board, or it can be output from the payout control board). (or output from the sub-control board). In addition, if you operate the counting button (accepting the operation of the counting button) in a situation where no score has been bet and the total score is 50 points, the total score of 50 points will be settled and the message "Settled. ” (may be outputted from the main control board, may be outputted from the payout control board, or may be outputted from the sub-control board). That is, the sound after settlement may be made different depending on whether the score is bet or not. Note that the volume of the voice saying "The score has been bet" and the voice saying "The settlement has been made" may be different.

<Configuration of the counting button> Assuming that a symbol combination that generates a point payout when stopped stops, a minor prize is won, and the symbol combination related to the minor prize (for example, a bell symbol) is stopped and displayed, resulting in a score of 10 points. In a situation where payouts are being executed, if an operation on the counting button is accepted (for example, an operation related to payment processing is executed, such as accepting a long press), (1) Points are paid out (or the payout display is ) is completed, the score adjustment process (or adjustment display) is executed, (2) the adjustment process (or adjustment display) is executed at the timing when the count button operation is accepted, (3) the adjustment process is not executed. It may be configured as follows. Further, when executing the settlement process, the settlement process may be configured to include the 10 points related to the bell, or may be configured to execute the settlement process without including the 10 points related to the bell.

In addition, in a situation where a replay combination has been won, the symbol combinations related to the replay have stopped, and automatic bets have been executed, an operation on the counting button is accepted (for example, an operation related to the settlement process, such as accepting a long press). is executed), (1) the score settlement process (or settlement display) is executed after the automatic bet ends; (2) the settlement process (settlement display) is executed at the timing when the operation of the counting button is accepted. It may be configured such that (3) the payment process is not executed. Furthermore, when executing the settlement process, the total score is settled while the automatically bet number is maintained.

As mentioned above, in this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured so that it does not include gaming information, and in such a configuration, (1) gaming machine installation information: gaming machine activation (2) Gaming machine performance information: Transmitted every 180 seconds after gaming machine startup is completed. (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: Transmitted every 300ms after gaming machine startup is completed. It will have gaming machine information notifications, and the order of priority is "(1) gaming machine installation information → (2) gaming machine performance information → (3) HC/fraud monitoring information" from highest to lowest.

The configuration of gaming machine information notification control processing, which is processing related to gaming machine information notification applicable to this example, in the case of the above configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

<Configuration 1 of gaming information notification control process> First, with reference to FIG. 176, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process applicable to this example will be described in detail. Note that the process in the figure is a process executed as an interrupt process in the main control board. First, in step 6002, the gaming machine determines whether the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification has arrived. In this example, the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification is configured to arrive every 300 ms. More specifically, it is configured to be able to generate and transmit three types of information as gaming machine information notifications: HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, and the generation and transmission timing is as follows. As mentioned above, HC/fraud monitoring information is sent every 300ms, gaming machine installation information is sent every 60 seconds (60,000ms), and gaming machine performance information is sent every 180 seconds (180,000ms). The gaming machine information notification generation timing is set at 300 ms, which is the transmission cycle of HC/fraud monitoring information, which is a short period. The transmission cycle of gaming machine installation information and the transmission cycle of gaming machine performance information are multiples of the shortest cycle of HC/fraud monitoring information (multiples of gaming machine information notification generation cycle). With this configuration, it is only necessary to determine which gaming machine information notification to generate and transmit every 300 ms, which is the shortest period, and it is possible to simplify the process regarding gaming machine information notification. can.

Furthermore, in this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information is displayed every 300ms, the gaming machine installation information is every 60 seconds (60000ms), and the gaming machine performance information is every 180 seconds (180000ms). The transmission cycle is 200 times the transmission cycle of HC/fraud monitoring information, and the transmission cycle of gaming machine performance information is 600 times the transmission cycle of HC/fraud monitoring information. In this way, multiple types of gaming machine information notifications are provided, and the time value of the transmission cycle of all gaming machine information notifications is set to be an integral multiple of the time value that has the shortest transmission cycle among the gaming machine information notifications. By configuring this, it is possible to send appropriate gaming machine information notifications by determining whether to send subsequent gaming machine information notifications every 300 ms, which is the time value with the shortest transmission cycle among gaming machine information notifications. The data capacity required for the program can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to output gaming machine information notifications to the outside of the gaming machine at a fixed cycle of 300ms, the loaner machine can receive commands from the gaming machine at intervals of 300ms, and if a command cannot be received. It is possible to understand that there is a possibility of communication abnormality.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 6002, the gaming machine generates HC/fraud monitoring information in step 6004. Next, in step 6006, the gaming machine determines whether the gaming machine installation information generation timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6006, the HC/fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002 is discarded in step 6008. Next, in step 6010, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, in step 6012, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information and moves to the next process. In this way, the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority as the gaming machine information notification, so when the timing to send the gaming machine installation information comes, the HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded and the gaming machine installation information is sent. is configured to do so.

Further, if No in step 6006, the gaming machine determines in step 6014 whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6014, the gaming machine discards the HC/fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002 in step 6016. Next, in step 6018, the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information. Next, in step 6020, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information and moves on to the next process. In this way, gaming machine performance information has the highest priority next to gaming machine installation information as a gaming machine information notification, so if the timing for sending gaming machine performance information is not the timing for sending gaming machine installation information, It is configured to discard HC/fraud monitoring information and transmit gaming machine performance information.

Further, in the case of No in step 6014, in step 6022, the gaming machine determines whether or not there is delayed gaming machine performance information. If it is the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information and the answer is Yes in step 6006, the gaming machine installation information will be transmitted, so the transmission of the gaming machine performance information will be delayed, and the next transmission timing of gaming machine information notification ( It will be transmitted after 300ms). If Yes in step 6022, in step 6024, the gaming machine discards the HC/fraud monitoring information generated in step 6002, and moves to the next process. Note that in the case of No in step 6022, the process moves to step 6016. Moreover, in the case of No in step 6002, the process moves to the next process.

In this way, in the figure, HC/fraud monitoring information is generated every 300 ms, and if the timing is to send a command with a higher priority than the HC/fraud monitoring information, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is configured to discard. That is, HC/fraud monitoring information is generated every time a gaming machine information notification is sent, and if it cannot be transmitted (when a gaming machine information notification with a higher priority is to be sent), the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. is configured to do so. Furthermore, it may be configured such that gaming machine performance information is also generated and discarded if not transmitted. In the case of such a configuration, the operation may be configured as follows.

<Effect 1> (1) In a situation where a door opening error occurs as a predetermined error (door opening error), the transmission timing of HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (gaming machine installation information may also be used). Therefore, HC/fraud monitoring information including information indicating that a door opening error has occurred is generated, but since gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. (2) 100ms later, the door open error is resolved. (3) 300ms after the timing in (1), it is time to send the HC/fraud monitoring information that could not be sent in (1), so the HC - Generate new fraud monitoring information (does not include information indicating that a door opening error has occurred) and send it. With this configuration, it is possible to output information tailored to the latest situation.

As a modification of FIG. 176, information is generated when the transmission timing (timing to be transmitted) is reached for any of the HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. If the information cannot be sent because it has a higher priority than the information that was sent, the information that could not be sent is stored without being discarded, and the next time it can be sent (timing every 300 ms). It may also be configured to transmit by. In the case of such a configuration, the operation may be configured as follows.

<Effect 2> (1) In a situation where a door opening error has occurred as a predetermined error, the door is opened because the timing for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (gaming machine installation information may also be used) Although HC/fraud monitoring information including information indicating that an error has occurred is generated, since gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is stored. (2) The door opening error is resolved 100ms later. (3) At the timing 300ms after the timing of (1), the HC that contains the information that the door opening error stored in (1) has occurred. Send fraud monitoring information. Also, at the timing of (3), it is not necessary to newly generate HC/fraud monitoring information, or it may be newly generated, or if it is newly generated, the HC/fraud monitoring information is stored. You can keep it or discard it. By configuring this way, if information cannot be sent when it should have been sent (for example, if information could not be sent because it was sent with a higher priority), Even if there is a problem, it is now possible to send information according to the situation at the time when it should have been sent, at the actual timing of sending, and the content of the information may be different due to a delay in the sending timing. can be prevented.

<Configuration 2 of gaming information notification control process> Next, referring to FIG. 177, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process applicable to this example will be described in detail. Note that the process in the figure is a process executed as an interrupt process in the main control board. First, in step 6026, the gaming machine determines whether the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification has been reached. In this example, similarly to FIG. 176, the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification is configured to reach 300 ms. If Yes in step 6026, in step 6028, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine installation information generation timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6028, in step 6030, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. If YES in step 6030, in step 6032, the gaming machine sends the performance information delay flag (the performance information delay flag The flag for transmitting gaming machine performance information at the timing of transmitting gaming machine information notification is turned on, and the process moves to step 6034. If No in step 6030, the process moves to step 6034 without executing step 6032.

Next, in step 6034, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, in step 6036, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information and moves on to the next process.

Further, in the case of No in step 6028, in step 6038, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6038, the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information in step 6040. Next, in step 6042, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information and moves on to the next process.

Further, in the case of No in step 6038, in step 6044, the gaming machine determines whether or not the performance information delay flag is off. If No in step 6044, the performance information delay flag is turned off in step 6046 and the process moves to step 6040. That is, the delayed gaming machine performance information is generated and transmitted. On the other hand, if YES in step 6046, the gaming machine generates HC/fraud monitoring information in step 6048. Next, in step 6049, the gaming machine sets HC/fraud monitoring information and moves on to the next process.

In this way, in the figure, it is determined which of the HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information should be transmitted every 300 ms, and the gaming machine information to be transmitted is determined based on the determination result. Configured to generate and send notifications. In the case of such a configuration, the operation may be configured as follows.

<Effect 3> (1) In a situation where a door opening error has occurred as a predetermined error, the timing for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (gaming machine installation information may also be acceptable) is reached, so the gaming machine Priority is given to transmission of performance information, and HC/improper monitoring information including information indicating that a door opening error has occurred is not generated. (2) 100ms later, the door open error is resolved. (3) 300ms after the timing in (1), it is time to send the HC/fraud monitoring information that could not be sent in (1), so the HC - Generate new fraud monitoring information (does not include information indicating that a door opening error has occurred) and send it. With this configuration, it is possible to output information tailored to the latest situation.

Note that the medalless drum-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured with one or more of the following as active low. (1) Sensor that detects the door opening (2) Sensor that detects the operation of the stop button (3) Sensor that detects the operation of the start switch (4) Sensor that detects the operation of the counting button (5) Sensor that detects the operation of the return button Sensors for Detection By configuring one or more sensors in an active low manner as described above, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is highly resistant to noise.

<Combination of configurations according to this example> As described above, gaming machines having the configurations according to the present embodiment to the thirteenth embodiment have been described. The configurations from this example to the 13th embodiment can be configured in combination as appropriate, and below is an example of a gaming machine that is combined across the configurations according to this example to the configurations according to the 13th embodiment. List.

<Combination configuration 1> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process using input sensor>>> in the form.

<Effects> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that no matter which display device the player looks at, the push order will be changed. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is To provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though addition processing is not executed.

<Combination configuration 2> For example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, and the configuration related to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Combination configuration 2> in this example A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the navigation cannot recognize the medal, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, so that the first medal that collided with the collision part It is possible to provide a game machine that can prevent a situation in which game medals bounce up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 3> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the fifth embodiment The present invention is a gaming machine configured by combining the configurations related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>>.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the navigation system cannot recognize the player, and when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player receiving the payout of game medals receives the payout of game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 4> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the configuration related to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <<Configuration 1> of <<<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing, when commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above configurations.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves the output of audio, the player Since the output of the sound does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination Configuration 5> For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>> in the third embodiment, and the <<Configuration 1>> in the fourth embodiment. <<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Returning Member>>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the above components.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time. This makes it possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is equal to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a game machine that has a sufficient distance from the collision part and can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. .

<Combination Configuration 6> For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>> in the third embodiment, and the <<Configuration 1>> in the fifth embodiment. <<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the following configurations.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time. It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing is not executed, and to ensure that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out by a player who receives game medals. To provide a user-friendly game machine in which game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals when the player is playing the game, and does not give a player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination Configuration 7> For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>> in the third embodiment, and <<Combination Configuration 1>> in the sixth embodiment. Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing, when commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time. It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing is not being executed, and the main control User-friendly feature that allows the player to recognize that there is no problem with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end even if communication between the board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. It is possible to provide gaming machines with

<Combination configuration 8> For example, the configuration related to the <<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment and the <<<<Fifth embodiment medal payout device The gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations related to the drive control >>>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first medal that collided with the collision part This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the game medals bounce back to the medal receiving opening D341, and when the player receiving the payout of game medals receives a predetermined number of game medals from the first medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which game medals can be paid out at the same intervals up to 10 minutes, and which does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination Configuration 9> For example, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the process related to <<<Sixth Embodiment Settlement in the sixth embodiment] Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of If the command and channel are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> do.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first medal that collided with the collision part This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the game medals from bouncing back to the medal receiving slot D341, and to prevent communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S while executing processing accompanied by audio output. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the game machine because the output of the voice does not end when the game machine is in a disconnected state.

<Combination Configuration 10> For example, the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>> in the fifth embodiment and the <<<Sixth Embodiment Settlement Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of processing related to When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> Constructed by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> A game machine.

<Effects> With this configuration, for example, when a player receiving game medals is paid out, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player can pay out game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while processing that involves the output of audio is performed, the game will not feel strange to the player. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Combination configuration 11> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and <<<<Fourth Embodiment: Medal return member>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to >>>>.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the addition process is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficient for the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combination configuration 12> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and <<<<Fourth Embodiment: Medal return member>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to >>>> and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the addition process is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficient for the diameter of the game medals. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allows the player who receives the game medals to collect the predetermined number of game medals. To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number when the game medals are paid out.

<Combination configuration 13> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment: Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and <<<<Fourth Embodiment: Medal return member>> in the fourth embodiment The configuration related to >>>>, the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and the <<<Sixth Implementation in the sixth embodiment Form: Processing when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during execution of processing related to payment When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> Constructed by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> The gaming machine is

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the addition process is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficient for the diameter of the game medals. This makes it possible to prevent the situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allows the player who receives the game medals to collect the predetermined number of game medals. When game medals are paid out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals, so it does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and it is easy to use when processing with audio output. During the game, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player cannot recognize that there is no problem with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end. It is possible to provide the most user-friendly gaming machine possible.

<Combination configuration 14> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process using input sensor>>> in the form.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed by turning on the reel window frame lamp D310 (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310), and it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation. While the D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error and perform a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, blocker D100 is turned off and the game medals are returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) are not executed in time, and the game medals end up getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process has not been executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent such problems.

<Combination configuration 15> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the fourth embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed using lighting (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine. has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, making it possible to prevent the first game medal that collided with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. We can provide gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 16> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the fifth embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>> in the embodiment.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed using lighting (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of game medals will be able to do so by turning on the predetermined number of medals. To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number of game medals when the game medals are paid out.

<Combination configuration 17> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the configuration related to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <<Configuration 1> of <<<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing, when commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above configurations.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed using lighting (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the process is executed with audio output. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during the game, the player will recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that enables

<Combination configuration 18> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<An example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will issue an error message. Despite the fact that the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 using the blocker D100) was not completed in time, and the credit addition process was not executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 19> For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to the above.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the situation of being put away.

<Combination configuration 20> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example and <<<<drive control of fifth embodiment medal payout device>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to >>>.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player receiving the payout of game medals can receive the payout of game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, so that the player does not feel any discomfort. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 21> For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> and in the sixth embodiment, <<<During execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board When commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , if the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while a process that involves the output of audio is being executed, the player cannot use the gaming machine because the audio output is not finished. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that allows users to recognize that no problems have occurred.

<Combination configuration 22> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<An example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next will be pressed while the reel is being pressed due to the stop operation of the relevant reel. Even if the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, , credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will determine that it is an error and perform a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, by turning off the blocker D 100). It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing has not been executed due to execution processing (such as refunding game medals to discharge port D240 by blocker D100) being delayed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that enables the following.

<Combination configuration 23> For example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to the above.

<Effect> With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next will be pressed while the reel is being pressed due to the stop operation of the relevant reel. Even if there is, it becomes clear that the player is less likely to suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to a mistake in the pressing order, etc., and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is the same as the diameter of the gaming medal. To provide a user-friendly game machine which has a sufficient distance to the collision part and can prevent a situation in which the first game medal that collides with a collision part bounces back to a medal receiving opening D341. be able to.

<Combination configuration 24> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and the <<<<drive control of the fifth embodiment medal payout device>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to >>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next will be pressed while the reel is being pressed due to the stop operation of the relevant reel. Even if a game medal is paid out, it is clear that even if the game medal is paid out, it will be clear that the player will not be disadvantaged unintentionally, such as not being able to get the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pressing order, etc. To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals when the game is played.

<Combination configuration 25> For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> and in the sixth embodiment, <<<During execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> in the case where commands and channels are one-to-one.

<Effect> With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next will be pressed while the reel is being pressed due to the stop operation of the relevant reel. Even if a process that involves audio output is being performed, the main control To enable a user to recognize that when communication between a board M and a sub-control board S is disconnected, there is no problem with the gaming machine because the player does not end audio output. We can provide friendly gaming machines.

An example of a gaming machine in which the configuration according to the present example is combined with the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described above, but these are just examples, and the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment can be changed as appropriate. , can be configured in combination.

(Summary) Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiment, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and it goes without saying that these listed concepts can be combined or separated (higher-level conceptualization), and concepts based on the further structures shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. It's okay.

The gaming machine according to aspect (1) includes a band-shaped reel tape (e.g., reel band MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (e.g., reel frame MW), and the reel tape includes the reel tape. A plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the types of symbols include at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol); The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol, and the second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. , and the first pattern is not arranged at each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape is equal to the surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound. This gaming machine is characterized by being longer than its outer circumference.

The gaming machine according to aspect (2) includes: a gaming machine main body; a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable; and a reel unit (for example, a reel In a reel-type gaming machine equipped with a reel unit RU, the gaming machine main body includes: a pedestal section (for example, pedestal section BU) on which the reel unit is installed; and a gaming medium installed below the pedestal section. A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) in which game media are stored, and an auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary A tank HS) is provided in a part of the main tank member, and a slope portion (for example, a slope H64) descending from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided, and the reel unit and The pedestal part is detachably held by a locking part (for example, screw BS), and the slope part is located vertically below the locking part that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes. This is a gaming machine with special features.

The gaming machine according to aspect (3) includes: a gaming machine main body; a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable; and a reel unit (for example, a reel In a reel-type gaming machine equipped with a reel unit RU, the gaming machine main body includes: a pedestal section (for example, pedestal section BU) on which the reel unit is installed; and a gaming medium installed below the pedestal section. A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) in which game media are stored, and an auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary a tank HS), the reel unit and the pedestal are removably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS), and the locking part is located closest to the side where the front door opens and closes. The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the auxiliary tank member.

The gaming machine according to aspect (4) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50), a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40), and a performance display section capable of displaying a performance (for example, performance display device S40). ), and an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the performance, and after the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the stop The rotation of the reel is stopped in response to the switch operation, and a final stop switch operation is performed, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel whose rotation is to be stopped last among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by stopping all of the plurality of reels, and if the final stop switch is operated, bets will not be placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch is operated. When a first predetermined time period has elapsed, a specific image (for example, a standby screen) can be displayed on the performance display section, and after one game is completed, a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) can be displayed. ) is operated, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section, and when the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the predetermined image is displayed. If a second predetermined period of time elapses with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing after the operation member is operated, the specific image is displayed on the effect display section, This gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to aspect (5) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reel M50), a plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40), and a performance display section capable of displaying a performance (for example, performance display device S40). ), and an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the performance, and after the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the stop The rotation of the reel is stopped in response to the switch operation, and a final stop switch operation is performed, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel whose rotation is to be stopped last among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by stopping all of the plurality of reels, and if the final stop switch is operated, bets will not be placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch is operated. When a first predetermined time period has elapsed, a specific image (for example, a standby screen) can be displayed on the performance display section, and after one game is completed, a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) can be displayed. ) is operated, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section, and when the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the predetermined image is displayed. If a second predetermined period of time elapses with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing after the operation member is operated, the specific image is displayed on the effect display section, The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the predetermined time, and when the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is longer than the predetermined time, and when the predetermined image is displayed after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operating member (for example, cross key SB2) is operated before the second predetermined time period elapses with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing, the predetermined operating member is Even if the second predetermined period of time has elapsed with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing after the operation, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display section, while the final stop switch is operated. If the stop switch is operated, the stop switch is operated anew before the first predetermined time period elapses without placing a bet from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. Also, if the first predetermined time period elapses without placing a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the performance display section, When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is placed before the first predetermined time period elapses without placing a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. , a game characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display section even after the first predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to aspect (6) includes: a main gaming section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game; and a setting that is electrically connected to the main gaming section and that determines the degree of advantage for the player. A setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) that is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a value can be changed, and the main gaming section executes processing at predetermined intervals. If a power outage occurs in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the gaming machine is not being supplied with power, the setting switch is turned on and the gaming machine is activated. If a power outage occurs after the game machine starts to be supplied with power and shifts to the setting change mode, and power starts to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, the game machine shifts to the setting change mode. If the power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the gaming machine is not being supplied with power, the setting switch is turned on and power starts to be supplied to the gaming machine, If a power outage occurs before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the power supply, and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off, the game machine is prevented from entering the setting change mode. This gaming machine is characterized by the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present aspect (7) includes a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the reels, and a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols. A stop switch (for example, left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) that the player operates when stopping the rotation of the reels, and a stop switch that can electrically store gaming media within a predetermined number of ranges. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200), a main game unit (e.g., main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, a speaker (e.g., speaker S20) that outputs effect sound, and an output of effect. The main gaming section includes: a winning lottery means for executing a prize lottery; reel control means for controlling the stop of the reels in accordance with the lottery result; storage number increasing processing for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means; and payout processing for paying out the game media. and when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game media can be given to the player, and the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number. When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and a specific number of game media are awarded in a situation where the number of game media is a certain number, the system is configured to execute a payout process without executing a storage number increase process, In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is awarded. If the number of gaming media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, and In a situation where the predetermined number is less than the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is awarded, the payout process is executed after the stored number increase process is executed. The main gaming section is configured to be able to transmit game media provision information to the sub gaming section after the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the sub gaming section receives the gaming media provision information. Based on the above, the speaker is configured to be able to output a game media imparting sound, which is an effect sound related to the imparting of game media, from the speaker, and in a situation where the number of gaming media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is awarded, a predetermined game media granting sound (for example, credit increases by 1) is emitted based on the reception of the game media granting information. the game media granting sound that is output at the time of paying out a game media, and the game media granting sound that is output when one game medal is paid out), and the number of game media stored in the storage means increases from the predetermined number to the number of game media stored in the storage means. When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is awarded in a situation where the value is less than or equal to the value obtained by subtracting the specific number, based on the reception of the game media award information, In a situation where the predetermined game media imparting sound can be output, and the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media are awarded, it is possible to output the predetermined game media award sound based on receiving the game media award information; During the execution of the storage number increase process, the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means reaches A (A is a natural number) until it becomes A+1 and N (N is a natural number, 2≦N M+1 game media from the start of execution of the payout process regarding M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N-1)) game media during the execution of the payout process that will pay out ) game media. This gaming machine is characterized in that the time values until the start of execution of payout processing regarding the first game media are different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) includes: a main gaming section (e.g., main control board M) that controls the progress of the game; a sub-gaming section (e.g., sub-control board S) that controls the performance; and execution of the performance. A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on at different times, and a setting value display part (for example, a setting display LED) that can display a setting value, and the game lamp has a lighting pattern (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77). The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77), and the lighting mode includes a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting pattern. The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and a light-off time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77). Yes, it has a plurality of lighting colors, a plurality of lighting times, and a plurality of off times, and the lighting pattern includes a first lighting pattern that can be implemented in the event of a predetermined abnormality, and a set value. A second lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is displayed on the display section; and a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed on the set value display section when there is no predetermined abnormality. The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode, and the second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured to not include the predetermined lighting mode. The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode, and the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured to not include the specific lighting mode. This gaming machine is characterized by:

The gaming machine according to aspect (9) includes a storage means that can electrically store game media within a predetermined number range (for example, in this example, a storage means that can electrically store game medals as credits in the gaming machine). A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the gaming media stored in the storage means and that allows betting on multiple gaming media (for example, a max bet button); and a predetermined gaming state. A predetermined lamp (for example, 3 bet lamp D213) that can notify that a specified number of bets, which is the maximum number of bets per game, has been placed, and a specific lamp that can notify that the bet switch operation is valid. comprising a lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) and a role determining means that can determine a winning role, and is configured to be able to determine a replay role as a winning role determined by the role determining means, and in the predetermined gaming state. , and the replay combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number, and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number. In a situation where the number of bets is less than a specified number, the specific lamp is turned on, and in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, if the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specified lamp is turned on. This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific lamp goes out after being turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) includes a main gaming section (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the performance, The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is configured to be longer than the time from the occurrence of a power outage to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the start of the program of the sub-gaming section. This gaming machine is characterized by being configured to last for a long time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game that is in a gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by a subsequent stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player; In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player's final Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the combination to the player, and in a game in which the predetermined gaming state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and after that, the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and a predetermined rotation failure occurs on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination even in a situation where the predetermined symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, and is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop operation by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the above, and the reel is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player to display the predetermined symbol combination. After that, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the game value is given to the player on each reel. , the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off is performed. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the execution, the system is configured to provide the player with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after the power is restored, and in the predetermined gaming state. In a game in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power-off processing based on the detection of power-off, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player the following:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. control means, capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and the reel control means, in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, based on a stop operation by a player, In a game that is configured to be able to stop symbol combinations, is in a predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each of the symbol combinations that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player; Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combinations are displayed, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are displayed. In a game in which the game is in the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. have been stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the combination of symbols other than the predetermined symbol combination Even after the symbol combination is displayed, the reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the reel control means is configured to give a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game, the specific symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on a stop operation by a player, and in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a specific symbol combination is set on each reel after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are each stopped, and after the player performs the final stop operation at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on each reel. Even though the player subsequently performed a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, the specific symbol combination was not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freeze even after

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game that is in a gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by a subsequent stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player; In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player's final Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the combination to the player, and in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to award a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player. In a game where the predetermined game state is in the predetermined gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on each reel. After the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the input of game value. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, Even though the player subsequently performed a stop operation at the specific timing as a final stop operation, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination was displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The structure is such that the next game can be executed even after the game is played, regardless of the input of game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, having at least a first lottery state as a lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least a probability of determining a specific result is different from the first lottery state; The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is in a predetermined game state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player, and thereafter After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the player is in the predetermined gaming state. , and in a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the predetermined result is then determined by the player as a final stopping operation. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the correct timing, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination In a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means can stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player. In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a pattern corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Each of the symbols to be drawn is stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the drawing state is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state. is a game that is executed when the first lottery state is set, and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Although each of the symbols to be played has been stopped, and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specific symbol combination is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after a symbol combination other than the above is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. a control means; and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on a specific result being determined, and the reel control means is provided with a predetermined result determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on the player's stop operation, and in the game where the predetermined game state is in a predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the player Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of After the symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, the reel does not respond to the final stop operation. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined defective rotation of the reel, the reel control means is configured to provide the player with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the reel control means includes: In a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination can be stopped based on a stop operation by the player, and the game is in the predetermined game state and the internal lottery means has determined the specific symbol combination. In a game in which a specific result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player then performs a stopping operation at a specific timing as the final stopping operation to display the specific symbol. After the combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is in place and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined lamp is turned on. , the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are each stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined number of symbols on the reels corresponding to the final stop operation is The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined lamp is configured to light up even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a rotation failure.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. It is equipped with a control means and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result, and is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected. In a game where a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player. After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player; In a game in which the game is in a gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on each reel, and the player's final stopping operation thereafter Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as described above, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the above-mentioned symbol combination will be displayed after the power is restored. The reel control means is configured to give a player a gaming value corresponding to a predetermined symbol combination, and in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to a predetermined symbol combination to a player, and in a game where a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to provide a gaming value corresponding to a predetermined symbol combination. In a game that is configured to be able to stop symbol combinations, and is in the predetermined gaming state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol that corresponds to the specific symbol combination. Each of the symbols is stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is turned on, and the predetermined lamp is turned on. In a game in which the game is in a gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player's final stopping operation thereafter Even if the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as described above, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the This gaming machine is characterized in that a predetermined lamp is configured to light up.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) includes N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and a production sound. a speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs the following: an internal lottery means; and a reel control means that controls the reels; The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on the player's stop operation, and in a game where the game is in a predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the player's operation, and the symbol combination is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player. After being displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is the predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels is , the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the reels corresponding to the final stop operation are stopped. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure, the player is configured to be provided with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and is executed in a specific gaming state. In a game, the player performs a stop operation on the N-1 reel at a specific timing, and after the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel, a predetermined performance is emitted from the speaker. It is configured to be able to output a sound (for example, tenpai sound), and in a game executed in the specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player. However, even after symbols other than the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel due to a predetermined rotation failure on the N-1th reel, the speaker does not output a predetermined effect sound. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electronically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , a max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and the reel control means is in a predetermined game state and the above-mentioned In a game where the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation, and subsequent After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at the predetermined timing. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. and in a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined game state is in place, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol. The symbols corresponding to the combinations are each stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is issued. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined game state is in place, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel is , the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the reel corresponding to the final stop operation is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electronically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a power source. In a game where a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to be able to execute a power-off processing when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to perform power-off processing based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means. , is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination, and in a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player. A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and after the player performs the final stop operation at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the symbol combination is stopped. A gaming value corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game in which the predetermined gaming state is in place and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel is provided with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Although each of the symbols to be played has been stopped, and the player performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the above-mentioned predetermined Even if a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, the reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the power is restored, and the reel control means controls the internal lottery means to select a specific symbol combination. In a game where the result has been determined, the specific symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on a stop operation by the player, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, and the game is in the predetermined game state. , and in a game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and a specific timing is determined as the final stopping operation by the subsequent player. After the stop operation is performed and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is configured not to be notified that it is valid, one or more gaming media are stored in the storage means, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. In a game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stop of the player thereafter Even if a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as an operation, even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the display will be canceled after the power is restored. The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electrically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , a max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and the reel control means is in a predetermined game state and the above-mentioned In a game where the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation, and subsequent After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at the predetermined timing. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. In a game where one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined game state is in place, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. , symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, It is configured to notify that a specific lamp is valid, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is in place, and the predetermined result is obtained by the internal lottery means. In the determined game, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the The feature is that even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is made. It is a gaming machine that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electronically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , a max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and the reel control means is in a predetermined game state and the above-mentioned In a game where the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation, and subsequent After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at the predetermined timing. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off despite the stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination will be displayed after the power is restored. one or more game media is stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is present, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation to display the predetermined symbol combination. Thereafter, the system is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is in effect, and the internal lottery means causes the In a game in which a predetermined result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, Regardless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, a notification that the specific lamp is valid will be made after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized by the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. control means, the reel control means has at least a special game state advantageous for the player as a game state, and is capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game; In a game where the result has been determined, the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on the player's stop operation, and the game is in a predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation. After the stop operation is performed and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result is obtained by the internal lottery means. In the determined game, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the player is provided with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination; When the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed. In a game that is newly executed in a situation in which the end condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by awarding the winning combination to a player, and in which the predetermined winning combination has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the above-mentioned winning combination. The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are each stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freezing becomes executable. The game is a newly executed game in a special gaming state in which the conditions for ending the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and In a game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and as a subsequent final stop operation by the player, the symbols are stopped at the predetermined timing. The system is configured such that the predetermined freezing can be performed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation. This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, which has at least a special game state advantageous to the player as a game state, is capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and when a power outage is detected, a power outage is detected. The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means. and in a game in which the predetermined gaming state is in place and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a pattern corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the symbols to be played has been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player receives the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. In a game in which the predetermined game state is given and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent In the case where a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off even though the player has performed the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation by the player. However, after the power is restored, the system is configured to award the player with the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) occurs. A new game is executed in a special gaming state in which the ending conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. In a game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and a predetermined combination is selected as the final stopping operation by the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing of , and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is executed, and a special gaming state is entered, in which the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. In a game that is newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by the awarding of the winning combination, and in which the predetermined combination has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol. Even though each of the symbols corresponding to the combination has been stopped and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off is executed. This gaming machine is characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game that is in a gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the game is stopped, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the reels are stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means controls the game in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means. The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop operation by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the above, and the reel is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player to display the predetermined symbol combination. is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and is in the predetermined gaming state, and the internal lottery means produces a specific result different from the predetermined result. In the game in which the symbol combination is determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at a specific timing, and the stopping operation is performed based on the detection of a power outage. A gaming machine characterized in that, after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power-off processing, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is not granted to the player. It is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, the reel control means being configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game where the game is in a gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The game has been stopped, and after the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without depending on the input of gaming value. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. have been stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that the next game cannot be executed unless a gaming value is input.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, the reel control means being configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game where the game is in a gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The game has been stopped, and after the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without depending on the input of gaming value. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel. , even though the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the specific timing as a final stop operation, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This gaming machine is characterized in that the next game can be executed even after the game has been played, without depending on the input of game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. the reel control means has at least a special game transferable state that is advantageous for the player as a game state, and is capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to control the internal lottery means. In a game after a specific result is determined by Until the symbol combination is stopped, the system is configured to be able to move to the special game, and in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, no stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player is allowed. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by the operation, and after the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the special symbol combination is displayed. is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus), is not in a state where it is possible to move to a special game, and the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning lottery means is different from the specific result. In a game that results in a predetermined result, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and the final stop operation is performed as a final stop operation by the player. The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined freezing is not executed after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the reel.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to freeze the game based on the player's stop operation in the game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are each stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, bonus In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel. Even though the player then performed a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, the specific symbol combination was not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the predetermined freezing can be executed even after the game is finished.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, having at least a first lottery state as a lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least a probability of determining a specific result is different from the first lottery state; The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is in the first lottery state. In a game that is executed when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has the specified symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player's final stop operation at a specific timing, the second lottery state can be entered. In a game that is executed in the first lottery state, and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a predetermined result. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are each stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specific symbol combination is stopped. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. control means, capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and configured to be able to execute a power-off processing when a power-off is detected, the reel control means controlling the internal lottery In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the means, the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on a stop operation by the player, and the predetermined game state is in a predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In a game in which the player's final stop operation is determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is then stopped as the player's final stop operation. After the stop operation is performed at the timing of and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the internal lottery means. In a game in which the result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation. First, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is granted to the player after the power is restored. The reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player's final stopping operation thereafter After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed, and a specific result is generated by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game after the determination is made, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even though the player performs the stopping operation at a specific timing as the final stopping operation after that, Nevertheless, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine with

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, and is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop operation by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the above, and the reel is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player to display the predetermined symbol combination. After that, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the game value is given to the player on each reel. , the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off is performed. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution, the reel control means is configured to provide the player with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after the power is restored, and the reel control means In a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination can be stopped based on a stop operation by the player, and the game is in the predetermined game state and the internal lottery means has determined the specific symbol combination. In a game in which a specific result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player then performs a stopping operation at a specific timing as the final stopping operation to display the specific symbol. After the combination is displayed, the next game can be executed without the input of gaming value, and the game is in the predetermined game state and the internal lottery means has determined the specific result. In the determined game, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player performs the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power is turned off. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off processing based on the power-off detection, the next game can be executed without the input of gaming value after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, having at least a first lottery state as a lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least a probability of determining a specific result is different from the first lottery state; When a power outage is detected, the reel control means is configured to be able to execute a power outage process, and in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to execute a power outage process based on a player's stop operation. In a game where the predetermined game state is in a predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player. A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, In a game in which the player is given a gaming value corresponding to a predetermined symbol combination, and the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel is provided with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Even though the corresponding symbols have been stopped and the player performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the above-mentioned result is caused by the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player after the power is restored, and the reel control means specifies the specified symbol combination by the internal lottery means. The game in which the result has been determined is configured such that the specific symbol combination can be stopped based on the player's stop operation, and is a game that is executed when the result is in the first lottery state, and In a game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player then performs a stopping operation at a specific timing as a final stopping operation. After the specific symbol combination is displayed, the game is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state, and is a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect. In a game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player then performs a stopping operation at a specific timing as a final stopping operation. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) includes N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and a production sound. a speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a , an internal lottery means, and a reel control means that controls the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected. , the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is in a predetermined game state; and in the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player; After the player performs a final stop operation at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in the predetermined gaming state. In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and the predetermined result is determined as the final stopping operation by the subsequent player. Even if a stop operation is performed at the timing of , even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off, the predetermined symbol combination will not be displayed after the power is restored. It is configured to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the number of reels, and in a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player, After the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel, a predetermined performance sound (for example, Tenpai sound) can be output from the speaker, and is executed in the specific gaming state. In the game where the game was stopped, even though the player performed a stop operation at the specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel, the game was stopped due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off. The gaming machine is characterized in that even if symbols other than symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, the predetermined performance sound can be output from the speaker after power is restored. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, having at least a first lottery state as a lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least a probability of determining a specific result is different from the first lottery state; The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is in the first lottery state. In a game that is executed when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has the specified symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player's final stop operation at a specific timing, the second lottery state can be entered. In a game that is executed in the first lottery state, and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol for the specific symbol combination. Even though the corresponding symbols have been stopped and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the specific symbol is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after a symbol combination other than the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is configured such that a stoppage function is enabled when a predetermined condition is met, and a stoppage process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met while the stoppage function is enabled. This gaming machine is configured to be executable, and configured to be able to set at least one specific condition candidate as the specific condition from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is

The game is configured so that the stoppage function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met, and the game is configured to be able to execute a stoppage process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stoppage function is enabled. It is configured such that at least one specific condition candidate from among the specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition, and the specific condition candidate is that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This is a gaming machine characterized by having the following features. The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is configured such that a stop function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met, and performs a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled. It is configured to be executable, and configured to be able to set at least one specific condition candidate as the specific condition from among multiple types of specific condition candidates, and to set the specific condition candidate as the specific condition candidate. If the number of gaming media has exceeded a predetermined number, and the specific condition is that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period has exceeded a predetermined number, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the termination process if the game is in a predetermined gaming state and the specific conditions are satisfied after the game is executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is configured such that the stop function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met, and the game machine performs a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled. The game apparatus is configured to be executable, and is configured to be configured to be able to execute a determination process related to a predetermined error even when a stop process is executed to stop the progress of the game. It is a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is configured such that the stop-off function is enabled when a predetermined condition A is met, and the automatic settlement function is enabled when a predetermined condition B is met. is configured to be able to execute a termination process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition A is met when the automatic settlement function is enabled, and an automatic settlement process can be executed if a specific condition B is met when the automatic settlement function is enabled. The system is configured such that at least one candidate specific condition A can be set as the specific condition A from among multiple types of specific condition A candidates, and at least one candidate specific condition A can be set as the specific condition A from among multiple types of specific condition B candidates. It is configured such that one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B, and at least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same, and the specific condition A and the specific condition B are the same. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that conditions different from condition B can be set.

There is a need for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information to or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and controls for transmitting appropriate information to or receiving information from outside the gaming machine are needed. There was a need to build a process (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-182215).

According to a gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine. It is possible to construct a control process for receiving.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is a gaming machine that is equipped with reels, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, and is capable of determining a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. and is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, and the predetermined information includes at least a serial number, and the value stored in the storage means is set to "1". ", and if the special addition process is executed when N (N is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means, "N+1" is stored in the storage means. If the special addition process is executed when M (M is 255) is stored in the storage means, "1" is stored in the storage means, and the power is turned off after the power is turned off. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the ``0'' is turned on, ``0'' is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is a gaming machine that is equipped with reels, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, and is capable of determining a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. and is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information includes at least a serial number, and after outputting the predetermined information, the predetermined information is stored in the storage means. The stored serial number is configured to be updateable, and when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means, and when the power is on, The gaming machine is characterized in that the value stored in the storage means is configured to cyclically update from "1" to "M (M is an integer of 2 or more)".

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside, and is configured to be able to output specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, and the types of serial numbers include serial numbers related to predetermined information and serial numbers related to specific information. The predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the predetermined information, the specific information includes at least a serial number related to the specific information, and the predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the specific information. and a second storage means for storing a serial number related to specific information, the addresses of the first storage means and the addresses of the second storage means are consecutive, and the power is turned off. This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned on, "0" is stored in the first storage means and "0" is stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside, and the predetermined information includes at least information consisting of X (X>1) bytes and checksum information, and the checksum information is This gaming machine is composed of one byte, and when calculating checksum information, the information composed of X bytes is divided and calculated by one byte.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, and a total score display device, and is configured such that the reels can be rotated based on the operation of the start switch. When the reels are rotating, if the points managed by the total score display device are less than a predetermined value, the points can be added based on the received lending signal, This gaming machine is characterized in that when the points managed by the total score display device are equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the points cannot be added based on the received lending signal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to rotate the reels based on the operation of the start switch, and the reels rotate. Under certain circumstances when the reels are not running, the system is configured so that points can be added based on the received lending signal, and when the reels are rotating, it is configured such that points cannot be added based on the received lending signal. This gaming machine is characterized by:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and is loaned from an outside party. It is configured to be able to receive notification commands, and the information included in the rental notification command includes at least the number of loans, and under certain circumstances, the rental notification command that includes "0" as the number of loans information. If a loan notification command is received that includes a value of "1" or more as loan number information under certain circumstances, the timing of the receipt will be enabled. This gaming machine is characterized in that a bet process based on a bet operation is not executed until a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting button, and a total score display device, and determines the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. If the count button operation is accepted between the output of predetermined information and the output of specific information to the outside, and then the count button operation is no longer accepted. However, it is possible to start updating the score displayed on the total score display device, and the operation of the counting button is made possible between outputting specified information to the outside and outputting specific information to the outside. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to output specific information including counting information to the outside even if the counting button operation is accepted and then the counting button operation is no longer accepted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is a gaming machine including reels, a stop switch, a start switch, and a point management means for managing point information, and the reels are controlled based on the operation of the start switch. It is configured to be rotatable, and is configured to be configured to be able to send commands containing point information to the outside multiple times within a period from when the reels start rotating until when the reels complete one rotation. It is a gaming machine.

There has been a need for a gaming machine that displays necessary information on a performance display device and does not hinder the progress of the game (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-202185).

According to the gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to display necessary information on the performance display device and to not hinder the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (D10) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the accessory is It has a first storage means that can store a value corresponding to the number of games that are activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated, and a second storage means that can store a value that corresponds to the total number of games that the device is activated. , The system is configured to be able to calculate the state ratio of accessory objects, etc. based on the value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is operating or the accessory continuous operation device is operating, and the value corresponding to the total number of games. , Under a predetermined situation where the power is on, a value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory stored in the first storage means is operating or the accessory continuous operating device is operating is a predetermined value. Even if the value is changed due to an abnormality and becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games stored in the second storage means, it is possible to continue playing the game, and in a situation where the power is turned off, A value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is activated or the accessory continuous operating device is activated, which is stored in the first storage means, is changed due to a predetermined abnormality and is stored in the second storage means. This gaming machine is characterized in that if the value becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games played, a predetermined error state occurs after the power is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E1) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: The first information can be outputted to the outside every first time, and the second information can be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine every second time. It is configured to be able to output third information to the outside every third time, and is configured so that the second time is X times the first time (X is a natural number), and the second time is It is configured such that Y times (Y is a natural number) becomes the third time, and if the scheduled output timings of the first information, second information, and third information overlap, the second time The device is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output information, output third information at a timing when a first time period has elapsed, and output the first information at a timing at which a first time period has elapsed thereafter. It is a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E2) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: The first information can be outputted to the outside at predetermined time intervals, and the second information can be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, and the first information and If the scheduled output timings of the second information and the second information overlap, the first information is output and then the second information is output at a predetermined timing. Even in the case where the second information is output, the timing after the specific time from the scheduled output timing of the first information and the second information is set as the next scheduled output timing of the second information. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E3) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: The first information can be outputted to the outside at predetermined time intervals, and the second information can be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, and the first information and If the scheduled output timings of the second information and the second information overlap, the first information is output and then the second information is output at a predetermined timing. When the second information is output in the gaming machine, the gaming machine is configured to set the timing after the specific time from the predetermined timing as the scheduled timing to output the second information next time. It is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E4) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and includes: The first information is configured to be able to be outputted to the outside at predetermined time intervals, and the second information is configured to be able to be outputted to the outside of the gaming machine at specific time intervals, and the first information is It includes information regarding whether or not a predetermined error has occurred, and the scheduled output timings of the first information and the second information overlap at the predetermined timing when the predetermined error occurs. In some cases, the second information is output, and the first information is output at a specific timing thereafter, and the second information is output at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. If the predetermined error is resolved at a timing before the occurrence of the predetermined error, the first information including information indicating that the predetermined error has not occurred at the specific timing can be output. This is a gaming machine with special features.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E5) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and determines the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. It is configured to be able to output information including settlement information regarding settlement to the outside of the gaming machine, and configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to the outside of the gaming machine. If the settlement process is not executed, it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is 0, and when the settlement process is executed, information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is a value other than 0 can be output. If possible, and after outputting information in which the payment information related to payment is 0, if information in which the information related to lending is a value other than 0 is received, information including information indicating normality is output as response information related to lending. If, after outputting information in which payment information related to payment is a value other than 0, information is received in which information related to lending is a value other than 0, information including information indicating an abnormality is sent as response information related to lending. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E6) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and determines the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. It is configured to be able to output information including payment information regarding payment to the outside of the gaming machine, and configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to the outside of the gaming machine. The system is configured so that if the counting switch is operated in a situation where the total score display device stores a value other than 0, a settlement process may be executed; if the settlement process is not executed, , it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is 0, and when executing the settlement process, it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to the settlement is a value other than 0, and the counting switch is operated. Under the circumstances, if after outputting information in which the payment information related to payment is a value other than 0, if information in which the information related to lending is a value other than 0 is received, the received information related to lending is a value other than 0. The score displayed on the total score display device is not updated based on certain information, the counting switch continues to be operated, and after outputting information that the settlement information regarding settlement is 0, When receiving information in which the lending information is a value other than 0, the score displayed on the total score display device can be updated based on the received lending information having a value other than 0. This gaming machine is characterized by:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E7) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and determines the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. The machine is configured to be able to output information including information regarding payment to the outside of the gaming machine, and after outputting information including information regarding payment, the machine will not be lent out until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is configured to be able to receive information regarding the loan, and the information regarding the loan includes information that allows determining whether the output information including information regarding the payment is normal or not, the serial number, and information regarding the number of loans. This is a gaming machine with special features.

P Reel-type gaming machine, DU Front door (door) D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Start lamp D290 Replay lamp, D300 Possible to insert Lamp D200 Credit number display device, D210 Input number display light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (press order display device) D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving opening D342 Medal falling surface D343 Medal non-falling surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum game interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Effect display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s No. 1 Payout sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation axis H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release biasing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board, K10 Reel motor K20 times Torso sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub-input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining game counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU Pedestal section, H62 Ejection guide section, H64 Inclined surface HS Medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 first end, M57 second end, M58 overlapping part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band M main control board MN11ta-A first main game winning/losing lottery table; MN11ta-B Win/fail lottery table for second main game MN11ta-H Win/fail lottery table for auxiliary game, MN41ta-A Lottery table for determining first main game symbols MN41ta-B Lottery table for determining second main game symbols, MN41ta-H Auxiliary Lottery table for determining game symbols MN51ta-A 1st lottery table for determining main game variation mode, MN51ta-B 2nd lottery table for determining main game variation mode MN51ta-H Lottery table for determining auxiliary game variation mode, MP11t-C 1st - 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game starting port electric role opening timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game timer MP52c Time saving number counter, MT10 Command transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game starting port A11s 1st main game starting port ball entry detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display section, A21h 1st main game symbol holding display section B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game starting port B11s 2nd main game starting port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game starting port electric accessory B20 2nd main game Symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral equipment, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big prize opening electric accessory C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd big prize opening electric accessory, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game Peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game starting opening H11s Auxiliary game starting opening ball entry detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display section S Sub-control board, SM Performance display control means (sub Main control board) SG Performance display device SG10 Display area, SG11 Decorative pattern display area SG12 First reservation display section, SG13 Second reservation display section KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, KE10 Payout unit D16 Transparent plate, KR Prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea Power switch, D42 Launch device E Power supply unit, D40 Launch control board DL10 Left-handed area, DR10 Right-handed area ML10 Left-handed route (first downstream route), MR10 Right-handed batting route (second downstream route) D50 Right-handed batting route outlet NKc Incoming ball number counter P10 Left general winning hole, P20 Right general winning hole HSc Left-handed hitting instruction counter, MSc Right-handed hitting instruction counter MP51c Fixed variable number counter, MN52c Limited Frequency counter MP41t Small winning game timer, MP41t-2 Ejection standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning hole), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 2nd big winning hole outlet, C23s 2nd big winning hole discharge detection device C24 Top Shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V Winning slot ball entry detection device SM26c Pre-read performance execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Consecutive games counter SB Sub-input button, SBs Sub-input button input detection device KH Prize ball Payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means, 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information Temporary storage means 3311a 1st main game starting opening winning counter, 3311b 2nd main gaming starting opening winning counter 3311c 1st big winning opening winning counter, 33
11d 2nd grand prize opening winning counter 3311e General winning opening winning counter, 3312 Ball number counter 3313 Enclosed game ball number counter, 3400 Launch control means 3410 Launch control related information temporary storage means, 3500 Initial time at power outage/recovery from power outage Processing control means 3510 Power outage information temporary storage means 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS Prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal prize detection device 2122 Normal electric accessory, 2221 Distribution prize detection Device 2222 Sorting electric accessory, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area ball entry detection device, 2224-2 Ejected ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 Gate part CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio Segment M90 setting display LED

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, The machine is configured to be able to output information including payment information related to payment to the machine, and is configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to external parties of the gaming machine, and when payment processing is not executed. , it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to settlement is 0, and when executing the settlement process, it is possible to output information in which the settlement information related to settlement is a value other than 0, and when the settlement information related to settlement is 0. After outputting certain information, if information is received in which the rental information is a value other than 0, it is possible to output information that includes information indicating normality as response information regarding the rental, and if the payment information regarding the payment is a value other than 0. After outputting information that is a value, if information regarding lending is received with a value other than 0, the system shall be configured to be able to output information including information indicating an abnormality as response information regarding lending. A gaming machine featuring:

Images